You are on page 1of 3126

MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES

T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.6

TECHNICAL PUBLICATION

Date of issue 03/04/09
This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 2/ 105

Presentation

VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 3/ 105

This page intentionally left blank

VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 4/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 5/ 105

Here are the technical publications available for ATR aircrafts, of course, depending of your job, it's not necessary to know everything, however, it's nice to
know that documents exist, even if you are not directly concerned...
- MPD Maintenance Planning Document
- AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
- " D/O Description - Operation
- " JIC Job Instruction Cards
- " TSM Trouble Shooting Manual
- IPC Illustrated Parts Catalog
- " Parts Illustrated Parts Catalog
- " CRT Cross Reference Table
- WDM Wiring Diagram Manual
- " ASM Aircraft Schematic Manual
- " AWM Aircraft Wiring Manual
- " AWL Aircraft Wiring List/Hook Up List
- CLM Component Location Manual
- SRN Structural Repair Manual
- NDTM Non Destructive Testing Manual
- ITEM Illustrated Tool & Equipment Manual
- CMM/M Component Maintenance Manual / -- Manufacturer
- CMM/V Component Maintenance Manual / Vendors
- SRKM Structural Repair Kit Manual
- CPCICF Corrosion Prevention / Inspection / Findings
- QEC Quick Engine Change
- VD Vendor Directory
- VWM Vendor Warranty Manual
- VPSA Vendor Support Agreement
- SB Service Bulletin / Letter
- AC Airplane Characteristics
- FCOM Flight Crew Operating Manual
- AFM Airplane Flight Manual
- MMEL Master Minimum Equipment List
- CL Check List
- WBM Wight & Balance Manual
- CCC Crash Crew Chart

VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 6/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 7/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 8/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 9/ 105

The ATR MPD as well as the revisions are approved by the French Airworthiness Authorities and provide the airlines with precise guidance for establishing
their own Maintenance Program subject to the approval of their local Airworthiness Authorities.

VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 10/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 11/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 12/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 13/ 105

Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM) The Aircraft Maintenance Manual for ATR conforms to ATA Specification No. 100, Revision 21. ATR declines all
responsability in the event that the instructions given in the Aircraft Maintanance Manual are not observed in their entirety.
ATR Technical Publications use both metric and non-metric systems of measurement. The system used in the original reference documents is quoted first,
followed by the conversion into the other system in brackets.
The Aircraft Maintenance Manual has been split into two manuals:
♦ The Description and Operation Manual whose technical content corresponds to pages 1 to 99 of the conventional Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
♦ The Job Instruction Card Manual whose technical content corresponds to pages 201 to 899 ; this manual contains the necessary data to cover
Scheduled Maintenance Procedures prescribed by the Maintenance Review Board (MRB) or the Minimum Master Equipment List (MMEL).
The Job Instruction Card manual has been divided into two sections:
♦ Section 1 contains general information.
♦ Section 2 contains the Job Instruction cards only.
Trouble Shooting Manual - TSM Scope of the Trouble Shooting Manual The TSM is a manual for use when the aircraft is on the ground. It is intended to
provide ground maintenance crews by means of isolating faults in order to reduce downtime.
Its aim is to enable detection of faulty components within a failed system by analyzing fault symptoms appeared in flight or on the ground (Test).

VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 14/ 105

IPC A FAIRE
The Illustrated Parts Catalog includes:
♦ All removable A / C manufacturer items with associated detail parts.
♦ All vendor units covered by a specific documentation (CMM) and associated maintenance-removable breakdown parts.
♦ All standard parts (screws, washers, connectors, pins, etc...).
The IPC is so arranged to allow for very convenient utilization in conjunction with job cards.
This publication complies with the requirements of the ATA specification No. 100.
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 15/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 16/ 105

ACOS v1.6

Presentation

TECHNI

Page 17/ 105

It is divided into 4 sections:

Î The alphanumerical list of Part Number (PNs) with:

optional PNs
optional vendors.

Î The list of Functional Identification Items corresponding to PNs listed in the alphanumerical index, with entries arranged:

by FIN (Functional Item Number)
by PN.

Î The list of identifications of access doors / panels listed in the alphanumerical index, with entries arranged:

by FIN
by PN.

Î The list of Local Manufacture PNs (X file), with entries arranged:

by PN of finished part, with cross-referencing to the material to be used
by PN of the material to be used, with cross-referencing to the PN of the finished part.

This table is furnished to the customer in the form of cassette and is not customized. It is reissued with the same frequency as IPC revisions.

VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 18/ 105

Diagram Make-Up
The schematics contained in these manuals have been prepared to meet ATA specification No. 100 requirements and include four types, as follows:
♦ Block Diagrams : have broard scope but little depth.
♦ Simplified Schematics : have schematic symbols but do not show sufficient detail to permit fault isolation.
♦ Schematics : show all line replaceable items, all A/C wiring, within a sub-sub system and give sufficient depth for A/C fault isolation.
♦ Wiring Diagrams : show all components and wires.
♦ Charts
In some cases, simplified schematics, logic diagrams or block diagrams have been incorporated in schematics whenever it has been deemed necessary, for
full understanding of system operation.
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 19/ 105

ACOS v1.6

Presentation

TECHNI

Page 20/ 105

Contents of manual
This document is divided into six sections as follows:
♦ ATA entry
♦ FIN entry
♦ ATA zone
♦ zoning
♦ access
♦ location figures.
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 21/ 105

ACOS v1.6

Presentation

TECHNI

Page 22/ 105

This manual is organized per ATA chapters as follows:
♦ 51 - General
♦ 52 - Doors
♦ 53 - Fuselage
♦ 54 - Nacelles / Pylons
♦ 55 - Stabilizers
♦ 56 - Windows
♦ 57 - Wings
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 23/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 24/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 25/ 105

This manual does not deal with standard tools and equipment. However, it does cover the particular adaptations required for their operation.
Ground equipment such as passenger stairways, luggage loading device, towing truck, etc... which is considered as airport equipment is not covered in this
document.
The information supplied is more or less comprehensive depending on whether the tool or equipment is of a complex nature, or not. In the case of a complex
tool or equipment requiring specific information on its operation, maintenance and overhaul, the Manual gives identification data and cross-reference to
Ground Equipment Manuals.
In the case of a tool requiring no specific information, the Manual gives identification data for that tool and, if required, for the tool components.
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 26/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 27/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 28/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 29/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 30/ 105

A maintenance program for corrosion is required to prevent corrosion occurences that may jeopardize the continued airworthiness of the aircraft.
The ATR MRB Document which represents the baseline maintenance program has been established during the MSG-3 analysis process upon mean
environment and utilization conditions and is assumed as the optimum previsional maintenance program to meet the regulatory requirements and the needs of
the typical operator.
Systematic corrosion damages in the fleet will result in a modification of the MRBD requirements, initiated by ATR.
Operators remain responsible, under the surveillance of their respective competent Authorities, to adapt their maintenance program to non typical conditions,
as corrosion is concerned, taking into account their corrosion findings between successive scheduled or unscheduled inspections.
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 31/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 32/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 33/ 105

The Product Support Agreement are those negociated by SOCIETA AEROSPAZIALE ITALIANA ALENIA and EADS whilst they reflect the contractual
provision for Product Support by the Vendors, they do not change or negate any provision contained in existing agreements separately negociated between
Vendors, Operators and ALENIA and EADS (ATR).
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 34/ 105

ACOS v1.6

Presentation

TECHNI

Page 35/ 105

The Warranty and Special Warranty conditions are those obtained from the Vendors by ALENIA and EADS during negociations of the General Terms
Agreements and transferred to ATR Operators.
To facilitate utilization of this document, the index of Vendors, in alphabetical order (see chapter 2) provides the types of guarantees offered to by each
Vendor:
a- Standard Warranty
b- Reliability Guarantee
c- Maximum parts cost guarantee and a shop labour guarantee
d- Special Guarantees
As mecanics, don't worry ... But they exist anyway...

VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 36/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 37/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Presentation

Page 38/ 105

This document provides, in a standardized format, the recommended minimum airplane characteristics data that are needed for general airport planning
information. Since operational practices vary among airlines, specific data should be coordinated with the using airlines prior to facility design.
This document will be distributed to appropriate airlines and their staff, airports where the ATR is likely to be operated, and their architects and consultants.
The document will also be distributed to other agencies, such as the FAA and others engaged in the air transportation industry where the need exists.
VYY01

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 39/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY01

Presentation

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 40/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

Example 1 of using technical publication

Page 41/ 105

Example 1 of using technical publication

VYY02

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 42/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 43/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 44/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 45/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 46/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 47/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 48/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 49/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 50/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 51/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 52/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 53/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 54/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 55/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 56/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 57/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 58/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 59/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 60/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 61/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI

VYY02

Example 1 of using technical publication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 62/ 105

ACOS v1.6

TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 63/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 64/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 65/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 66/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 67/ 105 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 68/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 69/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 70/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 71/ 105 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 72/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 73/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 74/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 75/ 105 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 76/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 77/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 78/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 79/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 80/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 81/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 82/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 83/ 105 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 84/ 105 ACOS v1.

TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 85/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 86/ 105 ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 87/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 88/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .TECHNI VYY02 Example 1 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.TECHNI Example 2 of using technical publication Page 89/ 105 Example 2 of using technical publication VYY03 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 90/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 91/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .

TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 92/ 105 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 93/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 94/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 95/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 96/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 97/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 98/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .

TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 99/ 105 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 100/ 105 ACOS v1.TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 101/ 105 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 102/ 105 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 103/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 104/ 105 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .TECHNI VYY03 Example 2 of using technical publication Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .Summary TECHNI Page 105/ 105 TECHNICAL PUBLICATION Presentation VYY03 2 Example 1 of using technical publication 41 Example 2 of using technical publication 89 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 ATA 00 GENERAL FAMILIARIZATION Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

ATA 00 Introduction Page 2/ 21 Introduction V0001 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 00 Production chart Page 3/ 21 Production chart V0002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 00 Main dimensions Page 4/ 21 Main dimensions V0003 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 00 Weights and loading Page 5/ 21 Weights and loading V0004 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 00 Cabin layout Page 6/ 21 Cabin layout V0005 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 00 Cabin cross section Page 7/ 21 Cabin cross section V0006 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 00 Cockpit Page 8/ 21 Cockpit V0007 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 00 Composite materials Page 9/ 21 Composite materials V0009 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 00 Engine Page 10/ 21 Engine V0010 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 00 Performances Page 11/ 21 Performances V0011 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î Hotel Mode works with the LP and HP stages running and the propeller brake locked. Hotel Mode = Right engine running + Propeller brake on + Gust lock on + right condition lever at feather V0012 Copyright © 2001-2008 . to provide aircraft electrical supply and air conditioning.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. is used only on ground.ATA 00 Hotel Mode Page 12/ 21 Hotel Mode Î This mode. available on the RH engine.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 00 Catering Page 13/ 21 Catering V0013 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

all the flight compartment lights are off. The use of lights to indicate correct operation is limited to a minimum (green illumination for normal operation).6 .Presentation ATA 00 Page 14/ 21 Presentation In normal operation. Time for taking action will be left to the crew's discretion. Î Î Î Î Î CAUTION Amber Configuration not requiring immediate action. Indication Green Normal operation Warning Red Configuration or failure requiring immediate action V0014 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Neutralized abnormal configuration. Indication Blue Normal transient configuration Indication White Control position indication.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 00 Introduction Page 15/ 21 Introduction S0001 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 00 Main dimensions Page 16/ 21 Main dimensions S0003 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 00 Weights and loading Page 17/ 21 Weights and loading P0004 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 00 Composite materials Page 18/ 21 Composite materials P0009 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 00 Engine Page 19/ 21 Engine P0010 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 00 Performances Page 20/ 21 Performances P0011 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 00 Page 21/ 21 ATA 00 GENERAL FAMILIARIZATION P0011 Introduction 2 Production chart 3 Main dimensions 4 Weights and loading 5 Cabin layout 6 Cabin cross section 7 Cockpit 8 Composite materials 9 Engine 10 Performances 11 Hotel Mode 12 Catering 13 Presentation 14 Introduction 15 Main dimensions 16 Weights and loading 17 Composite materials 18 Engine 19 Performances 20 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

.6 ATA 05 TIME LIMIT Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

ATA 05 Maintenance checks Page 2/ 6 Maintenance checks V0501 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î Environmental damage: Thresholds: 2 / 4 / 8 Years. Structural inspections: General Visual Inspections (GVI). to establish means by which fuel tank explosions can be prevented in future. the trainee will have to pay a particular attention to the safety precautions. Servicing. the influences on Fuel Tank Safety have been widely discussed in recent years. MAINTENANCE PLANNING DOCUMENT (MPD) F Tasks identified in the MRB Report are broken down into a comprehensive Maintenance Planning Document. Î The program defined in MRB/MPD documents is based on an average daily utilization of 5. F The MPD references each task and provides details on Zone. STANDARD INSPECTION INTERVALS These inspections are carried out with regular intervals. this term covers all items of the fuel tank and adjacent systems that are considered as critical ignition source prevention features. Î Î Î Î Line checks: Checks and Zonal Visual Inspections. Î CAUTION: All along the ATA 28 (FUEL) covered in this course.Maintenance checks ATA 05 Page 3/ 6 INSPECTION DEFINITIONS For the check of an aircraft. In the event that operation appreciably differs from these figures. Description. Efficiency.ATR Training Centre . Special Detailed Inspections (SDI). Lubrication. Repeat Intervals: 3000 / 6000 / 12000 / 18000 / 24000 Flights.2FL (2000 FH/YE and 3000 FL/YE). Operational and Functional checks on aircraft and powerplant systems. ENGINE AND PROPELLER MAINTENANCE Engine Maintenance Hard Time: V0501 Copyright © 2001-2008 . All CDCCLs are included in the time limit section of the MRB and are highlighted into AMM task cards and CMMs to provide the list of critical parts that should not be repaired out of the scope. Maintenance Planning Document (MPD) MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS Î BACKGROUND : Following a series of accident involving large commercial aircraft. focused on prevention against fuel tank explosion risk-adjacent systems and on Fuel Tank Airworthiness Limitations. C checks and multiple: Zonal Visual Inspections. Î Weekly Check: 7 days. Î Accidental damage: Intervals: 2 / 4 / 8 Years. F Line Check:2 days. As applied to fuel tank safety policy. Detailed Visual Inspections (DVI). Interval. All precautions shall be taken to prevent unsafe conditions to develop from configuration changes caused by maintenance action. A checks and multiple: Zonal Visual Inspections. Î A check: 500 Flight Hours (FH). Job Procedure. Repeat Intervals: 2 / 4 / 8 Years. the program should be adapted to account for A/C utilization. Accesses. Î CDCCL : An important concept of the new regulation is the introduction of Critical Design Control Configuration Limitation (CDCCL). Man-hours required. The FAA and EASA issued special requirements for maintenance and inspection.5FH for 8. Î C check: 4000 Flight Hours (FH).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Operational Checks. various types of inspections are carried out.6 . repair or alteration of these critical items. Manpower required. STRUCTURAL INSPECTION INTERVALS Three structural inspection categories exist: Î Fatigue damage: Thresholds: 24000 / 36000 Flights.

6 . Propeller Maintenance Major Inspection Intervals (MII): Aircraft typePropellerInterval ATR42-300/-320:14SF-510000 FH ATR72-200:14SF-1110500 FH Î ATR42-400/500/ATR72-500:568 8100 FH COMPONENT MAINTENANCE Components have scheduled overhaul: V0501 Copyright © 2001-2008 . F Proven to be the most cost effective way of maintaining engines. F Engine removal for refurbishment driven by on wing task and ECTM. (2 HSI for 1 OVH recommended by P&WC).Maintenance checks ATA 05 Page 4/ 6 F Removal of the engine at the defined time limit: .HSI (Hot Section Inspection). Engine Maintenance On-Condition: F No scheduled Hot Section Inspection (HSI) / Overhaul (OVH). .OVH (OVerHaul).ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 05 Maintenance checks Page 5/ 6 This page intentionally left blank V0501 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .Summary ATA 05 Page 6/ 6 ATA 05 TIME LIMIT Maintenance checks V0501 2 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.6 ATA 08 WEIGHING AND LEVELLING Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .

ATA 08 Weighing and levelling Page 2/ 9 Weighing and levelling V0801 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

♦ The remaining fuel quantity must be check in weight and balance manual (one table for each aircraft version).6 . V0801 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Prior to weighing: ♦ Defuel the tanks by suction and drained.ATR Training Centre . ♦ Weighing on wheels. pitch and roll attitude must be at 0°. ♦ Weighing on jack and wheels.ATA 08 Weighing and levelling Page 3/ 9 WEIGHING METHODS Three Weighing technics can be used: ♦ Weighing on jack.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ During defueling.

6 .ATA 08 V0801 Weighing and levelling Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 4/ 9 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ Top up with potable water system. ♦ No object workstand in contact with aircraft. for measuring aircraft pitch attitude = 0. V0801 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ♦ Control surfaces and trim in neutral position.ATA 08 Weighing and levelling Page 5/ 9 AIRCRAFT PREPARATION Place aircraft in a closed hangar. The aircraft configuration must be as follows: ♦ Flaps retracted. ♦ Engine oil replenishing has been accomplished. ♦ Note tire characteristics. dirt or water. ♦ Blanking plates. ♦ All doors and exits closed.ATR Training Centre . protection and covers removed. ♦ Spoilers retracted. Clean aircraft to remove all trace of grease. ♦ Replenish toilets with water and applicable materials. CAUTION : do not weight wet or iced aircraft. Equip with one clinometer.6 . at level of cargo compartment door between frame 14 and frame17. Make out list of missing equipment: ♦ Hydraulic system is topped up.

♦ 1 for each wing. V0801 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . The maximum permissible load on each point is given in Job Instruction Card (reference n° 08-12-00).ATR Training Centre . Note : Load cell depend on ATR version. ♦ 1 safety stay on tail cone.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 08 Weighing and levelling Page 6/ 9 WEIGHING ON JACK Jacking and load cell point location must be as follows: ♦ 1 or 2 on the nose.

ATR Training Centre . The three scales must have pans large enough to contain the landing gear tires.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 08 Weighing and levelling Page 7/ 9 WEIGHING ON WHEELS The mechanical scales must be located as follows: ♦ 1 on the nose. ♦ 2 for the main gears.6 . V0801 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Note : Mechanical scales depend on ATR version.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . The two scales must have pans large enough to contain the landing gear tires. Both main landing gear left and right tires will be positioned on same floor mechanical scale. The aircraft must be leveled at 0 attitude by lifting the nose gear structure. ♦ 1 scale for main gears.6 . V0801 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Nose landing gear structure will be suspended by jack assy positioned on floor mechanical scale.ATA 08 Weighing and levelling Page 8/ 9 WEIGHING ON JACK AND WHEELS The mechanical scales and jacking point must be located as follows: ♦ 1 scale and 1 jack for the nose. Note: Mechanical scales depend on ATR version.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 08 Page 9/ 9 ATA 08 WEIGHING AND LEVELLING Weighing and levelling V0801 2 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.6 ATA 10 PARKING AND MOORING Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 10 Parking Page 2/ 10 Parking V1001 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Install propeller securing straps.ATR Training Centre . refer to SL 42-30-5011. Install the cover assies on static port. Blank the two air conditioning inlets. For additional installation in cold weather conditions.Parking ATA 10 Page 3/ 10 INSTALLATION The following operations must be carried out: Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Park aircraft into wind. Check that parking brake is applied. Blank the two NACA inlets. Install the temperature probe cover. Install pitot probe covers.6 . Install main and nose landing wheel chocks. V1001 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Engage gust lock. Install engine nacelle covers.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Parking ATA 10 Page 4/ 10 REMOVAL The following operations must be carried out: Î Î Î Î Remove all installed covers and protective devices. Reference: from Job Instruction Card N° 10-10-00 V1001 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Remove safety pins from landing gear struts and stow. Remove wheel chocks. Store protective devices in bag provided.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 10 Mooring Page 5/ 10 Mooring GENERALITY Mooring is necessary when wind speed exceeds a limit calculated in function of aircraft weight and center of gravity. V1002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î Connect aircraft to ground. Preparation: Î Position the aircraft so that main landing gear de-bogging fixtures and nose landing gear towing fixtures correspond to mooring shackles on ground.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Perform the last meters of any taxiing procedure straight forward so that no torsion load is exerted on tires and landing gears hinge points.

6 .ATR Training Centre . V1002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 10 Mooring Page 6/ 10 GENERALITY Ground mooring is carried out at each main and nose landing gear.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Mooring ATA 10 Page 7/ 10 Ground mooring of main landing gear can be carried out with: Cables or ropes Turnbuckles V1002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Mooring ATA 10 Page 8/ 10 Ground mooring of nose landing gear can be carried out with: Cables or ropes Turnbuckles V1002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Reference: from Job Instruction Card N° 10-21-00.6 .Shelter the aircraft in a hangar. V1002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Mooring ATA 10 Page 9/ 10 LIMITATIONS Î Wind speed up to 95 Km/H: - Moor aircraft.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Wind speeds greater than 120 Km/H: . Lock rudder.ATR Training Centre . Î Wind speed ranging between 95 Km/H and 120 Km/H: - Moor aircraft.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .Summary ATA 10 Page 10/ 10 ATA 10 PARKING AND MOORING V1002 Parking 2 Mooring 5 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

.6 ATA 12 SERVICING Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Main external dimension Page 2/ 74 Main external dimension V1201 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Ground clearance Page 3/ 74 Ground clearance V1202 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Exhaust temperature contours Page 4/ 74 Exhaust temperature contours V1203 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 12 Danger areas of the engines Page 5/ 74 Danger areas of the engines V1204 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V1205 Copyright © 2001-2008 . A black hatched strip limits the area where you can walk. a black point strip shows the NO STEP areas.ATA 12 No step areas Page 6/ 74 No step areas On the aircraft.

ATA 12 Aircraft servicing with jetways Page 7/ 74 Aircraft servicing with jetways V1206 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

the visible components equipment are safe for the following flight.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Exterior inspection Page 8/ 74 Exterior inspection Î The exterior inspection is primarily a visual check to ensure that the general condition of the aircraft. It is normally performed by the maintenance personnel or if not present by the first officer prior to each originating flight.6 . V1207 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 12 Ground service connections Page 9/ 74 Ground service connections V1208 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 12 Air conditioning ground connection Page 10/ 74 Air conditioning ground connection V1209 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

V1209 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Start up ground air conditioning unit. make certain that both recirculation fan 1 and 2 are off.ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Air conditioning ground connection Page 11/ 74 Pre-conditioning Caution : Before supplying external air. 1.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Note : To avoid air back pressure at level of underfloor ducts. select the desired cooling or heating temperature. 2.6 . make certain that at least the cargo venting door or the captain communication door is open and remain open during the servicing.On ground conditioning unit.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Electrical ground connection Page 12/ 74 Electrical ground connection V1210 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

select the desired cooling or heating temperature.ATA 12 Electrical ground connection Page 13/ 74 Pre-conditioning Caution : Before supplying external air. make certain that at least the cargo venting door or the captain communication door is open and remain open during the servicing.6 .On ground conditioning unit.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Note : To avoid air back pressure at level of underfloor ducts. V1210 Copyright © 2001-2008 . 2. 1. make certain that both recirculation fan 1 and 2 are off.ATR Training Centre .Start up ground air conditioning unit.

ATA 12 Refueling electrical control panel Page 14/ 74 Refueling electrical control panel V1211 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 12 Refueling electrical control panel Page 15/ 74 This page intentionally left blank V1211 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 12 V1211 Refueling electrical control panel Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 16/ 74 ACOS v1.

Î Diffusers are located at the end of the two filling lines to limit formation of foam and vapor. Î The fuel / defuel assembly is installed in a dry bay which is drained. This tool is used to keep refuel / defuel valves in open position in case of valves failure. Î Two restrictors located at the valve outlet allow fuel flow in the circuits to be balanced for simultaneous filling of tanks.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The element called manual override enables the valves to be operated manually.ATA 12 Refueling electrical control panel Page 17/ 74 Automatic refueling operation Î The refueling panel and refuel / defuel coupling are located on the RH main landing gear fairing of the aircraft: ♦ During refueling and defueling operations.ATR Training Centre . in the event of an electrical control failure. Fuel through the lines is admitted into the tanks at the tank low points. fire services have to be ready in case of an emergency and fuel safety precautions have to be applied. V1211 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Î Each 28 VDC refuel / defuel valve is equipped with a metal ring located under the electrical connection.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Gravity refueling port Page 18/ 74 Gravity refueling port V1212 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 12 Gravity refueling port Page 19/ 74 This page intentionally left blank V1212 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 20/ 74 ACOS v1.ATA 12 V1212 Gravity refueling port Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î Take care not to damage wing leading edge equipped with de-icing boots. Î Press cap.6 . Each gravity filling port includes a support attached to the structure and a filter.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. turn by a quarter turn and release. loosen the screw by 4 to 5 turns. Î Gravity refueling ♦ Start up ground refueling equipment For each tank. Î Remove cap from refueling connector located on wing upper surface ♦ by means of a screwdriver. perform refueling and check quantity indicator located on refueling panel.Gravity refueling port ATA 12 Page 21/ 74 Î Gravity refueling is performed through two overwing gravity filling ports installed on the wing upper surface between ribs 22 and 23.ATR Training Centre . From JIC 12-11-28 FLG V1212 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Manual fuel quantity reading Page 22/ 74 Manual fuel quantity reading V1213 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 12 Manual fuel quantity reading Page 23/ 74 This page intentionally left blank V1213 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 24/ 74 ACOS v1.ATA 12 V1213 Manual fuel quantity reading Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

Inside the gauge body are : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an assembly consisting of a magnet and float. a control knob which.6 . Î Unlocked position : by pressing and turning the control knob. A chart is used to convert cm into liters and units of weight (Kg or lbs) as a function of A/C attitude and fuel density. the rod magnetically linked to the float.Manual fuel quantity reading ATA 12 Page 25/ 74 Î Each tank is equipped with two manual magnetic indicators.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. releases the gratuated scale. falls under its own weight. Î A clinometer located on the left rear landing gear fairing gives the A/C roll attitude in order to perform the corrections for limiting A/C attitude effects for dipstik reading. by simple rotation. Î When not being used for manual checks. the dipstik gives an indication of the residual fuel quantitycontained in the tank. V1213 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The dipstik comprises a gauge body with a mounting base. which holds the measurement and check assembly. Î The other one is mounted between rib 22 and 23 near the vent surge tank. a stop (or lock) which receives the control knob when the assembly is locked. a stop ring. Access to the indicators is gained from the wing lower surface. a graduated scale. the dipstick is locked in its raised position.ATR Training Centre . which defines the position on the scale during a level check. Î Locked position : the control knob is flush with the outer face of the gauge body and wing lower surface. By means of a graduated scale. The fuel level is read in cm on the section of the scale which protrudes from the wing lower surface. A dipstik is mounted between rib 5 and 6 near the feeder tank.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 12 Hydraulic reservoir filling Page 26/ 74 Hydraulic reservoir filling V1214 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. From JIC 12-12-29 SRV V1214 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Fill the reservoir with skydrol (02-003) until the level on the sight glass indicator reaches the "TOP FULL" mark. Î Î Î Î Open the reservoir filler cap. Install it on the reservoir. Example: 02-003 above.ATR Training Centre . Wash with fresh skydrol the filter basket. Note: A general rule products can be found in 20-31-00 (standard practices).ATA 12 Hydraulic reservoir filling Page 27/ 74 Procedure Caution: Reservoir replenishing by gravity without installation of the filter basket could cause system fluid pollution.6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Potable water service Page 28/ 74 Potable water service V1215 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 12 Potable water service Page 29/ 74 This page intentionally left blank V1215 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 30/ 74 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 V1215 Potable water service Copyright © 2001-2008 .

with valve handle in open position. perform draining after the last flight. remove blanking plug from union.ATR Training Centre . potable water service panel and access door.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Place valve handle in closed position Î Note: Filling pressure must not exceed 1 bar (14 PSI). ♦ During draining keep pushing the faucet lever Note: in the event of freezing. place handle in open position: drain water tank into service vehicle. in the event of freezing.ATA 12 Potable water service Page 31/ 74 Î Draining ♦ On potable water service panel. Î Replenishing ♦ ♦ On potable water service panel. connect service vehicle and replenish water tank: 15 liters (4 US gallons) approx. In the event of topping up operation. From JIC 12-15-38 V1215 Copyright © 2001-2008 . perform filling just before the flight. thoroughly wipe dry threads.6 . Î Caution: In order to avoid blocking of plugs and valves by ice. stop replenishing when water flows through overflow port.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 12 Toilet service Page 32/ 74 Toilet service V1216 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

V1216 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . emptying flushing and re-charging the tank with fluid containing a dye-deodorantchemical-water solution.6 .ATA 12 Toilet service Page 33/ 74 Î Toilet assembly must be serviced after each scheduled flight by.

ATA 12 Service interphone jack Page 34/ 74 Service interphone jack V1217 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 V1217 Service interphone jack Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 35/ 74 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Landing gear safety pins Page 36/ 74 Landing gear safety pins V1218 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 12 Landing gear safety pins Page 37/ 74 Î In the flight compartment : ♦ a set of three landing gear safety pins are stowed behind of the First Officer's seat.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V1218 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Jacking up for wheel removal Page 38/ 74 Jacking up for wheel removal V1219 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 39/ 74 ACOS v1.ATA 12 V1219 Jacking up for wheel removal Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATA 12 Free fall assister nitrogen charging Page 40/ 74 Free fall assister nitrogen charging V1220 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Procedure as per JIC 12-14-32 Check the red marker at next flight.6 . take extreme care of detailed charging procedure. Failure to do so may result in thermal unbalance during the charging activity and may affect final pressure requirements. A poor pressure will be indicated by a red mark. Î Caution: To ensure correct free fall assister inflation. if it will be visible. at the following flight remove at the first opportunity the free fall assister and evaluate it. A task (12-14-32) in the AMM JIC provides data to perform the job. re-perform the nitrogen charging.ATA 12 Free fall assister nitrogen charging Page 41/ 74 The free fall assister assists the main landing gears extension in emergency. If the red marker will be visible. V1220 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 12 Towing Page 42/ 74 Towing V1221 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Towing Page 43/ 74 This page intentionally left blank V1221 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 12 V1221 Towing Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 44/ 74 ACOS v1.

Towing ATA 12 Page 45/ 74 Î Procedure Make certain that tow bar is in horizontal position and that towing point or towing vehicle is not higher than 16 inch. When towing from the nose gear do not exceed the turning angle indicated by the pointer installed on the leg structure and the graduated plate bonded to the turning tube. Be careful when towing at sharp angles.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . ♦ Never tow the aircraft at an angle which will cause the main gear tires to slide. From JIC 09-11-00 V1221 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ♦ Never tow the aircraft if wind exceeds 50 knots. Î Caution Use only tow bar designed for this aircraft. ♦ Before towing the aircraft. tow very slowly. Î Caution: Towing with the hydraulic system pressurized can result in steering system damage. make certain that N/W steering switch is in the "OFF" position.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 12 Inflating tyre pressure Page 46/ 74 Inflating tyre pressure V1222 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 12 Inflating tyre pressure Page 47/ 74 Î Main gear and nose gear tire pressures are given in accordance with aircraft normal operating take-off weight in order to optimize tire wear (ref.00 CHK 10010 for tyres pressures). Job instruction card 32.41. V1222 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Check of tyre wear Page 48/ 74 Check of tyre wear V1223 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

V1223 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Exposure of any portion of this fabric layer makes the tire unsuitable for retreading. If retreading is not desired.ATR Training Centre . Note: It is permissible to wear the tire beyond the bottom of the grooves if the first fabric layer has not been exposed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Check of tyre wear Page 49/ 74 PlacardTire wear limit MLGGOODYEAR328Q28-1 (RETREADABLE) MLGGOODYEAR328Q28-2 (TBD) It is recommended that the tires be removed from the A/C when the bottom of any groove is reached at any location or when the first layer of fabric becomes exposed. this is not a reason for concern. the tire may be worn until the second layer of fabric is exposed. whichever occurs last. NLGGOODYEAR459M08-2(RETREADABLE) NLGMICHELINM09601(NOT RETREADABLE) It is recommended that the tire be removed from the aircraft when the bottom of any groove is reached at any location. The tire should be removed as soon as the fabric layer becomes visible. but the tire must be removed if it is to be retreaded.6 . When fabric exposure is reached before the bottom of the groove is reached.

always apply heat to inflation valve and surrounding areas before unseating valve seal. Note: It is necessary to check tires pressure in cold climates.ATA 12 Check of tyre wear Page 50/ 74 Note: Perform the check when the wheel is cold and with aircraft on wheels. Î Remove tire inflating valve cap. Î Connect a pressure gauge to the tire inflating valve.ATR Training Centre . read the pressure and verify that the valve is in accordance with the following table: V1223 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 12 Check of tyre wear Page 51/ 74 This page intentionally left blank V1223 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Braking reservoir fluid level check Page 52/ 74 Braking reservoir fluid level check V1224 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The radome weighs 60 lbs (27.6 .Check that the fluid level in the reservoir is between the level indicators marked on the reservoir.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.2 kg). From JIC SRV 12-12-32 V1224 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .In case of low level refill ♦ Remove the filler cap ♦ Fill the brake reservoir with the proper grade of oil to the max mark on the reservoir. 2. Check: 1.ATA 12 Braking reservoir fluid level check Page 53/ 74 Note: Two persons are required to remove the radome.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Tail bumper Page 54/ 74 Tail bumper V1225 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ If this indicator shows evidence of wear.6 . check the red indicator: ♦ If this indicator does not show evidence of wear.ATA 12 Tail bumper Page 55/ 74 At each walk around. inspect tail bumper. aircraft can be flown. If it is stripped. From JIC 05-51-18 V1225 Copyright © 2001-2008 . maintenance action is required.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Tail prop Page 56/ 74 Tail prop V1226 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Tail prop Page 57/ 74 On ground during passengers boarding / unboarding. Note: When not used. the tail prop is stored in the rear unpressurized area of the aircraft (beyond the aft bulkhead).6 . V1226 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the tail prop must be installed on the tail skid to avoid a possible pulling-up.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Oil tank level check access Page 58/ 74 Oil tank level check access V1227 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 59/ 74 ACOS v1.ATA 12 V1227 Oil tank level check access Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Draining of air data system Page 60/ 74 Draining of air data system V1228 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 V1228 Draining of air data system Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 61/ 74 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 12 Aircraft jacking Page 62/ 74 Aircraft jacking V1229 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 12 Aircraft jacking Page 63/ 74 This page intentionally left blank V1229 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 12 V1229 Aircraft jacking Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 64/ 74 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

) DIA ball at one end (jack side) and of a threaded part screwed into the forward fuselage or mlg fairing.) DIA ball at one end (jack side) and of a threaded part screwed onto the aft fuselage or wing. Î Connect a pressure gauge to the tire inflating valve. always apply heat to inflation valve and surrounding areas before unseating valve seal. Note: It is necessary to check tires pressure in cold climates.I. Î Remove tire inflating valve cap. Wing or aft fuselage jack adaptor These steel adaptors consist of a 38 mm (1.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. NLGGOODYEAR459M08-2(RETREADABLE) NLGMICHELINM09601(NOT RETREADABLE) It is recommended that the tire be removed from the aircraft when the bottom of any groove is reached at any location. DAMAGES INTERCHANGEABILITY MIXABILITY Refer to J.C. the tire may be worn until the second layer of fabric of fabric is exposed. If retreading is not desired.6 . Exposure of any portion of this fabric layer makes the tire unsuitable for retreading.ATR Training Centre .5 in. 32-41-00 CHK Note: Perform the check when the wheel is cold and with aircraft on wheels.ATA 12 Aircraft jacking Page 65/ 74 Forward fuselage jack adaptor These steel adaptors consist of a 38 mm (1.5 in. The tire should be removed as soon as the fabric layer becomes visible. read the pressure and verify that the valve is in accordance with the following table: V1229 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Wing fuel tank draining Page 66/ 74 Wing fuel tank draining V1230 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATA 12 Wing fuel tank draining Page 67/ 74 When it is required. Water draining is possible from tanks at any aircraft attitude between ± 3°.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V1230 Copyright © 2001-2008 .e. i. 8 underwing water drain valves identified as above. preferably: ♦ before the first daily flight or minimum half an hour after refuelling or engine shut down. the draining of water from fuel tanks will be performed when the water in the fuel is at the buttom of the tanks.ATR Training Centre . the aircraft must be defueled by suction at the fueling station and the remaining fuel drained by the water drain valves. Note: Before weighting.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 Fuselage water drain Page 68/ 74 Fuselage water drain V1231 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 69/ 74 ACOS v1.ATA 12 V1231 Fuselage water drain Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 12 Ground clearance Page 70/ 74 Ground clearance P1202 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 12 Exhaust temperature contours Page 71/ 74 Exhaust temperature contours P1203 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 12 No step areas Page 72/ 74 No step areas P1205 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .Summary ATA 12 Page 73/ 74 ATA 12 SERVICING P1205 Main external dimension 2 Ground clearance 3 Exhaust temperature contours 4 Danger areas of the engines 5 No step areas 6 Aircraft servicing with jetways 7 Exterior inspection 8 Ground service connections 9 Air conditioning ground connection 10 Electrical ground connection 12 Refueling electrical control panel 14 Gravity refueling port 18 Manual fuel quantity reading 22 Hydraulic reservoir filling 26 Potable water service 28 Toilet service 32 Service interphone jack 34 Landing gear safety pins 36 Jacking up for wheel removal 38 Free fall assister nitrogen charging 40 Towing 42 Inflating tyre pressure 46 Check of tyre wear 48 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .Summary ATA 12 P1205 Page 74/ 74 Braking reservoir fluid level check 52 Tail bumper 54 Tail prop 56 Oil tank level check access 58 Draining of air data system 60 Aircraft jacking 62 Wing fuel tank draining 66 Fuselage water drain 68 Ground clearance 70 Exhaust temperature contours 71 No step areas 72 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 ATA 20 STANDARD PRACTICES Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

swaging. Bonding.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Cable checking. V2001 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Protective treatment and Paint… Some principle of repairs. fixing process and the products and ingredients implementation are described too in this chapter.ATA 20 AMM (Aircraft Maintenance Manual) Page 2/ 6 AMM (Aircraft Maintenance Manual) GENERALITY This chapter sets out instructions relative to standard nut and bolt work together with procedures for: Î Î Î Î Î Line installation.6 . Sealing.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 3/ 6 ACOS v1.ATA 20 V2001 AMM (Aircraft Maintenance Manual) Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 20 AWM (Aircraft Wiring Manual) Page 4/ 6 AWM (Aircraft Wiring Manual) GENERALITY This chapter covers the description. part numbers and installation procedure of electrical equipment installed on aircraft: The standard practices information available allows all operations and repairs of electrical equipment. Î The corresponding allocation tables. For every kind of equipment. V2002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . at least 3 types of information are given: Î A description / identification section. Î A tool identification / allocation table including the basic accomplishment instructions.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 5/ 6 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 20 V2002 AWM (Aircraft Wiring Manual) Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Summary ATA 20 Page 6/ 6 ATA 20 STANDARD PRACTICES V2002 AMM (Aircraft Maintenance Manual) 2 AWM (Aircraft Wiring Manual) 4 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

.MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.6 ATA 21 AIR CONDITIONING Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.

ATA 21 General description Page 2/ 205 General description Î The air conditioning system is provided to keep the passenger and flight compartments to the required pressure. V2101 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . temperature. humidity and cleanliness for the comfort of the passengers and crew. Î This air also ventilates: w Components located in the avionics compartment. Î The air pressure variations are automatically kept within limits compatible with passenger comfort. both on ground and in flight. or by the ground cart.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The temperature and pressure of the air is controlled and distributed to the pressurized compartment.6 . It is then discharged overboard. the air flows continuously through the cabin. w The lavatory. Î The conditioning air is bled from: ♦ The aircraft air conditioning packs supplied with air from engine compressors (on ground or in flight).

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Cockpit panels Page 3/ 205 Cockpit panels V2102 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 21 Interfaces Page 4/ 205 Interfaces V2103 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Features Page 5/ 205 Features V2104 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 21 V2104 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 6/ 205 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 7/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2104 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 Air conditioning safety precaution Page 8/ 205 Air conditioning safety precaution V2105 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 9/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2105 Air conditioning safety precaution Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 21 Air conditioning system description Page 10/ 205 Air conditioning system description V2106 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Air conditioning system description ATA 21 Page 11/ 205 Î The conditionned air ventilates the cabin and the flight compartment then the air is evacuated and channeled to the outflow valves.6 . Temperature control is regulated independently for the flight deck and the passenger compartment (cabin). The air cooling system consists of two identical air conditioning packs. Î The conditioning air temperature is obtained by mixing air from: ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î A hot air source upstream of the conditioning pack (air bleed from engines). a refrigeration unit and a water separator. The air conditioning is divided into four parts.ATR Training Centre . each comprising airflow regulation. It is then pre-cooled by an air heat exchanger and routed to the air conditioning pack. Î The air bleed from engine compressors is pressure controlled by a pack valve. The cooling system provides flow regulation and cooling air from the pneumatic system by means of an air conditioning pack. It supplies the pressurized zones of the aircraft with cool and conditioned air. V2106 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The temperature control system controls air temperature at the conditioning pack outlet and inside the pressurized compartments. part is then discharged overboard the rest recycled to the cabin and flight compartment through a recirculation fan.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. A cold air source from the conditioning heat exchangers. Independant packs are located on each side of landing gear fairing. before entering the air conditioning unit.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Compression system description Page 12/ 205 Compression system description Î The pneumatic air for the air conditioning system is bled from either low or high bleed port of each engine. V2108 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î It is ducted to two identical independent air cooling units (packs) installed respectively in the left and right landing gear fairings.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Compression system description Page 13/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2108 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 205 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 V2108 Compression system description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

dried. The selection of high flow mode increases the pack entrance pressure resulting in conditioning performance improvement.ATR Training Centre . compressed) in the packs. Normal and high flow are available. It will also close without electrical supply. It has two functions: ♦ ♦ Pack shut-off. V2108 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Pressure control and hence flow control. the pack valve is spring-load closed. Î Without air pressure. Î The pack valve is pneumatically operated and electrically controlled.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The ducts connecting the engines to the respective air cooling pack are interconnected by a crossfeed valve (ground operation only). and regardless of electrical command. Î Hot air from the engine is admitted through pack valves and conditioned (cooled.ATA 21 Compression system description Page 15/ 205 Î Each engine feeds the pack on its respective side through a pressure regulating and shut-off valve (pack-valve) and through a service pressure regulator which transmits a pressure to the temperature control valve.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 21 Compression system operation Page 16/ 205 Compression system operation V2113 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Comments: a pack overheat could be due to a dirty heat exchanger or a turbo fan failure. Note: delay is only applicable to pack 2. Fault light illuminates because the pack valve selection (on) disagrees with the valve position (closed). V2113 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the "flow" push button has to be selected on. Î When all the conditions are met the signal is delayed by 6 s (not shown on the screen).ATR Training Centre . Î To increase the flow. The pack valve is controlled to open when the bleed air shut off valve is open and the valve is selected "ON" or with X FEED valve open and provided no fault is detected. Now the pack valve regulates at 30 PSI (high flow).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . The "flow" push button is common to both packs. Î When the time is elapsed the shut-off valve solenoid is energized and. as air pressure is available the pack valve opens and regulates at 22 PSI (normal flow). Note that a signal is sent to engine electronic control to decrease slightly the fuel to prevent ITT increase. this acts on the high pressure differential solenoid. The pack valve will close automatically. Note that the pack control relay provides information to the cabin pressure controller and to the cabin temperature sensor ventilation fan. In addition. Î In case of pack overheat (204°C).ATA 21 Compression system operation Page 17/ 205 Î Here is the simplified schematic of pack valve 2 operation. on the RH maintenance panel the "bite loaded" magnetic indicator turns on to indicated the fault.

6 .ATA 21 Pack valve description Page 18/ 205 Pack valve description V2109 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 21 Pack valve description Page 19/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2109 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATA 21 V2109 Pack valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 20/ 205 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

with a variable pressure regulator. These valves also work as shut-off valves. pneumatically operated and electrically controlled.6 .Pack valve description ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Page 21/ 205 This valve is located on the forward landing gear fairing and regulates. 2) Low reference regulator (22 PSI). Two pack valves. regulate the air flow and pressure. 4) High differential solenoid valve assembly.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. butterfly type. or shuts off the flow of the engine bleed air to the pack. 5) Actuator assy 6) Flow section 7) A position indicator switch assembly V2109 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The valve consists of a: 1) High reference regulator (30 PSI). one in each pack. The solenoid-controlled shut-off valve is a pneumatically-actuated. 3) Shut-off solenoid valve assembly.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Service pressure and regulating valve description Page 22/ 205 Service pressure and regulating valve description V2111 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

It provides a constant source of regulated supply air to the temperature control valve. V2111 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The service pressure regulator is a bleed on type regulator designed to deliver a regulated outlet pressure when provided with a higher. unregulated supply at the inlet.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î It provides a constant source of regulated supply air to the temperature control valve.6 . The service pressure regulator is pneumatically activated poppet-type differential pressure regulator.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Service pressure and regulating valve description Page 23/ 205 The service pressure regulator located in the landing gear fairing is a pneumatically activated poppet-type differential pressure regulator.

4 PSI to the temperature control valve. The poppet modulates in response to the interaction of output pressure acting on the diaphragm.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When the balance between the opening force and closing force is upset (change in supply pressure or change in output usage) the poppet valve will find a new position and return to the calibrated output.ATA 21 Service pressure and regulating valve operation Page 24/ 205 Service pressure and regulating valve operation Î Input pressure from the bleed air duct (upstream the pack valve) is applied to the service pressure regulator. V2112 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre . throught the feedback orifice. and the calibration spring to deliver a regulated supply pressure of 16.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .Cooling system description ATA 21 Page 25/ 205 Cooling system description Î The cooling system provides flow regulation and cooling air from the pneumatic system by means of an air conditioning pack in order to supply the pressurized zones of the aircraft with cool air.ATR Training Centre . Î In other cases. Î The temperature of air supplying the pressurized zones of the aircraft with conditioned air is regulated by the temperature control system. Î A cooling turbo-fan provides cooling air on ground or in flight when the aircraft speed is lower than 150 KTS and landing gear is down. cooling air is provided by ram-air. V2114 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

each one comprising an air flow regulation.6 .ATA 21 Cooling system description Page 26/ 205 Î The air cooling system consists of two identical air conditioning packs. These packs enable airflow temperature and humidity to be controlled.ATR Training Centre . a refrigeration unit and a water separator. V2114 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Air is supplied by the right engine for the passenger compartment and by the left engine for the flight compartment and 32 % of the passenger compartment.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 21 Cooling system description Page 27/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2114 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 28/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2114 Cooling system description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Cooling system description ATA 21 Page 29/ 205 Î The cooling air generation assembly consists of : ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î a cooling inlet (ram air). ♦ an additional de-icing pressure switch. There is also a nozzle spraying water in front of the heat exchangers.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. there are also : ♦ an air cycle machine comprising a compressor and a turbine. ♦ a turbine temperature inlet control valve. ♦ a condenser. The ground cooling turbo-fan is energized by bleed air. In the cooling system.6 . Two check valves are installed in the cooling air duct. a ground cooling turbo-fan which circulates the air in the heat exchangers. which is controlled through the turbo-fan shut-off valve.ATR Training Centre . ♦ a pack overtemperature switch. ♦ a water extractor. V2114 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Cooling system operation Page 30/ 205 Cooling system operation V2138 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 V2138 Cooling system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 31/ 205 ACOS v1.

ATA 21 V2138 Cooling system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 32/ 205 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 21 V2138 Cooling system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 33/ 205 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 34/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2138 Cooling system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 V2138 Cooling system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 35/ 205 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATA 21 V2138 Cooling system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 36/ 205 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Cooling system operation Page 37/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2138 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Dual heat exchanger description Page 38/ 205 Dual heat exchanger description V2115 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

There is a primary and a secondary section. it is two heat exchangers contained in a single housing.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The dual heat exchanger is an air-to-air.ATR Training Centre . V2115 Copyright © 2001-2008 . In reality. plate-fin unit. Each section consists of a rectangular plate.fin core with an inlet and outlet pans welded on opposite ends.Dual heat exchanger description ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Page 39/ 205 The dual heat exchanger is located in the forward landing gear fairing.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Air cycle machine description Page 40/ 205 Air cycle machine description V2117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 21 Air cycle machine description Page 41/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATA 21 V2117 Air cycle machine description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 42/ 205 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Î The air cycle machine consists of : ♦ ♦ a compressor. Î Air is ducted from the primary section of the dual heat exchanger to the compressor section of the air cycle machine.ATR Training Centre . Î The compressor and turbine. where flow temperature and pressure increase. Î The compression heat is partially removed in the secondary section of the dual heat exchanger. are mounted on the same shaft support by air bearings.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Air is then ducted to the cooling turbine where it expands and gets cold. forming the rotating assembly.ATA 21 Air cycle machine description Page 43/ 205 Î The air cycle machine is located in the forward landing gear fairing.6 . an expansion turbine.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Pack overheat switch description Page 44/ 205 Pack overheat switch description V2119 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

V2119 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . before the second heat exchanger.ATR Training Centre . belleville reference spring washer.ATA 21 Pack overheat switch description Page 45/ 205 Î The overheat switch is installed downstream the air cycle machine compressor. it expands and applies a force to the diaphragm. the switch returns to a normaly closed position. Î The pack overheat switch consists of a vapor-filled sensing probe. Î When the fluid vapor within the probe is subjected to the hot compressor discharge air. Î When air temperature across the probe has decreased to the reset value of approximately 182°C. stainless steel diaphragm. and a double pole/single throw.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î A temperature of approximately 204°C will produce a force sufficient to overcome the diaphragm spring washer and actuate the switch.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 21 Condenser description Page 46/ 205 Condenser description V2120 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

air-to-air heat exchanger.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2120 Copyright © 2001-2008 . single pass. cross flow.ATA 21 Condenser description Page 47/ 205 Î The condenser is a plate-fin. that uses refrigerated turbine discharge air at a temperature low enough for moisture condensation.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATA 21 Water extractor description Page 48/ 205 Water extractor description V2122 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Water extractor description Page 49/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2122 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 50/ 205 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 21 V2122 Water extractor description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

a water sump. plates. integral duct type device that incorporates four helix blades.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a flow baffle. Î The downstream water collector consists of : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a formed perforated collector ring. V2122 Copyright © 2001-2008 . brazed to the central hub and to the duct inner valve. and a downstream water collector. a scavenge air port.ATR Training Centre . Î The water extractor is an in-line.Water extractor description ATA 21 Page 51/ 205 Î The water extractor removes the water from the moisture produced by the condenser. water drain ports.6 . an outer muff.

ATA 21 Water spray nozzle description Page 52/ 205 Water spray nozzle description V2124 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre . Î The nozzle must be installed with the arrow properly positioned. Î The nozzle provides a restriction and atomizes the water while spraying it in the cooling airstream before it passes through the dual heat exchangers. V2124 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The evaporative cooling effect contributes to the efficiency of the heat exchangers.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Water spray nozzle description Page 53/ 205 Î The water spray nozzle is located at the air inlet of the heat exchangers. Î The water spray nozzle is an orificed fitting that provides a means to attach the line from the water extractor to the ram air plenum.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Turbine temperature inlet control valve description Page 54/ 205 Turbine temperature inlet control valve description V2125 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre . Î The thermal element and poppet valve are enclosed in the valve body. Î The action controls turbine inlet temperature to a minimum of 24°C and reduces the possibility of turbine icing. V2125 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Turbine temperature inlet control valve description Page 55/ 205 Î This valve is installed near the air cycle machine. Cold air causes the sensor/actuator to contract and open the poppet valve which adds some hot air (tapped from the compressor outlet duct) to the air flow from the water extractor. Î Air flow from the water extractor passes over the thermal sensing element before to reach cooling turbine.

ATA 21 Additional de-icing pressure switch description Page 56/ 205 Additional de-icing pressure switch description V2126 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

The other is tapped from the turbine air inlet.ATA 21 Additional de-icing pressure switch description Page 57/ 205 Î This pressure switch is installed in the forward landing gear fairing. Î Two pressure inputs are provided to the switch.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. One is tapped from the duct between the secondary heat exchanger outlet and the condenser inlet. It is a differential pressure switch connected to compressor outlet duct and water separator outlet duct. When the differential pressure between the two inputs increases to 9 PSI.ATR Training Centre . Î The signal from this switch will change the position of the temperature control valve in case of ice accretion.6 . V2126 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The purpose of the additional de-icing pressure switch is to detect condenser icing by monitoring the differential pressure across the condenser bleed air path.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Ground cooling turbo-fan description Page 58/ 205 Ground cooling turbo-fan description V2132 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Ground cooling turbo-fan description Page 59/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2132 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 60/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2132 Ground cooling turbo-fan description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î With bleed air available and the turbo-fan shut-off valve in the open position air enters the inlet duct and travels through the nozzle ring into the turbine blades. Turbine wheel.ATR Training Centre . Î The turbine wheel attaches to the tips of the fan wheel and forces the impeller to rotate. Outlet housing.ATA 21 Ground cooling turbo-fan description Page 61/ 205 Î The ground turbo-fan is pneumatically driven vane-axial fan used to produce a flow of cooling air through the dual heat exchangers. The main components are: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ The inlet housing. Î As the assembly rotates the fan blades force the air out of the outlet housing to the heat exchangers. Î The turbo-fan allows the air cooling operation on ground or in flight when the aircraft speed is lower than 150 KTS and landing gears are down. Fan wheel assembly. V2132 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Nozzle ring. Î A check valve is installed downstream the turbo-fan.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Turbo-fan shut-off valve description Page 62/ 205 Turbo-fan shut-off valve description V2134 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 . It is pneumatically actuated with an electrical control solenoid. The valve allows bleed air to flow and to operate the ground cooling fan when the solenoid is energized.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The turbofan shut-off valve is a spring loaded normally-closed.ATR Training Centre . V2134 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Turbo-fan shut-off valve description Page 63/ 205 Î This valve is located in the forward landing gear fairing. in-line poppet valve.

ATA 21 Turbo-fan pressure switch description Page 64/ 205 Turbo-fan pressure switch description V2136 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

if the turbo-fan shut-off valve is not open (turbo-fan not running). V2136 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The turbo-fan pressure switch detects a Δp of 8 PSI between the shut-off valve outlet and the ambient pressure.ATR Training Centre . Î It prevents erroneous use of turbo-fan in flight and pack overheat on ground.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Turbo-fan pressure switch description Page 65/ 205 Î This pressure switch is located downstream the turbo-fan shut-off valve.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 21 Air temperature control system description Page 66/ 205 Air temperature control system description V2139 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The right pack regulates cabin temperature and the left regulates flight compartment temperature. Î The temperature control valve operates the hot bypass valve. V2139 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The temperature control valve operates by a constant pressure from service pressure regulator. Î The air conditioning temperature is obtained by mixing air from : ♦ ♦ a hot air source upstream of the conditioning pack (engine bleed air). Î Temperature regulation is achieved by : ♦ ♦ the temperature control valve.ATR Training Centre . or automatically controls the flight compartment and cabin temperature. the hot bypass valve. a cold air source at the conditioning pack outlet.ATA 21 Air temperature control system description Page 67/ 205 Î The temperature control system manually.

ATA 21 V2139 Air temperature control system description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 68/ 205 ACOS v1.

A gauge indicates the selected duct and compartment temperatures. V2139 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. In manual mode.ATR Training Centre . In automatic mode. each pack temperature control valve is controlled directly by the zone temperature demand selector. cabin compartment by the right pack and 32% of the left pack. Flight compartment and cabin temperature auto control uses different temperature sensors located in the flight compartment and in the cabin. A compartment selector allows the cabin or the flight compartment selection. each pack delivery temperature is controlled by an electronic temperature controller.6 .ATA 21 Air temperature control system description Page 69/ 205 Î The system is designed to regulate and limit the temperature of the air delivered by the packs to supply the different zones : ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Î flight compartment by the left pack.

ATA 21 Air temperature control system operation Page 70/ 205 Air temperature control system operation V2154 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Air is mixed with air recirculated by the recirculation fan and ducted to the cabin air distribution. OVHT light illuminates associated with the single chime. the temperature control signal is timed for 15s. the fan is boosted to high speed. triming the quantity of hot air to be added to the cold air from the air cycle machine. The torque motor modulates air pressure from the service pressure regulator. Note 1 : Variation of the current flow to the torque motor will increase or deacrese the reciculation fan speed. the hot bypass valve which is slaved to the temperature control valve starts to open adding hot air to the mixing chamber. In addition. Î When ice is detected in the Air Cycle Machine (ACM) the temp control valve is controlled to open to de-ice the ACM (ref operation/additional de-icing). As a result the valves tend to close limiting the hot air flow to the compartment. in manual mode. The controller processes the inputs and determines a variable current to the MFC. When alert disappears control temp as required. duct temperature signal and actual cabin selector signal are sent to the temperature controller. AIR on the Crew Alerting Panel. Î Note : Resistor 26HH prevents. the temperature selector allows a cabin temperature of between 16°C and 32°C. Note 2 : When the temperature at foot level falls below 18°C. After 15 new seconds. skin sensor signal.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Air temperature control system operation Page 71/ 205 Here is a simplified schematic of the cabin temperature control. Î If the duct temperature reaches 88°C.ATR Training Centre . Î When the duct temperature is greater than 92°C. the temperature control valve opens normally. Î Comments : ♦ ♦ ♦ OVHT will remain illuminated as long as an overtemperature is detected in the duct. Î Temperature control in auto mode or manual mode are momentarely de-activated. air is ducted to the mixing chamber. In AUTO mode. air to the compartment will be provided by the recirculation fan. If alert does not disappear. the temp control valve is jammed open or torque motor inop. Energized when ice detected at ACM level V2154 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Cabin sensor signal.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the air pressure reference of the temperature control valve (and hot bypass valve too) is vented to ambient. Î The compt temp indicator is used by the crew to monitor the compt/duct temperature. the crew reverts to the manual mode (MAN illuminates white) controlling directly the torque motor from the temperature selector knob through the temperature controller (the knob has to be selected towards "COLD" position). CAUTION. the full closure of the trim air valve to protect the Air Cycle Machine from icing. When the pack valve opens. When the temperature control valve opens at about 50%. Î Following the overheat. Î Note : If one pack is inoperative. The pack valve has to be selected off.6 . the other one supplies both compartment through the mixing chamber (not shown). As a result the valve starts to open slightly. then routed through resistor 36HH to the torque motor of the temperature control valve. Then.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 72/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2154 Air temperature control system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Air temperature control system operation Page 73/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2154 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

the zone selected with the compartment selector is the cabin. Now.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . The compartment and duct temperature indicator gives the flight compartment ambient temperature and the flight compartment duct temperature.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Air temperature control system operation Page 74/ 205 Here is a simplified schematic of the flight compartment and cabin temperature indicating. The compartment and duct temperature indicator gives the cabin ambient temperature and the cabin duct temperature.6 . V2154 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The zone selected with the compartment selector is the flight compartment.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Air temperature control system operation Page 75/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2154 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 21 Temperature control valve description Page 76/ 205 Temperature control valve description V2140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Temperature control valve description Page 77/ 205 The temperature control valve is connected between the pack valve and the cooling air inlet duct upstream. controls hot bleed air addition to cooled air. The temperature control valve.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Adjusted pressure is also applied to the duct temperature limiter which will drop the pressure in case of air temperature in the duct reaches 88°C. The valve torque motor adjusts the pressure coming from the service pressure regulator to actuate the valve and to slave the hot bypass valve. in conjuction with the hot bypass valve.ATR Training Centre . Valve position is a direct function of regulated supply pressure and electro-magnetic control valve input. V2140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

V2142 Copyright © 2001-2008 . in conjuction with the temperature control valve.6 .ATA 21 Hot bypass valve description Page 78/ 205 Hot bypass valve description Î The hot bypass valve connects directly hot air downstream the pack valve to cold air downstream the cooling system.ATR Training Centre . additional hot air is mixed with cold air in the delivery duct downstream the condenser. Î When the valve opens.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. works to control air temperature. Î The hot bypass valve.

Î When the valve opens.6 . works to control air temperature.ATR Training Centre . Î The hot bypass valve.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Hot bypass valve description Page 79/ 205 Î The hot bypass valve connects directly hot air downstream the pack valve to cold air downstream the cooling system. in conjuction with the temperature control valve. additional hot air is mixed with cold air in the delivery duct downstream the condenser. V2142 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Compartment temperature controller description Page 80/ 205 Compartment temperature controller description V2144 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 21 Compartment temperature controller description Page 81/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2144 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 V2144 Compartment temperature controller description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 82/ 205 ACOS v1.

6 . selectors and switches are external to the unit. Sensors send electrical signals to the temperature controllers. V2144 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Compartment temperature controller description Page 83/ 205 Two temperature controllers are located in the flight deck electronic racks.ATR Training Centre . All sensors. The compartment temperature control is designed to maintain compartment air temperature within a user selectable range of 16°C to 32°C. The control provides a drive signal for the temperature control valve in response to inputs from sensors as well as compartment temperature selector. There is one controller for the cabin and one for the flight compartment. They regulate temperature control valve in AUTO mode in order to keep independent air temperature compartment controls.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The two electronic control boxes are supplied by 28VDC and controlled by the temperature control selectors on the cockpit overhead panel.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin ambient temperature sensors description Page 84/ 205 Flight compartment and cabin ambient temperature sensors description V2146 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin ambient temperature sensors description Page 85/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2146 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 21 V2146 Flight compartment and cabin ambient temperature sensors description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 86/ 205 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Î There are two screw terminals for the electrical connection. Î It consists mainly of : ♦ ♦ ♦ a glass probe type thermistor embedded in an epoxy resin housing.ATR Training Centre . Î The two compartment sensors have a single sensing element.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. one for each compartment. V2146 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin ambient temperature sensors description Page 87/ 205 Î There are two sensors. an electrical connector. an extract fan. Î The sensing element resistance varies according to temperature in the zone concerned. Î The resistance of the element decreases as the temperature increases.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 21 Duct temperature sensors description Page 88/ 205 Duct temperature sensors description V2147 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. one for each compartment supply duct. The two compartment sensors have a dual sensing element. It consists mainly of : ♦ a glass probe type thermistor embedded in an epoxy resin housing. ♦ an electrical connector.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Duct temperature sensors description Page 89/ 205 There are two sensors. V2147 Copyright © 2001-2008 . One element is a single thermistor (A to B) while the second element consists of two thermistors connected in series (B to C).ATR Training Centre . Î The sensing element resistance varies according to temperature in the zone concerned.6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Skin temperature sensors description Page 90/ 205 Skin temperature sensors description V2148 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The skin sensors consist of a thin-film nickel temperature sensing element deposited on a ceramic substrate. The element side of the sensor case has adhesive transfer tape for mounting.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The skin sensors inform the controller logic when the aircraft skin is either extremely hot or cold. V2148 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The skin sensor is a thermistor.6 . attached to the inside aircraft skin in the flight compartment and in the cabin. Its electrical signal is proportional to skin temperature.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Î Skin temperature sensors description Page 91/ 205 There are two sensors. This assembly is encapsulated in a high-thermal-conducting epoxy resin block.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Duct over temperature switch description Page 92/ 205 Duct over temperature switch description V2149 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre . Î The two overtemperature switches close if the air temperature exceeds 92 °C and OVHT light illuminates on the cockpit overhead panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The duct overtemperature switch is a glass probe type thermistor sensor embedded in an epoxy resin housing. V2149 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Duct over temperature switch description Page 93/ 205 Î Two duct overtemperature switches are installed in the low pressure duct distribution system in the underfloor area.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Duct temperature limiter sensor description Page 94/ 205 Duct temperature limiter sensor description V2150 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The duct temperature limiter sensor consists of : ♦ ♦ a spring-loaded bi-metallic thermostatic limiter.6 . a spring-loaded poppet valve contained in a plastic housing.ATA 21 Duct temperature limiter sensor description Page 95/ 205 Î The duct temperature limiter sensor is a pneumatic unit installed on the duct in the underfloor pressurized area. V2150 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the unit opens progressively. Î The duct temperature limiter sensor is a pneumatic unit which acts on the temperature control valves and hot bypass valve in order to prevent excessive air temperature supply from the pack.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. temperature control valve and hot bypass valve tend to close. Thus.ATR Training Centre . Î As the air supply temperature exceeds 88°C.

ATA 21 Cabin temperature ventilation fan description Page 96/ 205 Cabin temperature ventilation fan description V2152 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Cabin temperature ventilation fan description Page 97/ 205 Î The cabin temperature ventilation fan is installed in cabin between FR27 and FR28.ATR Training Centre .6 . near the cabin temperature sensor. V2152 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The cabin temperature ventilation fan is provided to improve air circulation across the cabin temperature sensor.

ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution system description Page 98/ 205 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution system description Î Conditioned air from each pack ventilates the cabin and the flight compartment by means of the air distribution system.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2155 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î Air is evacuated on the lower side wall panel. V2155 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution system description Page 99/ 205 Î Conditioned air enters the cabin below stowage compartment.ATR Training Centre .

V2155 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution system description Page 100/ 205 Î Air is evacuated to underfloor areas through openings on the lower side wall panel.

the cabin air distribution ducts. 2 mixing chambers. the flight compartment air distribution ducts.ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution system description Page 101/ 205 Î The air distribution system is composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ 2 recirculation fans.6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a ground cart connection. V2155 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

When the floor level temperature falls below 18°C. the recirculation fan thermal switch closes and high speed control relay (70HB) is energized.ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution operation Page 102/ 205 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution operation Î Î Î Î Î Î Here is a simplified schematic of flight compartment and cabin air distribution operation.6 . Then.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . The recirculation fan is supplied by 28VDC. Fan rotation speed linearly varies depending on temperature control valve position. V2162 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the recirculation fans run at high speed. The fan runs and forces recycled air through mixing chambers. The 28HB (or 29HB) solenoid is supplied and its contactor closes.

ATA 21 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution operation Page 103/ 205 Î When a recirculation fan underspeed or overheat is detected. Î Î Î Î Î The faulty recirculation fan must be stopped. Faulty recirculation fan stops and fault light extinguishes. master CAUTION flashes and a single chime is heard. recirculation fans are running at high speed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2162 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the recirculation fan thermal switch closes and high speed control relay (70HB) is energized.ATR Training Centre . OFF light on recirculation fan pushbutton illuminates in white. "AIR" on Crew Alerting Panel illuminates. When the floor level temperatures falls below 18°C. the recirculation fan pushbutton FAULT light illuminates. Then.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Mixing chambers desription Page 104/ 205 Mixing chambers desription V2156 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre . Î The mixing chamber is used to mix fresh air from the packs and recirculated air.ATA 21 Mixing chambers desription Page 105/ 205 Î The mixing chambers are located underfloor area. V2156 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. at the end of each recirculation system.

6 .ATA 21 Groud cart connection description Page 106/ 205 Groud cart connection description V2157 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î A check valve fitted on the pipe prevents air from the mixing chambers going outboard.ATA 21 Groud cart connection description Page 107/ 205 Î A ground connection is used by a ground cart to supply cabin with pre-conditioned air. Î This air is directly injected in the distribution ducts.6 . V2157 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Recirculation fans description Page 108/ 205 Recirculation fans description V2158 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Recirculation fans description Page 109/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2158 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 110/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2158 Recirculation fans description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

It is equipped with: ♦ a speed detection electronic system supplying an indicating light. ♦ a system producing the motion in the event of motor seizure.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Î Recirculation fans description Page 111/ 205 The two recirculation fans are installed below the cabin floor near the mixing chambers.ATR Training Centre . Each recirculation fan recycles air from underfloor area which is mixed with fresh air coming from packs. Î A check valve fitted downstream prevents flow crossover when the fan is stopped.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. It is fitted with a grid to prevent ingestion of objects that can damage the fan vanes. Î The recirculation fan is installed in a muffler to limit fan noise.6 . V2158 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The fan is driven by a variable speed electrical motor. The fan rotation speed linearly varies from 15600 rpm to 19600 rpm.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Cabin foot lever temperature switch description Page 112/ 205 Cabin foot lever temperature switch description V2159 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î If the temperature drops below 18°C.ATR Training Centre . between the interior panelling and the outer skin of the aircraft.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. between FR23D and FR24.ATA 21 Cabin foot lever temperature switch description Page 113/ 205 Î This switch is installed on the RH side of the cabin. the switch will activate the recirculation fans at high speed to warm up the cabin. Î It is located at foot level. V2159 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 21 Cabin air distribution duct description Page 114/ 205 Cabin air distribution duct description V2160 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Cabin air distribution duct description Page 115/ 205 Î The cabin air distribution ducts are routed above the overhead stowage compartment. Î Two additionnal ducts are used for passengers door and for service door lower ventilation.ATR Training Centre . V2160 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 21 Flight compartment air distribution duct description Page 116/ 205 Flight compartment air distribution duct description V2161 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 21 Flight compartment air distribution duct description Page 117/ 205 Î The flight compartment air distribution is composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ demisters for windshields and windows. V2161 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . ventilation outlets for crew and observer.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . foot warmers. Î The observer lower area is also vented.

V2163 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . individual air outlets.ATA 21 Individual air distribution system description Page 118/ 205 Individual air distribution system description Î The individual air distribution system provides air for each passenger. Î This system is composed of : ♦ ♦ individual air distribution duct. for crew and for cabin attendant.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Individual air distribution system description Page 119/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2163 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Individual air distribution duct description Page 120/ 205 Individual air distribution duct description V2164 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

for pilots and for cabin attendant.ATR Training Centre . V2164 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 21 Individual air distribution duct description Page 121/ 205 Î Individual air distribution system is supplied by the flight compartment air distribution duct. Î The individual air distribution system provides air for each passenger.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Individual air outlet description Page 122/ 205 Individual air outlet description V2165 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The other individual air outlets have the same functions. V2165 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Individual air outlet description Page 123/ 205 Î Each passenger module consists of two swivelling individual air outlets with adjustable flow.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Shown here are the extraction inlets for central panels.6 . the windshield temperature controller and the radar transceiver. the pedestal.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the glareshield.ATR Training Centre . V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 124/ 205 Ventilation system description Î Ambient air is drawn around the instruments and goes through ducts to the extraction fan.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 125/ 205 Î Extraction is also provided for the overhead panel. the AHRS and the cockpit ambient temperature sensor box. V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . the two electronic racks.6 .

ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 126/ 205 Î Behind the extraction fan.6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a tapping brings in air to ventilate the batteries. V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

air is evacuated overboard through the overboard ventilation valve. The underfloor ventilation valve is shut to avoid recirculation in underfloor areas. V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 127/ 205 Î On ground and when engine 1 is not running.

6 . One part of extracted air is recycled and evacuated underfloor. V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 128/ 205 Î In flight or on ground with engine 1 running. the overboard ventilation valve is closed and the underfloor ventilation valve is open.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 129/ 205 Î The remaining extracted air is evacuated in the forward cargo hold at the floor level. V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 130/ 205 Î In case of smoke in the forward cargo compartment.ATR Training Centre .6 . flight deck air extraction duct can be closed with a lever located by the RH side maintenance panel in order to prevent smoke entering the flight compartment from the forward cargo area.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 Ventilation system description Page 131/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2166 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Electronics racks and cabin air extraction system operation Page 132/ 205 Electronics racks and cabin air extraction system operation V2177 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

under auto control.ATR Training Centre . the OVBD FAULT illuminates together with master CAUTION. Note that batteries are also ventilated. Master CAUTION is triggered. the extraction fan is inhibited from running for 120 seconds and the exhaust mode FAULT light illuminates. The overboard ventilation valve moves from the open to the close position. the cockpit communication hatch might be opened in order to equalize pressure during an increase in extraction through the overboard ventilation valve. Now the aircraft is airborne. The underfloor ventilation valve opens and the captain may close the cockpit communication hatch. The air extraction fan stops. The exhaust mode FAULT light illuminates amber. Due to Δp existing between outside and inside cabin. the OVBD valve FAULT light illuminates. Î Prior to starting in hotel mode. In flight or on ground with engine 1 running. a single chime and "AIR" on crew alerting panel. 120 seconds after engine 1 start. Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î As engine 2 starts. the OVBD valve is closed and the OVBD valve FAULT light extinguishes. The air extraction fan recirculates the air into the cabin. in case of air extraction fan overheat or underspeed. OVBD light illuminates white. the OVBD selector valve has to be manually selected to full close.ATA 21 Electronics racks and cabin air extraction system operation Page 133/ 205 Î With aircraft on ground and on batteries only. As engine 1 starts. Now. According to the procedure. OVBD ventilation valve opens partially in AUTO mode. Î On ground. During this movement. sufficient cooling air flow is recovered. the propeller brake must be released and propeller unfeathered. extraction becomes insufficient. The air is blown outside through the overboard ventilation valve. In flight. According to the procedure. V2177 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the extraction fan is inhibited from runnig for 120 seconds. OVBD ventilation valve opens partially in auto mode. After 120 seconds. the air extraction fan starts to run and the exhaust mode FAULT light extinguishes. extraction becomes insufficient. the air extraction fan runs and the exhaust mode FAULT light extinguishes. "AIR" comes on.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The air recirculates into the cabin through the underfloor ventilation valve. In case of position disagreement. the extraction fan is stopped and the overboard ventilation valve is open. Î The exhaust mode fault light has to be set to "OVBD" mode. The exhaust mode fault light illuminates amber. The OVBD valve remains closed and the underfloor valve remains open. a single chime is heard and on the crew altering panel. the exhaust mode pushbutton has to be set on "OVBD" mode. The air extraction fan stops. Prior to taxiing. Now. engine 1 has to be started. in case of air extraction fan failure.6 . the OVBD ventilation valve is scheduled closed. Due to Δp existing between outside and inside cabin. sufficient cooling air flow is recovered.

Î In case of position disagreement. Î On ground.6 . ♦ FAULT amber light. Î According to the procedure. Overboard ventilation valve opens partially.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Electronics racks and cabin air extraction system operation Page 134/ 205 The air extraction fan stops. ♦ a single chime. It will trigger: ♦ master CAUTION. mechanical ground call is activated (horn). the OVBD ventilation valve is scheduled to be open. OVBD valve FAULT alert is generated when the actual position disagrees with the automatic schedule position. with engine 1 stopped and under auto control. ♦ "AIR" on crew alerting panel. In case of DC external power selected on. V2177 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the OVBD selector valve has to be manually selected to full open.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the OVBD fault alert is triggered.ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Electronics racks and cabin air extraction system operation Page 135/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2177 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 Air extraction fan description Page 136/ 205 Air extraction fan description V2168 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Air extraction fan description Page 137/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2168 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 138/ 205 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 V2168 Air extraction fan description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The air extraction fan stops in case of smoke detection in the aft cargo and lavatory compartments. It comprises a rotation speed control system connected to an ambient temperature sensor.ATR Training Centre . Î The fan is supplied with 28 VDC unit.ATA 21 Air extraction fan description Page 139/ 205 Î The air extraction fan is located on the lower part of the fuselage. a low speed sensor which detects fan failure or loss of power supply. Î The air extraction fan extracts air from the flight compartment and electronic racks to ventilate electrical and electronic components. Î The fan is equipped with two main security devices: ♦ ♦ a thermal switch. FAULT illuminates on the exhaust mode pushbutton and "AIR" illuminates on the crew alerting panel (CAP). which detects overtemperature.6 . V2168 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î When an underspeed and / or overheat (T > 110 °C) occurs.

ATA 21 Overboard ventilation valve description Page 140/ 205 Overboard ventilation valve description V2170 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Overboard ventilation valve description Page 141/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2170 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 V2170 Overboard ventilation valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 142/ 205 ACOS v1.

opening and closing of the valve could be manually controlled from outside of the aircraft.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The valve has three positions: ♦ ♦ ♦ open.6 . and is supplied with 28 VDC from EMER BUS. closed. intermediate. Î In the event of a failure of the electric motor. These positions are determined by three limit switches.ATA 21 Overboard ventilation valve description Page 143/ 205 Î The overboard ventilation valve is located on the lower part of the fuselage and flush with the aircraft skin. V2170 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î It is a flag-type valve. Î The overboard ventilation valve is used to discharge avionics ventilation air out of the aircraft.

ATA 21 Underfloor ventilation valve description Page 144/ 205 Underfloor ventilation valve description V2172 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

The valve isolates the underfloor areas. Then. Î The valve has two stable positions: ♦ open position: when the overboard ventilation valve is closed. Î The underfloor ventilation valve is a butterfly-type valve and is electrically supplied with 28 VDC from the EMER BUS. ♦ closed position: when the overboard ventilation valve is fully or partially open.6 .ATR Training Centre . avionics ventilation air is recycled to underfloor areas and to the forward cargo compartment. V2172 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Underfloor ventilation valve description Page 145/ 205 Î The underfloor ventilation valve is located on the lower part of the fuselage.

ATA 21 Extract air flow lever Page 146/ 205 Extract air flow lever V2174 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre . Î In normal operation. the front panel. the radar and the windshield temperature controller are no longer ventilated. due to suction from the cockpit panels. Only the overhead panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the two racks and the AHRS continue to be ventilated.Extract air flow lever ATA 21 Page 147/ 205 Î The valve is located at the end of the cockpit panels ventilation duct. V2174 Copyright © 2001-2008 . air circulates from the forward cargo area to the flight deck. thus preventing smoke from entering the flight deck. Î It is governed by a level located on the right maintenance panel.6 . Î In the case of smoke in the forward cargo area. the extract air flow lever will cut suction from the cockpit panels. Î If the anti-smoke valve is closed.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Ambient temperature sensor description Page 148/ 205 Ambient temperature sensor description V2175 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. according to the flight compartment ambient temperature. V2175 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Ambient temperature sensor description Page 149/ 205 Î A temperature sensor is installed on the flight compartment air extraction duct.ATR Training Centre . Î This sensor transmits an electrical signal to the fan speed control system.

6 .ATA 21 Battery ventilation system description Page 150/ 205 Battery ventilation system description V2178 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Battery ventilation system description Page 151/ 205 Each battery is located in a container placed in the left electronics rack (80 VU).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The system also serves to cool the batteries.ATR Training Centre . V2178 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . The upper part of the batteries is cooled by air bled at the air extraction fan outlet and then exhausted overboard. Gaseous fumes produced by the two batteries are evacuated out of the aircraft by the ventilation system.

located at the end of the exhaust system. the venturi and ducting are made from stainless steel. V2179 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the ducting is made from a light alloy material.ATA 21 Battery ventilation system operation Page 152/ 205 Battery ventilation system operation Î Î Î Î The batteries ventilation system is composed of flexible hoses which do not ground the battery. Upstream the check valve.6 . prevents fumes entering the air extraction system. A check valve located on the supply ducting. A venturi. serves to limit ventilation airflow.ATR Training Centre . Downstream the check valve.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

air is directly discharged outboard.ATA 21 Lavatory ventilation system description Page 153/ 205 Lavatory ventilation system description Î Lavatory ventilation is ensured by a tapping on the individual air distribution duct.ATR Training Centre . V2180 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î To avoid unpleasant odours in the cabin.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Lavatory ventilation operation Page 154/ 205 Lavatory ventilation operation V2183 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Lavatory ventilation operation Page 155/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2183 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 21 Air supply duct and outlets description Page 156/ 205 Air supply duct and outlets description V2181 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Air supply duct and outlets description Page 157/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2181 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Evacuation duct description Page 158/ 205 Evacuation duct description V2182 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The jet pump limits air flow due to differential pressure between the cabin and outside.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Evacuation duct description Page 159/ 205 Î Air from the lavatory is evacuated outboard by means of a hose fitted to a jet pump. V2182 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î Compressed air is delivered by the packs.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. except for the main and nose landing gear wheel wells. Î The fuselage is pressurized from the front bulkhead to the rear bulkhead. Pressure and its rate of change are controlled by the amout of cabin air discharged outboard.6 . V2184 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Pressurization description Page 160/ 205 Pressurization description Î The cabin and flight compartments must be pressurized to ensure comfort and safety for passengers and crew.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre . a cabin pressure indicator. a manual controller. providing vacuum reference for pressurisation system. an electro-pneumatic outflow valve. a cabin pressure mode selector. a jet pump. V2184 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a pneumatic outflow valve.ATA 21 Pressurization description Page 161/ 205 Î The whole system is composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an automatic pressure controller.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

Î The manual system is principally used when the automatic system has failed or for ground pressurization tests.ATR Training Centre . a pneumatic system (or MAN mode).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a cabin pressure indicator. a manual controller. V2184 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a cabin pressure mode selector.ATA 21 Pressurization description Page 162/ 205 Î The cabin pressure is controlled by means of two independant control systems: ♦ ♦ a digital electro-pneumatic system (or AUTO mode). ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a pneumatic outflow valve.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 21 Pressurization description Page 163/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2184 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 21 Pressurization operation Page 164/ 205 Pressurization operation V2199 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 21 Pressurization operation Page 165/ 205 Î In AUTO mode. a single chime sounds. the system must be set to MANUAL mode.6 . w "AIR" on crew alerting panel illuminates. Î The electro-pneumatic outflow valve and pneumatic outflow valve have the same opening. through the valve interconnection pipe. Î In this case. w "AIR" on crew alerting panel illuminates. Î The torque motor is no longer supplied and the electro-pneumatic outflow valve closes. Î If there is an internal failure. or a power loss of the auto-pressure controller: ♦ ♦ ♦ FAULT light illuminates. a single chime sounds. master CAUTION flashes. Î Vacuum is applied to the pneumatic outflow valve because the manual controller is in the "MAN" position. master CAUTION flashes. the auto-pressure controller controls the electropneumatic outflow valve torque motor. Î In this case.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2199 Copyright © 2001-2008 . through the pneumatic outflow valve. Î Turning the manual controller knob changes the reference pressure to the pneumatic outflow valve.ATR Training Centre . with the manual controller in the "NORM" position and "MAN" on the mode extinguishes. FAULT light is extinguished and "MAN" light illuminates. the system must be set to MANUAL mode. Î If there is an internal failure. or a power loss of the auto-pressure controller: ♦ ♦ ♦ FAULT light illuminates. Î Cabin pressure is now controlled by the manual controller. Î Vacuum is not applied to the pneumatic outflow valve because the manual controller is in the "NORM" position.

When "DUMP" is selected. the auto-pressure controller is no longer supplied and the torque motor is directly supplied with 28 VDC from BUS 1.500 ft / min cabin pressure rate of change with the pneumatic outflow valve in the fully open position. "AIR" on CAP illuminates.6 . At the same time. Cabin air input to the electro-pneumatic outflow valve is closed. vacuum is present in the servo chambers and both outflow valves are in the fully open position. the auto-pressure controller transforms the 28 VDC to monitor the electro-pneumatic outflow valve torque motor. master CAUTION flashes.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Pressurization operation Page 166/ 205 In AUTO mode. fast depressurization is obtained using the manual controller with its knob in the externe position. a single chime is heard and landing elevation digits extinguish.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î This position corresponds approximately to + 2. V2199 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î In "MAN" mode.

V2199 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Î Î Pressurization operation Page 167/ 205 The ditching mode is available in both AUTO and MAN mode. The electrical actuators are supplied with 28 VDC from the EMER BUS. to open or close the outflow valves. "ON" light and actuators are supplied with 28 VDC. At the same time. The "DITCH" pushbutton controls the two outflow valve electrical actuators. They move by means of a tooth wheel. master CAUTION flashes. Two microswitches are used to stop the actuators when the racks have reached their limit. "AIR" on CAP illuminates and a single chime is heard. When "DITCH" is selected.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 21 Automatic pressure controller description Page 168/ 205 Automatic pressure controller description V2186 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Automatic pressure controller description Page 169/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2186 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 170/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2186 Automatic pressure controller description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

000 ft => Zcth = 0.29 x Za . Î There are four segments: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ from 0 to 5.000 to 20.1600 from 20.275 x Za .3 x Za .000 ft => Zcth = 0.000 ft => Zcth = 0. the pneumatic outflow valve is slaved to the first one.ATA 21 Automatic pressure controller description Page 171/ 205 Î The auto-pressure controller is located on the cockpit central panel. Î The control logic calculates a theoretical cabin altitude (Zcth) according to the aircraft altitude (Za). the auto-pressure controller needs several parameters: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ take-off elevation.5960 V2186 Copyright © 2001-2008 .000 to 25. as a result.000 to 15.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.508 x Za .1500 from 5. Î For its control logic. aircraft altitude. Î In AUTO mode.000 ft => Zcth = 0. landing elevation.ATR Training Centre . cabin altitude.6 .1375 from 15. the auto-pressure controller regulates pressure and rate of change governing the electro-pneumatic outflow valve and.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Jet pump description Page 172/ 205 Jet pump description V2188 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 . Î High pressure air from the bleed air duct supplies the jet pump.ATA 21 Jet pump description Page 173/ 205 Î The jet pump is used to create vacuum in the control circuit of the pressurization system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V2188 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Two checks valves prevent reverse flow from the jet pump in case of LH or RH bleed air pressure not available.

ATA 21 Electro-pneumatic outflow valve description Page 174/ 205 Electro-pneumatic outflow valve description V2190 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Electro-pneumatic outflow valve description Page 175/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2190 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 176/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V2190 Electro-pneumatic outflow valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

000 to 20.000 ft => Zeth = 0.29 x Za .ATA 21 Electro-pneumatic outflow valve description Page 177/ 205 Î This valve is installed below the cabin floor.508 x Za . to provide negative pressure safety. Î The valve is directly controlled by the digital controller when the system operates in AUTO mode. Î The valve incorporates an electrical ditching device which on command. closes the valve prior to ditching.1600 from 20. to limit cabin normal differential pressure.000 to 15.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.000 to 25.1500 from 5. Î There are four segments: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ from 0 to 5.5960 V2190 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .275 x Za .000 ft => Zeth = 0.000 ft => Zeth = 0.3 x Za .1375 from 15. In this case. Î The electro-pneumatic outflow valve functions are: ♦ ♦ ♦ to regulate cabin air evacuation.ATR Training Centre . the valve also controls opening of the pneumatic outflow valve. close the cabin attendant seat.000 ft => Zeth = 0.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Pneumatic outflow valve description Page 178/ 205 Pneumatic outflow valve description V2192 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 Pneumatic outflow valve description Page 179/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2192 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 180/ 205 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 V2192 Pneumatic outflow valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The valve is directly controlled by the manual controller when the system works in MAN mode.000 to 15. close the cabin attendant seat. Î There are four segments: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ from 0 to 5.29 x Za .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The pneumatic outflow valve functions are: ♦ ♦ ♦ to regulate cabin air evacuation.6 .1375 from 15.000 ft => Zeth = 0.508 x Za .1500 from 5.000 ft => Zeth = 0.275 x Za . closes the valve. Prior ditching. to limit cabin normal differential pressure.3 x Za .5960 V2192 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 21 Pneumatic outflow valve description Page 181/ 205 Î This valve is installed below the cabin floor.000 ft => Zeth = 0. Î The valve incorporates an electrical ditching device which on command. to provide negative pressure safety.000 to 20.000 ft => Zeth = 0.ATR Training Centre .000 to 25. The valve is directly controlled by the electro-pneumatic outflow valve when the system works in AUTO mode.1600 from 20.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Filter and check valve description Page 182/ 205 Filter and check valve description V2194 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Check valves are fitted on the pneumatic system to ensure that the air flow is limited to one direction.ATR Training Centre . The check valves are located on the jet pump air ducts. The filter removes nicotine and dust before it enters the diaphragm chamber.ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Filter and check valve description Page 183/ 205 The filter is fixed on the electro-pneumatic outflow valve. V2194 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 21 Manual controller description Page 184/ 205 Manual controller description V2195 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 21 Î Î Î Î Manual controller description Page 185/ 205 The manual controller is located on the centre instrument panel.500 ft / min (decrease cab alt). must rotate the manual controller knob until the desired rate value. selected by means of a knob. Î An orange mark on the manual controller indicates that it is not is the NORM position (green mark).1. This reference pressure is generated by a combination of cabin pressure and vacuum from the jet pump. Its control knob is used to select any cabin rate of change from .500 ft / min (increase cab alt) to 2. The manual controller modulates the reference pressure to the pneumatic outflow valve to control the rate of change of cabin pressure. Î The manual controller delivers a reference pressure for the pneumatic outflow valve operation. V2195 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . The manual controller function positions are not graduated and the pilot. while watching the cabin altitude rate of change.

ATA 21 Cabin pressure indicator description Page 186/ 205 Cabin pressure indicator description V2197 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 21 Cabin pressure indicator description Page 187/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V2197 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 V2197 Cabin pressure indicator description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 188/ 205 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

differential pressure between cabin and exterior (DIFF). Î It receives information from : ♦ ♦ Air Data Computer (aircraft altitude). Î With this data. Î The cabin pressure indicator has three dials and relevant pointers which indicate : ♦ ♦ ♦ standard cabin altitude (ALT). the cabin pressure indicator computes the three values and controls three potentiometer motors to move the pointers.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 Cabin pressure indicator description Page 189/ 205 Î The cabin pressure indicator is located on the centre instrument panel. cabin altitude rate of change (RATE).6 . Î It is supplied with 28VDC from the EMER BUS and works in both AUTO and MAN mode. an internal pressure transducer (cabin altitude). V2197 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 21 System controls and indicators Page 190/ 205 System controls and indicators V21A1 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

<8> Selects the compartment where temperature check is desired. Manual override is accomplished by selecting FULL OPEN or FULL CLOSED in emergency procedures. the fan is off and the OFF light is illuminated. OVBD valve full open. <10> This pushbutton controls the position of the right or left pack valve. It is not inhibited in manual mode.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.P. <5> These selectors increase or decrease the air temperature in the flight compartment and in the cabin.ATR Training Centre . U/F valve open.6 . Duct temperature is limited to 88°C by pneumatic temp limiter. AIR light in C. Valve auto closed. <14> FAULT illuminated when OVBD valve in disagreement with OVBD valve Switch position and during valve transition. either in the automatic or manual mode. When the pack valve pushbutton is on. OVBD valve partially open. horn activated on ground when electrical external power is used. Air / ground.A. With the recirculation fan pushbutton released (out).) V21A1 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <2> This pushbutton controls the recirculation fan. OVBD valve closed. HIGH : 30 PSI (pack valve). <6> This pushbutton selects the high flow operation of the pack valve.). Differential pressure must be check prior to switch it in full open position (max Δp = 1 PSI. <11> NORM : ♦ ♦ On ground with ENG1 off Æ extract fan on. compartment temperature knob directly controls temperature control valve. If MAN is illuminated. U/F valve closed. <13> OVBD : extract fan off. the pack valve is open if electrical supply and air pressure are available. <15> NORM position = Automatic. <4> This pushbutton enables the selection of AUTO or MAN mode temperature regulation. U/F valve closed. NORM : 22 PSI. pushbutton must be set to OFF. The OFF light is illuminated when pushbutton is released. <12> FAULT : fan failure or overheat (fan inhibited for 120s after every engine start. No auto power supply cut-off.ATA 21 System controls and indicators Page 191/ 205 <1> FAULT : ♦ ♦ Fan low speed or motor overheat. <9> FAULT : pack valve position disagreement with pushbutton or pack OVHT temperature > 204°C. ENG1 onÆ extract fan on. <3> The OVHT amber light indicates an overtemperature in the supply duct if the air temperature is over 92°C. or for tests. <7> This dual indicator continuously monitors the air temperature in compartments.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 192/ 205 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 21 V21A1 System controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .

55 bar).000ft and 15. all digits are extinguished.500ft/min and -2.ATR Training Centre . yellow arc between 6 PSI (0. V21A1 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <8> This knob selects any cabin rate of change between --1. <10> This switch completely closes the outflow valves. <4> The display shows the landing elevation setting.07 bar) and -0. <2> The pointer displays cabin altitude rate of change between -1. <12> This pushbutton controls cabin emergency depressurization. master CAUTION flashes. red arc between -1 PSI (-0.500ft to 15.55 bar). "AIR" on CAP illuminates and a single chime is heard. <3> The pointer displays cabin/outside differential pressure from 1 PSI (-0.750ft and 10.000ft. red arc between 10.07 bar) to 8 PSI (0.44 bar) and 8 PSI (0.000ft.3 PSI (-0. NORM : AUTO mode selection. Displays alternatively 18. as long as the test pushbutton is pressed.System controls and indicators ATA 21 Page 193/ 205 <1> The pointer displays cabin altitude from -1. ON (guarded) : both outflow valves fully open in AUTO mode only. ♦ ♦ yellow arc between 6.44 bar).500ft/mn thru +2. When it is pressed in. With pushbutton released (out) the pressurization system operates in AUTO mode and the MAN light is extinguished. the ON light illuminates on the switch indicating the ditching mode.000ft.02 bar) and between 6.500ft/min in manual mode.35 PSI (0.500ft/min.04 bar). <11> FAULT illuminates in case of digital controller failure and/or input power loss.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.41 bar) and 6.800. FAULT appears on MAN pushbutton. <5> This knob selects the elevation of the planned destination airport shown by the landing elevation display. <7> This button tests the pressurization system.6 .800 and -8. <6> Descent rate increased from -400 to -500 ft/min when FAST selected. At the same time. ♦ ♦ ♦ white arc between 0 PSI and 0. <9> This switch selects the operating mode of the pressurization system.5 PSI (0.35 PSI (0. In case of failure of the automatic system.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 194/ 205 ACOS v1.ATA 21 V21A1 System controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

master WARNING flashing and continuous repetitive chime.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Pack valve disagreement. AUTO Press FAULT.ATA 21 System controls and indicators Page 195/ 205 <1> If the differential pressure exceeds 6.ATR Training Centre . OVBD valve position disagreement. V21A1 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Overpressure > 80 PSI. Pack overheat temp > 204°C. an internal switch triggers : ♦ ♦ red EXCESS CAB Δp illuminated on C. with temp > 92°C.A. <2> If cabin pressure altitude exceeds 10. X VALVE disagreement. <3> ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Bleed valve disagreement with selected position. Bleed DUCT temp > 274°C. Fan (extract or recirculation) failure.. Bleed air LEAK detected.P.000ft. master WARNING flashing and continuous repetitive chime. an internal switch triggers : ♦ ♦ red EXCESS CAB ALT illuminated on CAP.6 . Overtemperature in Air Conditioning DUCT.35 PSI. DITCH "ON" activating condition.

V21A8 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . NO MORE FAILURE RECORDED Î Select NORM FLT position.ATA 21 MFC reading memory Page 196/ 205 MFC reading memory Î Select MISC 1 position. Î Push on the PTA/ERS pushbutton.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. LEFT PACK VALVE OVERHEAT Î Push on the PTA/ERS pushbutton.

ATA 21 MFC reading memory Page 197/ 205 This page intentionally left blank V21A8 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 21 Auto-pressure controller test Page 198/ 205 Auto-pressure controller test V21B1 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 . 3 FL1 ADS / ADC1 on 21VU panel. 4 FL2 ADS / F/O INST / ALTM on 21VU panel. Î 3 .ATR Training Centre . release the 9HB and 10HB pack valve pushbuttons.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Push the auto-pressure controller TEST button and verify that the digital controller window displays alternatively the values 18800 and -8800.On 22VU panel. Î 4 .Energize the aircraft DC and AC constant frequency network.Make certain that the following circuit breakers are closed : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ 1 HM CAB PRESS / AUTO PRESS on 121VU panel. 3 FL2 ADS / ADC2 on 21VU panel. V21B1 Copyright © 2001-2008 . FAULT light illuminates amber on MAN pushbutton and AIR illuminates amber on Crew Alerting Panel. 4 FL1 ADS / CAPT INST / ALTM on 21VU panel. Î 2 .ATA 21 Auto-pressure controller test Page 199/ 205 Î TASK DESCRIPTION : Î 1 .

ATA 21 Fuselage pressurization leak test Page 200/ 205 Fuselage pressurization leak test V21B2 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

On 4VU panel. Î Rotate the manual control knob to obtain Vz CAB = -500ft/mn and verify on triple indicator that differential pressure increases and cabin altitude decreases. On 22VU panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. On 402VU panel. Î On 4VU panel. press L and R pack valve pushbuttons and verify that OFF legend goes off. If not.000ft/mn. Î Release ENG 2 BLEED pushbutton and verify that OFF legend goes on. On 22VU panel. perform the following steps : ♦ ♦ ♦ select manual control knob to MAN position. set the manual pressurization control knob to manual position. place OVBD valve selector in AUTO position.500 and 3. position manual control knob on green band stop.ATA 21 Fuselage pressurization leak test Page 201/ 205 Î A/C configuration : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Î Î A/C in the run-up area. Î When differential pressure reaches the value 0. Verify on triple indicator that Vz CAB is between 1. position the manual control knob on max deacrease. on 22VU panel. place OVBD valve selector in fully closed position. Î Release L and R pack valve pushbuttons and verify that OFF legends go on and FAULT legends goes off. Î The time necessary for the A/C pressure to fall from 2 PSI to 1 PSI has to be more than 105 seconds. V21B2 Copyright © 2001-2008 . On 22VU panel. rotate manual control knob to obtain Vz CAB = 0. check for leaks around doors and in other areas of the fuselage. A few minutes later.ATR Training Centre . engines running. the triple indicator rate of change (Vz CAB) shows a value between -800 and -1. On 4VU panel. When differential pressure reaches 2 PSI. Verify that the cabin altitude increases and that the differential pressure decreases. push the test button on digital controller and verify that landing elevation alternatively shows 18800 and -8800. press ENG 2 BLEED pushbutton and verify that OFF legend goes off and X VALVE OPEN legend comes on. Î Select manual control knob to max increase.6 . FAULT legend goes off and X VALVE OPEN legend goes off.300ft/mn. release the modes selector pushbutton and verify that the MAN legend on pushbutton illuminates and no data is shown on digital controller display. all doors closed. press mode selector pushbutton and verify that MAN legend goes off and landing elevation shows previous settings. qualified staff only.

Summary ATA 21 Page 202/ 205 ATA 21 AIR CONDITIONING V21B2 General description 2 Cockpit panels 3 Interfaces 4 Features 5 Air conditioning safety precaution 8 Air conditioning system description 10 Compression system description 12 Compression system operation 16 Pack valve description 18 Service pressure and regulating valve description 22 Service pressure and regulating valve operation 24 Cooling system description 25 Cooling system operation 30 Dual heat exchanger description 38 Air cycle machine description 40 Pack overheat switch description 44 Condenser description 46 Water extractor description 48 Water spray nozzle description 52 Turbine temperature inlet control valve description 54 Additional de-icing pressure switch description 56 Ground cooling turbo-fan description 58 Turbo-fan shut-off valve description 62 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 21 V21B2 Page 203/ 205 Turbo-fan pressure switch description 64 Air temperature control system description 66 Air temperature control system operation 70 Temperature control valve description 76 Hot bypass valve description 78 Compartment temperature controller description 80 Flight compartment and cabin ambient temperature sensors description 84 Duct temperature sensors description 88 Skin temperature sensors description 90 Duct over temperature switch description 92 Duct temperature limiter sensor description 94 Cabin temperature ventilation fan description 96 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution system description 98 Flight compartment and cabin air distribution operation 102 Mixing chambers desription 104 Groud cart connection description 106 Recirculation fans description 108 Cabin foot lever temperature switch description 112 Cabin air distribution duct description 114 Flight compartment air distribution duct description 116 Individual air distribution system description 118 Individual air distribution duct description 120 Individual air outlet description 122 Ventilation system description 124 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .Summary ATA 21 V21B2 Page 204/ 205 Electronics racks and cabin air extraction system operation 132 Air extraction fan description 136 Overboard ventilation valve description 140 Underfloor ventilation valve description 144 Extract air flow lever 146 Ambient temperature sensor description 148 Battery ventilation system description 150 Battery ventilation system operation 152 Lavatory ventilation system description 153 Lavatory ventilation operation 154 Air supply duct and outlets description 156 Evacuation duct description 158 Pressurization description 160 Pressurization operation 164 Automatic pressure controller description 168 Jet pump description 172 Electro-pneumatic outflow valve description 174 Pneumatic outflow valve description 178 Filter and check valve description 182 Manual controller description 184 Cabin pressure indicator description 186 System controls and indicators 190 MFC reading memory 196 Auto-pressure controller test 198 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .Summary ATA 21 Fuselage pressurization leak test V21B2 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 205/ 205 200 ACOS v1.

6 ATA 22 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

6 .General description ATA 22 Page 2/ 85 General description Î The aicraft is equipped with an Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) which ensures three functions: ♦ ♦ ♦ Autopilot (AP). V2201 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Autopilot (AP) ♦ ♦ ♦ The Autopilot system controls the pitch. Yaw Damper / turn coordination (YD). roll and yaw actuators as well as the elevator trim actuators (autotrim). It also flies any Flight Director active mode (AP / FD function) except Go-Around which must be flown manually.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . It stabilizes the aircraft around its center of gravity while holding pitch attitude and heading (basic mode). Flight Director (FD).

ATR Training Centre .6 . When autopilot is engaged it follows the FD bars commands automatically. ♦ ♦ The Yaw Damper ensure yaw damping and turn coordination through the rudder control linkage.ATA 22 General description Page 3/ 85 Î Flight Director (FD) ♦ ♦ The Flight Director provides command bars on the EADIs for manual flying. Autopilot engagement automatically engages the Yaw Damper. Î Yaw Damper / turn coordination (YD).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2201 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 4/ 85 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 V2201 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre . and one Advisory Display Unit (ADU). MKR). through the ASCB. Î Both SGUs receive analog signals coming from their associated NAV Sensors (VOR. two Symbol Generator Units (SGU). one control panel. This data is then transfered to the AFCS computer through the ASCB.ATA 22 General description Page 5/ 85 Î Main components are: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ one computer (Auto Flight Control System Computer ). one Advisory Display Unit (ADU).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The computer exchanges data with: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ two Air Data Computers (ADC). two Attitudes and Heading Reference Systems (AHRS).6 . Î This means that communications between the components are digital. continuous and multidirectional. V2201 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ILS. three servo-actuators (one for each axis).

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 Cockpit panels Page 6/ 85 Cockpit panels V2202 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 7/ 85 ACOS v1.ATA 22 V2202 Cockpit panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 Interfaces Page 8/ 85 Interfaces V2203 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 Features Page 9/ 85 Features V2204 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 10/ 85 ACOS v1.ATA 22 V2204 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 22 V2204 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 11/ 85 ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 22 V2204 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 85 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 85 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 V2204 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 Safety and precautions Page 14/ 85 Safety and precautions V2205 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

These functions are available in AP and FD as well.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Flying the aircraft on an acquired flight path ("upper hold modes"). available in AP function only).ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions description Page 15/ 85 Autopilot & flight director functions description Î The functions performed by the AP / FD are as follows: ♦ ♦ ♦ Stabilizing the aircraft around its center of gravity while holding pitch attitude and heading (basic mode. V2206 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Automatic pitch trim function (autotrim).ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 . roll and yaw actuators.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. as well as the elevator trim actuators. V2206 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions description Page 16/ 85 Î The AutoPilot system controls the pitch.

ATR Training Centre . V2206 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions description Page 17/ 85 Î AP engagement automatically engages the Yaw Damper (YD) which is the third AP axis and controls the yaw actuator.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions description Page 18/ 85 Î When a FD mode is active.6 .ATR Training Centre . V2206 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the AP automatically follows the guidance given by all FD active modes. except the GO AROUND mode.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions description Page 19/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2206 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions operation Page 20/ 85 Autopilot & flight director functions operation V2207 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

The AP pushbutton engages the AP and YD functions simultaneously. The YD pusbutton engages the YD only.ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions operation Page 21/ 85 Î AP engagement activates: ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î pitch and roll actuator. yaw actuator if not previously engaged. ♦ Display of the green AP ENG message on the EADIs. if no FD mode has been previously selected Î Pitch attitude is held and the aircraft holds bank angle or heading. the autopilot progressively maneuvers the aircraft to satisfy the selected mode.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. AP engagement is indicated by: ♦ Illumination of the arrows on both sides of the AP and YD pushbuttons on the AFCS control panel . AP and YD engagement is inhibited on ground.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î If a FD mode is active before AP engagement. Î When AP is engaged the autopilot operates in BASIC MODE. V2207 Copyright © 2001-2008 . autotrim function on the pitch axis. depending on initial angle of bank.

using the normal pitch trim on either control wheels.ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions operation Page 22/ 85 Î Manual AP disengagement is achieved by: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ pressing AP or YD pushbutton on the AFCS control panel.6 . pressing GA pushbutton on either Power Levers. using the standby pitch trim. pressing quick disconnect pushbutton on either control wheels.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. applying a force greater than 10 DaN (22 Lbs) on control column in pitch axis. applying a force greater than 30 DaN (66 Lbs) on the rudder pedals. V2207 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

stall warning threshold is reached.6 .ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions operation Page 23/ 85 Î Automatic disengagement occurs when: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ one of the engagement conditions of the AP and / or YD is no longer met. there is a disagreement between the two AHRS's or between the two ADC's.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V2207 Copyright © 2001-2008 . there is a mismatch between the two pitch trims.

Pushing the RESET pushbutton has the same effect.ATR Training Centre . Î Pressing the quick disconnect pushbutton one more time turns off aural and visual alert. In case of YD disengagement both AP and YD arrows are no longer illuminated. ♦ arrows on both sides of the AP pusbutton on the AFCS control panel are not illuminated. ♦ the AP OFF warning lights comes on.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. on the glareshield. (A flashing message means that the autopilot has been disengaged by the AFCS. ♦ a “cavalry charge” aural signal is broadcast.ATA 22 Autopilot & flight director functions operation Page 24/ 85 Î AP disengagement is indicated by: ♦ Display of the amber steady AP / YD disengaged or Autopilot disengaged message on the ADU. V2207 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .) ♦ the RESET pusbutton illuminates amber.

the corresponding command bar is removed. Î The FD commands are satisfied when the FD bars remain centered on the EADI.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2208 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 22 Flight director functions description Page 25/ 85 Flight director functions description Î The purpose of the Flight Director (FD) is to provide information to the pilot through the command bars on the EADI to enable manual vertical and lateral guidance of the aircraft. Î In addition the two bars can be removed by setting the FD BARS selection switch to OFF (located on the glareshied in front of each pilot). If no vertical and / or lateral active mode is selected. It does not disengage the FD modes. ♦ It provides a Pitch command if a vertical mode is engaged .6 . ♦ It provides a Roll command if a lateral mode is engaged.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 26/ 85 ACOS v1.ATA 22 V2208 Flight director functions description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.APP: lateral (LOC) and vertical (GLIDE) guidance for ILS approach.6 . .ATR Training Centre .ALT. .NAV: Navigation mode. .HDG: Heading selected mode.BC: Back Course localizer. .GA: lateral and vertical guidance for initial Go Around.IAS. . ♦ The Common modes are: . which are Air data modes ♦ The Lateral modes are: .VS. .ATA 22 Flight director functions description Page 27/ 85 Î The available modes are the following : ♦ The Vertical modes are: .ALT SEL. V2208 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 . The AP yaw actuator is installed in parallel on the flight controls. YD engagement controls the clutch of the yaw servo actuator and disengages the Releasable Centering Unit. The YD can be engaged using the YD pushbutton on the AFCS control panel. the rudder pedals follow the YD commands.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Therefore when the YD is engaged. YD is then the third AP axis.ATR Training Centre . The YD is also automatically engaged by pressing the AP pushbutton.ATA 22 Yaw damper function description Page 28/ 85 Yaw damper function description Î Î Î Î Î The Yaw Damper (YD) ensures yaw damping and turn coordination through the rudder control linkage by means of the yaw damper actuator. V2210 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2212 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The electric trim normal control is inhibited and the actuator control inputs are fed with the AFCS computer autotrim output.ATA 22 Auto trim function description Page 29/ 85 Auto trim function description Î When the AP is engaged the AFCS computer controls.6 .ATR Training Centre . through the normal pitch trim. the elevator trim actuators in order to reduce permanent loads on the pitch actuator and thus avoid jerks on the elevator in the event of AP disconnection.

De-activates the pitch autotrim control (the pitch trim normal control is then available).6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The Touch Control Steering (TCS) allows temporary manual control of the aircraft by overriding AP / FD function. Î In AP the TCS: ♦ ♦ Enables the crew to control the pitch and roll axes by declutching the pitch and roll actuators. Î This function is achieved by depressing the TCS pushbutton located on each control wheel and is activated until the pushbutton is released.ATA 22 Touch control steering function description Page 30/ 85 Touch control steering function description Î The AP is provided with a TCS function.ATR Training Centre . V2214 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î With the TCS pushbutton depressed the aircraft can be manoeuvered to a different bank angle which will be maintained when the pushbutton is released if within the operating limits of a > 6° and a < 35°.ATA 22 Touch control steering function description Page 31/ 85 Î When the AP is engaged in basic mode the wings are maintened at level off by the heading hold mode. Î The Bank angle can be changed in this mode using the TCS pushbutton. V2214 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î There is no annunciator for the Bank Hold mode on the ADU.6 .

the AFCS computer produces control signals based on average data received from both ADC and AHRS systems. the AFCS computer receives captain's or first officer's SGU and ADC data. if one AHRU fails. the AFCS computer automatically selects the remaining valid data for computation and a corresponding message is displayed on the ADU. For instance. except GLIDESLOPE are not cancelled. "AHRS DATA INVALID" is displayed on line two of the ADU. Lateral NAV modes must be reselected. all lateral flight director modes except HDG are cancelled.ATR Training Centre . Î For lateral and vertical guidance computations. Î The vertical modes. Î At power-up the AFCS computer selects automatically the Captain's SGU and ADC data.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 Coupling function description Page 32/ 85 Coupling function description Î For basic attitude control. Î Whenever invalid data from one sensor is detected. depending on coupling selection. V2216 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Î When the system is transfered to the alternate SGU.

Î The CPL status is repeated on the EADI's by a green arrow.Coupling function description ATA 22 Page 33/ 85 Î Selection of the coupled side is achieved by pressing the CPL pushbutton located on the AFCS Control Panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V2216 Copyright © 2001-2008 . and indicated by illumination of the adjacent arrow light showing the selected side.6 .

Note: The DUAL CPL function is mandatory for CAT II operations.ATA 22 Coupling function description Page 34/ 85 Î During the tracking phase of an ILS approach.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. side selection will be inhibited after automatic transition to DUAL CPL when radio altitude is below 1200 feet AGL.ATR Training Centre . V2216 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The dual coupling mode couples both NAV receivers to the AFCS computer which averages the data for guidance computation.6 . Î Î Î Î The AFCS then uses the ILS information delivered by the two receivers for guidance. After any disengagement of the approach mode in DUAL CPL phase. the side selected prior to DUAL CPL phase remains.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 22 Coupling function description Page 35/ 85 Î In DUAL coupling phase both arrows are on.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The DUAL coupling status is repeated on the EADI's by a green double-headed arrow. V2216 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2218 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 22 Bank function description & operation Page 36/ 85 Bank function description & operation Î This function enables selection of the bank angle limit ( high or low value).6 . a low bank angle limit (15°).ATR Training Centre . Î Selection of either value is made by using the BANK pushbutton on the AFCS control panel. Î Alternate action on the pushbutton causes alternate selection of: ♦ ♦ a high bank angle limit (27°). in the HDG SEL mode only.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 22 Bank function description & operation Page 37/ 85 Î The selected value is shown by the following messages displayed on the fourth line of the ADU: ♦ ♦ HDG SEL HI. V2218 Copyright © 2001-2008 . HDG SEL LO. Î And Heading is displayed on the EADI's. At power up the value of 27° is selected automatically.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î There are no EADI indications and only ALT SEL remains on the ADU. Î The ALT SEL mode will be re-armed automatically if the logic conditions are fulfilled.ATA 22 Standby function description & operation Page 38/ 85 Standby function description & operation Î Pushing the STBY pushbutton on the AFCS control panel cancels all previous armed and active modes on both axes. Î If the AP was engaged this action causes return to AP basic modes. and also FD bars if they are displayed.ATR Training Centre .6 . V2219 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 Standby function description & operation Page 39/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2219 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 AFCS computer description & location Page 40/ 85 AFCS computer description & location V2220 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 AFCS computer description & location Page 41/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2220 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 42/ 85 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 V2220 AFCS computer description & location Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. this failure results in limited down-grading which does not affect the flight safety . "fail safe" which means in case of a failure occuring on a single sensor.6 . V2220 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 22 AFCS computer description & location Page 43/ 85 Î The AFCS computer is located in the LH electronics rack (80 VU) on shelf 82VU. Î The AFCS computer is equipped with four power outputs used to control the three AP actuators and the elevator trim actuator (autotrim function). Î The AFCS computer includes arithmetic. FD: Flight Director.ATR Training Centre . amplification and monitoring units. Î The AFCS computer is: ♦ ♦ "fail passive" which means in case of a failure occuring on duplicated sensors. this failure does not result in a significant down-grading of the flight. Î It includes the following functions: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ AP: Autopilot. YD: Yaw Damper. Crosstalk management on ASCB (Avionics Standart Communications Bus).

Î When the AFCS computer receives the discrete signal from the MFCs it automatically disengages the AP function and sends a discrete signal to the CCAS V2232 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Stall function ATA 22 Page 44/ 85 Stall function Î The purpose of the stall function is to indicate: ♦ An angle of attack which leads to an IAS lower than 1.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .3 VS (V Stall).

V2232 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î AP OFF indicator illuminates red.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .Stall function ATA 22 Page 45/ 85 Î Visual and Aural signals are broadcast as follows: ♦ An "AP/YD DISENGAGED" is displayed on the ADU. Î A "CAVALRY CHARGE" alert is also broadcast to confirm AP disconnection.

Altitude alert function ATA 22 Page 46/ 85 Altitude alert function Î The purpose of the Altitude Alert function is to indicate: ♦ ♦ Approach of a selected altitude (selected by the ALT knob).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The AFCS sends a discrete signal to the CCAS for the aural warning and another discrete signal to altimeter 1 and 2 for the visual warning.6 . V2233 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Deviation with regards to this altitude when reached.

It goes out when the aircraft is within ± 250 feet of the preselected altitude.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.000 feet from the preselected altitude or has departed 250 feet from the selected altitude after capture. ♦ A "C CHORD" alert is also broadcasted when the aircraft is 1.ATR Training Centre . After capture. V2233 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .000 feet of the preselected altitude during the capture maneuver.Altitude alert function ATA 22 Page 47/ 85 Î Selected altitude is displayed on the ADU. the light illuminates if the aircraft departs more than 250 feet from the selected altitude. Î Visual and aural signal are broadcasted as followed: ♦ The altitude alert annunciator light illuminates when the aircraft is within ± 1.

6 . between 1000ft and 50ft with landing gear down. V2234 Copyright © 2001-2008 . When the Selected Decision Height is set to zero. the DH indicator disapears. This aural warning is generated by the GPWS.ATR Training Centre . the amber "DH" symbol illuminates inside the white box. When aircraft radio-altitude becomes lower than selected decision height. a white box appears near the radio altitude information on the EADI.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Visual and Aural signals are broadcast as follows: ♦ ♦ When aircraft radio-altitude reaches selected Decision Height +100ft. Î A "MINIMUMS MINIMUMS" voice alert is broadcasted when the selected decision height is reached.Decision height function ATA 22 Page 48/ 85 Decision height function Î The Selected Decision Height is displayed in feet in the left bottom part of the EADI and can be adjusted by means of the DH knob on EFIS control panel. Î Note: Maximum selectable decision height is 990 ft.

Î Moreover presence of warning messages on the ADU is indicated by an amber "AP MSG" on the EADI.ATR Training Centre . V2235 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Page 49/ 85 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Î Warning and caution messages studied in this module are all displayed in amber on line 2 of the ADU and cause the RESET light to come on.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 50/ 85 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 V2235 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Copyright © 2001-2008 .

An AP quick disconnect pushbutton is pressed.ATR Training Centre . A force greater than 10 DaN is applied on elevator control wheel. Elevator tab offset detection. A force greater than 30 DaN is applied on rudder pedals. Î AP engagement is inhibited if one of the following conditions is achieved: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ TCS pushbutton is pressed. Normal or standby pitch trim control switch is in UP or DN position. "ENGAGE INHIBIT" message is displayed for 5 seconds. GA pushbutton is pressed. an amber "NO ENGAGEMENT ON GROUND" is displayed on the ADU for 5 seconds.6 . Î YD engagement is inhibited if one of the following conditions is achieved: ♦ A force greater than 30 DaN is applied on rudder pedals. Î If an attempt to engage is made. V2235 Copyright © 2001-2008 . If an attempt to engage is made.ATA 22 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Page 51/ 85 The AFCS computer detects situations prohibiting engagement of the autopilot: Î AP/YD or YD engagement is inhibited on ground.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Stall warning detection.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 52/ 85 ACOS v1.ATA 22 V2235 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î It results in: ♦ ♦ ♦ AP DISENGAGED message on the ADU with illumination of the RESET pushbutton. V2235 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 22 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Page 53/ 85 Î Let's now see the five conditions which enable the AP to be disengaged automatically: ♦ ♦ ♦ The Autopilot disengages automatically in case of loss of one AP engagement hold logic condition. Î Note: FD is not affected by AP disengagement.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The Autopilot disengages automatically in case of loss of one YD engagement hold logic condition.3 VS.6 .ATR Training Centre . A "CAVALRY CHARGE" audio signal. Illumination of the AP OFF indicators. The Autopilot disengages automatically in case of IAS < 1.

ATA 22 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Page 54/ 85 Î It results in: ♦ ♦ ♦ AP DISENGAGED message on the ADU with illumination of the RESET pushbutton. V2235 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Push the YD pushbutton. Î Note: FD is not affected by AP disengagement.6 .ATR Training Centre . A "CAVALRY CHARGE" audio signal. Illumination of the AP OFF indicators. Î The Autopilot is disengaged manually by action on the YD pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î The Autopilot is disengaged manually by action on the AP quick disconnect pushbutton.ATR Training Centre . Î Note: FD is not affected by AP disengagement. Push the AP quick disconnect pushbutton. Illumination of the AP OFF indicators. A "CAVALRY CHARGE" audio signal.ATA 22 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Page 55/ 85 Î It results in: ♦ ♦ ♦ AP / YD DISENGAGED message on the ADU with illumination of the RESET pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V2235 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Push the GO-AROUND pushbutton.ATA 22 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Page 56/ 85 Î The Autopilot is disengaged manually by action on the GO-AROUND pushbutton. V2235 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre . Illumination of the AP OFF indicators. A "CAVALRY CHARGE" audio signal. Î Note: All previous armed or active modes (except ALT SEL) are cancelled.6 . V2235 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. GO-AROUND becomes an FD active mode.ATA 22 AP / YD engagement & disengagement Page 57/ 85 Î It results in: ♦ ♦ ♦ AP DISENGAGED message on the ADU with illumination of the RESET pushbutton.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 58/ 85 System controls and indicators V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

<9> APP pushbutton: ♦ The APP pushbutton arms the vertical and lateral guidance for capture of the selected course and glide slope on the coupled EHSI.ATR Training Centre . <10> BC: ♦ The BC pushbutton arms the lateral guidance for capture of the localizer Back Course selected on the coupled EHSI. The second line gives caution messages in amber letters. The fourth line shows active modes in green letters. The third line shows armed modes in white letters. <11> BANK pushbutton: ♦ The BANK pushbutton controls the bank angle limit during the heading hold mode only. <7> HDG pushbutton: ♦ The HDG pushbutton controls selection of heading hold mode. <13> IAS pushbutton: V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the heading which is used as a reference by the AFCS computer.ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 59/ 85 <1> Display: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ The first line gives advisory messages in white letters. <6> HDG knob ♦ The HDG knob selects on both EHSIs. <2> Reset pushbutton: ♦ This pushbutton is used to cancel a caution message or to confirm an AFCS automatic choice. <12> STBY pushbutton ♦ The STBY pushbutton cancels all previously armed and active modes and reverts the autopilot to basic mode. <5> CRS1 knob: ♦ The CRS1 knob selects course on the captain EHSI.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <4> BRT knob ♦ The BRT knob is used to adjust ADU brilliance. <8> NAV pushbutton: ♦ The NAV pushbutton arms the lateral guidance for capture of the course selected on the coupled EHSI.6 . <3> L SEL — R SEL pushbutton: ♦ These pushbuttons are used in AP ground maintenance test.

At power up. <16> AP pushbutton: ♦ The AP pushbutton engages the autopilot and Yaw Damper functions simultaneously.6 .ATA 22 ♦ System controls and indicators Page 60/ 85 The IAS pushbutton activates the vertical guidance to maintain the airspeed indicated by the coupled ADC at the time of the selection. and also change the reference values for airspeed and vertical speed hold modes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <14> VS pushbutton: ♦ The VS pushbutton activates the vertical guidance to maintain the vertical speed indicated by the coupled ADC at the time of the selection. V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 . All four associated arrows illuminate white. <20> CRS2 knob: ♦ The CR2 knob selects course on the F/O EHSI. Both associated arrows illuminate white. <21> Pitch thumb wheel The pitch wheel is used to facilitate pitch adjustments during basic pitch hold mode. <18> CPL pushbutton: ♦ The CPL pushbutton enables selection of the panel (CAPT or F/O) to be coupled to the AFCS computer. <19> ALT knob: ♦ The ALT knob controls the preselected altitude which is shown on the ADU.. <17> YD pushbutton: ♦ The YD pushbutton engages the yaw damper function. A repeated action on the pushbutton disengages only the autopilot function.ATR Training Centre . A repeated action on the pushbutton disengages the Yaw Damper function (and the autopilot if engaged). <15> ALT pushbutton: ♦ The ALT pushbutton activates the vertical guidance to maintain the altitude indicated by the coupled ADC at the time of the selection. selected side is CAPT side.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 61/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 62/ 85 For more details. V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <3> FD BARS switch: ♦ The FD BARS switch located on each side of the glareshield selects FD command bars on respective EADI. click on a button or an indicating light.ATR Training Centre . <2> GUIDANCE light (if installed): ♦ The GUIDANCE light annunciator illuminates amber if CAT II conditions are lost or if an excess deviation is detected. <1> AP OFF light: ♦ The AP OFF annunciators illuminate red when the autopilot is disengaged and are cancelled by pushing either AP disconnect pushbutton or ADU RESET pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 63/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 64/ 85 ACOS v1.ATA 22 V2236 System controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

<1> AFCS NORM FLT / TEST toggle switch: ♦ The AFCS NORM FLT / TEST switch. <3> AP quick disconnect pushbutton: ♦ The AP quick disconnect pushbutton disconnects AP when depressed once. For more details.System controls and indicators ATA 22 Page 65/ 85 For more details. the ground maintenance test mode should be entered after landing. located on the left maintenance panel tests the AFCS when the aircraft is on ground. to manually control the aircraft without disengaging the AP or cancelling FD modes.6 . click on a button or an indicating light.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . <2> Normal Pitch Trim rocker: ♦ Actuation of the Normal Pitch Trim rocker when the AP is engaged will disconnect AP. in order to retrieve the FLIGHT FAULT SUMMARY data. If an AFCS failure occurs in flight. Cancels all previous FD mode. When depressed again. Î Moreover the FD generates a pitch attitude compatible with single engine performance and flap setting at Go.Around selection and the lateral bar gives a heading hold command. click on a button or an indicating light. when depressed. <5> Go-Around pusbuttons: Actuation of the Go-Around pushbuttons located at the outboard end of each Power Lever grip: ♦ ♦ Disengages the Autopilot. <4> Touch Control Steering pushbutton: ♦ The TCS pushbutton located on the forward face of each control wheel allows. it clears AP OFF alert indication. and before removing avionics power.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 66/ 85 ACOS v1.ATA 22 V2236 System controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .

<11> Course deviation bar: ♦ The Course deviation bar displays in yellow deviation relative to the course pointer. V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 67/ 85 For more details.ATR Training Centre . Heading error between actual heading and selected heading is sent to the FD. <7> AP MSG annunciator: ♦ The AP MSG annunciator illuminates amber to indicate that a caution message can be read on the ADU. If no caution message is displayed and the autopilot is engaged. the indication is followed by a star while capture of an armed mode is in progress. GS. the indication is followed by a star while capture of an armed mode is in progress. Available vertical armed modes are ALT. GS.6 . LOC. <9> Selected heading bug annunciator: ♦ The Selected heading blue bug annunciator is positioned around the rotating heading dial by the remote HDG knob. LOC. IAS. Selected course is also displayed digitally in yellow numbers associated with white CRS letters. Available vertical active modes are VS. <5> Vertical armed mode annunciator: ♦ The Vertical armed mode annunciator displays in white the vertical AFCS armed mode. <1> Flight Director Command bars: ♦ The Flight Director Command bars display in magenta computed commands to capture and maintain a desired flight path. <8> CPL status annunciator: ♦ The CPL status annunciator indicates which SGU and ADC (left or right) data are coupled to the AFCS computer.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The scale is marked by dots. Available lateral active modes are VOR. ALT. <6> Vertical active mode annunciator: ♦ The Vertical armed mode annunciator displays in green the vertical AFCS armed mode. <10> Course pointer annunciator: ♦ The Course pointer annunciator displays in yellow the course which is selected for the respective VOR/ILS. the annunciator extinguishes when this mode is captured. The star disappears when capture is achieved. Selected heading is also displayed digitally in blue. the annunciator extinguishes when this mode is captured. <3> Lateral active mode annunciator: ♦ The Lateral active mode annunciator displays in green the lateral AFCS armed mode. <4> Transition box : ♦ The transition box is displayed in white around the green active mode annunciator for the first five seconds of capture of an armed mode. The aircraft symbol provides the position relative to the intended route. HDG. <2> Lateral armed mode annunciator: ♦ The Lateral armed mode annunciator displays in white the lateral AFCS armed mode. BC. click on a button or an indicating light. GA (FD only). a green “AP ENG” message is displayed. BC. The star disappears when capture is achieved. Each pointer is controlled by its associated CRS knob. Available lateral armed modes are VOR.

ATR Training Centre . <15> The selected decision height displayed in feet can be adjusted by means of the DH knob on EFIS control panel. Index and scale are visible only when an ILS frequency is selected on the related NAV control box. V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <13> STBY PITCH TRIM switch: ♦ The STBY PITCH TRIM switch disengages the Autopilot if it was previously engaged.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <14> The radio altimeter indication is displayed in feet.ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 68/ 85 <12> Glideslope annunciator: ♦ The Glideslope annunciator is indicated by a green index on a white scale which is marked by dots.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 System controls and indicators Page 69/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2236 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Put the AFCS NORM / FLT / TEST switch in TEST position.ATA 22 AFCS ground maintenance test Page 70/ 85 AFCS ground maintenance test Î On ground. the user may be asked to perform certain tasks in the cockpit or answer questions. Î To activate the test you must put the AFCS NORM / FLT / TEST switch in TEST position and be sure that aircraft is on ground and that airspeed is less than 50 kts. the maintenance team can localize failed systems by using ground maintenance test of specific LRUs. Î During execution of LRU test. V2238 Copyright © 2001-2008 . once engine shutdown. the ADU displays "01 FGC TEST?" and becomes the interface to test LRUs.ATR Training Centre . Î When the test is initiated.6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 AFCS ground maintenance test Page 71/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2238 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 72/ 85 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 22 V2238 AFCS ground maintenance test Copyright © 2001-2008 .

By pressing R SEL and L SEL pushbuttons on the ADU. you are able to select an LRU test.6 .ATA 22 AFCS ground maintenance test Page 73/ 85 Î By pressing R SEL and L SEL pushbuttons on the ADU. Î The AFCS system has built-in diagnostics that are used to determine the cause of in-flight automatic flight control system failures. The ground maintenance test is started and the ADU displays "01 FGC TEST?".All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î If an AFCS failure occurs in flight. you are able to select an LRU test. in the following vertical test menu. V2238 Copyright © 2001-2008 . in the following vertical test menu. the ground maintenance test mode must be achieved after landing and before avionics power is removed in order to retrieve FLIGHT FAULT SUMMARY data. Î Î Î Î Let's now have a look at the FLIGHT FAULT SUMMARY. Push twice the L SEL pushbutton to go back to the FLIGHT FAULT SUMMARY test.ATR Training Centre . It is the FLIGHT FAULT SUMMARY.

If a fault occurs.ATR Training Centre . The FLIGHT FAULT SUMMARY is a collection of fault data words that are displayed in hexadecimal format coded on 16 bit on the ADU.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î The translation of the fault codes can be achieved by using the AFCS manufacturer description and operation manual. On the screen shown here no failures have been registered. V2238 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Push the RESET pushbutton to enter test. lines of zero are replaced by characters comprised between 1 and F in hexadecimal value.AFCS ground maintenance test ATA 22 Î Î Î Î Page 74/ 85 Pushing the RESET pushbutton allows you to access to the FLIGHT FAULT SUMMARY of the last leg.

6 . Î During execution of LRU test. Î To activate the test you must put the AFCS NORM / FLT / TEST switch in TEST position and be sure that aircraft is on ground and that airspeed is less than 50 kts.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 22 Operational test of AFCS computer Page 75/ 85 Operational test of AFCS computer Î On ground. Î Put the AFCS NORM / FLT / TEST switch in TEST position. V2239 Copyright © 2001-2008 . once engine shutdown. the user may be asked to perform certain tasks in the cockpit or answer questions. the maintenance team can localize failed systems by using ground maintenance test of specific LRUs. the ADU displays "01 FGC TEST?" and becomes the interface to test LRUs.ATR Training Centre . Î When the test is initiated.

Î By pressing R SEL and L SEL pushbuttons on the ADU. Î Push twice the R SEL pushbutton to go to the ADVISORY DSPLY TEST.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. in the following vertical test menu.ATA 22 Operational test of AFCS computer Page 76/ 85 Î Let's now have a look at the ADVISORY DSPLY TEST. V2239 Copyright © 2001-2008 . you are able to select an LRU test.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 22 Operational test of AFCS computer Page 77/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2239 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 78/ 85 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 22 V2239 Operational test of AFCS computer Copyright © 2001-2008 .

press the L SEL pushbutton. Î The ADU displays on its four lines the following message which can be summed up by the sentences: "If the AP / YD DISENGAGED message is displayed on line 2.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The ADU displays on its four lines the following message which can be summed up by the sentence: "If the MSGS ON 4 LINES message is displayed on 4 lines. three and four are in the right order. Î The ADU displays on its four lines the following message which can be summed up by the sentence: "If lines one." Î Press the R SEL pushbutton to agree and continue the test.ATR Training Centre . press the RESET pushbutton. To pass the test. two. Congratulations ! The Advisory display test has been performed successfully. press the R SEL pushbutton. The next test enables to test mechanically the pushbuttons of the ADU. To pass the test." Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Press the R SEL pushbutton to agree and continue the test." "If you don't see the AP / YD DISENGAGED on line 2. V2239 Copyright © 2001-2008 . press the R SEL pushbutton." Î Press the R SEL pushbutton to agree and continue the test. To pass the test. press the R SEL pushbutton.6 . press the L SEL pushbutton. press the R SEL pushbutton. The next test enables to test mechanically the pushbuttons of the ADU. The next test enables to test mechanically the pushbuttons of the ADU.ATA 22 Operational test of AFCS computer Page 79/ 85 Î The ADU displays "03 ADVISORY DSPLY TEST ?" Î Push the RESET pushbutton to enter test.

let's check the navigation system. once engines shutdown. the maintenance team can localize the system failed with the MFC maintenance panel. Select the "NAV" position. V2240 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Î Î Î On ground. This one is initially set on the "NORM-FLT" position. For example.6 .MFC Bite test ATA 22 Page 80/ 85 MFC Bite test System studied: MFC Î As soon as a failure is recorded in the non volatile memory located in the CPU card of the MFC 1A module.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . the "BITE LOADED" magnetic indicator turns amber.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 22 MFC Bite test Page 81/ 85 This page intentionally left blank V2240 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 22 V2240 MFC Bite test Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 82/ 85 ACOS v1.

the PTA / ERS (Push To Advance) pushbutton has to be depressed in order to check the system. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. Then. The definition of this failure is given in the Job Instruction Card) or in the Flight Crew Operating Manual and is "AFCS Anomaly". By depressing once again the PTA / ERS pushbutton. 2 and 1 "F" lights illuminate amber so a failure has been memorized in the "NAV" system. This means that all the failure codes related to the selected sytem have been displayed.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The four "F" lights illuminate. V2240 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the following failure code will be displayed. MFC memory can be erased (procedure described in ATA 31 . you can either note which "F" number is illuminated (her the 8. The 8.ATA 22 MFC Bite test Page 83/ 85 System studied: MFC Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Once the system selector is set to "NAV" position.ATR Training Centre . 2 and 1 "F") or add the "F" numbers ( 8 + 2 + 1 = 11 = B hexadecimal value).INDICATING AND RECORDING chapter). To define which kind of failure is detected. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .Summary ATA 22 Page 84/ 85 ATA 22 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM V2240 General description 2 Cockpit panels 6 Interfaces 8 Features 9 Safety and precautions 14 Autopilot & flight director functions description 15 Autopilot & flight director functions operation 20 Flight director functions description 25 Yaw damper function description 28 Auto trim function description 29 Touch control steering function description 30 Coupling function description 32 Bank function description & operation 36 Standby function description & operation 38 AFCS computer description & location 40 Stall function 44 Altitude alert function 46 Decision height function 48 AP / YD engagement & disengagement 49 System controls and indicators 58 AFCS ground maintenance test 70 Operational test of AFCS computer 75 MFC Bite test 80 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 85/ 85 ACOS v1.ATA 22 V2240 Summary Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 ATA 23 COMMUNICATIONS Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 General description Page 2/ 103 General description V2301 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

V2301 Copyright © 2001-2008 . which manages all audio signals. Cockpit Voice Recorder which records all messages to and from the cockpit. Audio integrating system. Î The communications system also provides: ♦ ♦ ♦ An Emergency Locator Transmitter.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.General description ATA 23 Page 3/ 103 Î The communications system comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Radio communications between aircraft and ground stations. Aural alerts generated by the CCAS. GPWS and TCAS alerts is preset and is not adjustable.ATR Training Centre . Navigation source identifiers reception.6 . Passenger Address system (PA). Î Note that sound level for CCAS. GPWS and TCAS through the cockpit loudspeakers only.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . with separate electrical supplies. V2301 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 23 General description Page 4/ 103 Î The VHF system comprises two separate VHF sets. Î They are used for short range communications between aircraft and ground stations.

6 . V2301 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The announcements can be made from the cockpit or from the cabin attendant station.ATA 23 General description Page 5/ 103 Î The Passenger Address system is used to broadcast announcements and audio signals (chime) via the cabin and galley loudspeakers.

ATA 23 General description Page 6/ 103 Î The heart of all electronic cockpit communications is the Remote Control Audio Unit (RCAU). V2301 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The RCAU contains an electronic processor for each cockpit crew member.6 . Î Each processor integrates audio controls as selected on the respective Audio Control Panel at each cockpit crew member position.

This compares with international regulation which requires CVR to record 30 minutes. Î The CVR panel provides test and erase facilities. The CVR system is of the lastest standard and is known as Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR).General description ATA 23 Page 7/ 103 Î The Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) enables recording of conversations received and transmitted by the crew members.ATR Training Centre . announcements made to passengers as well as aural warnings.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V2301 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Recording is made in a memory with a recording capacity of 2 hours.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 Cockpit location Page 8/ 103 Cockpit location V2302 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 9/ 103 ACOS v1.ATA 23 V2302 Cockpit location Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Interfaces Page 10/ 103 Interfaces V2303 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 23 Features Page 11/ 103 Features V2304 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 V2304 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 23 V2304 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 23 V2304 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 103 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 23 V2304 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 15/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 Safety and precautions Page 16/ 103 Safety and precautions V2305 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2306 Copyright © 2001-2008 .000 to 136. Each system has its own transceiver to provide communications on 720 channels (or 760 depending on version) from 118. are provided. In case of audio control panel loss. Two antennae are installed on the fuselage.ATA 23 VHF System description Page 17/ 103 VHF System description Î Here is the VHF system block diagram. two AUDIO SEL pushbuttons select one VHF to each side. and via the Audio Integrating to the Cockpit Voice Recorder. Each VHF system is connected to the Audio Integrating and to the FDAU.975 MHz with 25 KHz spacing. one for each VHF system. Î Î Î Î Each system is controlled on the pedestal by a VHF control unit with dual frequency selection.ATR Training Centre .6 . Two systems. VHF1 and VHF2.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 VHF Operation Page 18/ 103 VHF Operation V2315 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î For example. The outer knob of the frequency selector is used to change the 3 left digits by 1 MHz increments. Select the XFR / MEM toggle switch to XFR position. Î Now click on the control wheel Push To Talk selector to transmit (or for the Captain Push To Talk on nose wheel steering or INT / RAD selector on Audio Control Panel).6 . Î When a transmission is performed. Î The two frequencies are transferred and ACT annunciator flashes amber. this indicates that the transceiver is not tuned to the frequency displayed in the active display. Î Let's display a new preset frequency. Note that if ACT annunciator continues flashing. the TX amber annunciator appears on the VHF1 control unit. V2315 Copyright © 2001-2008 . you have to transferred it to the active display.ATA 23 VHF Operation Page 19/ 103 Î When the VHF1 control unit is ON. select on the Audio Control Panel the VHF1 knob.ATR Training Centre . it displays the active and preset frequencies stored in memory when the equipment was last turned off. to use the VHF1. Î The inner knob of the frequency selector is used to change the 2 right digits by 50 KHz increments when first rotated or by 25 KHz increments for the first two increments when the direction of rotation is reversed. Now select the inner knob to change the KHz value.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. To set it active. Î You have set a new preset frequency. First rotate the outer knob to change the MHz value. Rotate the switch to the ON position.

ATA 23 VHF components Page 20/ 103 VHF components V2375 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 23 V2375 VHF components Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 21/ 103 ACOS v1.

ATA 23 V2375 VHF components Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 22/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2375 VHF components Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 23/ 103 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Passenger address description Page 24/ 103 Passenger address description V2319 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre . The cockpit announcement gets priority over cabin attendant announcements and tape reproducer. A chime is heard in the cabin: ♦ whenever passenger signs are switched on and off. aft of the cabin. V2319 Copyright © 2001-2008 . A second handset is optionally installed forward of the cabin. One cabin attendant handset is provided at the cabin attendant station. Î Î Î Î The PA system broadcasts passenger cabin announcements made from the cockpit or from the cabin attendant station via the 14 cabin loudspeakers. Î Î Î Î The tape reproducer is used for automatic broadcasting of passenger announcements before the flight as well as to broadcast music in the cabin. The tape reproducer is muted each time a message is broadcast from crew members or cabin attendant.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The CVR is connected to the Passenger Address. ♦ on selection of crew member-to-Cabin Attendant call. ♦ on selection of passenger-to-Cabin Attendant call. The audio level of the fourteen cabin loudspeakers increases by 6 dB as soon as one engine is started.ATA 23 Passenger address description Page 25/ 103 Î The Passenger Address system enables the pilots and the cabin attendant to transmit announcements to the passengers through the Passenger Address (PA) amplifier.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 26/ 103 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2319 Passenger address description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

A chime is heard in the cabin: ♦ whenever passenger signs are switched on and off.6 . One cabin attendant handset is provided at the cabin attendant station. The CVR is connected to the Passenger Address.ATA 23 Passenger address description Page 27/ 103 Î The Passenger Address system enables the pilots and the cabin attendant to transmit announcements to the passengers through the Passenger Address (PA) amplifier. ♦ on selection of passenger-to-Cabin Attendant call. Î Î Î Î The PA system broadcasts passenger cabin announcements made from the cockpit or from the cabin attendant station via the 14 cabin loudspeakers. The cockpit announcement gets priority over cabin attendant announcements and tape reproducer. Î Î Î Î The tape reproducer is used for automatic broadcasting of passenger announcements before the flight as well as to broadcast music in the cabin. The tape reproducer is muted each time a message is broadcast from crew members or cabin attendant. aft of the cabin. ♦ on selection of crew member-to-Cabin Attendant call.ATR Training Centre . V2319 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. A second handset is optionally installed forward of the cabin. The audio level of the fourteen cabin loudspeakers increases by 6 dB as soon as one engine is started.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. He can also use the boomset or oxygen mask microphone and the PTT on the control wheels or on the nose wheel steering or the INT/RAD selector on the ACP.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The "PA" key light illuminates.ATA 23 Passenger Address Operation Page 28/ 103 Passenger Address Operation Î To perform an announcement from the cockpit to the passengers. Î The audio signal is broadcast by the 14 cabin loudspeakers via the Remote Control Audio Unit and the PA amplifier. the pilot press the "PA" key on the Audio Control Panel. Then the pilot must take the microphone and press the Push-To-Talk pushbutton. V2329 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre . the handset must be removed from its base.ATA 23 Passenger Address Operation Page 29/ 103 Î To make an annoucement from the cabin attendant to the passengers. V2329 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î The audio signal is broadcast by the 14 cabin loudspeakers via the PA amplifier. "PA" pushbutton must be pressed to connect handset's microphone to the PA amplifier.ATA 23 Passenger Address Operation Page 30/ 103 Î The handset is energized. V2329 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Press the handset Push-To-Talk pushbutton to make an announcement. Î The LED associated with the "PA" pushbutton illuminates white.

ATR Training Centre .6 . V2329 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Passenger Address Operation Page 31/ 103 Î When put back on its cradle. the handset is de-energized and the LED associated with the "PA" pushbutton goes out.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 Passenger adress components Page 32/ 103 Passenger adress components V2376 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 33/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 V2376 Passenger adress components Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 23 V2376 Passenger adress components Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 34/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2376 Passenger adress components Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 35/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre . P2325 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Cabin attendant handset description Page 36/ 103 Cabin attendant handset description Î One cabin attendant handset is provided in the cabin attendant station.6 . aft of the aircraft.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 Cabin attendant handset description Page 37/ 103 This page intentionally left blank P2325 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 23 P2325 Cabin attendant handset description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 38/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The part features three illuminated pushbuttons: ♦ ♦ ♦ CALL to call the crew members. a receiver.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a Push-To-Talk (PTT) switch on the handle. Î The attendant handset is a plug-in unit centered and attached by means of four captive screws. Î The handset comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ a high level microphone. EMER to call the crew members in case of emergency.6 . a handset.ATA 23 Cabin attendant handset description Page 39/ 103 Î The cabin attendant handset assembly comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ a plastic cast base. PA to communicate with the passengers via the cabin loudspeakers. P2325 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a cast handle. Î An extendable cord fitted with a connector enables connection of the handset to the base.ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Description Page 40/ 103 Description V2330 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Passenger address system. V2330 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The operating transmitter PTT circuit closes on the common micro of the selection control corresponding to the selected transmitter. ground power receptacle and unpressurized bay in the rear cone. the GPWS and the TCAS. Î After utilization of the oxygen mask.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. cockpit and ground personnel stations at hydraulic bay. by means of the selection control. to the selected transmitter audio input. the boomset microphone is operative again after the oxygen supply overpressure control has been activated in order to depressurize hose and therefore de.activate the pressure switch.ATR Training Centre . Î The signal from the microphone is transmitted through a normally closed contact. an interphone between cockpit and cabin attendant station.6 . distribution in the cockpit loudspeakers only of the aural alerts generated by the CCAS.Description ATA 23 Page 41/ 103 Î The aircraft communication system provides: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ radio communication between aircraft and ground stations.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 42/ 103 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2330 Description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2330 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Two hand microphones. One INTPH/ RAD PTT switch on front face of electronics racks (80VU) on aisle side. Two jack panels for a hand microphone connection. Three jack panels for a boomset and a handset connection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Two loudspeakers. Î The system includes also two AUDIO SEL pushbutton in case of ACP failure. Two loudspeaker control volume knobs. Three boomsets. A Remote Control Audio Unit (RCAU).6 .ATA 23 Description Page 43/ 103 Î The audio integration system comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Two Audio Control Panels (ACP). Two microphones in the oxygen masks. Two headsets. Two INTPH/ RAD PTT switches on Captain and First Officier control wheels. A RAD PTT switch on steering control handwheel.

in Receive mode: Reception of audio outputs from the various navigation and communication systems. adjustment of audio levels according to selections made by the Captain and First Officer and transmission to the operating stations.ATR Training Centre .6 . V2330 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The transmission channels and the audio levels are selected by means of the Audio Control Panel (ACP).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Description Page 44/ 103 Î The system is built around the Remote Control Audio Unit (RCAU) which enables: ♦ ♦ in Transmit mode : Transmission to the desired communication sub-systems. Î These control signals are centralized and then directed to the RCAU through a digital data bus.

controls & indicators Page 45/ 103 Audio integrating operation. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Audio integrating operation.ATR Training Centre . controls & indicators Î The audio integrating system is built around the Remote Control Audio Unit (RCAU) which enables reception of audio signals from the various navigation and communication systems. and transmission to the operating stations.6 . Î Let's select the Captain Audio Control Panel (ACP) to see how to use it for reception.

ATR Training Centre . Select the VHF1 volume knob.6 . When depressed. It also provides the audio level adjustment of all navigation systems.ATA 23 Î Î Î Î Audio integrating operation. Select the VOR1 volume knob. The ACP provides the audio level adjustment of communication systems. controls & indicators Page 46/ 103 Both Audio Control Panels are installed on the centre pedestal. Press the VOICE ONLY key. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the VOICE ONLY key illuminates amber and inhibits NAV receivers station identification at 1020 Hz by activating a band cut off filter.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The Captain's is on the LH side.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Select the CAPT LOUDSPEAKER knob on the left side of the front panel. Î The CCAS. controls & indicators Page 47/ 103 Î Two loudspeakers are mounted in the cockpit ceiling. one on each side. the TCAS and the GPWS alerts are at a preset volume and are not adjustable.ATR Training Centre . Î Each loudspeaker audio level can be adjusted by its associated volume control knob. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 23 Audio integrating operation.

controls & indicators Page 48/ 103 Î The headsets and boomsets for Captain and First Officer are connected via two jack panels. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. installed in the cockpit ceiling close to the electric and electronic racks.6 .ATA 23 Audio integrating operation.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Audio integrating operation.6 . Î Let's select the Captain Audio Control Panel (ACP) to see how to use it for transmission.ATR Training Centre . controls & indicators Page 49/ 103 Î The audio integrating system is built around the Remote Control Audio Unit (RCAU) which enables transmission of the desired communication subsystems. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 23 Audio integrating operation. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . The Captain's is on the LH side.ATR Training Centre . controls & indicators Page 50/ 103 Î Both Audio Control Panels are installed on the centre pedestal. Select the VHF1 key. Î The ACP provides selection of the various communication channels via the six provided keys. Now. The selected key illuminates white.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. set the INT / RAD selector to the "INT" position. Î All the six keys are interlocked so that only one can be pushed down at a time.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. controls & indicators Page 51/ 103 Î The "INT" steady position is the hot mike position allowing communications between crew members without selecting any other key. Replace the INT / RAD selector to the neutral position.ATA 23 Audio integrating operation. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The intercommunication uses boomset microphone or the crew oxygen mask.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . controls & indicators Page 52/ 103 Î With the INT / RAD selector in the neutral position.ATA 23 Audio integrating operation. the interphone transmission mode is obtained by using the unsteady forward Interphone position of the Push.To-Talk selector located on each control wheel. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Let's select the VHF2 key. Now.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. controls & indicators Page 53/ 103 Î With the INT / RAD selector in the neutral position. Î The VHF2 key illuminates white indicating that this channel is selected for this ACP. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The transmission can be made by using the unsteady back Radio position of the Push-To-Talk selector located on each control wheel and by speaking through the boomset or crew oxygen mask microphone.6 . Î The "RAD" unsteady position is yet another PTT which allows transmission via the boomset or the oxygen mask microphone over the selected radio system or Passenger Address.ATA 23 Audio integrating operation. Î A Radio Push-To-Talk pushbutton is also provided on the nose wheel steering control. Î The hand microphone can also be used by pressing its Push-To-Talk pushbutton. the radio configuration must be selected. set the INT / RAD selector to the "RAD" position.

controls & indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 23 V2344 Audio integrating operation.6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 54/ 103 ACOS v1.

Let's follow the procedure. a RCAU failure occurs on the Captain's digital and audio processing board in the RCAU.6 . Any failure detected in audio processing leads the CCAS to trigger the following alerts: ♦ a single chime is broadcast in the flight compartment. clear the CAP. In this example. The Master CAUTION light is extinguished. VHF1 is directly connected to the Captain even if the associated ACP is switched on the VHF2. Switch the AUDIO 1 SEL pushbutton to ALTN. Î Î Î Î Î A RCAU power supply loss will lead to the same alerts.ATA 23 Audio integrating operation. controls & indicators Page 55/ 103 Î During a flight. Clear the Master CAUTION. Note that on the affected side. ♦ AUDIO caution light illuminates amber on the CAP. Î VHF2 would be connected to the First Officer by switching the AUDIO 2 SEL pushbutton to ALTN mode in case of F/O channel failure. This connects directly and exclusively the transmission on the associated VHF system. Let's have a look at the check list for the corrective actions. ♦ the Master CAUTION flashes amber. ♦ the FAULT legend illuminates amber on the AUDIO SEL associated pushbutton. Now.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Now.ATR Training Centre . V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The ALTN legend illuminates white and the FAULT light extinguishes. Passenger Address. interphone and other VHF (or HF if installed) can no longer be used. Î AUDIO caution light extinguishes on the CAP. the faulty channel operates in alternate mode.

controls & indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 56/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 V2344 Audio integrating operation.ATR Training Centre .

the indicator light associated with the CALL pushbutton illuminates white. Î On the handset control panel.Cabin attendant to Pilots call Î Now. hang up the handset on its holder. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î In the flight compartment. the operation is similar to normal operation except that the pilot has to press successively three times on CALLS / ATTND pushbutton. Î The single chime sound is broadcast via the cabin loudspeakers and the CAPT green LED light on the cabin attendant panel illuminates. Î Once RESET pushbutton pressed. the indicator light on the handset control panel extinguishes and the system returns to initial configuration. Î In the flight compartment.ATA 23 Audio integrating operation. the CALL blue legend extinguishes and the door bell sound is cancelled. the VHF1 transmission key is switched on and the INT / RAD selector is set to INT position. while the CAPT green LED light on the cabin attendant panel extinguishes. CALL legend on the CALLS / ATTND pushbutton illuminates blue in association with a door bell sound broadcast via the cockpit loudspeakers. hang up the handset on its holder. Î In case of emergency. Press the CALL pushbutton on the handset control panel. the CALL blue legend extinguishes and the door bell sound is cancelled.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î As soon as the handset is put back on its holder. on the CALLS/ ATTND pushbutton CALL legend illuminates blue and EMER legend illuminates red in association with a repetitive door bell sound. Î Once communication is finished. Press the CALLS / ATTND pushbutton on the Calls panel. the pilot must perform a reset on the Calls panel. Î Once RESET pushbutton pressed. Press the CALL pushbutton on the handset control panel. The audio level is adjusted with the INT knob and the INT / RAD selector is normally set to the INT position. microphones and PTT switches or through boomset and by setting PTT selector on the control wheel to INT position.6 . Both stations can communicate. which illuminates red on the associated indicator light. This activates three single chimes sound in the cabin loudspeakers. the cabin attendant needs to call the pilots and lifts the telephone handset which is then energized. Î As soon as the handset is put back on its holder. CALL legend on the CALLS/ ATTND pushbutton illuminates blue in association with a door bell sound broadcast via the cockpit loudspeakers. Press the RESET pushbutton. Because of the repetitive door bell sound. In the flight compartment. Communication to the cabin attendant is performed through headsets or loudspeakers. Press the RESET pushbutton. the indicator light associated with the CALL pushbutton illuminates white.Pilots to cabin attendant call Î The pilots need to call the cabin attendant. 2. controls & indicators Page 57/ 103 1.ATR Training Centre . Î Communication from the cabin attendant station is performed through the handset and the PTT switch. the indicator light on the handset control panel extinguishes and the system returns to initial configuration. Î The cabin attendant lifts the handset and presses the EMER pushbutton on the handset control panel. The cabin attendant lifts the telephone handset. After communication. Boomset is used to communicate to the cabin attendant. The reception and audio channels of attendant handset are now electromechanically connected to the RCAU and both stations can communicate. Î On the handset control panel. Î Normally. The pilot then has to press the RESET pushbutton.

6 . The pilot then has to press the RESET pushbutton. Î In the flight compartment.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 Audio integrating operation. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 . controls & indicators Page 58/ 103 Î In case of emergency. the operation is similar to normal operation except that the cabin attendant has to press the EMER pushbutton on the handset control panel. on the CALLS/ ATTND pushbutton CALL legend illuminates blue and EMER legend illuminates red in association with a repetitive door bell sound. On the handset control panel. the indicator light associated with the EMER pushbutton illuminates red.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 . controls & indicators Page 59/ 103 This page intentionally left blank V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 Audio integrating operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 23 V2344 Audio integrating operation.6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 60/ 103 ACOS v1. controls & indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Press the RESET pushbutton.2Ground crew to Pilots call Î The ground crew wants to call the pilots. in the ground power receptacle. Î In the flight compartment. the VHF1 transmission key is switched ON and the INT/RAD selector is set to INT position.6 . Î Normally. Click on the ground power receptacle area. The DC ground power receptacle provides a cabin crew call pushbutton. on the CALLS/ MECH pushbutton CALL legend illuminates blue in association with a repetitive door bell sound. Press the CALLS/ MECH pushbutton on the Calls panel. . in the hydraulic bay or in the aft avionics compartment. The audio level is adjusted with the INT knob and the INT/ RAD selector is normally set to the INT position. Communication to the ground crew is performed through headsets or loudspeakers.Audio integrating operation. Î The mechanical horn sounds in the nose wheel bay as long as the CALLS/ MECH pushbutton is pressed in the flight compartment. controls & indicators ATA 23 - Page 61/ 103 1Pilots to ground crew call Î The pilots need to call the ground crew. Boomset is used to communicate to the cabin attendant. V2344 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î The mechanic can then connect his headset to one of the three interphone jacks. microphones and PTT switches or through boomset and by setting PTT selector on the control wheel to INT position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Audio integrating components Page 62/ 103 Audio integrating components V2377 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 63/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 64/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 65/ 103 ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 66/ 103 ACOS v1.ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 67/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 68/ 103 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 69/ 103 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 70/ 103 ACOS v1.ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 71/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 V2377 Audio integrating components Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre . are recorded by the Cockpit Voice Recording system.6 . V2345 Copyright © 2001-2008 . voice or audio signals identifying navigation or approach radio aids. Î In addition. a CVR microphone located below the overhead panel. such as: ♦ ♦ ♦ communications received and transmitted by radio. Î Cabin crew announcements are also recorded. acquires cockpit conversation and aural warnings in the flight compartment.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 23 Description Page 72/ 103 Description Î All crew communications transmitted through the RCAU. conversations between the crew members.

Î The SSCVR receives parameters from the Remote Control Audio Unit and the Passenger Address in digital format and records them in a memory. The CVR is of the latest standard and is known as Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR). This compares with international regulations which require CVR to record for 30 minutes. a CVR microphone on the windshield center post. V2345 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Description ATA 23 Page 73/ 103 Î The Cockpit Voice Recording system mainly comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ a Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR) located in the aft unpressurized area. a Control Unit located on the overhead panel.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Recording capacity is 2 hours.6 .

ATA 23 Operation. controls and indicators V2349 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . controls and indicators Page 74/ 103 Operation.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 . Both engines are now running and external power is no longer available. Battery selector is set to ON and external power is not available. the ground is lost and the 7RK relay opens. V2349 Copyright © 2001-2008 .. Note that manual recording can only be achieved with external power set to ON. Aircraft parameters will be recorded during the entire flight. As soon as one engine is running the SSCVR is automatically supplied. controls and indicators Page 75/ 103 Aircraft is on ground with both engines stopped. Battery selector is set to ON and external power is not available. You want to manually run the SSCVR. you want to stop recording the aircraft parameters that you manually initialized. the "ON" legend illuminates blue. By pressing the RESET pushbutton. The associated contact closes. The MFC logic energizes the 7RK relay and the SSCVR is then supplied. The "ON" legend extinguishes on the RCDR pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The SSCVR is no longer supplied. the MFC internal logic causes loss of ground and the 7RK relay opens. The SSCVR stops recording. By pressing the RCDR pushbutton. Click on the aircraft to disconnect the Ground Power Unit.ATR Training Centre . The 11PG relay is then energized and the MFC internal logic causes loss of SSCVR energization. Now.ATA 23 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Operation. External power is now available and set to ON. Aircraft is now on ground and both engines have just stopped. Press the RESET pushbutton. The SSCVR is still supplied upon aircraft energization for ten minutes because of the delay in the MFC internal logic.. As soon as ten minutes have passed. The SSCVR is then supplied upon aircraft energization. Set the RCDR pushbutton to ON. Click on the aircraft to connect the Ground Power Unit.

controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 23 V2349 Operation.6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 76/ 103 ACOS v1.

This signal can be heard in the headset connected to this jack.ATR Training Centre . Press the TEST pushbutton. V2349 Copyright © 2001-2008 . During the test.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Recorders are now de-energized.6 . After this operation. recorders are off until one engine is started. So. They can be energized by pressing the RCDR pushbutton on the RCDR panel. the galvanometer pointer moves to a location between graduations 6 and 10. CVR can be checked at any time by means of the TEST pushbutton on the control unit. A 600 Hz signal is heard at the headset jack located on the front face of the control unit. Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Press this pushbutton. controls and indicators Page 77/ 103 Î When the aircraft is on external power. the recorders can be de-energized by pressing the RESET pushbutton on the RCDR panel.ATA 23 Operation. do it. Recorders are energized.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 78/ 103 ACOS v1. controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 23 V2349 Operation.

They can be energized by pressing the RCDR pushbutton on the RCDR panel. It is operational provided the aircraft is on the ground with the parking brake control handle pulled up and locked.Operation. a 400 Hz audio frequency signal can be heard in a headset connected to a jack located on the front face of the control unit. recorders are off until one engine is started.ATR Training Centre .6 . V2349 Copyright © 2001-2008 . To perform erasing sequence. controls and indicators ATA 23 Page 79/ 103 Î When the aircraft is on external power. the recorders can be de-energized by pressing the RESET pushbutton on the RCDR panel. the ERASE pushbutton must be pressed for at least 2 seconds. Memory erasing time: 5 to 6 seconds. Î Recorders are energized.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The ERASE pushbutton on the control unit is used for fully erasing the recorded memory. Î After this operation. Î Î Î Î Set the parking brake lever to ON position. Press the ERASE pushbutton. Î Press this pushbutton. During erasure. Î Recorders are now de-energized. do it. Î So.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 Cockpit voice recorder Page 80/ 103 Cockpit voice recorder V2378 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

close to the toilet door. the probability of the ELT transmitting a detectable signal is maximized.025 MHz frequency.6 .ATR Training Centre .5 MHz and 243 MHz frequencies and a geographical position signal on 406. a Remote Control Unit in the flight compartment. The system includes its own battery.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The ELT system comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ a transmitter in the pressurized ceiling. V2350 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Description ATA 23 Page 81/ 103 Description Î An automatic Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) must be attached to the aircraft in such a manner that. Î The ELT is able to transmit a distress signal on 121. an antenna in the fairing ahead of the stabilizer fin. in the event of a crash.

controls and indicators Page 82/ 103 Operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 Operation.ATR Training Centre . controls and indicators V2354 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Press the AUTO TEST RST switch. The AUTO TEST RST switch is used in case of undue alert (reset) or to test the emergency beacon.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. note that the mechanical horn will be triggered too. V2354 Copyright © 2001-2008 . controls and indicators Page 83/ 103 An auto test of the Emergency Locator Transmitter can be performed through the Remote Control Unit in the flight compartment.ATA 23 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Operation. By setting VHF 1 frequency to 121.5 MHz. if the emergency beacon is triggered after 30 seconds.ATR Training Centre . check that no distress signal is heard in the headset. The X MIT ALERT caution light illuminates amber for 2 seconds and then extinguishes. In case of test failure. So check that the MAN / AUTO selector is in "AUTO" position and guarded. This test must not be performed in manual mode. When aircraft is on ground (and electrically supplied). the X MIT ALERT caution light will flash amber.6 .

ATA 23 Emergency locator transmitter components Page 84/ 103 Emergency locator transmitter components V2379 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2379 Emergency locator transmitter components Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 85/ 103 ACOS v1.

ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 86/ 103 Indicators and recording panels V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

transmissions from boomset and oxygen mask are automatically connected without using a PTT pushbutton. interphone is always operative between crew stations. <4> The INT / RAD selector provides selection of transmission mode when using oxygen mask or boomset mike. inhibits NAV receivers station identification by activating a band cut off filter above 1020 Hz. Only one key can be engaged at a time. Six interlock keys are provided. .ATR Training Centre . when depressed. For more details. click on a button or an indicating light. It illuminates white when selected. <2> The transmission keys allow selection of the individual communication facilities for transmission.When in unsteady RAD position. Other transmission require selection of a transmission key and use of a PTT pushbutton.When in steady INT or hot mike position.When in neutral position. V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 . intercommunication requires use of forward position of control wheel PTT. The light then illuminates amber. . Location: Centre pedestal. <3> The VOICE ONLY key.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. . <1> The volume control reception knobs enable reception volume for associated communication or navigation facilities.ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 87/ 103 Î Look at both Audio Control Panels.6 .

6 .ATA 23 V2355 Indicators and recording panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 88/ 103 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

. V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 . When depressed. ACT flashes if the actual radio frequency is not identical to the frequency in the active frequency display. <7> The test button is used to initiate the radio self-test diagnostic routine.RMT illuminates amber when the VHF is remotely tuned. . the preset frequency is entered in the selected channel. . successive actions cycle the six memory frequencies through the display. <8> Three type of annunciators are displayed here. Location: Centre pedestal. the second line displays dashes and the first line can directly be tuned from frequency selector. <1> The ON / OFF knob energizes the control unit and the associated VHF. .TX illuminates amber when the VHF is transmitting. the MEM switch may be used to advance through the channel numbers. <5> The STO button allows six frequencies to beentered in the memory. <9> The ACT comparator annunciator illuminates amber when the frequencies are being changed. the initial configuration is recovered. <3> The frequencies display are shown here. the frequency selector controls the preset frequency display. The active frequency is displayed amber on the first line and the preset frequency is displayed amber on the second line. <10> The light sensor automatically controls the display brightness.When depressed a second time.After 5 seconds. <2> In normal use. The SQ OFF position disables the receiver squelch circuit. nothing happens. <4> The XFR / MEM switch is a three-position spring-loaded toggle switch. .When in XFR position.ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 89/ 103 Î Look at both VHF control units. . the upper window displays the channel number of available memory from CH1 to CH6. . For more details. . click on a button or an indicating light.ATR Training Centre .6 .An inner knob is used for selection of KHz with an increment of 50 KHz or 25 KHz for the first two steps when the direction of the rotation is reversed. . . the control will return to normal operation. .When depressed.When in neutral position.An outer knob is used for selection of MHz with an increment of 1 MHz. By pushing the STO button a second time.MEM illuminates amber when a preset frequency is being displayed on the second line.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. preset and active frequencies are exchanged.When in MEM position.For 5 seconds. <6> The ACT button allows the active frequency to be changed. .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 90/ 103 ACOS v1.ATA 23 V2355 Indicators and recording panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .

In case of aural alert.By pressing the pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Location: LH and RH Instruments Panels For more details. . With no light illuminated. Note that on the side affected.ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 91/ 103 Î Look at both AUDIO SEL pushbuttons and loudspeakers volume knobs.ATR Training Centre . V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 . interphone and other VHF can no longer be used. the volume of both loudspeakers is muted. the RCAU functions normally. Passenger Address. During any transmission. .The FAULT amber light is illuminated and the CCAS is activated when an associated RCAU processing board failure or power loss is detected. the ALTN white light illuminates and the affected crew station is connected directly to VHF1 if Captain's station is concerned or VHF2 if First Officer is concerned. <2> Communication reception over cockpit loudspeakers is controlled by an individual knob for each of the two cockpit loudspeakers. click on a button or an indicating light. preset volume is always available regardless of knobs position. <1> The AUDIO SEL pushbutton controls functioning of associated RCAU processing board.6 . Volume can still be adjusted by affected loudspeaker volume control.

ATA 23 V2355 Indicators and recording panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 92/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre . the CALL blue legend illuminates and a Door Bell sound is broadcast through the cockpit loudspeakers. V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the CALL blue legend illuminates and a Door Bell sound is broadcast through the cockpit loudspeakers. Location: Overhead panel For more details.ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 93/ 103 Î Look at the CALLS pushbuttons. click on a button or an indicating light.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. When the mechanic calls the cockpit. <3> The MECH pushbutton enables the ground crew to be called from the cockpit by activating the horn located in the nose wheel bay.6 . <2> The ATTND pushbutton enables the cabin to be called from the cockpit. <1> The RESET pushbutton enables cancellation of the CALL blue and EMER red legends when the ground crew or the cabin attendant call the cockpit crew members. In case of an emergency call from the cabin. the CALL blue legend and the EMER red legend illuminate and a repetitive Door Bell sound is broadcast through the cockpit loudspeakers. When the cabin calls the cockpit.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 94/ 103 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 23 V2355 Indicators and recording panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 95/ 103 Î Look at the CVR control unit. A complete erase is performed by depressing the pushbutton for 2 seconds. Test tone is audible when TEST pushbutton is depressed and erase tone is audible when ERASE pushbutton is depressed. V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 . By plugging a headset into the jack.6 . The movement of the pointer in the white band indicates that all channels are operative. the pointer moves to a location betxween 6 and 10. the cockpit sounds picked up by the microphone are audible. the TEST pushbutton allows test circuit to be activated. <2> When depressed and held. <3> The ERASE pushbutton provides fast erasure of tape recordings when the landing gear shock absorbers are compressed and parking brake is applied. <1> The monitor indicator is used for test only. <4> When a headset is plugged into the jack.ATR Training Centre . a 400 Hz signal can be heard.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. During erasure. the 600 Hz signal can be heard. Location: Overhead panel For more details. by plugging a headset into the jack. click on a button or an indicating light.

ATR Training Centre . when depressed. V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The ON light illuminates blue.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. click on a button or an indicating light. the RCDR pushbutton. <1> When the aircraft is energized by external power. Location: pedestal panel For more details.6 . <2> The RESET pushbutton inhibits recording in manual mode.ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 96/ 103 Î Look at the RCDR panel. energizes both Cockpit Voice Recorder and Digital Flight Data Recorder.

5 MHz. Location: overhead panel For more details.ATA 23 Indicators and recording panels Page 97/ 103 Î Look at the ELT remote control. The selector set in MAN position allows commanded position. <1> The MAN / AUTO guarded selector when set in AUTO position enables transmission to be made automatically on 121.025 MHz when deceleration exceeds 5 g and X MIT ALERT light to illuminate amber. the light illuminates amber for 2 seconds when the test is successful or flashes for 15 seconds if the test has failed. X MIT ALERT light then illuminates amber.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2355 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <2> The AUTO TEST RST pushbutton is used to reset an undue alert or to test the emergency beacon.ATR Training Centre . 243 MHz and 406.6 . <3> The X MIT ALERT light illuminates amber in case of an automatic transmission (in the event of a crash) or in manual mode. During the test. click on a button or an indicating light.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The control unit modulates the active and preset display intensity from minimum to maximum to annunciate that self-test is in progress.ATA 23 VHF control unit maintenance operations Page 98/ 103 VHF control unit maintenance operations System studied: VHF Control Unit self-test Î The self-test diagnostic routine can be initiated in the transceiver by pressing the test pushbutton on the VHF control unit. V2356 Copyright © 2001-2008 . System studied: VHF Control Unit self-test Î Four flashing dashes appear on the upper line and two flashing zeros appear on the lower line. Preset and active frequencies are displayed. press the TEST pushbutton.ATR Training Centre . set the selector to "ON" position. First of all. Î The VHF control unit is now power supplied. Î Several audio tones are heard in the audio system. Then.6 .

6 .ATA 23 VHF control unit maintenance operations Page 99/ 103 This page intentionally left blank V2356 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 100/ 103 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 23 V2356 VHF control unit maintenance operations Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

the preset and active frequencies are displayed again. the control unit displays DIAG (for diagnostic) in the active display and a 2-digit fault code in the preset display. Î The opposite list gives a description of the self-test codes that can be displayed on the control unit.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ACT is displayed for one second on upper line and then extinguishes.ATA 23 VHF control unit maintenance operations Page 101/ 103 System studied: VHF Control Unit self-test Î If test is succesful. the control unit displays DIAG (for diagnostic) in the active display and a 2-digit fault code in the preset display. V2356 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Î The opposite list gives a description of the self-test codes that can be displayed on the control unit. Î Record any fault codes displayed to help the service technician to locate the problem. System studied: VHF Control Unit self-test Î If any out-of-limit condition is found. System studied: VHF Control Unit self-test Î If any out-of-limit condition is found. Î Record any fault codes displayed to help the service technician to locate the problem.ATR Training Centre .

controls and indicators 82 Emergency locator transmitter components 84 Indicators and recording panels 86 VHF control unit maintenance operations 98 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . controls and indicators 74 Cockpit voice recorder 80 Description 81 Operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 23 Page 102/ 103 ATA 23 COMMUNICATIONS V2356 General description 2 Cockpit location 8 Interfaces 10 Features 11 Safety and precautions 16 VHF System description 17 VHF Operation 18 VHF components 20 Passenger address description 24 Passenger Address Operation 28 Passenger adress components 32 Cabin attendant handset description 36 Description 40 Audio integrating operation. controls & indicators 45 Audio integrating components 62 Description 72 Operation.6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 103/ 103 ACOS v1.ATA 23 V2356 Summary Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 ATA 24 ELECTRICAL POWER Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

variable frequency. constant frequency. AC (Alternating Current ). ACW (Alternating Current Wild).ATA 24 General description Page 2/ 187 General description Î The electrical system consists of three separate subsystems: ♦ ♦ ♦ DC (Direct Current).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . V2401 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 General description Page 3/ 187 Î DC and ACW generation are provided by engine driven generators.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V2401 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î AC and DC feeders run in the wing leading edge and under the ceiling roof to the electrical racks.

V2401 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î A Transformer Rectifier Unit (TRU) transforms ACW into DC for emergency purposes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 General description Page 4/ 187 Î AC constant frequency is provided by inverters which convert DC into AC.

ATA 24 General description Page 5/ 187 Î The electrical components are located in the electrical racks. Î Circuit breakers are located on the overhead panel and behind the first officer.ATR Training Centre . V2401 Copyright © 2001-2008 . except for the batteries which are located on the floor of the avionics racks.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î AC and DC electrical controls are located on the overhead panel.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 Control panels Page 6/ 187 Control panels V2402 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 Interfaces Page 7/ 187 Interfaces V2403 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 Features Page 8/ 187 Features V2404 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 24 V2404 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 9/ 187 ACOS v1.

ATA 24 V2404 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 10/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2404 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 11/ 187 ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 24 V2404 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2404 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 187 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 V2404 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 187 ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 Safety and precautions Page 15/ 187 Safety and precautions V2405 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre . Î It reflects "what's behind" the main electrical power panel in a simplified way.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 16/ 187 DC Electrical generation description Î RH diagram will be used to support the DC general description.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 17/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 18/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î Click on each bus to see the services that bus supplies. a HOT EMER BAT BUS.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 19/ 187 Î The aircraft DC distribution consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ two main busses (DC BUS 1 and DC BUS 2). This equipment remains supplied even after dual DC generator loss. by batteries or TRU. V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. 2 utility busses (UTLY BUS 1 and UTLY BUS 2). a DC EMER BUS. ♦ ♦ a DC SVCE BUS provides supply for aircraft services. DC ESS BUS and DC STBY BUS supply equipment required to fly. Î DC EMER BUS. a DC ESS BUS.ATR Training Centre . a HOT MAIN BAT BUS. Î Additionnally. a DC STBY BUS. a GND-HDLG BUS provides supply for ground handling operations.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 20/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 21/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 22/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 23/ 187 ACOS v1.

ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 24/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 25/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 26/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 27/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 28/ 187 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 29/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 30/ 187 ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 31/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 32/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 33/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 34/ 187 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 35/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 36/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 V2406 DC Electrical generation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 37/ 187 Î The DC power source is provided by two dual function DC starter / generators driven by the High Pressure (HP) compressors hrough the Auxiliary Gear Boxes (AGB). it rotates the HP compressor for engine starting. V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î As a generator. The on-line point is 61.5 % NH.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . The cut-out point is 45% NH. it is driven by the HP compressor. Î As a starter.

6 . V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 38/ 187 Î A Generator Control Unit (GCU) associated with each starter generator provides control for generator and starter operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

battery start contactor.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre . ground handling bus. V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 . service bus.DC Electrical generation description ATA 24 Page 39/ 187 Î A Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) controls: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ main busses tie. external power. load shedding.

V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î The emergency battery avoids power transient on critical equipment during engine start and supplies emergency power after main battery has been discharged.ATR Training Centre . Î The main battery is used to start the engine and to supply emergency power.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 40/ 187 Î A main battery and an emergency battery provide additional power sources.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 41/ 187 Î Multi Function Computer (MFC) 1 and 2 provide controls for battery's own operation and transfer contactors controls. V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 42/ 187 Î A Transformer Rectifier Unit (TRU) supplied with the ACW provides power to the emergency loads in case of dual DC generators loss.

V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 43/ 187 Î DC external receptacle allows the aircraft to be supplied from a Ground Power Unit (GPU).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 44/ 187 Î Contactors are used to connect the generators.ATR Training Centre .6 . the external power and the batteries to the electrical network.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the magnetic annunciator "BITE LOADED" which shows a system failure recorded by the MFC. the Multi Function Computer (MFC 1 for system 1 and MFC 2 for system 2). The system comprises two sub-systems. two feeders overheat sensors to detect a possible feeder overheat due to a faulty connection.ATR Training Centre . one for each generator. Î A feeder overheat detection system comprises the following components: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ feeders.6 . V2406 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation description Page 45/ 187 Î The feeder overheat detection system allows monitoring of the condition of the DC generation feeders from the engine nacelle to the electrical racks.

6 .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation cockpit location Page 46/ 187 DC Electrical generation cockpit location V2407 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation cockpit location Page 47/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2407 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 DC normal operation Page 48/ 187 DC normal operation V2433 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

"AVAIL" light extinguishes. The GPU now supplies the DC BUS 1. Simultaneously. "DC BUS OFF" 1 and 2 extinguish. GCU 1 closes the line contactor 11 PU. Î Select "OFF / START ABORT" on ENG START selector. GPU can be removed by ground crew. Î The main battery is charged from DC BUS 2 through 23 PA contactor controlled by its MFCs. Amber arrows on MAIN ELEC PWR panel indicate that batteries are discharging and supply their busses. GCU 2 closes the line contactor 12 PU and DC GEN 2 FAULT light extinguishes. the whole network is supplied from generator 2. Î Depress on EXT PWR pushbutton. amber arrows extinguish. As DC BUS 1 and DC BUS 2 are supplied. Now. The HOT EMER BAT BUS and the HOT MAIN BAT BUS are directly supplied by their respective battery. Î Switch off the EXT PWR pushbutton. Inverter 2 supplies AC BUS 2 (26 volts) and AC BUS 2 (115 volts). the DC BUS 2. through the BTC (controlled by PCU). Set BAT switch to "ON" position. Inverter 1 supplies the AC STBY BUSSES. Î In addition to AC STBY BUSSES. Î 30 PU and 29 PU contactors (controlled by the BPCU) supply respectively UTLY BUS 1 and UTLY BUS 2. AC BUS 1 and AC BUS 2 lights extinguish as well as INV 2 FAULT light. "ON" light extinguishes and the BPCU controls 11 PG contactor to open. When BAT switch is selected "ON". the "ON" light illuminates and the BPCU controls the external power contactor 11 PG to close. As a result. the STBY BUS and the inverter 1 through the HOT MAIN BAT BUS. selecting "START A" on ENG START selector causes batteries to be disconnected from the battery charge circuits. Aircraft is still supplied by the external power because external power source has priority over the generator. the Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) controls and monitors external power. Simultaneously. Then. MAIN V2433 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The emergency battery is charged from DC BUS 1 through 42 PA contactor controlled by its MFCs. Inverter 2 is supplied from DC BUS 2.ATR Training Centre . Î When EXT PWR is switched "OFF". Î When the Ground Power Unit (GPU) is connected to the external power receptacle. As the batteries are charging. the BPCU opens the BTC and DC GEN 1 FAULT light extinguishes. "SHED" light extinguishes. 2 PA contactor closes supplying inverter 1 from DC BUS 1. the main battery supplies the ESS BUS. Amber arrows on MAIN ELEC PWR panel indicate that batteries are discharging. Î Î Î Î When the electrical power is determined to be within acceptable limits by the BPCU. inverter 1 now supplies AC BUS 1 (26 volts) and AC BUS 1 (115 volts). arrows on MAIN ELEC PWR extinguish and batteries charge contactors 42 PA and 23 PA close (controlled by the MFCs). The emergency battery supplies the EMER BUS through the HOT EMER BAT BUS. Î Following engine 1 start sequence.DC normal operation ATA 24 Page 49/ 187 Î The system is shown engines stopped without external power and BAT switch "OFF".6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When EXT PWR pushbutton is depressed. Î Prior to starting engine 2. the "AVAIL" light illuminates. Î Select "START A" on ENG START selector. 4 PD contactor closes supplying the DC STBY BUS from the emergency battery. Î As start sequence is finished and the ENG START selector restored to "OFF".

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC normal operation Page 50/ 187 ELEC PWR panel is dark. V2433 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . This reflects the normal operation of DC electrical system.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC normal operation Page 51/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2433 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. All these operations are automatic. a faulty generator reset may be attempted before selecting the DC GEN pushbutton definately OFF. V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Î According to procedure.ATR Training Centre . the relevant GCU opens the line contactor and the BPCU closes the BTC.ATA 24 DC abnormal operation Page 52/ 187 DC abnormal operation Î If one generator fails during the operation.

V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The relevant battery charge contactor (42 PA or 23 PA) opens. ♦ DC STBY BUS is supplied from the main battery. inverter 1 FAULT light illuminates. The BPCU prevents the BTC from closing. ♦ inverter 2 supplies the AC STBY BUSSES.6 . the relevant GCU opens the relevant line contactor. F 10 seconds following failure. SHED light. AC BUSSES 1 are supplied from inverter 2 and AC BUS OFF light extinguishes. Simultaneously. As a result.ATA 24 Î Î Î Î DC abnormal operation Page 53/ 187 If a short circuit occurs on one DC BUS. ♦ EMER BUS is supplied from the DC BUS 2. DC GEN FAULT light.ATR Training Centre . DC BUS OFF light. and AC BUS OFF illuminate. keeping the opposite channel isolated.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 DC abnormal operation Page 54/ 187 Î If a main battery thermal runaway occurs. the MFCs open the 23 PA battery charge contactor.6 . V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The battery charge status is indicated by the MAIN BAT CHG FAULT light. Î Automatically. the ESS BUS power supply is transferred from the HOT MAIN BAT BUS to the DC BUS 1 by 3 PA contactor.

V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The battery charge status is indicated by the EMER BAT CHG FAULT light.ATR Training Centre . Additionally. the EMER BUS power supply is transferred from the HOT EMER BAT BUS to the DC BUS 1 by 58 PA contactor.ATA 24 Î Î Î Î DC abnormal operation Page 55/ 187 If an emergency battery thermal runaway occurs. Automatically. the MFCs open the 42 PA battery charge contactor. the DC STBY BUS power supply is transferred from the HOT EMER BAT BUS to the HOT MAIN BAT BUS by 4 PD contactor.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

the only DC sources are the main and the emergency batteries. V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . The AC STBY BUSSES are supplied by inverter 1 through the HOT MAIN BAT BUS.ATA 24 Î Î Î Î Î Î DC abnormal operation Page 56/ 187 In case of dual generators loss. The emergency battery supplies the EMER BUS through the HOT EMER BAT BUS.6 . Press TRU pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The main battery supplies the ESS BUS and the DC STBY BUS through the HOT MAIN BAT BUS. Batteries discharges are indicated by the amber arrows on the MAIN ELEC PWR panel.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 DC abnormal operation Page 57/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 V2434 DC abnormal operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 58/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

Amber arrow indicates that the TRU is in operation. Select BAT switch on OVRD position. As a result.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Simultaneously. batteries arrows extinguish. batteries arrows extinguish. Î The TRU delivers DC to: ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Î ESS BUS and STBY BUSSES through 96 PA contactor. EMER BUS through 95 PA contactor. 93 PA contactor closes supplying the TRU with ACW.6 . inverter 1 through 97 PA contactor.ATR Training Centre . the guarded BAT toggle switch has to be selected on OVRD according to procedure. Simultaneously.DC abnormal operation ATA 24 Page 59/ 187 Î The TRU pushbutton must be selected ON. V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 . In order to preselect busses supply from batteries (in case of TRU failure). TRU selection is indicated by the ON light on TRU pushbutton.

6 .ATA 24 Î Î Î Î DC abnormal operation Page 60/ 187 A failure will be detected by the MFC comparing the signal from sensors. the generator comes off line and FAULT illuminates on DC GEN pushbutton. The feeder overheat will be indicated on the RH maintenance panel and memorized by the MFC. As a result.ATR Training Centre . V2434 Copyright © 2001-2008 . At touchdown. the MFC will output a GEN de-excitation signal to the GCU.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

V2435 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 DC Hotel Mode operation Page 61/ 187 DC Hotel Mode operation Î The Hotel Mode allows the aircraft to be free from a Ground Power Unit.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î The main electrical network is supplied by DC GEN 2.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This is indicated by the red "GND HDL / ON BAT" light located on the cargo door control panel. the GROUND HANDLING BUS is automatically supplied by the main battery through the HOT MAIN BAT BUS. Î In addition.DC ground handling bus operation ATA 24 Page 62/ 187 DC ground handling bus operation Î The GROUND HANDLING BUS is supplied by the main battery when the cargo door is open. the GROUND HANDLING BUS is also supplied when refuelling control panel is open or when passengers door is open. or when "HYD AUX PUMP" ground control switch is depressed. Î As the panel opens.6 . V2436 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2436 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î When the aircraft is powered by the GPU.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the BPCU opens 2 PX relay and the red light on cargo door control panel extinguishes. the BPCU automatically controls 8 PX and 6 PX relays to close.6 .ATA 24 DC ground handling bus operation Page 63/ 187 Î When a Ground Power Unit (GPU) is connected and "AVAIL" light illuminated. supplying the GROUND HANDLING BUS through the SERVICE BUS. the GROUND HANDLING BUS is supplied by the DC BUS 1 through the SERVICE BUS. The GPU has priority over the main battery. Î Simultaneously.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 DC service bus operation Page 64/ 187 DC service bus operation V2437 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î Note that the GROUND HANDLING BUS is supplied from the SERVICE BUS. in normal operation. This is indicated by SHED light on the attendant's panel. Should a limited overload occur (detected by the GCU). the BPCU will prevent the BTC from closing (or opening if it was previously closed). In flight. If the overload is considerable. a ground / flight logic within the BPCU inhibits the GROUND HANDLING BUS supply. Shedding of the UTILITY BUS will be indicated by the loss of the recirculation fan (side effect).ATA 24 DC service bus operation Page 65/ 187 Î When a Ground Power Unit (GPU) is connected and "AVAIL" light illuminated. the BPCU sheds the SERVICE BUS. The GCU of the faulty side opens the line contactor. the BPCU automatically controls the 10 PX relay to close supplying the SERVICE BUS from the DC BUS 1.6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the BPCU automatically controls 8 PX relay to close. Î When the BAT switch and the EXT PWR pushbutton are selected "ON". the UTILITY BUS 1 or 2 (depends of the overload side) will be shed automatically by the BPCU. the SERVICE BUS is supplied from the DC BUS 1. supplying the SERVICE BUS. Î Î Î Î In flight. Î In the worst case. V2437 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Note: recirculation fan FAULT not shown on the drawing.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC external power operation Page 66/ 187 DC external power operation V2438 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

V2438 Copyright © 2001-2008 . supplying DC BUS 1 and DC BUS 2 through the BTC 16 PU. Î Î Î Î As the contactor closes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. "DC PWR NOT USED" also extinguishes when the SERVICE BUS and the GROUND HANDLING BUS are directly supplied by external power. One of the conditions to connect external power is "aircraft on ground". So. when the aircraft is on jacks.6 . the DC PWR NOT USED light extinguishes on the external power control panel. Î This is indicated by the "AVAIL" light on the overhead panel and by the "DC CNTD" and "DC PWR NOT USED" white lights located on the external power control panel.ATR Training Centre . external power must be available. To restore this condition. Î When all the conditions are met. this condition is lost. Then the 11 PG contactor closes. the BAT switch and the EXT PWR pushbutton have to be selected ON. located on the RH maintenance panel has to be selected to "FLT".DC external power operation ATA 24 Page 67/ 187 Î To connect the GPU to the network. the WEIGHT ON WHEELS switch.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC Starters / Generators description Page 68/ 187 DC Starters / Generators description V2408 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 DC Starters / Generators description Page 69/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2408 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 70/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2408 DC Starters / Generators description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î To ease maintenance.6 . the cut-out point is 45% NH.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the on-line point is 61. ♦ Rated nominal load current: 400 A (continuous operation). Î A speed sensor incorporated in the DC starter / generator sends a speed reference to the associated Generator Control Unit (CGU) for the starter cut-out point and the generator on-line point.ATR Training Centre . Starter performances: Maximum input current: 1275 A. Generator performances: ♦ Rated nominal voltage: 30 V. As generator function. As starter function. Î Î Î Î Î An air intake provides cooling for the DC starter / generator. ♦ Rated output power: 12 kW (400 A .5% NH.30 V continuous operation) V2408 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 DC Starters / Generators description Page 71/ 187 Î The DC starter / generator is mounted on the Auxiliary Gearbox (AGB). The DC starter / generators are designed to start the engine and supply the DC twin channels aircraft system. the DC starter / generator is attached on the AGB by means of a clamp.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC Generator Control Unit (GCU) description Page 72/ 187 DC Generator Control Unit (GCU) description V2410 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 DC Generator Control Unit (GCU) description Page 73/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2410 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 24 V2410 DC Generator Control Unit (GCU) description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 74/ 187 ACOS v1.

associated with each DC starter / generator. over / underspeed. equalizing load in case of BTC failed closed. reverse current.ATA 24 DC Generator Control Unit (GCU) description Page 75/ 187 Î The two DC Generator Control Units (GCU) are located in the RH electrical racks: ♦ ♦ GCU 1 on shelf 95VU. Î The Generator Control Unit (GCU). Î The GCU monitors the point of regulation where the voltage is maintened constant as load varies and provides fault detection and protection for: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ over / undervoltage. provides control for starter and generator operation. differential fault current.ATR Training Centre .6 . GCU 2 on shelf 94VU. magnetic annunciators and a test pushbutton allow respectively identification of a faulty component and testing of the GCU protection circuits. V2410 Copyright © 2001-2008 . bus tie lock out.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Located on the front face of each unit. power and fault current limiting. generator overload.

ATA 24 Hall effect sensors description Page 76/ 187 Hall effect sensors description V2412 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

differential fault protection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 Hall effect sensors description Page 77/ 187 Î The Hall Effect Sensors are located in the engine rear nacelle / wing spar area and in the 123 VU electronic racks panel.ATR Training Centre . current measuring.6 . V2412 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Two for each DC starter / generator channel provide through the related CGU: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ overload protection. Î There are four Hall Effect Sensors. current limiting function.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Page 78/ 187 DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description V2414 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Page 79/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2414 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 80/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 V2414 DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

load shedding.6 . magnetic annunciators and a test pushbutton allow respectively identification of a faulty component and testing of the BPCU protection circuits. service bus. no overcurrent is detected. V2414 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ground handling bus. no undervoltage is detected.ATA 24 DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Page 81/ 187 Î The DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) is located in the RH electronics rack shelf 95VU. Î The external power current quality is checked and "declared available" when: ♦ ♦ ♦ no overvoltage is detected. Î The Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) controls: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ main busses tie.ATR Training Centre . battery start contactor. Î Located on the front face of the unit. external power.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 Batteries description Page 82/ 187 Batteries description V2416 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 Batteries description Page 83/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2416 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 84/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2416 Batteries description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre . Î In addition. it will cause the relevant battery charge contactor to open. Î A switch located on each battery provides overheat protection. V2416 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The two batteries are Cadmium Nickel type. Î Batteries are vented by the air extraction fan. 24 volts. If an overheat occurs. and to critical loads in flight in the event of a total loss of the DC primary generation system. Î DC generation by main and emer batteries is normally utilized to provide stored energy to selected DC and AC CF loads during normal ground operations.ATA 24 Batteries description Page 85/ 187 Î The batteries are located on the floor of the LH electronics racks. The emergency battery (EMER BAT) has a capacity of 15 Ah.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . the main battery alone provides electrical power for the main propulsion engines starting during both ground and in flight operations. two batteries are charged at a constant potential (28V) respectively from DC BUS 2 (main battery) and DC BUS 1 (emer battery). The main battery (MAIN BAT) has a capacity of 43 Ah. Î For these applications.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 MultiFunction Computers (MFC) description Page 86/ 187 MultiFunction Computers (MFC) description V2420 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î Transfer contactors are controlled in the same way. V2420 Copyright © 2001-2008 . MFC 2 on shelf 92 VU. Î For safety purposes. Î MFCs control the bat charge contactor and monitor the current charge and abnormal battery operating condition or thermal runaway.ATR Training Centre . Î Multifunction computers 1 and 2 provide controls for batteries proper operation and transfer contactors controls.ATA 24 MultiFunction Computers (MFC) description Page 87/ 187 Î The two MultiFunction Computers (MFC) are located in the RH electronic racks: ♦ ♦ MFC 1 on shelf 91 VU. the main battery is controlled by MFC 1 module 1B or MFC 2 module 2B and emergency battery is controlled by MFC 1 module 1A or MFC 2 module 2A.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 24 Transformer Rectifier Unit (TRU) description Page 88/ 187 Transformer Rectifier Unit (TRU) description V2422 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î With TRU pushbutton depressed. DC STBY BUS. TRU supplies: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ EMER BUS. V2422 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 24 Transformer Rectifier Unit (TRU) description Page 89/ 187 Î The Transformer Rectifier Unit is located on the floor of the shelf 96 VU. static inverter 1 which supplies only 115 and 26 VAC STBY busses bars (through contactor 97 PA activated). Î This mode of distribution is indicated by illumination of arrow on 91 PA pushbutton. ESS BUS.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 DC external power description Page 90/ 187 DC external power description V2424 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

a Hall Effect Current Sensor. It has three pins: two for power transfer and a smaller one for its control.DC external power description ATA 24 Page 91/ 187 Î The DC external receptacle. connects external power to DC Bus 1 (and. when it is closed. which can be reached through an access door. installed on the external power channel. to DC Bus 2) and to the start line. Î External Power Contactor 11 PG is controlled by the BPCU and.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the BPCU. an external power contactor. Î The DC external receptacle can be reached through an access door. external power quality signals and. Î The DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) receives. provides control. Î This receptacle allows the aircraft to be supplied on ground with 28 VDC power from a Ground Power Unit (GPU).6 . In addition it sends signals directly to the current measuring instrument. through BTC in closed position. and fault detection for the DC external power system. sends a signal to the BPCU for external power overload protection. protection. from the external receptacle and the Hall Effect Sensor. Î The DC external power system is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an external power. is installed on the forward section of the aircraft. V2424 Copyright © 2001-2008 . by monitoring them. Î The Hall Effect Current Sensor. The smaller will automatically switch off power to prevent arcing if external power is removed.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2424 DC external power description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 92/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .

provides control.DC external power description ATA 24 Page 93/ 187 Î The DC external receptacle. Î The DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) receives. It has three pins: two for power transfer and a smaller one for its control. V2424 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . sends a signal to the BPCU for external power overload protection. protection. installed on the external power channel. is installed on the forward section of the aircraft. Î The DC external power system is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an external power. when it is closed. and fault detection for the DC external power system. Î The Hall Effect Current Sensor. which can be reached through an access door. from the external receptacle and the Hall Effect Sensor. a Hall Effect Current Sensor. Î This receptacle allows the aircraft to be supplied on ground with 28 VDC power from a Ground Power Unit (GPU). by monitoring them.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. to DC Bus 2) and to the start line. the BPCU. In addition it sends signals directly to the current measuring instrument.ATR Training Centre . through BTC in closed position. Î External Power Contactor 11 PG is controlled by the BPCU and. The smaller will automatically switch off power to prevent arcing if external power is removed. an external power contactor. Î The DC external receptacle can be reached through an access door. external power quality signals and. connects external power to DC Bus 1 (and.

ATA 24 Contactors description Page 94/ 187 Contactors description V2426 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 24 Î Î Î Î Î Î Contactors description Page 95/ 187 Utility busses contactors are located in the 122 VU panel. The other busses contactors are located in the 123 VU panel.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. external power and batteries to the electrical network.ATR Training Centre . V2426 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Service bus contactors are located in the 121 VU panel. Contactors are used to connect generators. To make removal and installation easier. Ground handling bus contactors are located in the 95 VU panel. most are "PLUG-IN" contactors.

After electrical rack. feeders are made of copper again. two thermal sensors (feeder overheat sensors) are located on the joints of the two conductors. Feeder overheat sensors and feeder connections are located in the electrical rack 90 VU and protected by a cover.ATA 24 Feeders Overheat sensors description Page 96/ 187 Feeders Overheat sensors description Î Î Î Î Î Î Î In order to detect any open wire condition. The two sensors send temperature values to the MultiFunction Computer (MFC) for analysis. From terminal block 503 VT to electrical rack 90 VU. feeders are made of two nickel-plated aluminium leads connected in parallel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The feeders are made of copper from starter / generator to terminal block 503 VT. V2428 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The connections are checked by two feeder overheat sensors (thermistances) which monitor feeders temperature due to current flows.6 .ATR Training Centre .

two thermal sensors (feeder overheat sensors) are located on the joints of the two conductors. feeders are made of two nickel-plated aluminium leads connected in parallel. From terminal block 503 VT to electrical rack 90 VU. The feeders are made of copper from starter / generator to terminal block 503 VT.ATA 24 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Feeders Overheat sensors description Page 97/ 187 In order to detect any open wire condition. Feeder overheat sensors and feeder connections are located in the electrical rack 90 VU and protected by a cover. The connections are checked by two feeder overheat sensors (thermistances) which monitor feeders temperature due to current flows. The two sensors send temperature values to the MultiFunction Computer (MFC) for analysis.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2428 Copyright © 2001-2008 . feeders are made of copper again.ATR Training Centre .6 . After electrical rack.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation system indicating Page 98/ 187 DC Electrical generation system indicating V2432 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

This measurement occurs through the related charge / discharge shunt 22 PA (MAIN BAT) and 39 PA (EMER BAT). Î The selector controls the voltage and current if it is set to each single DC generating source as follows: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î S/G 1 (GEN 1). Î The two DC instruments and the selector are installed on LH maintenance panel 101 VU. main battery (MAIN BAT). Another Hall Effect Current sensor (for external power channel) gives current indications relevant to the DC external power. under a control selector.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. in true amperes. of battery selected by BAT SEL switch on the same panel. with a center zero.ATR Training Centre . S/G 2 (GEN 2). for each channel. Voltage indications. Current indications are given. V2432 Copyright © 2001-2008 . by two Hall Effect Current sensors through a separate output. are given by the related POR installed at the load end of each generator feeder. It shows the charge and discharge current.6 . In addition an ammeter. emer battery (EMER BAT). DC external power (EXT PWR). is installed on MAIN ELEC PWR panel.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation system indicating Page 99/ 187 Î The DC measuring system gives voltage and current indication by a voltmetre and an ammetre.

6 . Î When selected on the proper postion. Î Load is mesured from the Hall Effect sensor.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 DC Electrical generation system indicating Page 100/ 187 Î DC generator parameters are displayed on the DC indicators located on the LH maintenance panel. the "ELEC IND" selector allows the relevant parameters to be displayed. V2432 Copyright © 2001-2008 . voltage from the feeder.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

and indicated on the DC AMP indicator located on the main electrical power control panel.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation system indicating Page 101/ 187 Î Batteries voltage is measured at HOT MAIN BAT BUS and HOT EMER BAT BUS level respectively for main and emergency batteries.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Load is measured from shunts. Î Selecting the "BAT SEL" switch allows the batterie load to be checked (charge or discharge). Î When selected on the proper position. V2432 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the "ELEC IND" selector allows the relevant parameters to be displayed.ATR Training Centre . Î Voltage is displayed on the DCV indicator located on the LH maintenance panel.6 .

6 . the "ELEC IND" selector allows the relevant parameters to be displayed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When selected on the proper postion. V2432 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Load is mesured from the Hall Effect sensor. voltage from the feeder.ATA 24 DC Electrical generation system indicating Page 102/ 187 Î DC external power parameters are displayed on the DC indicators located on the LH maintenance panel.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2439 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î It reflects "what's behind" the main electrical power panel in a simplified way.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 AC Electrical generation system Page 103/ 187 AC Electrical generation system Î RH diagram will be used to support the AC general description.

V2439 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . two busses of 26 VAC (AC BUS 1 and AC BUS 2). an AC STBY BUS of 26 VAC. (Each AC BUS is split into a 115 VAC and a 26 VAC busses). an AC STBY BUS of 115 VAC.6 .ATA 24 AC Electrical generation system Page 104/ 187 Î The aircraft AC distribution consists in: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ two busses of 115 VAC (AC BUS 1 and AC BUS 2).

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 105/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2439 AC Electrical generation system Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 106/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2439 AC Electrical generation system Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 24 V2439 AC Electrical generation system Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 107/ 187 ACOS v1.

ATA 24 V2439 AC Electrical generation system Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 108/ 187 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 109/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2439 AC Electrical generation system Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 24 V2439 AC Electrical generation system Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 110/ 187 ACOS v1.

Inverter 2 normally supplies the AC BUSSES 2. Inverter 1 is normally supplied from the DC BUS 1 and inverter 2 from the DC BUS 2. In case of single inverter failure.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Inverter 1 normally supplies the AC BUSSES 1 and the AC STBY BUSSES. the operating inverter automatically supplies all the AC BUSSES.6 .ATA 24 Î Î Î Î AC Electrical generation system Page 111/ 187 The AC constant frequency is provided by two static inverters which convert DC into AC.ATR Training Centre . V2439 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V2444 Copyright © 2001-2008 . inverter 1 supplies the AC BUSSES 1 (26 / 115 volts) and the AC STBY BUSSES (26 / 115 volts).6 . Î Inverter 2 supplies the AC BUSSES 2 (26 / 115 volts).ATA 24 AC normal operation Page 112/ 187 AC normal operation Î In normal operation.

ATA 24 AC normal operation Page 113/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2444 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 AC abnormal operation Page 114/ 187 AC abnormal operation V2445 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

"BUS OFF" light extinguishes and "INV FAULT" light illuminates on MAIN ELEC PWR panel. 9 XA bus-tie relay closes and AC BUSSES 1 (26 / 115 volts) are supplied from inverter 2. Simultaneously. Should inverter 1 fail. amber "ELEC" on Crew Alerting Panel (CAP).6 . master CAUTION flashing. Ten seconds later.ATR Training Centre . 19 XA relay opens and "BUS OFF" light illuminates on MAIN ELEC PWR panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2445 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the AC STBY BUSSES are supplied from inverter 2.AC abnormal operation ATA 24 Page 115/ 187 Î Any electrical failure will be indicated by: ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î a single chime.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 Inverters description Page 116/ 187 Inverters description V2441 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 Inverters description Page 117/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2441 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 118/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2441 Inverters description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

. supplies 115 and 26 VAC BUS 2. V2441 Copyright © 2001-2008 .INV 2.Nominal Frequency: 400 ± 5 Hz single phase .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the operating Inverter automatically supplies all AC busses. supplies: 115 and 26 VAC BUS 1. Î Electrical characteristics: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ . Î In normal conditions: ♦ ♦ .ATR Training Centre .Power: 500 VA continuous operation (575 VA for 30 minutes). inverter 2 on shelf 94VU.INV 1. . which is connected to DC BUS 1. 750 VA for 5 minutes (forced air cooling).Output voltage: w 115 ± 4 V 26 ± 1 V .6 . Î In the event of a single inverter failure. Î Inverters are designed to operate with both natural convection and forced cooling. which is connected to DC BUS 2.DC input supply voltage: 18 to 31 V from main DC busses.Inverters description ATA 24 Page 119/ 187 Î Inverters 1 and 2 are located in the RH electrical racks: ♦ ♦ inverter 1 on shelf 93VU. 115 and 26 VAC STBY BUS. 500 VA for 30 minutes with convection cooling only.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 AC Electrical generation system indicating Page 120/ 187 AC Electrical generation system indicating V2443 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Inverter 2 (INV 2). Î The selector allows control of the above mentioned parameters if it is set to each single AC generating source as follows: ♦ ♦ Inverter 1 (INV 1). is given by a shunt internal to each Inverter. frequency. V2443 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The AC indication.6 . load. by a voltmeter. Î Voltage and frequency indications are given directly by each single AC generating source always through the selector set. a loadmeter and a frequency meter.ATR Training Centre . for AC generation. under a selector.ATA 24 AC Electrical generation system indicating Page 121/ 187 Î The AC (constant frequency) measuring system gives the following indications: ♦ ♦ ♦ voltage. Î The three AC instruments and the selector are installed on LH maintenance panel 101 VU.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . Note: the values which are displayed concern the 115 VAC / 400 Hz but not the 26 VAC.ATA 24 Î Î Î Î AC Electrical generation system indicating Page 122/ 187 Inverters electrical parameters are displayed on the AC indicators located on the LH maintenance panel. the "ELEC IND" selector allows the relevant parameters to be displayed. V2443 Copyright © 2001-2008 . When selected on the proper position. Select INV 2 position.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î It reflects "what's behind" the AC WILD electrical power panel in a simplified way.6 .ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 123/ 187 ACW Electrical generation system description Î RH diagram will be used to support the ACW general description.

ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 124/ 187 Î The aircraft ACW distribution consist of two main busses (ACW BUS 1 and ACW BUS 2).6 . V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a SERVICE BUS provides supply for aircraft services such as the galley power.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Additionally.

ATA 24 V2446 ACW Electrical generation system description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 125/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 V2446 ACW Electrical generation system description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 126/ 187 ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 127/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2446 ACW Electrical generation system description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre . V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 128/ 187 Î The ACW (variable frequency) power source is provided by two ACW generators driven by the power turbines through the propeller Reduction Gear Boxes (RGB).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 129/ 187 Î A Generator Control Unit (GCU) associated with each generator provides control for generator operation.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. load shedding.ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 130/ 187 Î A Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) controls: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ main busses tie. external power. V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 . service bus.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 131/ 187 Î An AC external receptacle allows the aircraft to be supplied from a Ground Power Unit (GPU).6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 132/ 187 Î Contactors are used to connect the alternators and the external power to the ACW electrical network.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system description Page 133/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2446 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 ACW normal operation Page 134/ 187 ACW normal operation V2460 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

As external power has priority over aircraft generators. the "AVAIL" light illuminates on AC WILD ELEC PWR panel. ACW GEN 1 line contactor closes and BTC's open. Set "OFF" EXT PWR pushbutton. Once AC GPU is unplugged. When BAT switch is set to "ON" position and EXT PWR pushbutton is selected "ON". ACW GEN 2 remains off line. Np reaches 100%. The AC WILD ELEC PWR panel is dark. corresponding to the normal operation. Set "ON" EXT PWR pushbutton. ACW GEN 2 connects on line and supplies ACW BUS 2 and ACW BUS 1 through the BTC's. When EXT PWR pushbutton is selected "OFF". AC GPU supplies ACW busses. the ACW SVCE BUS is automatically shed. At 66% Np. V2460 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .8%) for ACW supply.6 . to avoid GEN 2 overload. As ACW GEN 1 is off line. During ground operations. ACW GEN 2 is able to provide current. Selecting "ON" the ACW SVCE BUS pushbutton on cabin attendant's panel allows the ACW SVCE BUS to be supplied from external power. as the Condition Lever is moved forward. the fuel governing mode is activated. At take-off. an AC GPU can be used to supply ACW busses. "AVAIL" light extinguishes. When the electrical power is determined to be within acceptable limits by the BPCU. the fuel governing mode is activated. If ACW SVCE BUS pushbutton on cabin attendant's panel is released. Note: The ACW SVCE BUS is now supplied through ACW BUS 1. Following ENG 1 start. Set BAT switch to "ON" position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. As fuel governing mode provides minimum propeller speed (70. the "SHED" light illuminates. Each generator supplies its respective BUS and ACW SVCE BUS is supplied by ACW BUS 1.ACW normal operation ATA 24 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Page 135/ 187 Set "ON" the ACW SVCE BUS pushbutton. as the Condition Lever is moved forward. propeller blade angle governing mode takes over from fuel governing mode. The ACW SVCE BUS may be supplied even with battery switch OFF on MAIN ELEC PWR panel. Following ENG 2 start.

The BPCU automatically sheds the ACW SVCE BUS as soon as one generator is off line.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a faulty generator reset may be attempted before selecting the ACW GEN pushbutton definitively OFF. V2461 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 ACW abnormal operation Page 136/ 187 ACW abnormal operation Î Î Î Î If one ACW generator fails during the operation. the relevant GCU opens the line contactor and the BPCU closes the BTC. All these operations are automatic. According to procedure.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre . the BPCU automatically sheds the ACW SVCE BUS.ATA 24 ACW abnormal operation Page 137/ 187 Î Should an overload occurs.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2461 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The BPCU prevents the BTC from closing.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 ACW abnormal operation Page 138/ 187 Î If a short circuit occurs on one ACW BUS. ACW BUS OFF light and SHED light. Î As a result ACW GEN FAULT light. V2461 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . illuminate. the relevant GCU opens the relevant line contactor and the BPCU sheds the ACW SVCE BUS. keeping the opposite channel isolated.6 .

ACW is not available.ATA 24 ACW Hotel mode operation Page 139/ 187 ACW Hotel mode operation Î In Hotel Mode.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. as propeller is stopped. V2462 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 24 ACW external power operation Page 140/ 187 ACW external power operation V2463 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

The BTC flow bar extinguishes and "ACW BUS 2 OFF" light illuminates indicating that BTC 2 is open. Î ACW Bus Tie Contactors (BTC) operational test is performed with a GPU and weight on wheels. Then. V2463 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the BAT switch and the EXT PWR pushbutton have to be selected ON. Î As the contactor closes.6 . Î This is indicated by the "AVAIL" light on the overhead panel and by the "AC CNCTD" and "AC PWR NOT USED" white lights located on the External Power control panel. Î Note: That flow bar is illuminated when both BTC 1 and BTC 2 are closed. Î Selecting the guarded "ACW BTC OPNG" toggle switch to "BTC 2 OPEN" causes contactor 8 XU to open. This test allows BTC1 and BTC 2 proper operation to be checked.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î "AC PWR NOT USED" extinguishes also when the ACW SVCE BUS is directly supplied by External Power. Î Selecting the guarded "ACW BTC OPNG" toggle switch to "BTC 1 OPEN" causes contactor 7 XU to open.ATA 24 ACW external power operation Page 141/ 187 Î To connect the GPU to the network. the AC PWR NOT USED light extinguishes on the External Power control panel. supplying AC BUS 1 and AC BUS 2 through the BTC's contactors 7 XU and 8 XU. the 11 XG contactor closes. Î When all the conditions are met. External Power must be available. The BTC flow bar extinguishes and "ACW BUS 1 OFF" light illuminates indicating that BTC 1 is open. Î Restoring the switch to the neutral causes "ACW BUS 1 OFF" light to extinguish and the BTC flow bar to illuminate.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 ACW generators description Page 142/ 187 ACW generators description V2448 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î ACW (variable) frequency power source is provided by two ACW generators driven by the power turbine through the propeller Reduction Gear Box (RGB). Î The output voltage of each ACW generator is 115 / 200 VAC wild frequency with a normal operating frequency range of 341 to 488 Hz corresponding to 70 to 100% Np. Î Each ACW generator is rated to continuously supply 20 KVA over a load power factor range from 0. is attached to the related engine propeller Reduction Gear Box (RGB) with mounting flange adapters and Quick-Attach / Detach (QAD) coupling rings.75 lagging to unity within the speed range of 10245 to 14634 RPM.ATR Training Centre . brushless air-cooled type.ACW generators description ATA 24 Page 143/ 187 Î Each ACW generator.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V2448 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î A case allows generator cooling.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 ACW Generator Control Units (GCU) description Page 144/ 187 ACW Generator Control Units (GCU) description V2450 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 ACW Generator Control Units (GCU) description Page 145/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2450 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 24 V2450 ACW Generator Control Units (GCU) description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 146/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

associated with each ACW generator. differential protection.ATR Training Centre . undervoltage. Î The Generator Control Unit (GCU). magnetic annunciators and a test pushbutton allow respectively identification of a faulty component and testing of the GCU protection circuits. V2450 Copyright © 2001-2008 . overvoltage. over frequency. power and fault current limiting.ATA 24 ACW Generator Control Units (GCU) description Page 147/ 187 Î The two ACW Generator Control Units (GCU) are located in the RH electrical racks: ♦ ♦ GCU 1 on shelf 95VU. open phase. under frequency. provides control for generator operation. Î Located on the front face of each unit. GCU 2 on shelf 93VU.6 . bus tie lock out. Î The GCU provides the following controls and protection functions: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ voltage regulation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 Current Transformers description Page 148/ 187 Current Transformers description V2452 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

differential current protection. V2452 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . two in the electrical racks 126 VU.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. one phase protection.ATR Training Centre . Î Two current transformers for each ACW generator channel provide through the related GCU: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ overload protection.ATA 24 Current Transformers description Page 149/ 187 Î There are four three-phase current transformers: ♦ ♦ two within each ACW generator. current measuring.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 ACW Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Page 150/ 187 ACW Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description V2454 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 24 ACW Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Page 151/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2454 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 152/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 V2454 ACW Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ACW service bus shedding. overfrequency protection. phase sequence protection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . open phase protection. undervoltage protection. V2454 Copyright © 2001-2008 . load shedding. Î The Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) controls main busses tie.ATR Training Centre . Î The BPCU protective functions are: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ BTC's control and lockout. the service bus. Î Located on the front face of the unit. overcurrent protection. magnetic annunciators and a test pushbutton allow respectively identification of a faulty component and testing of the BPCU protection circuits. and external power. overvoltage protection. external power control and monitoring. underfrequency protection.ATA 24 ACW Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description Page 153/ 187 Î The ACW Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) is located in the RH electronics rack shelf 95 VU.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 ACW External Power desription Page 154/ 187 ACW External Power desription V2456 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 ACW External Power desription Page 155/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2456 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 156/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 V2456 ACW External Power desription Copyright © 2001-2008 .

fault detection and indications for the AC external power system. gives control. Î The ACW BPCU receives. through the BTC's in closed position. a current transformer. In addition it sends other signals to the BPCU for external power current measuring.6 . Î This receptacle allows the aircraft to be supplied on ground with three phase 400 Hz . installed on the external power channel. external power quality signals and. It has six pins: four for power transfer and a two (smaller) for its control. Î EPC 11 XG is controlled by BPCU and. Î The three-phase current transformer. when it is closed. the BPCU. is installed in the forward section of the aircraft.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. which can be reached through an external access door.ATR Training Centre . an external power contactor. Î The AC external can be reached through an access door. connects external power to ACW busses 1 and 2. sends signals to the BPCU for external power overload and external power open phase protection. protection. Î AC external power system is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an external receptacle. from external receptacle and the current transformer.115 / 200 VAC power from a Ground Power Unit (GPU). by monitoring them. The smaller pins will automatically switch off power to prevent arcing when external power is removed.ATA 24 ACW External Power desription Page 157/ 187 Î The AC external power receptacle. V2456 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 24 External power current transformers description Page 158/ 187 External power current transformers description V2458 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

a three-phase current transformer provides: ♦ ♦ ♦ external power.ATR Training Centre . open phase protection. Î Through the BPCU.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2458 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 24 External power current transformers description Page 159/ 187 Î The current transformer is located in the electric racks panel 126 VU. current measuring.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system indicating Page 160/ 187 ACW Electrical generation system indicating V2459 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system indicating Page 161/ 187 Î The AC (wild frequency) measuring system gives the following indications: ♦ ♦ ♦ voltage. frequency. for the ACW channels. Î Voltage and frequency indications are always given directly by each single AC generating source through the selector set. Î The ACW three-phase indications. are given by the associated three-phase current transformers monitored by the related GCU. Î The selector allows the control of the above mentioned parameters if it is set to each single AC generating source as follows: ♦ ♦ ♦ ACW Generator 1 (GEN 1). by a voltmeter. Î The ACW three-phase indications. Î The three AC instruments and the selector are installed on LH maintenance panel 101 VU. for AC external power. ACW Generator 2 (GEN 2).6 .ATR Training Centre . a loadmeter and an frequencymeter under a selector. is given by the associated three-phase current transformer monitored by the BCPU. V2459 Copyright © 2001-2008 . load. ACW external power (EXT PWR).

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Load is mesured from the current transformer through the GCU (voltage and frequency from phase C).ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system indicating Page 162/ 187 Î AC generator parameters are displayed on the AC indicators located on the LH maintenance panel. Î When selected on the proper postion. the "ELEC IND" selector allows the relevant parameters to be displayed.ATR Training Centre .6 . V2459 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

the "ELEC IND" selector allows the relevant parameters to be displayed. Î When selected on the proper postion. Î Load is mesured from the current transformer through the BPCU (voltage and frequency from phase C).ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 ACW Electrical generation system indicating Page 163/ 187 Î AC external power parameters are displayed on the AC indicators located on the LH maintenance panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2459 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 164/ 187 Electrical power system controls and indicators V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

the BTC is open allowing isolated operation of both generator circuits.6 . Controls the energization of associated generator and the resetting of the protection system after failure. Allows to connect DC external power if BAT switch is ON. <2> BTC pushbutton. DC SVCE BUS and both UTLY BUSSES are disconnected from associated main DC BUS. Contactor is closed in normal operation. Associated generator is de-energized and associated generator contactor is open. ♦ ♦ ON: (pushbutton pressed in). OFF: (pushbutton released).Start sequence initiated (in this case.ATA 24 Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 165/ 187 Î Look at the MAIN ELEC PWR Panel (DC). . Controls the operations of the associated BATTERY CHARGE CONTACTOR. connects both main DC BUSSES.A protection trip initiated by the associated GCU If it is caused by a generator underspeed. the CCAS will be activated (MC + SC + ELEC on CAP). ♦ ♦ AVAIL: Illuminates green when conditions of DC external power connection are met. ON: (pressed in). ♦ NORM: (released). reset will be automatic. the flow bar is illuminated. Hotel Mode or single generation. The charge contactor is open. ♦ ISOL: (pressed in). OFF: (pushbutton released).Thermal runaway of battery. The OFF light illuminates white.In normal conditions with both generators operating. <1> DC GEN pushbutton. <5> DC BUS OFF lights. the BUS TIE CONTACTOR closes and affected DC BUS is automatically supplied from the remaining generator. ♦ ♦ ♦ NORM: (pushbutton pressed in). <4> DC SVCE / UTLY BUS pushbutton. Associated generator is energized and associated generator contactor closes if the network electrical parameters are normal. The BTC is open. ♦ ♦ ♦ ON: (pushbutton pressed in). ISOL light illuminates white. If one DC BUS is OFF. Controls connection / disconnection of DC SVCE BUS and both UTLY BUSSES to associated main DC BUSSES.An opening of a generator contactor except if pushbutton is selected OFF. The BPCU automatically controls the BTC. <3> EXT PWR pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <6> BAT CHG pushbuttons. The contactor is controlled by the MFC. the BTC is automatically closed. .Undervoltage of DC MAIN BUS (< 25 volts).ATR Training Centre . a manual reset has to be performed.an OVRD signal on BAT switch. For the other cases. Illuminates amber when associated main DC BUS is not supplied. FAULT: illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated in event of: . Note: AC BUS 1 and 2 are isolated. OFF: (pushbutton released). when closed. V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The OFF light illuminates white. SHED: Illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when a load shed condition controlled by the BPCU is present and at least one DC SVCE UTLY BUS is disconnected from associated main DC BUS.In case of external power operation. DC SVCE BUS and both UTLY BUSSES are available unless a load shed signal is provided by the BPCU. . and close when start rotary selector leaves START or CRANK position). In both cases. The OFF light iluminates white. . This guarded pushbutton controls the DC BUS TIE CONTACTOR (BTC) which. it opens in case of: . . . both BCC are open.

OVRD: Ensures busses are supplied by their respective battery in case of dual DC GEN loss. <8> Emergency supply ind.With one or both DC GEN.With batteries only (no DC GEN.ESS BUS is supplied from HOT MAIN BAT BUS. OVRD pushbutton has to be pressed (OVRD illuminates white) to transfer STBY BUSSES (DC and AC through INV 1) to EMER BAT. EMER BUS and STBY BUSSES (DC and AC through INV 1).An override detected by the MFC. the charge contactor automatically opens.5 volts). ON: (pushbutton pressed in). Arrow illuminates amber when supply of DC EMER BUS. Following a dual DC GEN loss. "UND / V" illuminates amber when the MAIN BAT is discharging (STBY BUS below 19. In this case. Indicates the change charge (CH) / discharge (DCH) current of the selected battery.ESS BUS. OFF: MAIN and EMER BATS are only connected to the relevant HOT MAIN and HOT EMER BAT BUSSES. INV 1 and DC ESS BUS from TRU is effective. This position is protected by a toggle guard. ON light illuminates white. . STBY BUSSES (DC and AC through INV1) are supplied from HOT MAIN BAT BUS.ATR Training Centre . ♦ ♦ NORM: (pushbutton released).6 . Enables to select the battery checked by the ammeter. <10> OVRD pushbutton.EMER BUS and STBY BUSSES are supplied from HOT EMER BAT BUS. . Left arrow illuminates amber when the DC EMER BUS is supplied from the EMER BAT. no TRU). .ATA 24 ♦ Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 166/ 187 FAULT: Illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated in the event of: . no EXT PWR. <11> DC AMP ind.A failure of the charge contactor. TRU is not connected to ACW BUS 2. . The TRU is connected to ACW BUS 2. <12> BAT AMP reading selector.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The BAT toggle switch is a three positions switch: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ON: . or EXT PWR connected: . <9> BAT toggle switch. DC STBY BUS. .EMER BUS is supplied from the HOT EMER BAT BUS. ♦ ♦ Right arrow illuminates amber when the DC ESS BUS is supplied from the MAIN BAT. ON or OVRD: With TRU connected (Dual DC GEN loss) TRU supplies ESS BUS. <7> TRU pushbutton.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 167/ 187 This page intentionally left blank V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 168/ 187 ACOS v1.ATA 24 V2464 Electrical power system controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

the AC BTR is automatically closed.In normal conditions. .ATA 24 Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 169/ 187 Î Look at the MAIN ELEC PWR Panel (AC). <3> BTC pushbutton. . <2> BUS OFF light Illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when the associated AC BUS is not supplied. This may be caused by an inverter failure or a power supply loss. ISOL: (pushbutton depressed). The BPCU automatically controls the DC BTC and a separate logic controls the AC BTR. The INV FAULT light illuminates and associated BUS is supplied by remaining INV. when closed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . For more details. <1> INV FAULT light Illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when an under / over voltage detected at the output of the associated inverter. V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The AC BTR is open. the AC BTR is open.ATR Training Centre .In case of inverter failure. ♦ ♦ NORM: (pushbutton released). click on a button or an indicating light. with both inverters running. connects both main AC BUSSES. allowing dependant operation of both inverter circuits. ISOL light illuminates white. This guarded pushbutton controls the AC BUS TIE relay (AC BTR) which.

ATA 24 V2464 Electrical power system controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 170/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

♦ OFF: (pushbutton released). Controls the energization of the associated generator and the resetting of the protection system after failure. . <1> ACW GEN pushbutton. frequency limits. open phase. The pushbutton can be pressed in.a protection trip initiated by the associated GCU. EXT PWR has priority over the engine driven generators. with both generators running. ISOL: (pushbutton depressed). ♦ ♦ NORM: (pushbutton released). overload. For the other cases.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ON blue light illuminates. OFF light illuminates white. allowing individual operation of both generator circuits. the EXT PWR can be used. the BTC's are closed and affected ACW BUS is automatically supplied from the remaining generator. connects both main ACW BUSSES in parallel. This guarded pushbutton controls the ACW BUS Tie contactors (BTC 1 and BTC 2) which. ♦ ON: (pushbutton depressed).ATA 24 Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 171/ 187 Î Look at the AC WILD ELEC PWR Panel. BTC 1 and 2 are automatically closed.6 . a manual reset has to be performed. reset will be automatic. BTC 1 and 2 are opened. If it is caused by a generator underspeed. The associated generator is de-energized and the associated generator contactor is open.an opening of a generator contactor except if pushbutton is selected OFF. The BTC 1 and 2 are opened. . The light extinguishes and the fault circuit is reset when the pushbutton is cycled to the out position. ♦ FAULT: Illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated in the event of: . when closed. When the above conditions are in the correct status. In both cases. The BPCU automatically controls the BTC 1 and 2: . ISOL light illuminates white. <3> BTC pushbutton. The AVAIL light illuminates green. <2> ACW BUS OFF light Illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when the associated ACW BUS is not supplied. <4> EXT PWR pushbutton. The power is controlled via the BUS POWER CONTROL UNIT (BPCU) which provides protection for: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ voltage limits phase sequence. The associated generator is energized and the associated generator contactor closed if the network electrical parameters are normal. The flow bar is illuminated. V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ACW GEN pushbutton.In normal conditions.ATR Training Centre .In case of external power operation or single generator failure.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 172/ 187 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 24 V2464 Electrical power system controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .

<6> AC VOLTAGE INDICATOR Indicates voltage on selected AC source.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. of selected AC source. Normal reading is: 400 Hz ± 5 Hz. <1> ACW BUS TIE CONTACTORS Used to open the corresponding ACW BTC (maintenance action). in Hz. <5> FREQUENCY INDICATOR Indicates frequency. <7> ROTARY SELECTOR Allows for selected sources to display relevant current parameters on indicators. Normal reading for each generator is: less than 300 A. <3> DC CURRENT INDICATOR Indicates the current generated by selected sources. Normal reading is 115 V ± 4 V. for battery under load: 23 to 28 volts.ATR Training Centre . <4> AC LOAD INDICATOR Indicates in hundred percent the load of selected AC source. Normal reading is: ♦ ♦ for battery without load: 25 to 28 volts. Normal reading is below 0. <2> DC VOLTAGE INDICATOR Indicates the voltage of sources selected by the rotary selector.ATA 24 Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 173/ 187 Î Look at the LH Maintenance Panel.5.6 . V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 174/ 187 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 V2464 Electrical power system controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

the DC source is available and the pushbutton is released. As soon as one of the two pushbuttons is selected OFF.ATA 24 Electrical power system controls and indicators Page 175/ 187 Î Look at the Cabin Attendant Panel. OFF (pushbutton released): The SVCE BUS is disconnected from the available power source. <2> Connect the ACW SVCE BUS to the EXT PWR source or to the ACW BUS 1 when it is energized. . <1> Controls the supply of the DC SVCE BUS.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. . or under generator supply.ATR Training Centre . ♦ ♦ ♦ ON (pushbutton depressed): Whenever ACW of acceptable quality is available. SHED illuminates amber when: .the pushbutton is pressed and an overboard shed occurs. V2464 Copyright © 2001-2008 . .the pushbutton is pressed and an overboard shed occurs. the light illuminates green. the bus is isolated. Note: ♦ ♦ With EXT PWR available but not ON.6 . The ON light extinguishes. only the cabin attendant's panel pushbutton has control. OFF (pushbutton released): The DC SVCE BUS is disconnected from the available power source.the pushbutton is pressed and only one ACW generator is on line.the ACW source is available and the pushbutton is released. ♦ ♦ ♦ ON (pushbutton depressed): The light is illuminated green when DC SVCE BUS is energized. The supply of the bus may be performed with batteries switched OFF. With EXT PWR selected ON. DC SVCE BUS will be supplied if both cockpit DC SVCE BUS and UTLY BUS pushbutton and the cabin attendant's panel DC SVCE BUS pushbutton are selected ON. SHED illuminates amber when: . The ON light extinguishes.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 DC GCU operational test Page 176/ 187 DC GCU operational test V2468 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

.the two arrow legends of BAT caution light 6PA illuminate. ♦ Place BAT selector switch 7PA in ON position and check that: . After 15 sec.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ On panel 29 VU place BAT selector switch 7PA in OFF position. if GCU operates correctly. the CC indicator light remains on as long as the CC switch is pressed. INV FAULT 2 legend also illuminates. ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU shelf 5(4) on DC GCU1 (2) front panel depress the CC switch and verify that the CC indicator light illuminates. V2468 Copyright © 2001-2008 . If a failure is detected. CC indicator light extinguishes.6 .DC GCU operational test ATA 24 Page 177/ 187 System studied:DC generator control unit operational test Î Task description: ♦ On RH electronics rack 90 VU open access door 214 BZ.bus OFF 1 and 2 legends of INV FAULT / BUS OFF caution lights 7XN and 8XN illuminate and after about 5 secs.ATR Training Centre . ♦ On RH electronics rack 90 VU close access door 214BZ.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 DC BPCU operational test Page 178/ 187 DC BPCU operational test V2469 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

bus OFF 1 and 2 legends of INV FAULT / BUS OFF caution lights 7XN and 8XN illuminate and after about 5 secs. ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU shelf 5 on DC BPCU front panel depress the CC switch and verify that the CC indicator light illuminates. If DC BPCU operates correctly.ATR Training Centre . INV FAULT 2 legend also illuminates. and remains on as long the pushbutton is kept depressed. If one or several circuits of the BPCU are defective. then it extinguishes.ATA 24 DC BPCU operational test Page 179/ 187 System studied:DC bus power control unit operational test Î Task description: ♦ Place BAT selector switch 7PA in ON position and check that: .1 sec and subsequently again illuminates. CC indicator light remain on for 11 sec (testing time). the indicator light will remain illuminated for 15 sec. ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU open access door 214BZ.6 .the two arrow legends of BAT caution light 6PA illuminate. ♦ On panel 29VU place BAT selector switch 7PA in OFF position. . ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU close access door 214BZ. V2469 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. it then extinguishes for 0.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 ACW GCU operational test Page 180/ 187 ACW GCU operational test V2471 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU shelf 5 (3) on ACW GCU 1 (2) front panel depress and hold for 10 secs the CC switch and verify that the CC indicator light illuminates. ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU close access door 214BZ. CC indicator light remains on as long as CC switch is depressed.BUS OFF 1 and 2 legends of INV FAULT / BUS OFF caution lights 7XN and 8XN illuminate and after about 5 secs. V2471 Copyright © 2001-2008 . if GCU operates correctly.ATR Training Centre . INV FAULT 2 legend also illuminates. ♦ Place BAT selector switch 7PA in ON position and check that: .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . ♦ On panel 29VU place BAT selector switch 7PA in OFF position.ATA 24 ACW GCU operational test Page 181/ 187 System studied:ACW generator control unit operational test Î Task description: ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU open access door 214BZ. If a failure is detected on GCU. After 7 ± 1 secs (testing time). . CC indicator light extinguishes.the two arrow legends of BAT caution light 6PA illuminate.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 24 ACW BPCU operational test Page 182/ 187 ACW BPCU operational test V2472 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

INV FAULT 2 legend also illuminates. ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU close access door 214BZ. V2472 Copyright © 2001-2008 .the two arrow legends of BAT caution light 6PA illuminate. the CC indicator light remains on. if ACW BPCU operates correctly. If a failure is detected on ACW BPCU.ATR Training Centre .BUS OFF 1 and 2 legends of INV FAULT / BUS OFF caution lights 7XN and 8XN illuminate and after about 5 secs.6 . ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU shelf 6 on ACW BPCU front panel depress the CC switch and verify that the CC indicator light illuminates. . ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU open access door 214BZ. After 7 ± 1 secs (testing time).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 24 ACW BPCU operational test Page 183/ 187 System studied:ACW bus power control unit operational test Î Task description: Note: BPCU operational test can be performed on ground with the external power not used. CC indicator light extinguishes. ♦ On panel 29VU place BAT selector switch 7PA in OFF position. as long as CC switch is depressed. ♦ Place BAT selector switch 7PA in ON position and check that: .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 24 ACW bus tie contactors operational test Page 184/ 187 ACW bus tie contactors operational test V2473 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ACW bus OFF 2 caution light 8XB illuminates. make certain that: .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.the flow bar legend of BTC pushbutton 18XU illuminates.ACW bus OFF 1 caution light 7XB illuminates. On panel 26VU.the flow bar legend of BTC pushbutton 18XU is OFF. On panel 26VU. . ♦ Place ELEC / ACW BTC OPNG switch 21XU in BTC 2 OPEN position. . make certain that: .the flow bar legend of BTC pushbutton 18XU illuminates.ACW bus OFF 2 caution light 7XB extinguishes. make certain that: . . make certain that: .ACW bus OFF 1 caution light 7XB extinguishes.ATA 24 ACW bus tie contactors operational test Page 185/ 187 System studied:ACW bus tie contactors operational test Î Task description: ♦ Energization of aircraft AC network (see JIC: 244100-EAD-10000). ♦ On RH electronics rack 90VU close access door 214BZ.the flow bar legend of BTC pushbutton 18XU is OFF. ♦ De-energization of aircraft AC network (see JIC: 244100-EAD-10000).ATR Training Centre . . Place ELEC / ACW BTC OPNG switch 21XU in NORM / FLT position. V2473 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Place ELEC / ACW BTC OPNG switch 21XU in NORM / FLT position. On panel 26VU. ♦ Place ELEC / ACW BTC OPNG switch 21XU in BTC 1 OPEN position.6 . On panel 26VU.

Summary ATA 24 Page 186/ 187 ATA 24 ELECTRICAL POWER V2473 General description 2 Control panels 6 Interfaces 7 Features 8 Safety and precautions 15 DC Electrical generation description 16 DC Electrical generation cockpit location 46 DC normal operation 48 DC abnormal operation 52 DC Hotel Mode operation 61 DC ground handling bus operation 62 DC service bus operation 64 DC external power operation 66 DC Starters / Generators description 68 DC Generator Control Unit (GCU) description 72 Hall effect sensors description 76 DC Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description 78 Batteries description 82 MultiFunction Computers (MFC) description 86 Transformer Rectifier Unit (TRU) description 88 DC external power description 90 Contactors description 94 Feeders Overheat sensors description 96 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .Summary ATA 24 DC Electrical generation system indicating V2473 Page 187/ 187 98 AC Electrical generation system 103 AC normal operation 112 AC abnormal operation 114 Inverters description 116 AC Electrical generation system indicating 120 ACW Electrical generation system description 123 ACW normal operation 134 ACW abnormal operation 136 ACW Hotel mode operation 139 ACW external power operation 140 ACW generators description 142 ACW Generator Control Units (GCU) description 144 Current Transformers description 148 ACW Bus Power Control Unit (BPCU) description 150 ACW External Power desription 154 External power current transformers description 158 ACW Electrical generation system indicating 160 Electrical power system controls and indicators 164 DC GCU operational test 176 DC BPCU operational test 178 ACW GCU operational test 180 ACW BPCU operational test 182 ACW bus tie contactors operational test 184 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

.6 ATA 25 EQUIPMENT / FURNISHING Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. S2501 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 25 Flight compartment seats Page 2/ 44 Flight compartment seats Î Two captain and first officer seats are adjustable on the three axes. Next to the pilot. a documents door allows an exchange with exterior.ATR Training Centre . and bolted on to the floor structure.

This seat is elevated for good visibility of instruments and corresponding footrests are installed on the aft section of the center pedestal. S2501 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .Flight compartment seats ATA 25 Page 3/ 44 Î One observer folding seat is hinged on to the electronic rack.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 25 Flight compartment emergency equipment Page 4/ 44 Flight compartment emergency equipment S2502 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 25 General description Page 5/ 44 General description The secured door is installed between the cockpit and the cargo compartment for all ATR models equipped with a forward cargo door. V2509 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 25 General description Page 6/ 44 FUNCTIONS The cockpit secured door.6 . V2509 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The door allows air ventilation in case of rapid decompression.ATR Training Centre . Î Smoke can not penetrate between the cockpit and the cargo compartment. SAFETY Î The secured door protects the cockpit crew against hazardous trajectory of bullets or debris. Î Cockpit and cabin routine access. shall ensure following functions: Î Flight Crew privacy (cabin noise. Î Cockpit emergency exit (jammed door or crew incapacitated). unwanted person).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 25 General description Page 7/ 44 This page intentionally left blank V2509 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 25 V2509 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 8/ 44 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

by unlocking the door.ATR Training Centre . let's play the video! NORMAL OPENING Î The Flight crew can authorize entry.General description ATA 25 Page 9/ 44 The system provides an electrically locking and unlocking of the cockpit door. Now.6 . when the door is closed. which remains closed. Cockpit door control unit (CDCU) The Cockpit door control unit is located in the nose landing gear avionics bay. In normal conditions.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2509 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Now. let's discover this video. CLOSING FROM THE COCKPIT Î The secured door has an electromagnetic locking system controlled by the pilots. until it is pulled open. Now. Cockpit door control panel The Cockpit door control panel (with buzzer sound) is installed on the central pedestal and is accessible by both flight crews. it remains locked. The system is mainly composed of: Î Reinforced cockpit door The reinforced cockpit door and its frame are installed in place of the previous cockpit door and are attached on each side to the flight control column (“canaline”). Î Î Î Î Door control panel The door control panel is installed on the right door panel. The door opens aft. Control switch The Cockpit door control switch is installed on the 121 VU. JAMMED DOOR OPENING Î The left door panel (facing door) can be removed from the cockpit in case of the door becomes jammed by using the quick release hinges that are only accessible from inside the cockpit. have a look to this procedure. The door call panel enables the cabin crew to request access to the cockpit.

To open the door left panel. If the system is switched off and the aircraft power is available.ATR Training Centre . Î ON: The cockpit door locking system is operative. V2510 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the FAULT light on the pedestal Cockpit Door Control panel comes on.ATA 25 Panels location and description Page 10/ 44 Panels location and description The Cockpit Door Locking System ON/OFF Control Switch is located behind the First Officer on the 121VU panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. move the handle located on the cockpit side and pull the left panel. The door is unlocked.6 . The door right panel can be opened from the cargo compartment side by pulling it. Î OFF: The cockpit door locking system is deactivated.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 25 Panels location and description Page 11/ 44 This page intentionally left blank V2510 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 25 V2510 Panels location and description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 44 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.In case of an electrical supply failure. located on the central panel. Note : . buzzer and Door Call Panel are inhibited for 3 minutes. or continuously when the cabin crew has started an EMERGENCY access procedure. Î FAULT: This light comes on when a system failure has been identified or with control switch in OFF position. Î DENY position: Once the button has been moved to this position. Î CLOSE position: The door is locked. . Only EMERGENCY access procedure is possible.If the DENY position has not been used by the pilot for at least 3 minutes. the cabin crew is able to request either the routine or the EMERGENCY access. EMERGENCY access. the door is locked. . the door will unlock at the end of 30 seconds delay. the cockpit door is automatically unlocked.6 . The switch must be pulled and maintained in the open position until the right door panel is pulled open.ATR Training Centre . TOGGLE Switch Î OPEN position: This position is used to enable the cabin crew member to open the cockpit door. V2510 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î OPEN light flashes: the cabin crew has started an EMERGENCY access procedure. BUZZER Î BUZZER sounds: For at least 2 seconds after the cabin crew has requested an access through the CALL push-button on the Door Control Panel.The OPEN position overrides and resets any previous selection. FAULT/OPEN indication Î OPEN light ON: the door is not closed.Panels location and description ATA 25 Page 13/ 44 The cockpit door opening is controlled by a toggle switch. If there is no reaction from the flight crew.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 44 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 25 V2510 Panels location and description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The door right panel can then be pulled open. the door remains locked. DENIED LIGHT illuminates: When the flight crew has denied access. the light remains illuminated for 3 minutes.ATR Training Centre . OPEN Green LED Î Illuminated: The door has been unlocked either by a flight crew action or automatically (during 10 seconds). CALL push-button switch: It is used to sound the buzzer in the cockpit for at least 2 seconds. Î Flashing: An emergency request to enter the cockpit has been made. During this delay. It is used to initiate the emergency opening of the door when the flight crew does not respond. The buzzer will sound continuously in the cockpit.ATA 25 Panels location and description Page 15/ 44 The Door Control Panel is used by the cabin crew to request pilots to open the door. when no flight crew action has been performed during the delay (30 seconds).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. but no action has yet been taken by the flight crew. and OPEN green LED on the Door Control Panel will flash. If no crew action is taken. V2510 Copyright © 2001-2008 . EMER push-button switch: It is protected by a rotating plate to prevent inadvertent activation.6 . any action on the Control panel will be inhibited. following an emergency request. The buzzer will sound continuously in the cockpit.

ATA 25 Normal operations Page 16/ 44 Normal operations V2513 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 25 V2513 Normal operations Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 17/ 44 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 18/ 44 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 25 V2513 Normal operations Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 25 Emergency and abnormal operations Page 19/ 44 Emergency and abnormal operations V2515 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 25 V2515 Emergency and abnormal operations Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 20/ 44 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 21/ 44 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 25 V2515 Emergency and abnormal operations Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 25 Cockpit secured door components Page 22/ 44 Cockpit secured door components V2511 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

allows the smoke tightness.ATR Training Centre . with an upper and lower lock bolt. Î When the door is closed. there is a cremona. attached on the right panel. located on cockpit side. to allow identification the person calling entry. fixed on the right panel. Î The right and left panels and the frame.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 25 Cockpit secured door components Page 23/ 44 MAIN STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS OF THE DOOR Î The door is qualified to withstand intrusion and penetration. Î The right panel. On the left panel. V2511 Copyright © 2001-2008 . cockpit side. is equipped with a peephole.6 . This gap is protected by a bullet proof backing (deflector). It allows air venting in case of decompression. F The electromagnetic locks are located on the cockpit door. are bullet-proof. the two panels are separated by a gap of approximately 40mm. Î A seal between the two door panels.

Each electromagnetic lock is supplied with 28VDC via the CDCU. the magnet and the lock status switch. the magnet attracts the counter plate which sticks on it. When the lock is energized. Î The door locking system is mainly composed of two parts: ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î One part fitted on the left panel which includes the electrical supply. Each of the locks includes a manual lock bolt to be used in case of an electromagnetic lock failure. V2511 Copyright © 2001-2008 . When the lock is de-energized.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 25 Cockpit secured door components Page 24/ 44 DOOR LOCKING OR UNLOCKING SEQUENCE (CDCU monitoring). the counter plate is retracted by a spring. The lock is closed. One part fitted on the right panel which includes the movable counter plate.

to cope with the aircraft structural tolerance. when the counter plate is stuck to the magnet. 2 position switches. are used by the CDCU. of the electromagnetic locks (incorporated in each electromagnetic lock). (closed or open). V2511 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The signals provided by these switches.6 . the locking or unlocking of the door.ATA 25 Cockpit secured door components Page 25/ 44 POSITION SWITCHES Î Different kinds of position switches are installed on the door: ♦ ♦ 1 position switch provides CDCU with the door position information. to control and monitor. They provide a close position signal. This switch can be accurately adjusted at door installation. provide CDCU with the unlocking position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . These switches are of "reed" type.

V2511 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î They are protected from bullets.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 25 Cockpit secured door components Page 26/ 44 DOOR ELECTRICAL WIRING Î All the wires are installed on the right panel.6 . and there are routed inside the honeycomb.

Î It is supplied by the aircraft 28 VDC BUS2.Cockpit secured door components ATA 25 Page 27/ 44 COCKPIT DOOR CONTROL UNIT (CDCU) Î The CDCU is an electronic control box located in the nose landing gear avionics bay.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î The function of this equipment is to control and monitor the door locking or unlocking following cockpit control panel switch and door control panel push buttons position.ATR Training Centre . V2511 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the open light on the 811VU. the buzzer.6 . V2511 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The second breaker (6MQ) protects the locks. the lights on the door. It is connected on the DC BUS2. It is connected on the essential DC bus. The first breaker (4MQ) protects the fault light on the 811VU. Both circuit breakers are rated for 3A current. the CDCU.Cockpit secured door components ATA 25 Page 28/ 44 ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE DEVICES Î Î Î Î 2 breakers are installed on the 122VU behind the copilot seat.

Î Luggage is held in place by means of a net.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. so that it does not drop during flight.ATA 25 Cargo compartment Page 29/ 44 Cargo compartment Î Two luggage compartments are provided.8 m3 in volume. Î The FWD cargo compartment is 5. V2503 Copyright © 2001-2008 . A smoke detection system is installed in forward cargo compartment. Loading is achieved through the cargo door. Luggage or payload is bulk loaded. One is located forward between the flight compartment and the cabin and the other aft. on the RH side. No passage way starting from the passenger compartment has been provided.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 25 V2503 Cargo compartment Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 30/ 44 ACOS v1.6 .

Cargo compartment loading is made through the right AFT service door. Î The AFT compartment volume is 4. This door is of the plug type. on the RH side. One is located forward between the flight compartment and the cabin and the other aft. an access door to the lavatory water tank.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. One is located forward between the flight compartment and the cabin and the other aft. Î The AFT cargo compartment is closed by means of a curtain provided with a quick closing fastener. Gargo compartment forms two sections separated by a net.6 . Passenger compartment fire extinguishing system can be connected to a fixed extension located above cargo compartment ceiling. on the RH side.ATR Training Centre . Î Two luggage compartments are provided. a cargo compartment bottom panel fastened to a back structure by means of screws. A smoke detection is installed. on the RH side. the lavatory right wall. a cross net secured to the post and to the A/C structure. V2503 Copyright © 2001-2008 .8 m3. ceiling panels secured to a back structure by screws. the wall on which the C/A seat is installed. One is located forward between the flight compartment and the cabin and the other aft. Î Two luggage compartments are provided.Cargo compartment ATA 25 Page 31/ 44 Î Two luggage compartments are provided. Î Luggages are hold by means of: ♦ ♦ a post secured to the floor rail and to the upper part. Î Two luggage compartments are provided. on the RH side. One is located forward between the flight compartment and the cabin and the other aft. Î The walls are made of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Lateral panels attached to a back structure by means of screws.

Galley ATA 25 Page 32/ 44 Galley Î The galley is installed in the aircraft aft section next to the service door. V2504 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Waste container and associated unit are so designed that they can withstand a possible fire originating in the waste container. The compartments are closed by means of a door provided with a lach and a lock.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The basic galley is provided with 2 hot jugs. The galley is supplied with 115 volts of variable frequency. 1 drink trolley-half size. Î A waste disposal system common to the lavatory washbasin is provided.6 . Î Its dimensions are such that it can be entered into the aircraft through the passenger / crew doors. It is loaded through the service door. w at the upper part by means of an adjustable rod. 7 standard units. The basic galley does not include any water delivery system. 1 meal trolley-half size and one waste container. The galley is secured as follows: w at the lower part by means of fittings to the floor rails.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . The lavatory door is so designed that it can be opened from outside without using any special tool. Î Potable water and toilet system use the same water tank.ATR Training Centre . It can be easily reached via the luggage compartment. It is located in the pressurized section aft of the toilet unit.ATA 25 Lavatory Page 33/ 44 Lavatory Î The passenger compartment is equipped with one lavatory located aft of the cabin. V2505 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 25 Passenger compartment Page 34/ 44 Passenger compartment V2506 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre . base boards secured to a back structure attached to the main structure by flexible fasteners. Î Remark: floor covering consists of 3 carpet sections. light and ventilation outlet covers.6 . side wall panels attached to an extrusion at the upper edge by means of spring clips and secured by screws at the lower edge. each section being in 3 parts.Passenger compartment ATA 25 Page 35/ 44 Î Heat and sound insulation is obtained through blankets made of glass wool flakes. They are attached to the inner side of fuselage linning panels between frames and they are easily removable.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2506 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the opposite edge is provided with quick attach / detach fasteners which enables access to lights and air outlet. Î The passenger compartment is equipped with: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Ceiling panels with lighting secured by screws and they can be removed after tilting the overhead stowage compartment. each cover hinged at one edge.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 36/ 44 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 25 V2506 Passenger compartment Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ a luggage retainer. The double side unit consists of: ♦ an ashtray on the center armrest and armrest on aisle side. The left emergency seat unit differs from the previous one as no wall side armrest. ♦ on the back side by means of a ANCRA type fitting.ATR Training Centre .ATA 25 Passenger compartment Page 37/ 44 Î The cabin arrangement consists of 66 passenger seats pitched at 30 inches. V2506 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ♦ a seat pouch for magazines and passenger instructions. Î A right emergency exit seat unit which differs from the others as the wall side armrest is shorter and the backrest is fixed. by means of a play take-up pin. ♦ a life vest stowage. ♦ a safety belt. ♦ a folding table attached to seat backrest. Attachment of the seat to the rail is performed as follows: ♦ on the front side.6 .

ATA 25 Passenger compartment Page 38/ 44 Two cabin attendant seats are provided: ♦ one in FWD section. V2506 Copyright © 2001-2008 . When in stowed position it is folded up against cargo compartment partition.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. In order to use the seat. The seat pan is automatically folded up when not in use. It is attached to the floor rails. ♦ the other in the AFT section. The aft section cabin attendant seat is located next to the cabin attendant partition in line with the aisle.6 . The seat is provided with a shoulder harness. the C/A unlocks the seat and turns it towards the aisle.ATR Training Centre . The FWD seat is secured to sidewall by means of two fittings. The locking of the seat in folded down position is automatic. The seat pan is automatically folded up when not in use. The seat is provided with an inertia reel type harness.

V2506 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. quick attach detach fasteners are provided on the other side. Each basic PSU includes. The size of the module is such that it fits into the overhead stowage compartment on which it is mounted. a passenger illuminated sign unit.ATA 25 Passenger compartment Page 39/ 44 The Passenger Service Units are located under the stowage compartments above the passengers. It is possible to unlatch the PSU and to maintain it half open by means of a rope so as to ease maintenance. Access to these fasteners is gained from the overhead stowage compartments. the following: A loudspeaker. two or four reading lights and two or four ventilation outlets. Each module is attached on one side by means of removable hinges enabling module tilting. a loudspeaker module mounted in every other PSU.ATR Training Centre . according to their location in the A/C.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 25 Doors location Page 40/ 44 Doors location V2507 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2508 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 25 Cabin acoustic treatment Page 41/ 44 Cabin acoustic treatment Î Both inner wing leading edge are equipped with two foam walls reducing noise and vibrations coming from the engines.ATR Training Centre .

6 . Skin damper Î Skin damping treatment through viscomaterial strips on the panels. V2508 Copyright © 2001-2008 . greatly reducing the transmission of noise generated by the propeller blades. reducing noise propagation by the skin.ATR Training Centre .ATA 25 Cabin acoustic treatment Page 42/ 44 Î Stiffening of eight frames located in the propeller area and installation of Dynamic Vibration Absorbers on the upper side of the frames and on the floor beams.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 25 Cabin acoustic treatment Page 43/ 44 Î Attachment of the panels and overhead bins to the structure by specially designed dampers. Î New insulation blankets with an optimized thickness and made of waterproof material.ATR Training Centre . air conditioning recirculation fans and from hydraulic pumps) have been treated. Î Cabin partitions treated to reduce reverberation phenomena in the forward and rear cabin area. Î Parasitic noise sources (coming from outflow valves.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2508 Copyright © 2001-2008 . avoiding transmission of vibrations from the structure to the interior furnishings.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .Summary ATA 25 Page 44/ 44 ATA 25 EQUIPMENT / FURNISHING V2508 Flight compartment seats 2 Flight compartment emergency equipment 4 General description 5 Panels location and description 10 Normal operations 16 Emergency and abnormal operations 19 Cockpit secured door components 22 Cargo compartment 29 Galley 32 Lavatory 33 Passenger compartment 34 Doors location 40 Cabin acoustic treatment 41 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

.MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.6 ATA 26 FIRE PROTECTION Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.

nacelle and cabin. Î For fire extinguishing.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2601 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î Engine fire extinguishing system includes two extinguisher bottles which may be used for engine N°1 or engine N°2. and extinguishing for each engine.General description ATA 26 Page 2/ 95 General description Î The ATR fire protection system provides detection. Dual squibs are installed in the discharge heads on each bottle. They are located on each side of the fuselage. warning. the squibs are ignited by depressing the corresponding illuminated AGENT pushbutton on the ENG FIRE panel. Engines and nacelles fire protection Î Each engine is equipped with a continuous loop system monitoring overheat or fire.6 . The engine nacelles are protected with fire extinguishers activated by controls from the cockpit. Right nacelle is equipped with an overheat detector. The extinguishing agent (Freon or Halon) is pressurized by nitrogen.

These warning systems reduce the risk of fire.ATR Training Centre .6 . through early detection of smoke. V2601 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 26 General description Page 3/ 95 Cabin smoke and fire protection Î The cargo compartments. the lavatory.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The lavatory is equipped with an automatic fire extinguisher. Î The other areas require a crew member to extinguish any fire with the use of portable hand-held fire extinguishers. and the electrical panels in the cockpit are protected by smoke detectors.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 4/ 95 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 26 V2601 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î De-ice system is supplied with bleed air from the HP port. Î Smoke detectors (photoelectric type): ♦ ♦ FWD Cargo. Electronics Racks. Î Nacelle Overheat (Overheat Thermal switch). V2601 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Fire detection Î Engine Fire (loop).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. AFT Cargo.General description ATA 26 Page 5/ 95 Î Location of fire protection main components.6 . Î Smoke detectors (ionisation type): ♦ ♦ Lavatory.

ATR Training Centre .General description ATA 26 Page 6/ 95 Î Location of fire protection main components. Fire extinguishing Î Î Î Î Î 2 Engine fixed bottles.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. 1 Lavatory fixed bottle. V2601 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . 3 Halon portable extinguishers (cabin and cockpit). 1 Water portable extinguisher in the cabin. De-ice system is supplied with bleed air from the HP port.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Fire protection cockpit panels Page 7/ 95 Fire protection cockpit panels V2602 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Fire protections interfaces Page 8/ 95 Fire protections interfaces V2603 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Features Page 9/ 95 Features V2604 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 10/ 95 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 26 V2604 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 26 V2604 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 11/ 95 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 95 ACOS v1.ATA 26 V2604 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 95 ACOS v1.ATA 26 V2604 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Safety and precautions Page 14/ 95 Safety and precautions V2605 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . installed in parallel and connected to an electronic control unit. Î Note: The system is identical for each engine. V2606 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Each detection loop may be tested individually using the corresponding test switch. Î The whole engine fire detection system is supplied from DC Emergency bus bar.6 .Engine fire detection description ATA 26 Page 15/ 95 Engine fire detection description Î The engine fire detection system is composed of two continuous loops A+B.

ATA 26 Detection system operation Page 16/ 95 Detection system operation V2611 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. loop A disconnected. detection is provided by loop B. Detection on loop B.ATR Training Centre . loop A FAULT.6 . corresponding transistor will be triggered. If a FIRE or FAULT signal is detected.Detection system operation ATA 26 Page 17/ 95 Î Three configuration will be studied: ♦ ♦ ♦ fire warning sensed by both loops. ENG1 (ENG2) lights on fire handle come on (fire handle pushed = normal position). Î Î Î Î Î Detection by both loops Fault signal on loop A is detected. When a fire is detected. Fault signal on loop A. Note: fire warning from loop B cannot be triggered while the loop A is FAULT and its pushbutton is not set to OFF. Î Each detection circuit is supplied by EMERGENCY BUS 28 VDC. V2611 Copyright © 2001-2008 . A FAULT appears when FDCU detects a failure on a loop. due to a short circuit or to a rapid drop in a sensing element resistance without increase of capacitance. fire warning sensed by loop B only.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î LOOP FAULT TEST TEST switch in FAULT position causes a malfunction of loops. The following warnings are triggered. ♦ ♦ ♦ Single Chime is activated.ATR Training Centre . Master CAUTION amber light illuminates. Î Note: these alarms are not triggered if A/C in battery mode. V2611 Copyright © 2001-2008 . LOOP amber light illuminates on CAP.6 .Detection system operation ATA 26 Page 18/ 95 Î LOOP FAULT TEST Let's consider ENG 1 LOOP test. Pushbuttons of LOOP A and B are pressed in. Select switch to FAULT TEST position.

ATA 26 Detection system operation Page 19/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2611 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Engine fire loops description Page 20/ 95 Engine fire loops description V2607 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

and a centre wire.). V2607 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . The eletrical characteristics of the fire sensing element vary with temperature.6 in. At each end of the sensing element a sealed connector brazed on the element enables connection to the electrical harness for aircraft circuit junction. The cable consists in an outer stainless steel sheath of 1. sensitive to temperature.ATA 26 Î Î Î Î Engine fire loops description Page 21/ 95 The fire sensing element is a flexible coaxial cable.ATR Training Centre . It contains a glass base material.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.8 mm (4. Grooved foolproof devices at electrical harness-to-element junctions prevent any cross connection between the loops.

Resistance reduces and capacitance does not increase when a fault is detected. its operation is based on the variation in resistance and capacitance. Resistance reduces and capacitance increases when a fire is detected. Î In case of breakage of the sensing element.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Detection element from two loops are connected to the FDCU (Fire Detection Control Unit). However.ATA 26 Engine fire loops operation Page 22/ 95 Engine fire loops operation Î Î Î Î Each engine is equipped with 10 fire sensing elements. Î The fault will be indicated during the pre-flight test. The fire sensing element is a flexible coaxial cable.ATR Training Centre . each end of the element connected to the aircraft electrical harness is still capable of fire detection. this break will be indicated to the crew at the first pre-flight test following the fault. fire detection is still possible. In case of breaking of a sensing element.6 . V2608 Copyright © 2001-2008 . there is no FAULT signal following on single break.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Engine fire loops operation Page 23/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2608 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Fire Detection Control Unit description Page 24/ 95 Fire Detection Control Unit description V2609 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 26 Fire Detection Control Unit description Page 25/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2609 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 26/ 95 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 V2609 Fire Detection Control Unit description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î BITE instruction are display on the front face of the F. 1. independent of the FIRE circuit.U. a switch with 3 positions. contamination of an electrical connector) to the crew members. V2609 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Moreover.D.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. 2 and 3 with automatic return to neutral (position 2). indicates any sensing element faulty operation (short circuit.ATR Training Centre . one FAULT circuit per loop. shelves 93VU (ENG 1) and 94VU (ENG 2).Fire Detection Control Unit description ATA 26 Page 27/ 95 Î The fire detection control is installed in the electronics rack 90VU.C. Î The fire detection control unit processes the warning signals from the sensing element according to an AND logic and triggers the corresponding indications in the flight compartment (FIRE circuit).6 . Î The face comprises: ♦ ♦ two push-to-test lights: LOOP A and LOOP B.

Î They enable the extinguishing agent to be directed toward the engine concerned by means of two way valves. on either side of the fuselage. V2612 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î Dual squibs are installed in the discharge heads on each bottle. Î Two fixed fire extinguishing bottles are installed in the wing to fuselage junction fillet. Four water drains are installed on the lower points of the lines.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 26 Extinguishing system description Page 28/ 95 Extinguishing system description Î A fire extinguishing system is provided for each engine. The squibs are ignited by depressing the corresponding illuminated AGENT pushbutton on the ENG FIRE panel.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Comments: on this example. SQUIB white lights illuminate and allow percussion of the bottles. DISCH AGENT 1 illuminates on the FIRE HANDLE 1 corresponding to bottle n°1. V2617 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 26 Extinguishing system operation Page 29/ 95 Extinguishing system operation Î Î Î Î Î A fire is detected on ENGINE 1. DISCH amber light illuminates when corresponding bottle is discharged. DISCH AGENT 2 illuminates on FIRE HANDLE 2 (same bottle)... Bottle is percussed.6 . Please pull ENG 1 FIRE Handle. Please percuss AGENT 1. at the same time.

ATA 26 Extinguishing system operation Page 30/ 95 Î FIRE test Let's consider ENG 1 FIRE test. Master WARNING red light illuminates. ENG 1 FIRE red light illuminates on fire handle. FUEL SO red light illuminates on ENG 1 Condition Lever (if not on FUEL S/O position).ATR Training Centre . V2617 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Pushbuttons of loops A and B are pressed in. Î FIRE test TEST switch in FIRE position causes fire signals of loops A and B. Select switch to FIRE position. The following warnings are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Continunous Repetitive Chime is activated. ENG 1 FIRE red light illuminates on CAP.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

The intensity of the test current is limited to IA because of the test transistor. the test result is positive if both resistances are in correct condition. Note: although only one resistance is sufficient to squib the bottle.6 . Î Î Î Î When aircraft is energized and SQUIB test pushbutton is pressed in.ATA 26 Extinguishing system operation Page 31/ 95 Î SQUIB test The percussion panel comprises a SQUIB test pushbutton. V2617 Copyright © 2001-2008 . both SQUIB white lights extinguish. It enables an electrical continuity check of percussion resistances .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. both SQUIB white lights illuminate.ATR Training Centre . When SQUIB test pushbutton is released. The intensity of the percussion current is higher than 3A. Select SQUIB test pushbutton.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Water drains description Page 32/ 95 Water drains description V2613 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

This is a mechanical foolproofing preventing any fire extinguishing line inversion.6 . Î The left water drain support is slightly shifted. V2613 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Water drains description ATA 26 Page 33/ 95 Î On the lowest points of the lines four water drains are installed: ♦ ♦ two water drains at the two-way valves.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. two water drains directly on the lines.

ATA 26 Two way check valve description Page 34/ 95 Two way check valve description V2614 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

With the pressure due to the extinguishing agent.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The water drain has an aluminium valve which in absence of pressure is spring loaded open. A water drain is located at the two-way check valve lower point. Î The two-way check valve has a light alloy valve which is operated and opens according to the pressure the extinguishing agent exerts on it.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Two way check valve description Page 35/ 95 Î The purpose of the two-way check valves is to direct the extinguishing agent toward the engine concerned and to prevent the agent released by the second percussion from filling the bottle emptied by the first percussion. the valve closes the water drain. V2614 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 26 Fire extinguisher bottles description Page 36/ 95 Fire extinguisher bottles description V2615 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Fire extinguisher bottles description Page 37/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2615 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 38/ 95 ACOS v1.ATA 26 V2615 Fire extinguisher bottles description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î A pressure switch is installed on each bottle to enable checking of the bottle inner pressure.04 to 0. Î Each bottle has two discharge heads enabling the fire extinguishing agent to be routed toward one or the other engine.6 . between the two discharge heads.04 Kg (4. Each discharge head is blanked by beryllium bronze diaphragm. the percussion can still be obtained with the remaining operational resistance).2 ohms) (in case of a failure of one resistance. Each discharge head is blanked by beryllium bronze diaphragm. Î Each bottle has two discharge heads enabling the fire extinguishing agent to be routed toward one or the other engine. Each bottle has a volume of 2.800 PSI (123 bars). Î A pressure relief valve is located at the lower point of the bottle. thus enabling a complete discharge of the extinguishing agent into the compartment.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. With the pressure due to the extinguishing agent.400 PSI (95.ATA 26 Fire extinguisher bottles description Page 39/ 95 Î The two bottles are of the quick-discharge type. With the pressure due to the extinguishing agent. Î The water drain has an aluminium valve which in absence of pressure is spring loaded open.6 bars) and 1.048 cm3 (125 inch3) and can contain 2. Î The water drain has an aluminium valve which in absence of pressure is spring loaded open. It causes illumination of DISCH warning lights (one per bottle each time the pressure inside the bottle drops below 225 PSI (15 bars). the valve closes the water drain.ATR Training Centre . Î The valve is composed of a diaphragm which breaks when the pressure inside the bottle reaches between 1. the valve closes the water drain. The valve can also be used for bottle filling. The diaphragm is broken by the percussion of a pyrotechnic cartridge electrically fired by two resistances (0. V2615 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Sealing is provided by a gasket.5 lbs) of monobromotrifluoromethane (CF3 Br) pressurized by nitrogen at 41 bars (600 PSI) at a temperature of 21°C. A pressure gauge displays the pressure inside the bottle.

ATA 26 Fire panel description Page 40/ 95 Fire panel description V2616 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 26 Fire panel description Page 41/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2616 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 26 V2616 Fire panel description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 42/ 95 ACOS v1.

2 pushbutton switches: LOOP A and LOOP B.1 DISCH amber legend. The panels are located on the overhead panel. Î Each panel consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ 2 pushbutton switches: AGENT 1 and AGENT 2.ATR Training Centre . Î In case of engine fire detection the following procedure must be applied: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Place the Power Lever in Idle position (Flight or ground).6 .feathering the propeller. enabling electrical continuity of the percussion resistances to be checked. . 1 SQUIB TEST switch. This has for effect to: .closing pressure regulating and shut off de-icing valves. .ATA 26 Fire panel description Page 43/ 95 Î There is a control and indicating panel corresponding to each engine.1 SQUIB white legend.closing the LP fuel shut off valve.disconnecting AC and DC generators. Î If the FIRE warning does not disappear within the 30 following seconds.enabling percussion of the fire extinguisher bottles (the corresponding SQUIB legends come on). .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. . Place the Condition Lever in FUEL S/O position (FUEL S/O red light on Condition Lever goes off). Squib the first bottle. . by pressing AGENT 1 pushbutton switch (discharge of the bottme is indicated by the illumination of amber DISCH legend). Each pushbutton switch has two legends: . the second bottle must be squibbed. V2616 Copyright © 2001-2008 . .closing the air bleed valve. Pull Fire Handle.

following cautions are activated: Î They enable the extinguishing agent to be directed toward the engine concerned by means of two way valves. ambient air goes through detectors by convection. Four water drains are installed on the lower points of the lines.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. In forward cargo compartment. is performed by means of two fans. V2618 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 26 Compartment smoke and fire protection description Page 44/ 95 Compartment smoke and fire protection description Î The cargo compartment smoke detection is achieved by smoke detectors located on FWD and AFT cargo compartment ceiling panels and by smoke detectors located on electronic rack and toilet air extraction ducts. Î In case of fan failure.6 .ATR Training Centre . Î The air extraction through the smoke detectors in aft cargo and toilets.

the following warnings are triggered: V2618 Copyright © 2001-2008 . In case of forward cargo smoke. In case of smoke.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Compartment smoke and fire protection description Page 45/ 95 Î Electric compartment smoke detection. Detection is provided by a smoke detector mounted on air extraction duct. the following warnings are triggered: Î Forward cargo smoke detection warnings.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î Following alerts are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ Continuous Repetitive Chime is activated.ATR Training Centre .6 . V2626 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Master WARNING red light illuminates. FWD SMK red lights illuminate on CAP. No smoke is detected.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Compartment smoke detection operation Page 46/ 95 Compartment smoke detection operation Î Air conditioning and fire protection systems are available. Please select the FWD SMK detector to create corresponding smoke detection.

ATA 26 Compartment smoke detection operation Page 47/ 95 Î Air conditioning and fire protection system are available. ELEC SMK red lights illuminate on CAP.ATR Training Centre .6 . Master WARNING red light illuminates. V2626 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Please select ELEC SMK detector to create corresponding smoke detection. Î Following alerts are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ Continuous Repetitive Chime is activated. No smoke is detected.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 V2626 Compartment smoke detection operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 48/ 95 ACOS v1.6 .

CARGO or LAV SMOKE red lights illumination on Flight attendant panel gives information for cabin attendants. Master Caution amber light illuminates.6 . AIR amber light illuminates on CAP.ATR Training Centre . Fire can be extinguished with portable halon or water extinguishers. Please select AFT SMK detectors to create corresponding smoke detection. AFT SMK red lights illuminate on CAP. Air EXTRACTION FAN is stopped.ATA 26 Compartment smoke detection operation Page 49/ 95 Î Air conditioning and fire protection systems are available. No smoke is detected.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Master WARNING red light illuminates. V2626 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Following alerts are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Continuous Repetitive Chime is activated.

6 .ATA 26 V2626 Compartment smoke detection operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 50/ 95 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

V2626 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. If the test is performed in flight. Î Following alerts are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Continuous Repetitive Chime is activated. Î Following alerts are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Continuous Repetitive Chime is activated. Master CAUTION amber light illuminates. ELEC. w AIR amber light illuminates on CAP. Î Smoke detection system can also be tested from COMPT SMK overhead panel.ATA 26 Compartment smoke detection operation Page 51/ 95 Î Aircraft is on ground. During the test. FWD and AFT SMK red lights illuminate on CAP. air extraction does not stop. After the test. Master WARNING red light illuminates. Select the SMK position on WARN panel. Î To test smoke detection system. ELEC.ATR Training Centre . Please select COMPT SMK push button. CARGO and LAV SMOKE red lights illuminate on Flight attendant panel.6 . CARGO and LAV SMOKE red lights illuminate on Flight attendant panel. Rotary selector on WARN panel has been set to NORM FLT. air extraction fan must be reset by acting on EXHAUST MODE / OVERBOARD pb switch. please select PTT switch. This test is available only on ground. air extraction fan stops. FWD and AFT SMK red lights illuminate on CAP. w Master WARNING red light illuminates.

AIR amber light illuminates on CAP. Smoke detector fan control unit monitors air extraction fans. Î 170 WA fan is now running. Master CAUTION amber light illuminates. Î Following alerts are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Single Chime is activated. V2626 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 26 Compartment smoke detection operation Page 52/ 95 Î Air extraction fans are running alternately. Select the ALTN push button. 172 WA fan is now running. FAULT amber light illuminates on COMPT SMK panel. Select 172 WA fan to create a failure.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Compartment smoke detection operation Page 53/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2626 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors description Page 54/ 95 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors description V2620 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 26 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors description Page 55/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2620 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 56/ 95 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 26 V2620 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The air extracted from the cargo compartment is evacuated by a "VENTURI" effect to non-pressurized zone of the tail cone.ATA 26 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors description Page 57/ 95 Î Two photoelectric cell type smoke detectors are installed on the aircraft: ♦ ♦ one detector in aft cargo compartment. V2620 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The aft cargo compartment ambient air is sucked through smoke detector by fans 170 and 172 WA mounted in series. 1 port.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The photoelectric cell smoke detector casing comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ 1 photoelectric cell. 1 amplifier.6 .ATR Training Centre . on detector in the forward cargo compartment. The "VENTURI" inlet is located in the ceiling panel. 1 projector lamp (light source). 1 lens.

ATA 26 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors operation Page 58/ 95 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors operation Î Operating principle of Photoelectric Cell Smoke Detector A projector consisting of a lamp and a lens sends a cylindrical light beam through a sensing chamber.ATR Training Centre . Î A photoresistive cell is fitted on the chamber along an axis perpendicular to the light beam.6 . When the air is free of smoke. V2621 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. no light reaches the photoresistive cell.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors operation Page 59/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2621 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Ionisation type smoke detectors description Page 60/ 95 Ionisation type smoke detectors description V2622 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 26 Ionisation type smoke detectors description Page 61/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2622 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 26 V2622 Ionisation type smoke detectors description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 62/ 95 ACOS v1.

With the pressure due to the extinguishing agent. Î The water drain has an aluminium valve which in absence of pressure is spring loaded open.ATA 26 Ionisation type smoke detectors description Page 63/ 95 Î The smoke detection system comprises two ionisation type smoke detectors: ♦ ♦ one detector on toilets air extraction duct. the valve closes the water drain. V2622 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The smoke detection casing comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ 1 measuring chamber with a perforated housing enabling passage of air inside the cell. 1 automatic temperature compensation circuit associated with a thermometric sensor enabling test to be perfomed.ATR Training Centre .6 . 1 electronic circuit. one detector in electronics rack air extraction system. 1 High Impedance Resistor.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î In case of fan failure. Î When particles in suspension.ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Ionisation type smoke detectors operation Page 64/ 95 Ionisation type smoke detectors operation Î In the measuring chamber. resulting of fire. The ions (negatively or positively charged gas molecules) move torward the corresponding electrode with a speed relative to molecule width and electrical field intensity. penetrate the measuring chamber. Four water drains are installed on the lower points of the lines. Their displacement speed is reduced which decreases the ionization current and then increases the electrical resistor of the measuring chamber. the ions which associate with the particles become heavy (to 1. The air between the electrodes is ionized by means of a radio-active source.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2623 Copyright © 2001-2008 . following cautions are activated: Î They enable the extinguishing agent to be directed toward the engine concerned by means of two way valves.6 .000 times heavier). an electrical field is created between electrodes E1 and E2 by means of a power supply.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Ionisation type smoke detectors operation Page 65/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2623 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 26 Extraction fans description Page 66/ 95 Extraction fans description V2624 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre . mounted on air extraction system of the lavatories and the aft cargo. the valve closes the water drain. Î The water drain has an aluminium valve which in absence of pressure is spring loaded open.6 . have a 40 mm diametre. V2624 Copyright © 2001-2008 . With the pressure due to the extinguishing agent. Î They are supplied with 115 VAC 400Hz.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Extraction fans description Page 67/ 95 Î Extraction fans.

ATA 26 Smoke detection fan control unit description Page 68/ 95 Smoke detection fan control unit description V2625 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Smoke detection fan control unit description Page 69/ 95 Î The fan control unit supplied by circuit breakers 154WA and 166WA controls alternate operation of the air extraction fans 170WA and 172WA.6 . V2625 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î This alternate operation is controlled by a "flip-flop" relay which operates the fan not previously in service. after each system energization.

cabin and each cargo compartment. direct fire extinguishing may be carried out without use of the line extension installed on the ceiling. Î If cargo loading permits. toilets waste bin.6 .ATR Training Centre . Î Aft cargo compartment extinguishing system Fire extinguishing system is installed on the ceiling of the cargo compartment and includes two diffusers. This system serves to diffuse the extinguishing agent in the entire cargo compartment when loaded to the maximum.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2627 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 26 Compartment fire extinguishing description Page 70/ 95 Compartment fire extinguishing description Î Compartment fire extinguishing system is designed in order to ensure extinguishing for: ♦ ♦ cockpit.

manufacturing date. Î Portable extinguishers are fixed by means of quick attach / detach fasteners.6 .ATR Training Centre . Î Avionics compartment extinguishing system Direct fire extinguishing is done with a portable fire extinguisher. A placard on each extinguisher gives the instructions for use.ATA 26 Compartment fire extinguishing description Page 71/ 95 Î Lavatory compartment extinguishing system An automatic fire extinguisher is installed above the lavatory dust bin. V2627 Copyright © 2001-2008 . expiration date and weight of the bottle.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

direct fire extinguishing may be carried out. Î Extinguishing agent is released in the cargo compartment by two diffusers.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Please click on the portable fire extinguishing bottle to discharge it. Î FWD and ELEC fire extinguishing system The portable fire extinguishers (HALON and WATER type extinguishers) are operated by removing the safety pin and pressing the handle. Note: if cargo loading permits.6 . V2631 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . This orifice is located above cabin attendant seat.ATA 26 Compartment fire extinguishing operation Page 72/ 95 Compartment fire extinguishing operation Î The aft cargo compartment fire extinguishing procedure consists in connecting portable fire extinguisher to extinguishing system orifice. Î Spraying may be interrupted by pulling up the handle and installing the safety pin until the next use.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 26 Compartment fire extinguishing operation Page 73/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2631 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Cabin and cockpit halon portable extinguishers description Page 74/ 95 Cabin and cockpit halon portable extinguishers description V2628 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Cabin and cockpit halon portable extinguishers description Page 75/ 95 This page intentionally left blank V2628 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 76/ 95 ACOS v1.ATA 26 V2628 Cabin and cockpit halon portable extinguishers description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

which has for effect to open the valve and spray the extinguishing agent. inform the appropriate service when an extinguisher has been used.ATR Training Centre . Î Certain Halon type extinguishers are equipped with a flexible duct. Each bottle contains Halon 1211 (CF2 CL Br) pressurized with nitrogen. Î For the Halon extinguishers.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Cabin and cockpit halon portable extinguishers description Page 77/ 95 Î The portable fire extinguishers are installed by means of quick fasteners. Î A placard on each extinguisher gives the instructions for use. the pressure gage indicates the quantity of agent left into the bottle. expiration date and weight of the bottle. The extinguishers are Halon type with a manometre indicating the pressure of the nitrogen cartridge. If the pointer is in the red range. Î Note: whenever possible. manufacturing date. V2628 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The portable fire extinguisher is operated by removing the safety pin and pressing the handle. so that an inspection can be carried out. the bottle must be changed.6 . Spraying may be interrupted by pulling up the handle and installing the safety pin until the next use.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Cabin and cockpit water portable extinguisher description Page 78/ 95 Cabin and cockpit water portable extinguisher description V2629 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

manufacturing date.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Spraying may be interrupted by pulling up the handle and installing the safety pin until the next use. expiration date and weight of the bottle. so that an inspection can be carried out. Î Note: whenever possible. Î The portable fire extinguisher is operated by removing the safety pin and pressing the handle. The Water type extinguisher is fitted without manometre.6 . Î A placard on each extinguisher gives the instructions for use. which has for effect to open the valve and spray the extinguishing agent.ATR Training Centre . inform the appropriate service when an extinguisher has been used.ATA 26 Cabin and cockpit water portable extinguisher description Page 79/ 95 Î The portable fire extinguisher is installed by means of quick fasteners. V2629 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Toilet dust bin bottle description Page 80/ 95 Toilet dust bin bottle description V2630 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

The fire extinguisher is activated automatically when a heat source in the region of 77°C (170°F) is detected. V2630 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a halon fire extinguisher is installed above the bin.ATA 26 Î Î Î Î Toilet dust bin bottle description Page 81/ 95 In case of fire in the lavatory dustbin. inform the appropriate service when an extinguisher has been used.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . so that an inspection can be carried out. Note: whenever possible. The extinguishing agent is discharged into the dustbin via two tubes equipped with a valve at the end.

with engine running (with propeller brake engaged or disengaged).ATA 26 Engine nacelle protection description Page 82/ 95 Engine nacelle protection description Î The overheat detection system monitors RH nacelle temperature on ground. This system is inhibited in flight. V2632 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Overheat sensor is located only in the nacelle below the exhaust pipes.ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Nacelle overheat detection signal is sent to the Nacelle Overheat Detection Control Unit.

Î When the thermal switch detects a temperature > 170°C. Note :Overheat detection system is installed on the RH engine only to prevent Hotel Mode operation with rear wind. ♦ Continuous Repetitive Chime is activated NAC OVHT red light illuminates on CAP ♦ MASTER WARNING red light is flashing. ♦ V2635 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ♦ Aircraft is on ground ♦ Engine 2 is running (CL not in fuel S/O position).ATA 26 Engine nacelle protection operation Page 83/ 95 Engine nacelle protection operation Î The electrical circuit of the overheat detection system is in standby position.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . the warning circuit is activated. Note :Engine nacelle overheat system is activated 30s after landing to avoid transient warning during reverse operation.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 26 Overheat sensor description Page 84/ 95 Overheat sensor description V2633 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î Overheat signal is sent to the Detection Control Unit located in the flight compartment. When the right nacelle temperature reaches 170° +/. a 30 seconds time delay (monitored by MFCs internal logic) inhibits "NAC OVHT" warning. Note :On wheel touch down.ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Overheat sensor description Page 85/ 95 Î Nacelle overheat is detected by a sensor located in the right engine nacelle only. V2633 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This time delay avoids spurious warnings.5. NAC OVHT light located on Crew Alerting Panel comes on.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Nacelle control unit description Page 86/ 95 Nacelle control unit description V2634 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 26 Nacelle control unit description Page 87/ 95 Î Nacelle overheat control unit is located on the RH electronic rack (shelf 94VU) Î The control unit is supplied with 28VDC from BUS 2. V2634 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 Fire panel system controls and indicators Page 88/ 95 Fire panel system controls and indicators V2636 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Loop illuminates on CAP (DC EMER).PROP: Feather .ATR Training Centre .ATA 26 Fire panel system controls and indicators Page 89/ 95 <1> AGENT 1 / 2 ♦ ♦ DISCH amber light:bottle depressurized. Fuel S/O red light illuminates on CL (if out of Fuel S/O position).FUEL: LP valve is closed . SQUIB white light armed when fire handle is pulled. and Master Warning activated. CAP illuminates. Pressing squib pb discharges bottle (DC EMER / HOT MAIN BAT). OFF white light: takes related loop off parallel circuit. Inhibits fire signal until turned off.6 . <2> Loop A / B ♦ ♦ Fault amber light: Loop unserviceable signal g enerated by fire detection control unit. O pposite agent DISCH light will also illuminate on other fire panel. <5> ENG 1 / 2 FIRE HANDLE ♦ When fire handle is pulled (squibs armed lights llumination): . CAP illuminates.ELEC: DC and ACW gen are disconnected V2636 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <4> SQUIB test ♦ Electrical test of bottle squibs. Allows other loop to activate fire signal.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.AIR: Bleed and HP valve are closed . Fault test (down position): Single Chime and Master Caution activated.DE-ICE: DE-ice and Shut-off valve are closed . <3> Selector switch ♦ ♦ First test (up position): Continuous Repetitive Chime. Loop fault amber lights illuminate on pushbutton.

ATA 26 Compt smoke system controls and indicators Page 90/ 95 Compt smoke system controls and indicators <1> SMK TEST ♦ ♦ Tests all four smoke detectors (elec.ATR Training Centre . <2> AFT COMP / LAV DET FANS ♦ ♦ FAULT amber light: fan inoperation. AIR illuminates on CAP.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ALTN white light: activates altn fan. V2637 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . To restart extract fan it is necessary to reset EXHAUST pushbutton. aft smoke red alarm in CAP). fwd. Stops extract fan (FAULT on EXHAUST MODE).

ATR Training Centre . V2643 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î FDCU BITE test permits engine fire protection system failures to be localised.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 26 FDCU test Page 91/ 95 FDCU test Î Fire Detection Control Unit incorporates a BITE test (Built In Test Equipment test).

ATA 26 V2643 FDCU test Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 92/ 95 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Note: if LOOP A light illuminates: ♦ FDCU must be replaced. 3 positions are available with the BITE switch. FDCU must not be replaced. Loop A short circuit is detected. 3 positions are available with the BITE switch. ♦ Loop A short circuit is not detected. ♦ Loop A short circuit is not detected.6 .FDCU test ATA 26 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î 2 amber lights and 1 BITE switch with 3 positions permit the testing functions of the FDCU. Page 93/ 95 BITE instructions are displayed on the front face of the FDCU. Note: if LOOP A light does not illuminate: ♦ FDCU must be replaced. Î Î Î Î Please set BITE switch to POS 3 to confirm loop fault diagnosis. V2643 Copyright © 2001-2008 . FDCU must not be replaced. LOOP A light does not illuminate. LOOP A light illuminates. When a loop failure is sensed. 3 positions are available with the BITE switch. Loop A short circuit is detected. Loop A is fault on overhead panel. Note: BITE indicators are taken into account only when flight compartment confirms a failure condition. the BITE switch permits the failure on the control unit or sensing elements to be identified. Please set BITE switch to POS 1 to test LOOP A.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .Summary ATA 26 Page 94/ 95 ATA 26 FIRE PROTECTION V2643 General description 2 Fire protection cockpit panels 7 Fire protections interfaces 8 Features 9 Safety and precautions 14 Engine fire detection description 15 Detection system operation 16 Engine fire loops description 20 Engine fire loops operation 22 Fire Detection Control Unit description 24 Extinguishing system description 28 Extinguishing system operation 29 Water drains description 32 Two way check valve description 34 Fire extinguisher bottles description 36 Fire panel description 40 Compartment smoke and fire protection description 44 Compartment smoke detection operation 46 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors description 54 Photoelectric cell type smoke detectors operation 58 Ionisation type smoke detectors description 60 Ionisation type smoke detectors operation 64 Extraction fans description 66 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .Summary ATA 26 V2643 Page 95/ 95 Smoke detection fan control unit description 68 Compartment fire extinguishing description 70 Compartment fire extinguishing operation 72 Cabin and cockpit halon portable extinguishers description 74 Cabin and cockpit water portable extinguisher description 78 Toilet dust bin bottle description 80 Engine nacelle protection description 82 Engine nacelle protection operation 83 Overheat sensor description 84 Nacelle control unit description 86 Fire panel system controls and indicators 88 Compt smoke system controls and indicators 90 FDCU test 91 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1. .6 ATA 27 FLIGHT CONTROL Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.

ATA 27 General description Page 2/ 285 General description V2701 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 . The spoilers and flaps are hydraulically operated. Pitch control is performed by two elevators with their balance tabs. A gust lock system protects roll and pitch controls on the ground.ATA 27 General description Page 3/ 285 Î Control of the aircraft is achieved on the three axes by primary flight controls and secondary flight controls. with a spring tab. elevators and rudder.ATR Training Centre . elevators and rudder are mechanically actuated. using the blue hydraulic circuit. Auto pilot inputs drive ailerons. Î Roll. and one spoiler. pitch and yaw control are the primary flight controls: ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Î Roll control is performed on each wing by one aileron. They are the secondary flight controls. Flaps are provided on each wing. Yaw control is performed by the rudder and its spring tab.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. They can be overridden by the pilot. V2701 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The ailerons.

ATA 27 Cockpit panels location Page 4/ 285 Cockpit panels location V2702 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 5/ 285 ACOS v1.ATA 27 V2702 Cockpit panels location Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27 Interfaces Page 6/ 285 Interfaces V2703 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Features Page 7/ 285 Features V2704 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 8/ 285 ACOS v1.ATA 27 V2704 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 9/ 285 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 V2704 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 10/ 285 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 V2704 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 11/ 285 ACOS v1.ATA 27 V2704 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 285 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 V2704 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 285 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 V2704 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Safety precautions Page 14/ 285 Safety precautions V2705 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The spring tab provides a flexible compensation with automatically increases with the aerodynamic loads applied on the ailerons.6 .ATR Training Centre . Î The left aileron tab is also used for aileron trim. each equipped with a spring tab. The control wheels operate the roll spoilers through the hydraulic valve blocks.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Roll control: aileron & tab description Page 15/ 285 Roll control: aileron & tab description Î Roll control is performed by two ailerons. thus ensuring a reduction of the pilot's efforts. Î The control wheels mechanically drive both ailerons. V2706 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The roll spoilers are installed on the upper surface of the wing. and two roll spoilers.

V2720 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The pilot continues to deflect the control wheels on the left. Control surface is free to rotate. the spring is compressed and therefore the spring tab travels in the opposite way of the surface. Î The trim operation is available only on the left aileron. Note that the aileron and spring tab stay in line.6 . no force is applied on the spring which keeps the same length.ATA 27 Aileron & tab operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 16/ 285 Aileron & tab operation and cockpit controls & indicators Î Aircraft is on the ground. Î The pilot deflects the control wheels on the left. Ailerons and spring tabs are in line and the control wheels are in the neutral position. Due to the mechanical stop.ATR Training Centre . No airload is applied on the flight surfaces.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Aileron & tab operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 17/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2720 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 18/ 285 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 V2720 Aileron & tab operation and cockpit controls & indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

V2720 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the airload on the surface also increases. the pilot feels the airload of the control surface. he feels the sum of the spring load plus the aerodynamic load of the control surfaces. Secondly. Î When the control wheels are held in position. as surface deflection increases.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Aileron & tab operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 19/ 285 Î Aircraft is in flight with no aerodynamic load. At initial pilot input. the control surface and spring tab begin to move in line. minus the spring tab compensation. Î The pilot deflects the control wheels to the left. due to the pilot input.ATR Training Centre . ♦ ♦ Firstly. Control wheels are in the neutral position. The trim operation is available only on the left aileron. Spring tab provides flexible compensation to reduce pilot effort.6 . Î A compensating moment is generated which assists the pilot. The aircraft is then lighter to handle at high speed. The spring is compressed and the spring tab deflects in the opposite way to the control surface.

6 . V2720 Copyright © 2001-2008 . It allows movement of the spring attachment point on the aileron so that the spring tab neutral position can change. the trim actuator motor drives and its output shafts begin to move the spring-linked attachment. Î Because of the mechanical linkage.ATR Training Centre . the control wheels follow the spring tab movement. Î By pressing both roll trim control switches to the left. regardless of air speed. Î Due to the position transmitters. Consequently. the spring tab deflects according to the roll trim control switches input.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Note : Trim authority will not generate more than 10 daN on the control wheels.ATA 27 Aileron & tab operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 20/ 285 Î The trim actuator is fitted on the left aileron. Note that the spring tab deflection scale is small. the left tab deflection is indicated on the left upper part of the trim position indicator. in the flight compartment.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 Cockpit location Page 21/ 285 Cockpit location V2707 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î By means of cables.ATA 27 Mechanical control description Page 22/ 285 Mechanical control description Î Both control wheels are connected by a torque tube (interconnection tube) and linked to a cable tension regulator located below the cockpit floor. This is called the primary loop.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2708 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The aft quadrant is linked to ailerons by means of several push-pull rods.ATR Training Centre .6 . a secondary loop links the cable tension regulator to the aft quadrant located in the wing.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Mechanical control description Page 23/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2708 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Control wheel & cable tension regulator Page 24/ 285 Control wheel & cable tension regulator V2709 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Control wheel & cable tension regulator Page 25/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2709 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 V2709 Control wheel & cable tension regulator Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 26/ 285 ACOS v1.

Î The movements of the two control wheels are transmitted through the torque tube. One control wheel is provided to the captain and is identical to the first officer's. It also maintains the cable tension between 20 and 25 daN for all temperatures encountered during flight or on the ground. Î To check that the regulator is correctly compensating for ambient temperature.ATR Training Centre . to the tension regulator quadrant. The rotation of the wheel is limited by two bump stop screws installed in the column.ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Control wheel & cable tension regulator Page 27/ 285 The control wheels are located in the cockpit. a pointer is attached to one quadrant and a calibrated scale on the other quadrant.6 . The cable tension regulator is located under the cockpit floor. V2709 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Both are linked by the torque tube located underfloor. Î Its function is to transmit the movement to the aft quadrant.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Control wheel travel is limited by two stops adjusted at 107° with respect to its vertical axis on both sides.

Î The AP actuator is connected to the aft quadrant upper part.ATA 27 Aft quadrant & AP actuator Page 28/ 285 Aft quadrant & AP actuator Î The aft quadrant lower part is located in the wing.ATR Training Centre . in the pressurized area.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2710 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

V2710 Copyright © 2001-2008 . It receives movement of the cables from the control wheels.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Aft quadrant & AP actuator Page 29/ 285 Î The aft quadrant is fixed in the pressurized area.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The aft quadrant upper part is connected to the RH crank (unpressurized area).

a reduction gear block.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2710 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Aft quadrant & AP actuator Page 30/ 285 Î The AP roll actuator is connected to the quadrant by means of a cable.ATR Training Centre . this clutch block connects motor and cable drum. Supplied with 28 VDC. a solenoid-operated electric clutch block. Î The AP roll actuator is a permanent magnet type DC actuator composed of three sections: ♦ ♦ ♦ a tachometer generator block.6 .

ATA 27 Aft quadrant & AP actuator Page 31/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2710 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Aileron control Page 32/ 285 Aileron control V2711 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 . Each connection between the rods is maintened by pendular cranks. V2711 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Aileron control Page 33/ 285 Î The right and left bellcranks are connected to push-pull rods which drive ailerons.

Î Each aileron deflection is limited by one upper and one lower adjustable aileron stop.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V2711 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Aileron control Page 34/ 285 Î The final push-pull rods actuate each aileron fixed bellcrank through the input lever.

the surface of which is composed of nickel. Î Three hinges are installed on the front spar of the aileron box-type structure: ♦ ♦ ♦ the inner hinge. ensuring control rod connection. Î Five static dischargers installed on the trailing edge ensure static electricity flow by corona effect.Aileron control ATA 27 Page 35/ 285 Î The aileron is balanced through counterweights installed on the structure inside the anti-icing horn area. and the outer hinge. the center hinge.ATR Training Centre . V2711 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

The winglets improve wing efficiency.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Aileron control Page 36/ 285 Î The aircraft is provided with winglets on the wing tips. V2711 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 . Î An electrical trim actuator is installed on the left aileron and actuates the tab.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This provides a flexible compensation which automatically increases with the aerodynamic loads applied on the ailerons.ATA 27 Aileron trim & tab and indicating description Page 37/ 285 Aileron trim & tab and indicating description Î Each aileron is equipped with a spring tab. Î There are 2 position transmitters.ATR Training Centre . reducing the effort necessary to their command. one on each aileron. V2712 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 27 Aileron tab Page 38/ 285 Aileron tab V2713 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

V2713 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î All spring tab control linkages are of failsafe construction so that the spring tab can be controlled in the normal way in the event of a failure of a single component.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the end of which is held by a rod hinged on a fixed section of the wing.ATA 27 Aileron tab Page 39/ 285 Î The right and left aileron spring tab are integral with a bellcrank.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The spring tab operates mechanically. Its deflection rate with respect to the aileron varies in proportion to aerodynamic resistance to aileron deflection.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Aileron trim control and actuation description Page 40/ 285 Aileron trim control and actuation description V2714 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27 Aileron trim control and actuation description Page 41/ 285 Î Aileron trim is performed by varying the neutral position setting of the left aileron spring tab with respect to the aileron.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. action on both rockers is required to drive the trim actuator.ATR Training Centre . As a safety device.6 . V2714 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Electrically controlled tab deflection supplements spring tab deflection. Î The aileron trim control switch includes two rockers which are operated simultaneously.

ATA 27 V2714 Aileron trim control and actuation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 42/ 285 ACOS v1.

two screw-type output shafts. Î The motor is of the permanent magnet type with two separate windings.ATA 27 Aileron trim control and actuation description Page 43/ 285 Î All trim actuators are interchangeable and comprise: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a dual electrical motor wired with two independent circuits. Upon energization (28 VDC) of one winding. V2714 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Note : only one motor coil is used for aileron and rudder trim. a position transmitter for cockpit indication.6 . a reduction gear. the motor rotates at a constant speed specific to this winding. Î The screw-type output shafts ensure that trim is irreversible.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The position transmitter sends a synchro signal to the trim position indicator. two end-of-travel microswitches.ATR Training Centre . Î A desiccant cartridge in the actuator absorbs any internal humidity. one for fully retracted and the other for fully extended. A window in the actuator allows visual inspection of the product color.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 Aileron trim tab position indicator description Page 44/ 285 Aileron trim tab position indicator description V2716 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2716 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Aileron trim tab position indicator description Page 45/ 285 The aileron trim tab position indicator is located on the front panel.6 . Roll scales are graduated in fraction of the total authority.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. commanded by the trim. are indicated in the flight compartment on the upper left part of the trim position indicator. Indications are computed from signals sent by the trim actuator position transmitter. Deflection values of the left aileron tab.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Aileron position transmitters description Page 46/ 285 Aileron position transmitters description V2718 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

one on each aileron. V2718 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The aileron position transmitter is linked by a rod to the aileron control left bellcrank at the fuselage-to-wing junction. Î The position of each aileron (left and right) is also mesured by a position transmitter.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . It is directly linked by a rod to the associated aileron.ATA 27 Aileron position transmitters description Page 47/ 285 Î There are 2 aileron position transmitters.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .deflection exceeds 2. improve roll control.5°.ATR Training Centre . one on each upper surface wing.ATA 27 Spoilers description Page 48/ 285 Spoilers description Î The roll spoilers. Î The roll spoilers begin to deflect as the associated aileron up . They are actuated by the blue hydraulic system. V2721 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Their deployment is regulated by their associated hydraulic Spoiler Block Valve (SBV).

a spoiler position feedback linkage connecting the spoiler to the valve block. a Spoiler Block Valve (SBV). V2721 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Spoilers description Page 49/ 285 Î After the junction bellcranks. the system components are: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a rod.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . a hydraulic actuator supplied from the SBV by hydraulic pipes. an input detent lever on the valve block.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 50/ 285 Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators V2726 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The spring return system allows the rotary selector valve to return to its neutral position. Due to the feedback position unit. the spoiler is hydraulically locked to the control wheel position. Î The pilot holds the control wheels in their position. Consequently. Î Hydraulic pressure in the big chamber is controlled by the SBV by means of the rotary selector. The smaller actuator chamber (A) is under the Blue hydraulic pressure. V2726 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the big chamber hydraulic fluid is returned to the reservoir. Î When input shaft rotation exceeds mechanism dead play.ATR Training Centre . until the control wheel selected position is reached. the spoiler opens. Î The pilot deflects the control wheels to the neutral position. The small chamber is under the Blue pressure and the actuator retracts the spoiler. Î Because of the current position of the middle annular valve. the extension command is transmitted to the rotary selector which allows pressure to both actuator chambers.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î In the example shown. The proximity switch detects the spoiler extension and sends a signal and the associated spoiler extended indicator light illuminates. Displacement of the detent input lever causes rotation of the input shaft in the SBV. and by the spoiler feedback linkage according to the position commanded. the actuator big chamber pressure is locked. The spoiler is then hydraulically locked.6 . the rotation of the middle annular valve causes the closure of the hydraulic selector valve. Î When the spoiler is retracted.5° of aileron deflection. so the right spoiler has to extend.ATA 27 Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 51/ 285 Î The control wheels are in the neutral position. It causes the SBV input shaft and thus the mechanism dead play to return to their neutral position. the pilot deflects the control wheels on the right. the proximity switch sends a signal and the associated spoiler extended indicator light extinguishes. Î As the A piston section is smaller than the B piston section. Î If the control wheel selected position corresponds to the spoiler position. Note that the dead play ensures spoiler beginning deflection as from 2.

ATR Training Centre . the pilot deflects the control wheels on the left.ATA 27 Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 52/ 285 Î The control wheels are in the neutral position. V2726 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the actuator big chamber pressure is locked. and by the spoiler feedback linkage according to the position commanded. Î Hydraulic pressure in the big chamber is controlled by the SBV by means of the rotary selector.6 . The smaller actuator chamber (A) is under the Blue hydraulic pressure. Î If the control wheel selected position corresponds to the spoiler position. so the right spoiler have not to extend. Î As the actuator is adjusted so that it is against the retracted stop with aileron in neutral position. the extension command is transmitted to the rotary selector which allows pressure in big chamber actuator to connect the return hydraulic line. When input shaft rotation exceeds mechanism dead play. Î Displacement of the detent input lever causes the input shaft rotation in the SBV. the right spoiler cannot move.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î In the example shown.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 53/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2726 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 V2726 Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 54/ 285 ACOS v1.

Displacement of the detent input lever causes rotation of the input shaft in the SBV. so the right spoiler has to extend. the spoiler opens. Consequently. V2726 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The spoiler is then hydraulically locked. Î As the actuator is adjusted so that it is against the retracted stop with aileron in neutral position. Î When input shaft rotation exceeds mechanism dead play. the pilot deflects the control wheels on the left. Î As the A piston section is smaller than the B piston section. Î Displacement of the detent input lever causes the input shaft rotation in the SBV. Î In the example shown. The small chamber is under the Blue pressure and the actuator retracts the spoiler. Î The pilot deflects the control wheels to the neutral position. until the control wheel selected position is reached. Î When the spoiler is retracted. so the right spoiler have not to extend. the spoiler is hydraulically locked to the control wheel position.ATR Training Centre . The proximity switch detects the spoiler extension and sends a signal and the associated spoiler extended indicator light illuminates. Î Because of the current position of the middle annular valve. Î If the control wheel selected position corresponds to the spoiler position. the proximity switch sends a signal and the associated spoiler extended indicator light extinguishes. the actuator big chamber pressure is locked. The smaller actuator chamber (A) is under the Blue hydraulic pressure. Î Hydraulic pressure in the big chamber is controlled by the SBV by means of the rotary selector. When input shaft rotation exceeds mechanism dead play. the rotation of the middle annular valve causes the closure of the hydraulic selector valve. Î In the example shown. It causes the SBV input shaft and thus the mechanism dead play to return to their neutral position. Note that the dead play ensures spoiler beginning deflection as from 2.ATA 27 Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 55/ 285 Î The control wheels are in the neutral position. Î The pilot holds the control wheels in their position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Due to the feedback position unit.5° of aileron deflection.6 . the extension command is transmitted to the rotary selector which allows pressure in big chamber actuator to connect the return hydraulic line. the extension command is transmitted to the rotary selector which allows pressure to both actuator chambers. and by the spoiler feedback linkage according to the position commanded. the big chamber hydraulic fluid is returned to the reservoir. the pilot deflects the control wheels on the right. the right spoiler cannot move. The spring return system allows the rotary selector valve to return to its neutral position.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 Spoiler block valve description Page 56/ 285 Spoiler block valve description V2722 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

They comprise an input lever following the aileron position and a position feedback shaft linked to the spoiler. Î The Spoiler Block Valves (SBV's) are identical. underneath the spoiler surface. Î Each is linked to the push-pull rods of the roll mechanical control. Î In case of spoiler jamming. The input levers can be fitted on either end of each axle.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The base of the detent input lever has four notches which bear on four hub lugs by means of a spring. V2722 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Spoiler block valve description Page 57/ 285 Î Each Spoiler Block Valve (SBV) is installed close to its associated spoiler actuator. the detent input lever provides an automatic disconnection. so that the right and left SBV are identical and interchangeable.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The position feedback lever ensures slaving of the spoiler position according to input lever position.

6 .ATA 27 Spoiler Page 58/ 285 Spoiler V2724 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre . They are hydraulically powered by the blue hydraulic system and the command orders are mechanical. Î The three hinges are fitted on the spoiler and are attached to the wing rear bulkhead.ATA 27 Spoiler Page 59/ 285 Î Spoilers are provided on each side on the upper surface wing.6 . V2724 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Spoiler deflection is initiated for 2. Î Each roll spoiler deploys proportionally to aileron deflection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.5° aileron deflection and is limited by an internal stop at 57°.

ATR Training Centre . hydraulic actuator and proximity switches Page 60/ 285 Pipes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. hydraulic actuator and proximity switches V2725 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Pipes.6 .

Î They are mounted in such a way not to be subject to wing deformation or dilatation.6 . At the actuators level. lyre pipes are used. V2725 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Pipes. hydraulic actuator and proximity switches Page 61/ 285 Î The hydraulic pipes are fixed on the rear spar from the SBV's to the spoiler actuators.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 27 Pipes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. two hydraulic line unions for connection to the SBV by means of the hydraulic pipes.6 .ATR Training Centre . hydraulic actuator and proximity switches Page 62/ 285 Î The spoiler actuators are a differential cross section type. Î They are composed of: ♦ ♦ a body connected to the structure by means of an end fitting equipped with a spherical bearing. V2725 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

hydraulic actuator and proximity switches Page 63/ 285 Î Spoiler proximity switches supply spoiler extension indicator lights on the overhead panel and send a signal "spoiler extended" to the AP.ATA 27 Pipes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2725 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Each indicator light is illuminated when the relevant spoiler is not retracted.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V2727 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The trim function is performed by offsetting the spring tab zero position. The pedals mechanically drive the rudder. The rudder trim tab deflection value is indicated in the flight compartment. A Travel Limitation Unit (TLU) installed on the rear quadrant area reduces rudder deflection at high speed. The RCU is centered each time trim is used or yaw damper is engaged. One of the final checks before take-off is to center both pedals and the RCU.Yaw control: rudder & tab description ATA 27 Page 64/ 285 Yaw control: rudder & tab description Î Î Î Î Î Î Yaw control is performed by a rudder which includes a spring trim tab. A releasable centering unit installed on the rudder input shaft stabilizes the rudder when no force is applied on the pedals.

V2746 Copyright © 2001-2008 . when the pedals are moved to full deflection. Î Î Î Î The pilot command acts directly on the spring tab and.ATR Training Centre . so the rudder also has to deflect on the right. The rudder and spring tab are in line and no trim command is applied.ATA 27 Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator Page 65/ 285 Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator Î Aircraft is on ground and no airload is applied on the flight surfaces. the spring is compressed and the spring tab moves in the opposite way.6 . The pedals are in the neutral position. Without airload on the surface. When rudder reaches full deflection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. In the example shown. the spring tab stays in line with the rudder until the rudder reaches its stops. through the spring on the rudder itself. the pilot pushes the pedals on the right.

airload on the surface also increases. The spring is compressed and the spring tab deflects in the opposite way of the control surface which generates a compensating moment. Î In the example shown.6 . The pilot command acts directly on the spring tab and. as rudder deflection increases. Î The spring tab provides flexible compensation which automatically increases with the aerodynamic loads applied on the rudder.ATR Training Centre . thus ensuring a reduction of the pilot's effort. The rudder and spring tab are in line and no trim command is applied. Î Note that spring travel increases with air speed. The pedals are in the neutral position. so the rudder also has to deflect on the right.ATA 27 Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator Page 66/ 285 Î Aircraft is in flight and airload is applied on the flight surfaces. Î With airload on the surface. through the spring on the rudder itself. V2746 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the pilot pushes the pedals on the right.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator Page 67/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2746 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 68/ 285 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 27 V2746 Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î Because of the mechanical linkage. the supply circuit of the Releasable Centering Unit (RCU) is closed. Î The spring tab deflection is indicated. the trim actuator motor commands its output shafts clockwise (or counterclockwise).ATR Training Centre . the pedals follow the spring tab and rudder movements. Î After release of the levers. causing the actuator motor to stop immediately. V2746 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Note that the spring tab deflection scale. in the flight compartment.6 . The RCU is then declutched and so the spring tab and the rudder can deflect according to the yaw trim control switches input. Î The Releasable Centering Unit (RCU) is no longer supplied. they are returned to the stable neutral position by springs. Î By moving both yaw trim control levers on the right. At the same time. are small.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. from signals sent by the trim actuator position transmitters. and consequently that of the rudder. The brake engages and the pre-strained spring maintains the rudder at the new centered position.ATA 27 Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator Page 69/ 285 Î The trim actuator allows movement of the neutral position setting of the spring tab with respect to the rudder. on the lower left part of the trim position indicator.

YD is engaged. The rudder and spring tab deflections principle remains the same as manual control in flight or on ground.6 . so the YD actuator commands the yaw control linkage by moving the rear quadrant.ATA 27 Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator Page 70/ 285 Î In the example shown.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When the YD actuator moves. the supply circuit of the Releasable Centering Unit (RCU) is closed. The RCU is then declutched as long as the YD function is engaged. Î When the YD function is not engaged. the RCU is no longer supplied. The brake engages and the pre-strained spring maintains the rudder at the new centered position. V2746 Copyright © 2001-2008 . so the spring tab and the rudder can deflect freely.

They are linked by rods located under flight compartment.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î The pedals are linked to a force detector rod which produces movement to the forward quadrant. V2729 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Mechanical control description Page 71/ 285 Mechanical control description Î Rudder control is performed by the captain's and first officer's pedals. The tension of the cable is not regulated but adjusted by turnbuckles. Î A cable loop runs through the fuselage to the tail cone and connects the forward and aft quadrants. The aft quadrant is connected to the rudder control rod. The neutral position of each pedal assembly is adjustable by means of a handle.

Î A trim actuator and a spring tab are mounted inside the rudder. and a rudder damper which limits rudder travel speed and excessive movement generated by gusts on ground. a Travel Limiter Unit (TLU) which limits rudder travel at high speed.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Mechanical control description ATA 27 Page 72/ 285 Î The rudder control mechanism is provided with: ♦ ♦ ♦ a Releasable Centering Unit (RCU) which transmits to the linkage a constant centering movement toward the controlled trimmed position. V2729 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Mechanical control description Page 73/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2729 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Pedals and force detector rod Page 74/ 285 Pedals and force detector rod V2730 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

V2730 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The Captain and First Officer each have one identical pedal set.ATR Training Centre . Î The linkage is composed of interconnection rods between the two pedal sets.6 . These rods synchronise the movement of both pedals sets.ATA 27 Pedals and force detector rod Page 75/ 285 Î Both pedals operate the rudder mechanically.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2730 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Pedals and force detector rod Page 76/ 285 Î The neutral position of each pedal assembly is adjustable from a handle installed under the front panel.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre . this drives the force detector rod. This causes the yaw damper function (and consequently the autopilot) to disengage. Î When the pilot pushes one pedal.ATA 27 Pedals and force detector rod Page 77/ 285 Î The left pedal set is connected to a force detector rod (or dynamometric rod). V2730 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The force detector rod includes a microswitch which changes state when a 30 daN load is applied to the pedal.6 . which links to the forward quadrant.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. and the rudder forward quadrant.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Forward & rear quadrants and linkage components Page 78/ 285 Forward & rear quadrants and linkage components V2731 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î This cable loop is not tension regulated. V2731 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Forward & rear quadrants and linkage components Page 79/ 285 Î The rudder forward quadrant transmits the linear movement from the pedals assemblies to the ruder cable loop.

the cable runs rearward in the cargo and cabin ceiling. Î After a second set of pulleys.ATA 27 Forward & rear quadrants and linkage components Page 80/ 285 Î The cable loop runs beneath the flight compartment floor.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . the cable runs upward through structural protections at the rear of the electric racks. V2731 Copyright © 2001-2008 . After a first set of pulleys. Î Turnbuckles are installed on the cables to permit length and tension adjustment.6 .

V2731 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . It is connected to the rudder bellcrank by a push-pull rod.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Pressure seals permit the cables to pass through the rear pressurized bulkhead. The pressure seals are made of two halves enabling easy replacement without cable removal. The rudder rear quadrant receives the linear movement from the cable loop and transmits it to the rudder control rod.ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Forward & rear quadrants and linkage components Page 81/ 285 Cables guides protect the cables from vibration and interference with other systems.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Spring tab mechanism Page 82/ 285 Spring tab mechanism V2732 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 . thus ensuring a reduction of the pilot's effort.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The spring tab provides flexible compensation which automatically increases with aerodynamic loads applied on the rudder.ATR Training Centre . through the spring tab. on the rudder itself. Î The pilot command acts directly on the rudder tab and. V2732 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Spring tab mechanism Page 83/ 285 Î The spring tab mechanism is located in the bottom part of the rudder. Î The spring tab is made of a failsafe four-leaf spring.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 Releasable centering unit description Page 84/ 285 Releasable centering unit description V2733 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Releasable centering unit description Page 85/ 285 Î The Releasable Centering Unit (RCU) stabilizes the rudder position when no action is applied on the pedals. Î This device is automatically centered on the linkage position every time a trim control command is applied. and is inhibited when the yaw damper is active. releases the springs support. Î It comprises: ♦ ♦ ♦ an input lever mechanically linked to the rudder. when energized.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . a set of springs which return the input lever to its central position. V2733 Copyright © 2001-2008 . and an electromagnetic brake which.

pushed against friction by six springs.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 Releasable centering unit description Page 86/ 285 Î The electromagnetic brake system includes: ♦ ♦ ♦ a brake coil made up of a wire-wound solenoid supplied by 28 VDC. and a centrifugal damper comprising eight wipers distributed on the outer diameter hub. V2733 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a deck. secured to hub.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Releasable centering unit description Page 87/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2733 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 27 Trailing edge and rudder Page 88/ 285 Trailing edge and rudder V2735 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

It is statically and dynamically balanced. The top of the rudder is anti-iced.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Trailing edge and rudder Page 89/ 285 The rudder is hinged on the fin rear spar by means of three hinges. V2735 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The horn anti-icing is through an electrical heating element brazed to the inner surface of the horn. using weights.ATR Training Centre .6 . placed on the forward side of the tip. Both rudder and tab include static dischargers ensuring static electricity flow by corona effect.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Rudder damper Page 90/ 285 Rudder damper V2736 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 Rudder damper Page 91/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2736 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 92/ 285 ACOS v1.ATA 27 V2736 Rudder damper Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

On ground. ♦ an anti-rotation pad on the damper body end fitting. The rudder damper is a double-effect damper. it limits excessive movement generated by gust and avoids damage to the structural stops. V2736 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Rudder damper ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Î Page 93/ 285 The rudder damper is located in the fin and is linked to the rudder.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. In flight. the rudder damper regulates rudder travel speed. ♦ a piston rod/tail rod assembly connected to the control surface by a spherical bearing in an adjustable end fitting.6 . ♦ and a visual indicator to check the damper hydraulic fluid lever. damping is obtained by the transfer of oil via a flow regulator. The rudder damper consists of: ♦ a body linked to the structure by a spherical bearing end fitting.

It modifies the neutral position of the spring tab. an AP yaw actuator is connected to the rear quadrant. Rudder trim tab deflection is indicated in the flight compartment. V2737 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î A position transmitter is installed in the fin and connected to the rudder. Î The Yaw Damper (YD) provides yaw damping and turn coordination.ATA 27 Rudder trim & YD function and indicating description Page 94/ 285 Rudder trim & YD function and indicating description Î An electrical trim actuator is installed in the bottom part of the rudder.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre . Trim setting is then allowed and causes the mechanism to center on the new position linkage. To achieve these functions. An AP yaw command also disengage the RCU. Î Movement of the yaw trim control upper lever to the left or the lower lever to the right energizes the clutch of the Releasable Centering Unit (RCU).

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 27 Rudder trim & YD function and indicating description Page 95/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2737 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27 Trim tab Page 96/ 285 Trim tab V2738 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 27 Trim tab Page 97/ 285 Î In the lower section. the trailing edge accomodates a trim spring tab connected to the rudder structure by means of piano hinges.6 . Î The rudder trim tab includes balancing weights.ATR Training Centre . V2738 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Trim tab deflection to either side of the rudder is approximately 16°. Î Rudder trim tab deflection is limited by two stops in the trim actuator.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Rudder trim control and actuation description Page 98/ 285 Rudder trim control and actuation description V2739 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2739 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Rudder trim control and actuation description Page 99/ 285 Î Rudder trim is performed by varying the neutral position setting of the spring tab with respect to the rudder via an electrical actuator. Î The rudder trim control switch includes two levers.6 .ATR Training Centre . For safety reasons. which control the yaw trim actuator.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. both levers must be moved and maintained in the same direction (Nose LH or Nose RH) to energize the system and trim the aircraft.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 100/ 285 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 27 V2739 Rudder trim control and actuation description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The position transmitter sends a syncro signal to the trim position indicator.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The motor has a permanent magnet with two separate windings. Î A desiccant cartridge in the actuator absorbs any internal humidity.ATA 27 Rudder trim control and actuation description Page 101/ 285 Î All trim actuators are interchangeable and comprise: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a dual electrical motor wired with two independent circuits.ATR Training Centre . Î The screw-type output shafts ensure that trim is irreversible.6 . one for fully retracted and the other for fully extended. a reduction gear. Note that only one motor coil is used for aileron and rudder trim. two screw-type output shafts. A window in the actuator allows visual inspection of the product color. Upon energization (28 VDC) of one winding. a position transmitter for cockpit indication. two end-of-travel microswitches. V2739 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the motor rotates at a constant speed specific to this winding.

ATA 27 Rudder trim tab position indicator description Page 102/ 285 Rudder trim tab position indicator description V2741 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

Deflection values of the rudder tab. are indicated in the flight compartment on the lower left part of the trim position indicator.ATR Training Centre . commanded by the trim. V2741 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Yaw scales are graduated in fractions of trim motor displacement. Indications are computed from signals sent by the trim actuator position transmitter.ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Rudder trim tab position indicator description Page 103/ 285 The rudder trim tab position indicator is located on the front panel.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 DFDR rudder position transmitter Page 104/ 285 DFDR rudder position transmitter V2743 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

It is linked by a rod and a lever to the rudder surface.6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 DFDR rudder position transmitter Page 105/ 285 Î The rudder position transmitter is installed in the fin. Î The position of the rudder is transmitted to the Flight Data Acquisition Unit (FDAU) then to the Digital Flight Data Recorder (DFDR) through a synchro signal from the position transmitter. V2743 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27 Yaw damper actuator description Page 106/ 285 Yaw damper actuator description Î Î Î Î The Yaw Damper (YD) actuator (or Auto Pilot (AP) actuator) is connected to the rear rudder quadrant by means of a cable loop. When the YD is engaged.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The Yaw Damper actuator is installed in parallel on the flight controls. The YD function ensures yaw damping and turn coordination through the rudder control linkage using the Yaw Damper actuator.ATR Training Centre . Engagement of the YD disengages the Releasable Centering Unit (RCU). V2744 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the rudder pedals follow the YD commands.6 .

The YD function ensures yaw damping and turn coordination through the rudder control linkage using the Yaw Damper actuator. V2744 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Yaw damper actuator description Page 107/ 285 The Yaw Damper (YD) actuator (or Auto Pilot (AP) actuator) is connected to the rear rudder quadrant by means of a cable loop.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre . Engagement of the YD disengages the Releasable Centering Unit (RCU). When the YD is engaged. The Yaw Damper actuator is installed in parallel on the flight controls. the rudder pedals follow the YD commands.

ATA 27 TLU and indicating description Page 108/ 285 TLU and indicating description Î The Travel Limitation Unit (TLU) limits pedals travel in order to prevent any damage to rudder structure when flying at high speed. Î The TLU has two states: ♦ ♦ "full authority position" which allows non limited rudder deflection. and "reduced authority position" which limits rudder deflection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre . V2747 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The TLU is a mechanical device.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 TLU and indicating description Page 109/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2747 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 110/ 285 ACOS v1.ATA 27 V2747 TLU and indicating description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

♦ a FAULT indicator light on panel 25VU.6 . ♦ and a "LO SPD" indicator light on panel 404VU which.ATR Training Centre .TLU and indicating description ATA 27 Page 111/ 285 Î The Travel Limitation Unit (TLU) comprises: ♦ a variable stop mechanism activated by an electrical actuator. indicates that the TLU is in low speed configuration.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ a manual stand-by control circuit from a 3-position protected switch. V2747 Copyright © 2001-2008 . which enables manual setting of the TLU (high speed or low speed) in case of ADC failure. on panel 25VU. The TLU automatic control is performed when reaching 185 Kts during an acceleration and when reaching 180 Kts during deceleration. Î The TLU is designed with dual load transfer channels so that failure of a component does not entail the loss of travel limitation at high speed. ♦ an automatic normal control circuit using air speed discrete signals delivered by the two ADCs (information VTLU). when illuminated. ♦ a normal control monitoring circuit performed by modules 1A and 2A of the Multi Function Computers (MFCs).

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 112/ 285 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 P27B3 TLU and indicating description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

TLU and indicating description ATA 27 Page 113/ 285 Î The Travel Limitation Unit (TLU) comprises: ♦ a variable stop mechanism activated by an electrical actuator. ♦ a manual stand-by control circuit from a 3-position protected switch. ♦ a FAULT indicator light on panel 25VU. The TLU automatic control is performed when reaching 195 Kts during an acceleration and when reaching 190 Kts during deceleration. which enables manual setting of the TLU (high speed or low speed) in case of ADC failure. when illuminated. ♦ an automatic normal control circuit using air speed discrete signals delivered by the two ADCs (information VTLU). indicates that the TLU is in low speed configuration.ATR Training Centre . ♦ and a "LO SPD" indicator light on panel 404VU which.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ a normal control monitoring circuit performed by modules 1A and 2A of the Multi Function Computers (MFCs). P27B3 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The TLU is designed with dual load transfer channels so that failure of a component does not entail the loss of travel limitation at high speed.6 . on panel 25VU.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 TLU control and indicating Page 114/ 285 TLU control and indicating V2749 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 27 TLU control and indicating Page 115/ 285 Î The Travel Limiter Unit (TLU) comprises: ♦ one electrical actuator. when the actuator is retracted. rudder control trim and elevator control trim.ATR Training Centre . ♦ two V-shaped hollow cams integral with the rudder rear quadrant shaft. the cam/roller assembly makes the stop limiting rudder deflection ("reduced authority position"). In this position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. identical to those used for the aileron control trim. fitted with two output shafts. ♦ and two articulating levers. Each lever is equipped with a roller which. positions itself into the "V" groove or the corresponding cam.6 . controlled by the actuator. a support secured on the aircraft structure. ♦ V2749 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The position transmitter inluded in the actuator is used for monitoring the normal control.6 .ATR Training Centre . V2749 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 TLU control and indicating Page 116/ 285 Î The electrical actuator includes two separate coils which enable two speeds of travel: ♦ ♦ high speed coil corresponds to normal control.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. and low speed coil corresponds to stand-by control.

ATA 27 TLU control and indicating Page 117/ 285 Î The two positions. depend on the state of the electrical actuator. TLU in "Reduced authority position" Î The actuator retracts and engages the rollers into the "V" cams.ATR Training Centre . Rudder deflection is no longer limited. Rudder deflection is then limited by the cam/roller artificial stops.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2749 Copyright © 2001-2008 . TLU in "Full authority position" Î The actuator extends and releases the rollers from the "V" cams. "full authority" and "reduced authority".6 .

the electrical actuator is energized and the TLU starts to extend.ATA 27 TLU control and indicating Page 118/ 285 TLU to "Full authority position" Î When aircraft speed decreases below the TLU activation threshold.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2749 Copyright © 2001-2008 . This indicates to the crew that the TLU is in "full authority position".ATR Training Centre . Î The TLU LO SPD indication illuminates when the TLU reaches the extended position because of extension limit switch closure.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 TLU control and indicating Page 119/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2749 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator Page 120/ 285 TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator V2750 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator Page 121/ 285 Aircraft is on ground. Following take-off. the TDC relay 19CY supplies the normal motor for 30 seconds. The actuator extension limit switch is closed and the green "LO-SPD" light is illuminated. Rudder travel is free to rotate. and detected by any ADC. Now. aircraft is in descent and its speed is decreasing. the retraction limit switch closes.6 . The rudder is free to rotate but the TLU actuator normal motor is still supplied. Note : if both ADCs are available. ADC1 has priority over ADC2. the extension limit microswitch closes and the green "LO-SPD" light illuminates. The normal motor is no longer supplied. When IAS is above 185 Kts. The normal motor is supplied. When IAS is below 180 Kts. As soon as Bus 2 is supplied. the TLU is still in "full authority position" and the green "LO-SPD" light remains illuminated. the 19CY TDC relay closes. The 19CY TDC relay is also energized.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. thus confirming the TLU extended position. As soon as time elapsed. the 19CY TDC relay closes and the normal motor is no longer supplied. as long as IAS is below 180 Kts. The TLU actuator starts to retract. and detected by both ADCs. V2750 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . When the actuator outputs shafts reach end-of-travel. the 13CY and 15CY relays are no longer energized. Rudder travel is then limited. The TLU is normally in extended position. The normal motor is no longer supplied. and the TLU actuator normal motor is supplied to extend. Aircraft is in flight and speed is increasing. When the actuator output shafts reach end-of-travel. After 30 seconds. the 13CY and 15CY relays are grounded and so energized. The extension limit switch opens and so the green "LO-SPD" light extinguishes.

ATR Training Centre . So. the actuator motor will not be supplied to retract. V2750 Copyright © 2001-2008 . If IAS is above 180 Kts but only one ADC detects it. The crew has to manually operate the TLU.ATA 27 TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator Page 122/ 285 Î Monitoring of the normal control is ensured by the A modules of the MFCs. This software logic compares the actuator position given by the position transmitter synchro signal with the 180 kts reference from the ADCs. the normal operation cannot be achieved.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the TLU has to be operated manually. Î Let's see an example of TLU manual operation.6 . In case of disagreement.

FLT CTL on CAP illuminates.ATR Training Centre . and TLU FAULT light illuminates amber.6 .ATA 27 TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator Page 123/ 285 Î Caution is triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Single chime sounds. Cautions flash. V2750 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 27 V2750 TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 124/ 285 ACOS v1.

the TLU selector switch has to be replaced on AUTO position.ATR Training Centre . Aircraft speed is now decreasing. Rudder deflection is now limited. Î Î Î Î The TLU manual actuator is supplied by the 28 VDC EMER Bus.6 . The actuator retracts toward "reduced authority position". IAS is below 180 Kts. therefore in low speed configuration. Î Note : in this position. the actuator manual motor is connected to the 17CY shunt resistor.ATA 27 TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator Page 125/ 285 Î The actuator is extended. Select the HI SPD position on the TLU selector switch. The TLU has to be retracted by setting the TLU selector switch on HI SPD position after opening the guard. Î IAS is above 180 Kts. as this winding is only used on emergency procedures. Select the AUTO position on the TLU selector switch. Î Î Î Î The TLU manual actuator is supplied by the 28 VDC EMER Bus.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The rudder is then free to rotate. Î This is to keep the manual motor collector clean. Select the LO SPD position on the TLU selector switch. The TLU actuator is extended. The TLU has to be extended by setting the TLU selector switch on LO SPD position. When TLU setting is done. Rudder deflection is no longer limited and free to rotate. V2750 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The actuator extends towards "full authority position". The TLU actuator is retracted.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The deflection value commanded by the pitch trim is indicated in the flight compartment. V2751 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The two actuators are synchronized by a flexible shaft.ATA 27 Pitch control: elevator & tab description Page 126/ 285 Pitch control: elevator & tab description Î Pitch control is performed by two elevators each equipped with a tab. Î Each control column mechanically drives the associated elevator and. Î A stall warning system including a stick pusher and two stick shakers is provided. Î Pitch trim is performed by off-setting both tabs neutral position.6 . the other elevator and the opposite control column. Each trim is activated by its dedicated actuator. through the pitch uncoupling mechanism.ATR Training Centre .

6 . Î Each cable tension regulator maintains cable tension between 20 and 25 daN. located below the cockpit floor.ATA 27 Mechanical control description Page 127/ 285 Mechanical control description Î Both control columns are connected.ATR Training Centre . They disconnect the Auto Pilot when the effort applied on the control column is greater than 10 daN.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2753 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Two force detector rods are connected on the pitch control lines. to a cable tension regulator. by means of rods.

ATA 27

Mechanical control description

Page 128/ 285

Î The cable tension regulators are linked, by means of cables, to two rear quadrants located in the tail cone.
Î The rear quadrants are coupled to the AP pitch actuator on the right side and to the stick pusher on the left side.
Î The rear quadrants are connected to the elevators by means of several push-pull rods.
V2753

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Mechanical control description

Page 129/ 285

Î The two elevators are linked by a pitch uncoupling mechanism.
Î In case of jamming, pitch control will be recovered by applying a differential force on both control columns, disengaging the pitch uncoupling system. A
"PITCH DISCONNECT" red alert is then triggered.

Î The non affected channel allows the aircraft to be operated safely. System recoupling has to be performed on ground.
V2753

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

Page 130/ 285

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

V2763

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

Page 131/ 285

Î Aircraft is in flight. The pitch uncoupling mechanism is provided with the 171 WW microswitch which monitors the system. In the normal condition, the left
and right elevators are coupled. Consequently, the ground is not connected to the MFCs inputs.

Î Unfortunately, the pitch uncoupling mechanism no longer couples the elevators.
Î The 171 WW microswitch closes during disconnection of the mechanism. Ground is now connected to the MFC's input and causes:


Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

illumination of the master WARNING light,
activation of the Continuous Repetitive Chime,
and illumination of the PITCH DISCONNECT warning light on the crew alerting panel.

To reset the system, the aircraft must be on ground.
Aircraft is now on ground. The control logic takes into account "weight on wheels" information. The 65 GB relay is then closed.
First, the gust lock system must be set on. This will cause the left and right elevators to reposition correctly.
Gust lock is set. The 3 KY switch closes.
The pitch uncoupling mechanism can be reset by pressing the "ELEV CLUTCH" rearm pushbutton on the RH lateral maintenance panel, in the flight
compartment.

Î When the "ELEV CLUTCH" rearm pushbutton is pressed, the 6 CB switch closes and supplies the 4 CB solenoid relay. Thus the electrical motor is
energized and the 8 CB actuator starts to extend.

V2763

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

Page 132/ 285

Î A fork, part of the mechanism, enables the uncoupling to be reset by pushing directly on the over centered points.
Î When energized, the electrical actuator extends and forces the fork to push the roller inside the V profile cam.
Î When actuator reaches the extension position, the 171 WW microswitch is pressed again and the contactor is opened. Ground is lost at the MFC's input
and the "PITCH DISCONNECT" light starts to flash.

Î To finish the resetting procedure, the "ELEV CLUTCH" rearm pushbutton must be released to retract the electrical actuator. The "PITCH DISCONNECT"
light continues to flash during the time of retraction.

Î When the electrical actuator reaches its retraction limit switch, the electrical supply is cut and the "PITCH DISCONNECT" stops to flash. The system has
been reset.
V2763

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

Page 133/ 285

Î Aircraft is in flight. The pitch uncoupling mechanism is provided with the 171 WW microswitch which monitors the system. In the normal condition, the left
and right elevators are coupled. Consequently, the ground is not connected to the MFCs inputs.

Î Unfortunately, the pitch uncoupling mechanism no longer couples the elevators.
Î To reset the system, the aircraft must be on ground.
Î Manual resetting can only be performed on ground. A pitch resetting tool is used to achieve this task. Access to the mechanism is done below elevators to
the tail.

Î Resetting the pitch uncoupling assembly is done by pushing the tool directly on the over centered points. This accomplished, the CAP alarm extinguishes.
V2763

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2763

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 134/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

Page 135/ 285

Î Aircraft is in flight. The pitch uncoupling mechanism is provided with the 171 WW microswitch which monitors the system. In the normal condition, the left
and right elevators are coupled. Consequently, the ground is not connected to the MFCs inputs.

Î Unfortunately, the pitch uncoupling mechanism no longer couples the elevators.
Î The 171 WW microswitch closes during disconnection of the mechanism. Ground is now connected to the MFC's input and causes:


Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

illumination of the master WARNING light,
activation of the Continuous Repetitive Chime,
and illumination of the PITCH DISCONNECT warning light on the crew alerting panel.

To reset the system, the aircraft must be on ground.
When energized, the electrical actuator extends and forces the fork to push the roller inside the V profile cam.
Aircraft is now on ground. The control logic takes into account "weight on wheels" information. The 65 GB relay is then closed.
First, the gust lock system must be set on. This will cause the left and right elevators to reposition correctly.
Gust lock is set. The 3 KY switch closes.
The pitch uncoupling mechanism can be reset by pressing the "ELEV CLUTCH" rearm pushbutton on the RH lateral maintenance panel, in the flight
compartment.

Î When the "ELEV CLUTCH" rearm pushbutton is pressed, the 6 CB switch closes and supplies the 4 CB solenoid relay. Thus the electrical motor is
energized and the 8 CB actuator starts to extend.

Î A fork, part of the mechanism, enables the uncoupling to be reset by pushing directly on the over centered points.
Î When actuator reaches the extension position, the 171 WW microswitch is pressed again and the contactor is opened. Ground is lost at the MFC's input
and the "PITCH DISCONNECT" light starts to flash.

Î To finish the resetting procedure, the "ELEV CLUTCH" rearm pushbutton must be released to retract the electrical actuator. The "PITCH DISCONNECT"
light continues to flash during the time of retraction.

Î When the electrical actuator reaches its retraction limit switch, the electrical supply is cut and the "PITCH DISCONNECT" stops to flash. The system has
been reset.

Î Manual resetting can only be performed on ground. A pitch resetting tool is used to achieve this task. Access to the mechanism is done below elevators to
the tail.

Î Resetting the pitch uncoupling assembly is done by pushing the tool directly on the over centered points. This accomplished, the CAP alarm extinguishes.

V2763

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Control column and force detector rod description

Page 136/ 285

Control column and force detector rod description

V2754

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Control column and force detector rod description

Page 137/ 285

Î Two identical control columns are provided in the flight compartment; one for the Captain and one for the First Officier.
Î When the pilot moves the control wheel forward or backward in a direction parallel to the aircraft center line, the pitch control bellcrank transmits control
column actuation to the push-pull force detector rod.

Î The control column is limited for nose down and nose up attitudes by adjustable stops to 8.75° nose down and 13.25° nose up.
V2754

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Control column and force detector rod description

Page 138/ 285

Î Each control column is connected to a force detector rod (or dynamometric rod), which links to its associated cable tension regulator.
Î When the pilot moves the control column forward or backward, this drives the force detector rod, and also the cable tension regulator.
Î The force detector rod includes a microswitch which changes state when a 10 daN load is applied on the control column. This causes the autopilot to
disengage (if engaged).
V2754

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Control column and force detector rod description

Page 139/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2754

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick shaker description

Page 140/ 285

Stick shaker description

V2755

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick shaker description

Page 141/ 285

Î Each stick shaker is linked to the base of the control column, under the floor compartment.
Î The stick shaker is designed to give warning of approaching stall by a vibrating its associated control column. The device is a part of the primary stall
warning.

Î The principle of operation is based on a reduction of rotary movement of an electrical motor shaft, used to drive an unbalanced rotor. This creates a
vibration of a given frequency.
V2755

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

Page 142/ 285

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

V2756

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

Page 143/ 285

Î Movement of each control column is transmitted through the force detector rod, to the cable tension regulator.
Î Its function is to transmit the movement to the rear quadrant. It also maintains the cable tension between 20 and 25 daN for all temperatures encountered
during flight or on the ground.

Î To check that the regulator is correctly compensating for ambient temperature, a pointer is attached to one quadrant and a calibrated scale on the other
quadrant.
V2756

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

Page 144/ 285

Î The cable loops run beneath the flight compartment floor. After a first set of pulleys, the cables run upward through structural protections at the rear of the
electric racks.

Î After a second set of pulleys, the cables run rearward in the cargo and cabin ceiling.
Î Turnbuckles are installed on the cables to permit length and tension adjustment.
V2756

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

Page 145/ 285

Cable guides protect the cables from vibration and interference with other system.
Pressure seals permit the cables to pass through the rear pressurized bulkhead.
The pressure seals are made of two halves enabling easy replacement without cable removal.
The rear quadrants receive the linear movement from the cable loops transmit it to the pitch contol rods.
V2756

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

Page 146/ 285

Î The movement of the rear quadrants is transmitted through dual push-pull rod and bellcranks up to the uncoupling mechanism.
Î The dual sets are located in the fin structure. One set for each control column.
V2756

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

Page 147/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2756

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator description

Page 148/ 285

Elevator description

V2757

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

Elevator description

Page 149/ 285

The elevators are hinged on three points fixed to the rear stabilizer spar.
The aileron is balanced through counterweights installed on the elevator structure, inside the anti-icing horn.
The elevator deflection is limited by one upper and one lower stop.
The horn anti-icing is through an electrical heating element brazed to the inner surface of the horn.
Five static dischargers ensure static discharging by corona effect.
The right and left elevator tab are integral with a bellcrank, the end of which is held by a rod hinged on a fixed section of the wing.
V2757

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Pitch uncoupling mechanism description

Page 150/ 285

Pitch uncoupling mechanism description

V2758

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Pitch uncoupling mechanism description

Page 151/ 285

Î The pitch uncoupling mechanism is installed in the upper part of the fin, between the last elevator bellcranks.
Î The left bellcrank is coupled to the right bellcrank through an adjustable mechanism. A leaf spring ensures adjustment.
Î Pitch uncoupling occurs when either elevator is jammed. It is detected by a microswitch. In this case, only the operable elevator provides aircraft pitch
control.

Î Reconditioning is performed on the ground using a manual tool or by means of an electrical actuator actuated by a pushbutton installed on the RH
maintenance panel, in the flight compartment.
V2758

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Rearm elevator clutch actuator description

Page 152/ 285

Rearm elevator clutch actuator description

V2760

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Rearm elevator clutch actuator description

Page 153/ 285

Î The elevator rearm clutch actuator is located below the uncoupling mechanism in the upper part of the tail.
Î The elevator clutch pushbutton allows reconnection, on ground, of both elevators in case of declutch. This pushbutton is located on the RH lateral
maintenance panel (702VU).

Î An electrical actuator is installed close to the pitch uncoupling mechanism.
Î Activation of the elevator clutch pushbutton energizes the electrical actuator which pushes the roller inside the V profile cam by means of a fork.
V2760

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher actuator description

Page 154/ 285

Stick pusher actuator description

V2761

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Stick pusher actuator description

Page 155/ 285

The stick pusher is the secondary stall warning. This device permits aircraft recovery through an immediate and strong nose- down order.
The stick pusher electrical actuator comprises a 28 VDC electric motor, a reduction gear, a spring rod and an output shaft.
The actuator also includes a control relay and a microswitch for monitoring system operation.
The spring permits the pilot to override the stick pusher with a sufficient load on the control column.
V2761

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher actuator description

Page 156/ 285

Î The stick pusher actuator is normally in the extended position.
Î When a stall configuration is detected, the actuator retracts which causes the aircraft nose to go down.
V2761

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher actuator description

Page 157/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2761

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Auto pilot actuator description

Page 158/ 285

Auto pilot actuator description

V2762

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Auto pilot actuator description

Page 159/ 285

Î The autopilot actuator is connected to the right rear quadrant.
Î The autopilot is linked to the right rear quadrant in the tail cone, by means of a cable loop.
Î The actuator includes a clutch which allows free movement when the autopilot is not engaged.
V2762

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Trim elevator and indicating description

Page 160/ 285

Trim elevator and indicating description

Î Two electrical trim actuators are installed inside the horizontal stabilizers and are coupled by a flexible shaft. They modify the neutral position of the tabs
with respect to the elevators.

Î Elevator trim tab deflection is indicated in the flight compartment on the pitch trim indicator.
Î An elevator position transmitter is installed on the left elevator.
V2764

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Trim elevator and indicating description

Page 161/ 285

Normal trim and STBY trim supply appropriate parts of each actuator.
Normal trim is performed by switching the two rockers installed on each control wheel.
Standby trim is performed by switching the standby trim control on the center pedestal.
Note that if the normal trim actuator is actuated for more than one second, an aural whooler is generated by the Computer Crew Alerting System (CCAS).
V2764

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Trim elevator and indicating description

Page 162/ 285

Î A "PITCH TRIM ASYM" light, located in the cockpit, on the center instrument panel, illuminated amber in case of pitch tabs desynchronisation.
Î To test the pitch tabs shift detection unit, a Push To Test pushbutton is provided on the Right Hand lateral maintenance panel (702VU).
V2764

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Trim elevator and indicating description

Page 163/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2764

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

Page 164/ 285

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

V2769

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

Page 165/ 285

Î Aircraft is in flight. Pitch trim is in the neutral position.
Î When aircraft pitch trim is required, the pilot has to press up (or down) both pitch trim rockers on the control wheel. Let's see what happens if the pilot
wants to trim up the aircraft.

Î By pressing up both rockers, the 13 CG microswitches close in up position. 50 CG and 54 CG relays are then supplied and close.
Î The normal trim actuator motors 21 CG and 22 CG are supplied and the actuators start to retract. If the pilot releases the rockers, or presses them down,
trim actuators retraction will stop immediately.

Î
Î
Î
Î

The pilot continues to trim up the aircraft.
If a trim actuator reaches the up limit switch, the switch closes and electrical supply is cut. The motor stops immediately.
The pilot decides to switch on the autopilot.
The pilot has released the pitch trim rockers so 50 CG and 54 CG relays are now open. Autopilot is switched on. The 58 CG relay is energized and closes.
Normal motors actuation is now managed by the AFCS computer.

Î The autopilot supplies the normal trim actuator motors 21 CG and 22 CG to trim down and the actuators start to extend.
Î As soon as the trim actuator leaves the retraction limit position, the up limit switch opens. The actuator motors are still supplied but the direction of the
current changes.

Î The pilot decides to manually trim down the aircraft.
Î By pressing down both rockers, the autopilot function is disconnected. The 58 CG relay opens and the 13 CG microswitches close in the down position.
51 CG and 53 CG relays are energized and close.

Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

The normal trim actuator motors 21 CG and 22 CG are supplied and the actuators start to extend.
The pilot continues to trim down the aircraft.
If a trim actuator reaches the down limit switch, the switch closes and electrical supply is cut. The motor stops immediately.
Stop-to-stop deflection time controlled by the elevator trim actuator motor is about 30 seconds.
A single electrical failure does not stay hidden:
♦ If a relay cannot be supplied (faulty contact), the trim control is lost.
♦ If a relay stays permanently supplied (stuck contact), the control in one direction is lost.

V2769

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2769

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 166/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

Page 167/ 285

Î Aircraft is in flight, but normal pitch trim control is lost. Pitch trim is in the neutral position.
Î When aircraft pitch trim is required, the pilot has to switch up (or down) the guarded standby control switch on the center pedestal. Let's see what happens
if the pilot wants to trim up the aircraft.

Î By switching up, the 18 CG up microswitches close.
Î The standby trim actuator motors 21 CG and 22 CG are supplied and the actuators start to retract. If the pilot releases the switch, or presses it down, trim
actuators retraction will stop immediately.

Î
Î
Î
Î

The pilot now wants to trim down the aircraft.
By switching down, the 18 CG down microswitches close and the up microswitches open.
The standby trim actuator motors 21 CG and 22 CG are supplied and the actuators start to extend.
Stop-to-stop deflection time controlled by the elevator trim actuator standby motor is about 32 seconds

V2769

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

Page 168/ 285

Î Tab asymmetry monitoring is performed by the MFC modules 1B and 2B. The MFCs are supplied by synchro signals delivered by the transmitters of the
21 CG and 22 CG elevator trim actuators.

Î The monitoring threshold is set at 0.7° of tab. In case of override, the 52 CG relay is energized and closes. The normal and standby pitch trim controls are
then inhibited.

Î The PITCH TRIM ASYM caution light illuminates amber, in association with the Master Caution lights and the single chime sound.
Î The pitch trim asymmetry monitoring can be tested through the dedicated "PITCH TRIM ASYM" PTT pushbutton on the RH maintenance panel.
Î When activated, results are the same as a pitch trim asymmetry detected (actuator power supply cut, "PITCH TRIM ASYM" caution light illuminates and
the CCAS is activated).
V2769

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

Page 169/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2769

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator trim control and actuator description

Page 170/ 285

Elevator trim control and actuator description

V2765

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator trim control and actuator description

Page 171/ 285

Î Pitch trim is performed by varying the neutral position setting of the tabs with respect to the elevator via two electrical actuators, linked by a flexible shaft.

V2765

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2765

Elevator trim control and actuator description

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 172/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator trim control and actuator description

Page 173/ 285

Î All trim actuators are interchangeable and comprise:




a dual electrical motor wired with two independent circuits. Note that only one motor coil is used for aileron and rudder trim,
a reduction gear,
two screw-type output shafts,
two end-of-travel microswitches, one for fully retracted and the other for fully extended,
a position transmitter for cockpit indication.

Î The motor has a permanent magnet type with two separate windings. Upon energization (28 VDC) of one winding, the motor rotates at a constant speed
specific to this winding.

Î The screw-type output shafts ensure that trim is irreversible.
Î A dessicant cartridge in the actuator absorbs any internal humidity. A window in the actuator allows visual inspection of the product color.

V2765

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator trim control and actuator description

Page 174/ 285

Î The position transmitter of the right elevator trim actuator (22 CG) sends a synchro signal to the trim position indicator and to the Centralized Crew
Alerting System (CCAS).

Î The position transmitter of the left elevator trim actuator (21 CG) sends a synchro signal to the Flight Digital Acquisition Unit (FDAU) and to the CCAS.
V2765

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Elevator trim control and actuator description

Page 175/ 285

Normal pitch trim control is ensured by two pitch trim rocker switches installed on each control wheel.
By operating both rocker switches, for safety reasons, the normal electrical motor of each trim actuator is energized, to control the nose up or down.
When the rockers are released, they are returned to the stable neutral position and the electrical circuit opens.
Standby pitch trim control is ensured by the standby pitch trim control switch, installed in the center pedestal, close to the aileron and rudder trim control
switches. In normal configuration, the switch is guarded in the neutral position.

Î The switch is composed of 8 electrical contacts. In standby control configuration, with the guard raised and placing the lever in the extreme position
causes 4 contacts to move to the working position and the 4 other contacts to remain in the rest position.
V2765

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Elevator trim tab position indicator description

Page 176/ 285

Elevator trim tab position indicator description

V2767

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Elevator trim tab position indicator description

Page 177/ 285

The pitch trim tab position indicator is located on the front panel.
Deflection values of the elevators tabs, commanded by the trims, are indicated in the flight compartment on the right part of the trim position indicator.
The green sector in the pitch scale (from 0.5° to 2.5° UP) identifies the take-off range.
Indications are computed from signals sent by the right trim actuator position transmitter.
V2767

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flexible shaft and push-pull rod description

Page 178/ 285

Flexible shaft and push-pull rod description

V2768

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

Flexible shaft and push-pull rod description

Page 179/ 285

The flexible shaft links the two elevator trim actuators.
It runs between the two elevators through the upper part of the fin.
The flexible shaft is located between the two actuators reduction gears.
It synchronizes the two actuators in both operating directions and allows one actuator to be driven by the other in case of failure.
The mechanism and the push-pull rods are dual load path construction types.
V2768

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stall warning description

Page 180/ 285

Stall warning description

V2770

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

Stall warning description

ATA 27

Page 181/ 285

Î Protection against aerodynamic stall is provided by aural and mechanical devices.
Î The primary warning comprises :

a criket aural alert activated when the margin between aircraft angle- of-attack and stall angle is too small,
and a stick shaker warning simultaneously activated with the aural alert.

Î The primary stall warning is computed by the MFCs depending on aircraft configuration and signals sent by the alpha probes (LH and RH).
Î The secondary warning comprises the stick pusher calibrated to the maximum angle-of-attack. The complete pitch control linkage assembly is pushed
forward resulting in an immediate and strong nose down change in pitch.

Î The primary and secondary stall warning activation threshold depends on several parameters such as angle-of-attack, radio-altitude and icing conditions
in take-off phase and in cruise.

Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

Note that the critical angle-of-attack value varies with the flaps position and the engine torque.
There are two stick shakers, one for each control column.
The stick pusher actuator is located on the captain's pitch channel.
Note that the autopilot is immediately disengaged in case of stall warning.
The AOA probes take part in flight enhancement.
When the Power Levers are set to the Flight Idle position, the EECs receive a signal from the MFCs to increase the fuel flow delivered to the engines in
function of the aircraft angle-of- attack so that it leads to a torque engine increasing with a maximum of 6%.

Î Therefore the propellers drag in particullar and the aircraft performances in general are optimized.
Î Note that should a Stick Pusher fault occurs from the MFCs, this optimization of the flight will be lost.

V2770

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stall warning operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 182/ 285

Stall warning operation and cockpit control and indication

V2774

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stall warning operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 183/ 285

Î The primary aerodynamic stall warnings are computed by the multifunction computers (MFCs) which takes into account the aircraft configuration and the
alpha probe signals.

Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

Computation of triggering thresholds also depends on torque values, to allow landing on shorter runways.
When the angle-of-attack limit is reached, the MFCs trigger the primary warnings. A criket aural alert sounds and the stick shakers are activated.
Additionnally, the Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) is inhibited and the autopilot is disconnected (if engaged).
Primary stall warnings de-activate if the angle-of-attack value decreases below the limit.
Primary stall warnings (and secondary stall warnings) are inhibited when aircraft is on ground.
The primary stall warnings (and secondary stall warnings) can also be inhibited by switching OFF the stick pusher and shaker pushbutton on the front
panel.

Î The secondary aerodynamic stall warnings are computed in the same way as the primary stall warnings.
Î When the angle-of-attack limit is reached, the MFCs trigger the secondary warnings. The stick pushers retracts to nose down the left / captain side
elevator channel. The stick pusher lights on the front panel and the CHAN1 and CHAN2 lights on the LH side maintenance panel illuminate.

Î Additionally, the Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) is inhibited and the autopilot is disconnected (if engaged).
Î In case of a difference between the two probes exceeding 4° for more than 5 seconds, a failure signal is processed by the MFCs.
Î The FAULT light illuminates on the stick pusher and shaker pushbutton associated with a single chime sound and the master CAUTION light. The stick
pusher is then inhibited.

Î The secondary stall warnings are inhibited:


if aircraft is on ground,
for 10 seconds after take-off,
or when aircraft is below 500 ft in approach.

Î The secondary stall warnings (and primary stall warnings) can also be inhibited by switching OFF the stick pusher and shaker pushbutton on the front
panel.

Î The stick shakers and stick pusher can be tested on ground by using the "WARN" section of the left hand side maintenance panel.
Î By placing the rotary selector on the "YES" position and pressing the "PTT" pushbutton, an angle-of-attack signal is simulated higher than the stick pusher
activation threshold. Corresponding warnings are then triggered.

Î By placing the rotary selector on the "TEST 1", "TEST 2" or "TEST 3" position and pressing the "PTT" pushbutton, a simulation of angle-of-attack signals
in the modules is done. Corresponding warnings are then triggered.

V2774

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Alpha probe description

Page 184/ 285

Alpha probe description

V2771

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

Alpha probe description

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Page 185/ 285

Two alpha probes are installed outside the fuselage, one on each side at the flight compartment level.
The probes are installed on the aircraft fuselage.
Each probe sends an electrical voltage via four potentiometers to the MFCs which is proportional to aircraft angle-of-attack.
Each vane is heated to avoid icing of the vane element.
V2771

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick shaker description

Page 186/ 285

Stick shaker description

V2772

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick shaker description

Page 187/ 285

Î The stick shaker is designed to give warning of approaching stall by vibrating its associated control column. This device is a part of the primary stall
warning.

Î Stick shakers are controlled by module B of the MFC.
Î Each MFC module receives signals sent by four potentiometers of each left and right hand alpha probe.
Î The MFC's trigger the following primary warnings when the angle-of-attack limit is reached:

criket aural warning,
stick shakers.

V2772

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2772

Stick shaker description

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 188/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick shaker description

Page 189/ 285

Î The activation threshold depends on:




flaps position (from flap position transmitters),
engine torques (from torque indicators),
angle-of-attack (from AOA sensors),
altitude (from the radio-altimeter),
icing conditions in take-off phase and in cruise (from anti-ice system).

Î The de-activation threshold is the same as the activation threshold.
Î For the existing flap configuration and to allow low landing speed for short landing distance, the MFCs compute the angle-of-attack value to be added to
the basic activation thresholds to take into account the actual engine power setting. Stick shaker is then called clever stick shaker.

Î Basic activation threshold is the value corresponding to an engine torque greater than 35 %.
Î The increase of thresholds for low engine torques is not applicable in icing conditions.
Î Alarms are inhibited when the aircraft is on ground.

V2772

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

V2772 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATA 27 Stick shaker description Page 190/ 285 Î A guarded pushbutton located on the front panel allows the stick shaker (and stick pusher) function to be switched off.ATR Training Centre . Î A periodic test is required on the system. A device is provided on "WARN" section of the left maintenance panel 101VU and forms part of the Centralized Crew Alerting System.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Stick shaker description Page 191/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2772 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Stick pusher description Page 192/ 285 Stick pusher description V2773 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Stick pusher description Page 193/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2773 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 27 V2773 Stick pusher description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 194/ 285 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 . ♦ icing conditions in take-off phase and in cruise (from anti-ice system). ♦ altitude (from the radio-altimeter). The activation threshold depends on: ♦ flaps position (from flap position transmitters). This device permits aircraft recovery through an immediate and strong nose-down order. The stick pusher is controlled by module A of the MFCs.ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Î Stick pusher description Page 195/ 285 The stick pusher is the secondary stall warning. ♦ engine torques (from torque indicators). Î The de-activation threshold is the same as the activation threshold.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. To activate the secondary warning (stick pusher). ♦ angle-of-attack (from AOA sensors). Each MFC module receives signals sent by four potentiometers of each left and right hand alpha probe. signals from both MFC 1 and MFC 2 are required. V2773 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The stick pusher is then called clever stick pusher. V2773 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . the MFCs compute the angle-of.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Basic activation threshold is the value corresponding to an engine torque greater than 35 %. Î The increase of thresholds for low engine torques is not applicable in icing conditions.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Stick pusher description Page 196/ 285 Î For the existing flap configuration.attack value to be added to the basic activation thresholds to take into account the actual engine power setting.

or if the difference between alpha probes exceeds 4° for more than 5 seconds (FAULT illuminates amber on the Stick Shaker / Pusher pushbutton).ATA 27 Stick pusher description Page 197/ 285 Î The stick pusher is inhibited: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ on ground (weight on wheels).ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2773 Copyright © 2001-2008 . for 10 seconds after take-off. descending below 500 ft radio altitude (approach) while first stall warning remains operative.

ATA 27 Stick pusher description Page 198/ 285 Î A guarded pushbutton located on the front panel allows the stick pusher (and stick shaker) function to be switched off.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î A periodic test is required on the system. A device is provided on "WARN" section of the left maintenance panel 101VU and forms part of the Centralized Crew Alerting System.6 . V2773 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The flaps are controlled by means of a selector handle on the right hand side of the pedestal panel. approach and landing is performed by four flaps which rotate on hinges located below the wings.ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Flaps description Page 199/ 285 Flaps description Î Lift increase for take-off.6 . V2775 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 27 V2775 Flaps description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 200/ 285 ACOS v1.

Four hydraulic actuators are supplied from an electro-hydraulic flap valve. Position 2: flaps at 15° (during take-off and approach).Flaps description ATA 27 Page 201/ 285 Î There are three flaps positions : ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Î Position 1: flaps at 0° (in cruise). The left and right flap assemblies are identical. Two transmitters indicate their position to the MFCs and to the flaps position indicator in the flight compartment.6 . A flap asymmetry detection and a spurious flap retraction warning system are associated with the control system. V2775 Copyright © 2001-2008 . This last selection corresponds to an effective position of 33°. Position 3: flaps at 30° (for landing phase).ATR Training Centre . Commands are transmitted by electrical signals to the Multi Function Computers (MFCs).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Flaps operation and cockpit controls and indications Page 202/ 285 Flaps operation and cockpit controls and indications V2788 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

when the flaps reach their new position. the EXT flag on the flaps position indicator appears. Î When the flaps reach their new position. As before. the MFCs correct the flaps position by energizing the extension or retraction solenoid valve. Î Î Î Î Î Î If the flaps move out of that position. Î When the control lever is placed on the 15° flaps position. S1 microswitch in the flap control switch unit is closed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the MFCs receive this information from the position transmitters. The extension solenoid valve is then deenergized. the MFCs inhibit the flap extension order. During flap movement. S1 microswitch in the flap control switch unit opens and S2 microswitch closes. energizing the flap block valve retraction solenoid. When the control lever is placed in the 30° flaps position. Î The actuators are supplied by the blue hydraulic circuit and start to extend. The actuators are supplied by the blue hydraulic circuit and start to extend. The extension solenoid valve is then de-energized. The MFCs receive the signal corresponding to the new selected position and energize the extension solenoid valve in the flap block valve. V2788 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The MFCs receive the signal corresponding to the new selected position. This maintains the actuators against their retracted position stops.ATR Training Centre . Î Flaps retraction operation is the same as for extension. Î Otherwise the MFCs energize the extension solenoid valve in the flap block valve while the retraction solenoid valve is no longer energized. Î The MFCs send a signal to the flap block valve. S2 microswitch in the flap control switch unit opens and S3 microswitch closes. If airspeed is already above the Maximum Flap Extended Speed (VFE). Î Let's select the 15° flap position. the MFCs receive this information from the position transmitters.ATA 27 Flaps operation and cockpit controls and indications Page 203/ 285 Î When the flap control lever is placed in the 0° flap position.6 . Let's select the 30° flap position.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 204/ 285 ACOS v1.ATA 27 V2788 Flaps operation and cockpit controls and indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î If an asymmetry between the left and right inboard flaps exceeds 6. Movement of the flap control lever has no more effect on the flaps. Select the 30° flaps position. V2788 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the positions of the right and left inboard flaps are monitored by the MFCs through the two position transmitters. the FLT CTL light illuminates amber on the Crew Alerting Panel (CAP). Î The aircraft is in approach.ATA 27 Flaps operation and cockpit controls and indications Page 205/ 285 Î Aircraft is in flight with a 0° flaps position.ATR Training Centre . and the amber FLAP ASYM light illuminates. Î Warnings are then triggered in the flight compartment: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ the Master Caution light flashes amber.7°.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a logic in the MFCs causes inhibition of the wing flap extension or retraction command.6 . the single chime sounds. Î When the flaps are commanded to extend (or retract). Î The ASYM flaps test pushbutton located on the right hand side maintenance panel enables to test on ground the system. The captain asks you to select the 30° flaps position. Î The extension or retraction solenoid valves are no longer energized and the flaps remain in their current position.

the continuous repetitive chime sounds. and the FLAPS UNLOCK light illuminate red on the Crew Alerting Panel (CAP). V2788 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When one of the 15° or 30° positions (33° effective position) is reached.ATR Training Centre . a logic compares the half-sum of the position values read by the transmitters respectively with values 12° and 30° memorized in computers. Î Any spurious flap retraction of more than 3° triggers the warnings in the flight compartment: ♦ ♦ ♦ the Master Warning light flashes red.6 .ATA 27 Flaps operation and cockpit controls and indications Page 206/ 285 Î The positions of the right and left inboard flaps are monitored by the MFCs through the two position transmitters. Î The UNLK pushbutton located on the right hand side maintenance panel enables to test on ground the system.

A pin links the lever to the flaps control switch unit. electrical and hydraulic controls description Î Î Î Î Each of the four flaps are actuated by its own actuator. V2777 Copyright © 2001-2008 . All surfaces are linked mechanically and move simultaneously.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 27 Mechanical. electrical and hydraulic controls description Page 207/ 285 Mechanical. The flap control lever is installed on the centrer pedestal. The MFCs receive flap position information from two transmitters located on the inboard flaps (one on each side). The flap control switch unit is linked to the MFCs.

6 . electrical and hydraulic controls description Page 208/ 285 Î The flap block valve receives electrical orders computed by the MFCs. Î The blue hydraulic system provides hydraulic pressure.ATA 27 Mechanical. Î It distributes the pressure between the four actuator chambers. V2777 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 . electrical and hydraulic controls description Page 209/ 285 Î A flap unlock warning is provided to inform the crew of the untimely flaps retraction from flap position 15° or 30°. Master Warning light flashes red.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The purpose of this warning is to counteract any evolution of the aircraft towards a possible stall configuration.ATR Training Centre . Î The UNLK pushbutton located on the right hand side maintenance panel enables the system to be tested on ground V2777 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î If an untimely flaps retraction occurs. and the continuous repetitive chime sounds.ATA 27 Mechanical. the following associated warnings are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ FLAP UNLOCK light on the Crew Alerting Panel (CAP) illuminates red.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 210/ 285 ACOS v1.ATA 27 V2777 Mechanical. electrical and hydraulic controls description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The following associated warnings are triggered: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ FLT CTL light on the Crew Alerting Panel (CAP) illuminates amber.ATA 27 Mechanical. electrical and hydraulic controls description Page 211/ 285 Î An asymmetry protection is also provided to restrict possible asymmetry between the flaps assemblies to a defined limit.6 . Master Caution light illuminates amber. Î The ASYM flaps test pushbuttons located on the right hand side maintenance panel enables the system to be tested on ground. The flaps remain in position and the control lever no longer has effect on the system. Î If an asymmetry between the inboard flaps occurs.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the electrical flaps control supply is isolated. FLAP ASYM light illuminates amber. and the single chime sounds. V2777 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

electrical and hydraulic controls description Page 212/ 285 Auto Pilot (AP) and Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) receive signals from the flaps control switch unit. The left flap position transmitter supplies a flaps position indicator.ATR Training Centre .6 . V2777 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 27 Î Î Î Î Mechanical. This signal is also used by the Flight Data Acquisition Unit (FDAU) and the Centralized Crew Alerting System (CCAS) for Take-off config warning.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Activation of FLAP ASYM light and position of left hand side flap are recorded in the Digital Flight Data Recorder (DFDR).

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Mechanical.6 .ATR Training Centre . electrical and hydraulic controls description Page 213/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2777 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27 Flap control lever and switch unit description Page 214/ 285 Flap control lever and switch unit description V2778 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

Î Before changing notches.ATA 27 Flap control lever and switch unit description Page 215/ 285 Î The flap control lever is installed on the center pedestal. Î The lever is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ a handle. It moves through a three-notch gate. and a spring to maintain the pin in a normal position in a notch in the gate. V2778 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the pilot must pull the handle to compress the spring thereby disengaging the pin from the notch.6 . a pin attached to the handle.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

s2 and s3). Each microswitch corresponds to one lever position. and an electrical connector connected to the MFCs. Î For each position of the input lever corresponding to a flap control lever preselected position. Î The flaps control switch unit comprises three microswitches (s1.6 . an input shaft attached to a cam which controls opening and closing of microswitches.ATA 27 Flap control lever and switch unit description Page 216/ 285 Î The flaps control switch unit is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an input lever connected to the flap control lever.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . one microswitch closes and two open. a brake providing resistive torque to the input shaft. V2778 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 27 Flap control lever and switch unit description Page 217/ 285 This page intentionally left blank V2778 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 27 P2778 Flap control lever and switch unit description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 218/ 285 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Flap control lever and switch unit description Page 219/ 285 This page intentionally left blank P2778 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27 P2778 Flap control lever and switch unit description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 220/ 285 ACOS v1.

Each microswitch corresponds to one lever position. Î The flaps control switch unit comprises three microswitches (s1. Î Before changing notches. a pin attached to the handle. a brake providing resistive torque to the input shaft.6 . the pilot must pull the handle to compress the spring thereby disengaging the pin from the notch. Î For each position of the input lever corresponding to a flap control lever preselected position. P2778 Copyright © 2001-2008 . s2. and an electrical connector connected to the MFCs. an input shaft attached to a cam which controls opening and closing of microswitches.ATA 27 Flap control lever and switch unit description Page 221/ 285 Î The flap control lever is installed on the center pedestal. one microswitch closes and two open. and a spring to maintain the pin in a normal position in a notch in the gate. Î The lever is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ a handle.ATR Training Centre . Î The flaps control switch unit is composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an input lever connected to the flap control lever. It moves through a four-notch gate. s3 and s4).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 27 Flaps position transmitters & indicator description Page 222/ 285 Flaps position transmitters & indicator description V2781 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 27

Flaps position transmitters & indicator description

Page 223/ 285

Î Left and right inboard flap position information is supplied by two synchro-type position transmitters (one for each inboard flap).
Î Each transmitter is connected to the mobile fitting of the flap inner hinge via a rod.
V2781

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Flaps position transmitters & indicator description

Page 224/ 285

The flaps position is indicated in the flight compartment. The signal is provided by the flap position transmitter.
The transmitter also sends signals to the CCAS enabling "TO CONFIG" (Take-Off Configuration) alarms to be generated.
The Flight Data Acquisition Unit (FDAU) records flaps position.
A magnetic flag labelled EXT comes into view when the flap extend solenoid valve is energized. Its repeated activation in flight with wing flaps extended
indicates a leakage in the hydraulic lock incorporated in the valve block.
V2781

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps position transmitters & indicator description

Page 225/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2781

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps actuator description

Page 226/ 285

Flaps actuator description

V2783

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps actuator description

Page 227/ 285

Î The actuators are of the sliding type. They are connected to the wing structure and the flap by means of self-lubricated spherical bearings.
Î The spherical bearings must be lubricated at regular intervals.
Î Two self-sealing hydraulic couplings allow bleeding of the hydraulic circuit.
V2783

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps block valve description

Page 228/ 285

Flaps block valve description

V2784

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps block valve description

Page 229/ 285

Î The hydraulic control unit is designed to supply the four hydraulic actuators, through rigid pipes.
Î The flap block valve includes two solenoid valves operating a selector valve, one for extension, the other for retraction.
Î The selector valve links the pressure and return circuits to the users according to the command sequence.
V2784

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

Flaps block valve description

ATA 27

Page 230/ 285

Î Blocking valve are inserted in the user ports in the block valve. Their function is to close off these ports in the absence of a command to the solenoid
valves (or in case of simultaneous commands to both solenoid valves) in order to immobilize the flaps.

Î Overpressures, due to thermal expansion for example, occuring downstream the blocking valves, are maintained within acceptable values by two relief
valves.

Î A block of two restrictor units is located at the flap block valve output, on the line supplying the actuator big chambers. Its function is to limit the flap
operating speed in the extension direction.

Î Each restrictor unit supplies a symmetrical pair of actuators in order to obtain symmetrical operating loads.
V2784

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps block valve description

Page 231/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2784

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

Page 232/ 285

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

V2786

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

Page 233/ 285

Î The left and right flap assemblies are symmetrical. Three hinge arms are mounted on each flap.

V2786

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

Page 234/ 285

Î The inboard and outboard flaps are connected by an interconnection rod. In case of failure, a pin minimizes the differences in flaps position.

V2786

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

Page 235/ 285

Î Each flap assembly is hinged on arms fitted on the wing rear spar. There are:


the inner hinge,
the intermediate hinge (fitted with an actuator),
and the outer hinge.

V2786

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

Page 236/ 285

Î Flaps fairings are installed on the arms to improve aerodynamics and avoid icing. This is valid for all the arms except for the inboard inner arm.
Î For this, the arms move into a lip seal installed on the wing to fuselage vertical side fairing.
V2786

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

Page 237/ 285

The hydraulic lines are fixed on the rear wing spar from the flap block valve to the actuators.
They are mounted in such a way so as not to be subject to deformation or extansion.
At the actuators level, lyre pipes are used.
A block of two restrictor units is located at the flap block valve output, on the line supplying the extend actuators chamber. The function is to limit the flap
operating speed in the extension direction.

Î Each restrictor unit supplies a symmetrical pair of actuators in order to obtain symmetrical operating loads.
Î A restrictor unit is also installed at the flap block valve output, on the line supplying the retract actuators chamber. The function is to limit the flap operating
speed in the retraction direction.
V2786

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Interconnection torque shaft description

Page 238/ 285

Interconnection torque shaft description

V2787

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

Gust lock description

ATA 27

Page 239/ 285

Gust lock description

Î A gust lock system is provided to protect the roll and pitch controls on ground.
Î This system includes:

an elevator mechanical locking device,
and an aileron electro-mechanical locking device.

Î To enable gust lock system engagement, the ailerons must be centered and the control column positioned slightly forward.
Î A hydraulic damper installed between the rudder and the vertical stabilizer protects the rudder in the same way.
V2789

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust lock description

Page 240/ 285

Î When the gust lock lever is set to the ON position, the Power Levers travel is slightly limited below FI (Flight Idle).
Î This system provides protection against take-off when gust lock engaged, or too high power setting when in hotel mode.
Î An AIL LOCK light illuminates amber with CCAS activation through the MFCs, whenever one of the locking actuators is in disagreement with the gust lock
lever position (lock or unlock position).
V2789

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust lock description

Page 241/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2789

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 242/ 285

Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication

V2794

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 243/ 285

The aileron electric gust lock actuators can be activated only on ground.
The actuator positions are monitored by both MFCs. Set the gust lock lever to the ON position.
When the gust lock lever is set to the ON position, the actuators are supplied to extend.
An 8 seconds time delay is given in the monitoring system to allow actuators extension.

When the full extend position is reached, the electrical supply is cut off and a signal is sent to the MFCs, via the microswitches.
Set the gust lock lever to the OFF position.

Î Selecting the gust lock lever to the OFF position will supply the actuators to retract.
Î In case of failure of one actuator, the MFCs will trigger a Flight Control (FLT CTL) caution with AIL LOCK illuminated on the pedestal after 8 seconds.
Î With the AIL LOCK illuminated, selecting the PLA in High Power will cause a CONFIG WARNING through the MFCs.

V2794

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 244/ 285

Î The gust lock control microswitch is used for the pitch uncoupling resetting operation. Setting the gust lock lever to the ON position causes the right and
left elevator to reposition correctly.

V2794

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 245/ 285

Î Setting the gust lock lever to the ON position is one of the actions required to enable engagement of the propeller brake in hotel mode.
Î Gust lock engagement is monitored by both MFCs.
V2794

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 246/ 285

When starting the right engine with the propeller brake locked (in Hotel Mode), the gust lock lever must be set to the ON position.
This is to prevent power levers displacement above Flight Idle (FI) in order to protect the propeller brake.
If the gust lock is off, FAULT in the Start 2 pushbutton illuminates when the ENG/START selector is set to any start or crank position.
CCAS is activated. ENG illuminates on the Crew Alerting Panel (CAP), Master Caution illuminates amber and the single chime sounds.
Note that starting is not inhibited.
V2794

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication

Page 247/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2794

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Control lever description

Page 248/ 285

Control lever description

V2791

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Control lever description

Page 249/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2791

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2791

Control lever description

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 250/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Control lever description

Page 251/ 285

Î Position of the control lever in locking notch (ON position means that ailerons and elevators are locked) is indicated as follows:

yellow stripes engraved in control lever handle are visible to the crew,
a mechanical stop linked to the gust lock lever limits power lever travel, thus enabling taxi but not take-off.

Î When in the OFF position, the gust lock lever is maintained in this position by various locking unit springs and by its own spring.
Î The gust lock lever consists of:



a lever connected to a bearing end,
a slider pin. When this pin is moved up by pilot action on the handle, two rollers start running over two cams.
a return spring. It ensures the return of the pin to the ON position when the handle is pulled aft.
two microswitches near the ON position.

V2791

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust locking unit description

Page 252/ 285

Gust locking unit description

V2792

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Gust locking unit description

Page 253/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2792

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2792

Gust locking unit description

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 254/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

Gust locking unit description

Page 255/ 285

The two gust locking units are located underneath the flight compartment.
The gust lock lever operates two push-pull cables, toward the two underfloor locking units.
The captain's locking unit locks the captain's elevator channel.
The first officer's locking unit locks the first officer's operator channel
The locking device includes a spring, which disengages the lock in the absence of a control order on the plunger.
Locking is accomplished as follows:
♦ the slider actuates a locking pin via a second spring,
♦ if the locking pin is not facing its housing, the pin locking spring is compressed,
♦ when the rotation of the corresponding elevator lever brings the housing in front of the locking pin, the pin locking spring will automatically cause
locking pin engagement.

V2792

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Aileron lock description

Page 256/ 285

Aileron lock description

V2793

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Aileron lock description

Page 257/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2793

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2793

Aileron lock description

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 258/ 285

ACOS v1.6

Aileron lock description

ATA 27
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î

The system includes two mechanical locking devices, each immobilizing one aileron.

Î
Î
Î
Î

The electrical gust lock actuator pushes a roller through a linkage on a cam.

Page 259/ 285

Each locking device is controlled by a gust lock electrical actuator.
The gust lock electrical actuators are controlled by switches installed on the gust lock lever.
If one switch or the associated relay logic remains open, the two aileron gust lock actuators remain engaged or disengaged.
In flight, a relay inhibits the electrical gust lock control.
Monitoring of the electrical control logic is performed by modules 1B and 2B.
Each MFC module activates:
♦ an amber local 'AIL LOCK" light and associated MASTER CAUTION light in case of discrepancy between any actuator and any control switch.
♦ a red CONFIG warning (through TO CONFIG test or power lever at Max power position) if:
- discrepancy is detected between any actuator and GUST LOCK lever control switches,
- any actuator is not released when one power lever is at TAKE-OFF power.

If the roller is not facing the cam slot, the actuator spring box is compressed and forces aileron locking due to the cam profile.
When the roller is in front of the slot, the spring will automatically cause locking engagement.
In case of rupture downstream the actuator screw, an additional spring disengages or keeps the roller locking disengaged.

V2793

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Aileron lock description

Page 260/ 285

Î In case of system failure, actuators can be manually retracted using a screw fitted on the actuator body.
Î Actuators can be reached through an access door, below the wing.
V2793

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

System controls and indicators

Page 261/ 285

System controls and indicators

<1> FAULT light illuminates amber in case of two Air Data Computer failures or data incoherence, TLU position synchro failure or system disagree. CCAS
activated.
<2> The Travel Limitation Unit selector switch contains three self-held positions. The two manual positions are selectable in accordance with airspeed
limitation. Above 185 kts : HI SPD has to be selected. Below 180 kts : LO SPD has to be selected.
<3> When illuminated, each spoiler blue light indicates that the associated spoiler is not in the retracted position. Spoilers activate when aileron travel is
above 2.5 °.
V2795

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2795

System controls and indicators

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 262/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

System controls and indicators

Page 263/ 285

<1> The STICK PUSHER light comes on in green when the stick pusher actuator is supplied.
<2> The flaps position indicator shows the current flaps position. A EXT flag appears to indicate that the flap valve is hydraulically commanding flap
extension. When the flaps are extended, an EXT flag means that a hydraulic circuit leak exists.
<3> The FLAP ASYM light illuminates amber when flaps asymmetry exceeds 6.7°. Flaps are then frozen in the current position. CCAS is activated.
<4> The PITCH TRIM ASYM light illuminates amber to indicate a pitch tabs desynchronisation. CCAS is activated.
<5> The roll trim position indicator shows the left hand aileron trim controlled tab travel.
<6> The pitch trim tab position indicator shows right trim actuator controlled tab travel. If the indication is not in the green arc at take-off, a CONFIG
warning is triggered on the CAP. CCAS is activated.
<7> The yaw trim position indicator shows units of trim motor displacement.
<8> The TLU LO SPD indicator light comes on in accordance with airspeed limitations. It illuminates green below 180 kts; The TLU is released to allow full
rudder deflection. Above 185 kts, the TLU is in the reduced authority position. Full rudder deflection is not allowed. In case of TLU automatic control
failure, with airspeed below 180 kts and LO SPD position not manually selected, the maximum cross wind is 15 kts. The TLU LO SPD light is not
illuminated.
<9> The stick pusher and shaker pushbutton enables the two sytems and aural warnings to be switched off. In this case, the OFF light illuminates white. It
also indicates a failure if stick pusher or shaker system in case of FAULT amber illumination.
<10> The AIL LOCK light illuminates amber whenever one of the locking actuators is in disagreement with the gust lock lever position (lock or unlock
position).

V2795

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 264/ 285

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Î A periodic test circuit of the stick pusher and shaker system is provided on the "WARN" section of the left hand maintenance panel 101VU and forms part
of the Centralized Crew Alerting System (CCAS).

Î Before performing the tests, preparation has to be accomplished.
V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 265/ 285

This page intentionally left blank

V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2797

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 266/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 267/ 285

Î First, check that the following circuit breakers are closed on panel 121VU:


2FU "FLT CTL / STICK PUSHER / CTL & CAPT STICK SHAKER",
14FU "FLT CTL / STICK PUSHER / PWR SPLY",
15FU "FLT CTL / F/O STICK SHAKER & RUD TLU / AUTO CTL".

Î Check that the following circuit breakers are closed on panel 122VU:


1DM "ANTI / DE ICING / AAS / BOOTS A & B IND",
33DM "ANTI / DE ICING / HORNS CTL & IND / RUD & L ELEV",
34DM "ANTI / DE ICING / HORNS CTL & IND / AIL & R ELEV".

Î Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers on panel 126VU:




32DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / R ELEV",
48DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / L AIL",
50DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / R AIL",
51DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / RUDDER",
63DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / R ELEV",

Î To finish the preparation task, make certain that no-one is working in elevator travel ranges. Aircraft can now be energized.

V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2797

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 268/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 269/ 285

Î Aircraft is now energized.
Î Check that the following circuit breakers are closed on panel 21 VU:







2UA1 "MFC/1A NORM SPLY",
2UA2 "MFC/2A NORM SPLY",
3UA1 "MFC/1B NORM SPLY",
3UA2 "MFC/2B NORM SPLY",
4UA1 "MFC/1A AUX / ADC1 HOT SPLY",
4UA2 "MFC/2A AUX SPLY",
5UA1 "MFC/1B AUX SPLY",
5UA2 "MFC/2B AUX SPLY",

Î Finally, on the overboard panel, check that MFC pushbuttons are set to ON.
Î Ckeck also flap data acquisition. This check ensures that flap position transmitter signal are correctly received in each MFC module.

V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 270/ 285

Î Check that the rotary selector of the maintenance panel is placed on the NORM-FLT position.
Î After de-energization of the aircraft, remove safety clips and tags and close the following circuit breakers on panel 126VU:




32DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / R ELEV",
48DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / L AIL",
50DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / R AIL",
51DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / RUDDER",
63DM "HORNS ANTI ICING PWR SPLY / L ELEV".

Î Operational test of stick shakers and pusher circuit is now finished.
V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 271/ 285

Rotary selector switch is placed in the "YES" position. An angle-of-attack signal will be simulated higher than the stick pusher activation threshold.
Please perform the test by pressing and holding the "PTT" pushbutton.
Criket aural alert sounds and STICK SHAKERS are activated. "GPWS FAULT" advisory light illuminates amber on the Crew Alerting Panel (CAP).
After 10 seconds, corresponding to the 10 seconds of inhibition after take-off, "CHAN1" and "CHAN2" and both "STICK PUSHER" indicator lights
illuminate.

Î At the same time, the STICK PUSHER is activated so its actuator moves to its stops. Test "YES" has been completely performed.
V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 272/ 285

Î Rotary selector switch is placed in the "TEST 1" position. An angle-of-attack signal will be simulated in the "HARD" and "SOFT" modules of the MFCs.
Î Please perform the test by pressing and holding down the "PTT" pushbutton.
Î Cricket aural alert sounds and LEFT COLUMN STICK SHAKERS is activated. "GPWS FAULT" advisory light illuminates amber on the Crew Alerting
Panel (CAP).

Î After 5 seconds, the "FAULT" legend on the stick pusher pushbutton illuminates. Master "CAUTION" illuminates. "FLT CTL" caution lights come on.
Î Test "TEST 1" has been completely performed.
V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 273/ 285

Î Rotary selector switch is placed in the "TEST 2" position. An angle-of-attack signal will be simulated in the "HARD" and "SOFT" modules if the MFCs.
Î Please perfom the test by pressing and holding down the "PTT" pushbutton.
Î Cricket aural alert sounds and RIGHT COLUMN STICK SHAKERS is activated. "GPWS FAULT" advisory light illuminates amber on the Crew Alerting
Panel (CAP).

Î After 5 seconds, the "FAULT" legend on the stick pusher pushbutton illuminates. Master "CAUTION" illuminates. "FLT CTL" caution lights come on.
Î Test "TEST 2" has been completely performed.
V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

V2797

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

Page 274/ 285

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations

Page 275/ 285

Î Rotary selector switch is placed in the "TEST 3" position. An angle-of-attack signal will be simulated in the "HARD" and "SOFT" modules if the MFCs.
Aircraft is not in icing conditions.

Î Please perfom the test by pressing and holding down the "PTT" pushbutton.
Î Cricket aural alert sounds and both STICK SHAKERS are activated. "CHAN 1" and "CHAN 2" indicator lights illuminate on the maintenance panel. The
stick pusher is not activated. "GPWS FAULT" advisory light illuminates amber on the Crew Alerting Panel (CAP).

Î While continuing to press down the "PTT" pushbutton, switch on the anti-ice "RUD & L ELEV HORNS" (or "AIL & R ELEV") pushbutton to perform the test
in icy conditions.

Î As soon as anti-ice is switched ON, the STICK PUSHER is activated and both "STICK PUSHER" indicator lights illuminate. The previous warnings
(including stick shakers activation) remain activated.

Î Test "TEST 3" has been completely performed.

V2797

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Rigging of ailerons control operation

Page 276/ 285

Rigging of ailerons control operation

Î Before accomplishing rigging of ailerons control, preparation has to be done. First, the Captain's and First Officer's seats have to be removed. Then the
flight compartment floor covering can be removed.

Î Check that trim tab is in the zero position on the trim position indicator. If not, place it in this position using the two half control switches.
V2798

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Rigging of ailerons control operation

Page 277/ 285

Î On panel 121VU, open, safety and tag the following breaker:

4CG "FLT CTL / AIL TRIM AND LOCK WARM".

V2798

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Î
Î
Î
Î

Rigging of ailerons control operation

Page 278/ 285

Put the aileron control wheels in the neutral position and display a warning notice in the flight compartment prohibiting operation of aileron control.
Then remove floor panels around the control column and the control column covers
Install access platforms at level of ailerons and remove the underwing surface access panels.
Finally, remove ceiling panels below the rear quadrant.
V2798

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Rigging of ailerons control operation

Page 279/ 285

Î Place the control whells in the neutral position and engage the two rigging pins. This maintain the control wheels in the central position.
Î Rigging of the cable tension regulator is performed following an adjustment graph to compensate for ambient temperature. A zero position holding
maintenance tool is inserted.

Î A rigging pin is also inserted in the Captain's aileron control quadrant.
V2798

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Rigging of ailerons control operation

Page 280/ 285

Î Engage rigging pin in the rear quadrant.
Î Finally, engage rigging pin of the aileron tabs.
V2798

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

ATA 27

Rigging of ailerons control operation

Page 281/ 285

Î To finish this task:


re-install the removed panels and covers,
remove the access platforms,
and remove the warning notice in the flight compartment.

Î On panel 121VU, remove safety clips and tags and close the breaker 4CG.
Î Finally, re-install the flight compartment floor covering and install the Captain's and First Officer's seats.
V2798

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

Summary

ATA 27

Page 282/ 285

ATA 27 FLIGHT CONTROL

V2798

General description

2

Cockpit panels location

4

Interfaces

6

Features

7

Safety precautions

14

Roll control: aileron & tab description

15

Aileron & tab operation and cockpit controls & indicators

16

Cockpit location

21

Mechanical control description

22

Control wheel & cable tension regulator

24

Aft quadrant & AP actuator

28

Aileron control

32

Aileron trim & tab and indicating description

37

Aileron tab

38

Aileron trim control and actuation description

40

Aileron trim tab position indicator description

44

Aileron position transmitters description

46

Spoilers description

48

Spoiler mechanical & hydraulic operation and cockpit controls & indicators

50

Spoiler block valve description

56

Spoiler

58

Pipes, hydraulic actuator and proximity switches

60

Yaw control: rudder & tab description

64

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

Summary

ATA 27

V2798

Page 283/ 285

Rudder & spring tab operation and cockpit control & indicator

65

Mechanical control description

71

Pedals and force detector rod

74

Forward & rear quadrants and linkage components

78

Spring tab mechanism

82

Releasable centering unit description

84

Trailing edge and rudder

88

Rudder damper

90

Rudder trim & YD function and indicating description

94

Trim tab

96

Rudder trim control and actuation description

98

Rudder trim tab position indicator description

102

DFDR rudder position transmitter

104

Yaw damper actuator description

106

TLU and indicating description

108

TLU control and indicating

114

TLU operation and cockpit control and indicator

120

Pitch control: elevator & tab description

126

Mechanical control description

127

Elevator & tab operation and cockpit control

130

Control column and force detector rod description

136

Stick shaker description

140

Cable tension regulators, rear quadrants and linkage components description

142

Elevator description

148

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

Summary

ATA 27

V2798

Page 284/ 285

Pitch uncoupling mechanism description

150

Rearm elevator clutch actuator description

152

Stick pusher actuator description

154

Auto pilot actuator description

158

Trim elevator and indicating description

160

Elevator & tab trim operation and cockpit controls & indication

164

Elevator trim control and actuator description

170

Elevator trim tab position indicator description

176

Flexible shaft and push-pull rod description

178

Stall warning description

180

Stall warning operation and cockpit control and indication

182

Alpha probe description

184

Stick shaker description

186

Stick pusher description

192

Flaps description

199

Flaps operation and cockpit controls and indications

202

Mechanical, electrical and hydraulic controls description

207

Flap control lever and switch unit description

214

Flaps position transmitters & indicator description

222

Flaps actuator description

226

Flaps block valve description

228

Flaps, supports, fairing and hydraulic components description

232

Interconnection torque shaft description

238

Gust lock description

239

Copyright © 2001-2008 - ATR Training Centre - All right reserved For Training Only

ACOS v1.6

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 27 V2798 Page 285/ 285 Gust lock operation and cockpit control and indication 242 Control lever description 248 Gust locking unit description 252 Aileron lock description 256 System controls and indicators 261 Stick pusher and shaker check maintenance operations 264 Rigging of ailerons control operation 276 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1. .6 ATA 28 FUEL Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.

V2801 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 28 General description Page 2/ 107 General description Î The ATR Fuel system is composed of the following systems : ♦ ♦ ♦ a storage system : 2 tanks. with its associated ventilation system. an indicating system (fuel quantity indicating and fuel tank temperature). a distribution system with 2 engine feed systems and a refuel/defuel system. one in each wing.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 General description Page 3/ 107 This page intentionally left blank V2801 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 4/ 107 ACOS v1.ATA 28 V2801 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

The total volume is 6370 liters (5000 kg / 11025 lbs). a main tank. one in each wing. the wing centre box is vented and drained. to prevent this. Î Any fuel leakage from these lines accumulates in the wing centre box.785). Î The wing centre box structure.ATA 28 General description Page 5/ 107 Î Each wing is composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a feeder tank. The maximum fuel capacity per tank is 3185 liters (2500 kg / 5512 lbs for a fuel density of 0. a vent-surge tank. Î Each tank has its own venting system which connects it to a vent-surge tank in all flight configurations. formed as an integral part of the wing structure.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The fuel is stored in two tanks.ATR Training Centre . contains the fuel cross-feed and tank refuelling lines. V2801 Copyright © 2001-2008 . located above the fuselage. a venting system.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 6/ 107 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 V2801 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

and is controlled by a motive flow valve. located on the cockpit fuel panel. The valve position is indicated by a green horizontal flow bar on the cockpit fuel control panel and the electrical pumps are automatically activated. Î The LP S/O valve is located between the tank outlet and the corresponding engine.ATR Training Centre . allows both engines to be fed by one fuel tank. or one engine to be fed by both tanks. The vent-surge tank serves as a reservoir for main tank overflow due to fuel thermal expansion.6 .U. Î An electrical pump and an engine feed jet pump are installed.M.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The feeder tank is always full and protects the engine feed system against negative or lateral load factors. The engine feed jet pump is activated by HP fuel from the engine H.ATA 28 General description Page 7/ 107 Î In normal conditions. Î When the cross feed valve is opened. V2801 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a blue "FUEL X FEED" light illuminates on MEMO panel. Î The outboard 100 liters vent-surge tank is not a fuel storage tank but is an integral part of the fuel ventilation system. Î Each system is equipped with a pressure drop protection. Î A cross feed valve controlled by the "X FEED" pb. Î The main tank stores the remaining fuel and supplies the feeder tank through the feeder pump action or gravity flow. each engine is supplied from its associated wing tank. It's controlled by its associated fire handle. Î The inboard 160 kg (353 Lbs) feeder tank normally supplies the respective engine and contains most of the pumps and control valves.

ATA 28 General description Page 8/ 107 Î Six probes are installed in each tank and electrically connected to the cockpit fuel quantity indicator.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V2801 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . four magnetic fuel quantity indicators (dipsticks). Î Fuel indicating system also comprises : ♦ ♦ a fuel tank temperature probe located in the LH feeder tank which sends information to the cockpit fuel tank temperature indicator.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Cockpit panel location Page 9/ 107 Cockpit panel location V2802 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Interfaces Page 10/ 107 Interfaces V2803 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Features Page 11/ 107 Features V2804 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 V2804 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 107 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 107 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 28 V2804 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 28 V2804 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 107 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 28 Safety and precautions Page 15/ 107 Safety and precautions V2805 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 V2805 Safety and precautions Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 16/ 107 ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 17/ 107 ACOS v1.ATA 28 V2805 Safety and precautions Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 18/ 107 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 V2805 Safety and precautions Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 19/ 107 ACOS v1.ATA 28 V2805 Safety and precautions Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 20/ 107 ACOS v1.ATA 28 V2805 Safety and precautions Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Safety and precautions Page 21/ 107 This page intentionally left blank V2805 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 28 Fuel storage description Page 22/ 107 Fuel storage description V2806 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre . taking into account the thermal expansion volume. Î These two outlets are connected to a vent-surge tank located outboard of the fuel tank between ribs 23 and 24.510 Lbs). Î Both tanks are vented in all flight configurations : ♦ ♦ by a vent line routed from rib 5 to rib 23 and provided with a rubber drain. That inspection must be conducted by specially trained personnel and dedicated tools.500 kg (5. Î Each ATR fuel tanks are composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ a feeder tank : capacity = 160 kg (353 Lbs). located at the wing break. Each tank has a capacity of 2. Î MPD Scheduled Check: Particular attention to the Detailed Inspection of the fuel tank (JIC 28-10-00 DVI 10005/10010) for general condition and installation of all the components within the fuel tanks.785. Î The wing upper surface panel is comprised of two sections for each half wing from rib 0 to rib 13 and from rib 13 to rib 24. constitutes an anti-surge baffle.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. by a float valve located in the outer wing section. V2806 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Rib 13. The centre section spar box located above the fuselage does not store fuel. a main wing tank which stores the remaining fuel. It can be removed for inspection and internal repair. for a kerosene density of 0. a vent-surge tank : capacity = 100 liters (does not store fuel).6 .Fuel storage description ATA 28 Page 23/ 107 Î Fuel is stored in two integral wing tanks formed by the wing spar box between ribs 4 and 23.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 S2806 Fuel storage description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 24/ 107 ACOS v1.6 .

6 . a main wing tank which stores the remaining fuel. Î These two outlets are connected to a vent-surge tank located outboard of the fuel tank between ribs 22 and 23.Fuel storage description ATA 28 Page 25/ 107 Î Fuel is stored in two integral wing tanks formed by the wing spar box between ribs 4 and 22. Î Both tanks are vented in all flight configurations : ♦ ♦ by a vent line routed from rib 5 to rib 22 and provided with a rubber drain.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. located at the wing break. Rib 13.250 kg (4. Î Each ATR fuel tanks are composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ a feeder tank : capacity = 160 kg (353 Lbs). Î MPD Scheduled Check: Particular attention to the Detailed Inspection of the fuel tank (JIC 28-10-00 DVI 10005/10010) for general condition and installation of all the components within the fuel tanks. Each tank has a capacity of 2. Î The wing upper surface panel is comprised of two sections for each half wing from rib 0 to rib 13 and from rib 13 to rib 23. for a kerosene density of 0. taking into account the thermal expansion volume. constitutes an anti-surge baffle. It can be removed for inspection and internal repair.785. by a float valve located in the outer wing section.960 Lbs). S2806 Copyright © 2001-2008 . That inspection must be conducted by specially trained personnel and dedicated tools.ATR Training Centre . The centre section spar box located above the fuselage does not store fuel. a vent-surge tank : capacity = 100 liters (does not store fuel).

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 28 Fuel tanks description Page 26/ 107 Fuel tanks description V2807 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2807 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î They ensure drainage of water from tanks at any aircraft attitude between ±3°. This water is then drained away through manually operated water drains. Three self-closing water drains per tanks are installed.6 .ATA 28 Fuel tanks description Page 27/ 107 Î The wing lower surface panel is designed so that any water collects beneath the fuel in the lowest parts of the tanks. A water drain is installed at the lowest point of the vent surge tank in order to evacuate water which could freeze up to siphon level in icing condition and thus prevents tank venting failure.

where all necessary precautions for performing work in fuel tanks must be taken by specially trained personnel.ATR Training Centre . CDCCL Item: Particular attention during remove/installation of wing access doors.6 .ATA 28 Fuel tanks description Page 28/ 107 Î Three access doors are located on the upper surface at either end of each tank and allow access to essential equipment without removing the upper surface panel : ♦ one door is located between rib 4 and 5 (feeder tank access). Î CDCCL Item: Particular attention when opening and closing the wing box access doors (JIC 570000 OAC 10000). ♦ the door located above the wing centre box compartment (between rib 1 and 2) is the cross feed system access. for the check of conductivity (JIC 05-51-16 CHK 10010). ♦ another door is between rib 22 and 23 and is fitted with a gravity refuelling port.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2807 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

A ground connection installed near the cap.6 . provides electrical continuity between the refuelling cap and the aircraft structure.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2807 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 28 Fuel tanks description Page 29/ 107 Î Gravity refuelling operation is performed through two overwing gravity filling ports installed on the wing upper surface panel access door between rib 22 and 23. Î Each gravity refuelling port includes a support attached to the structure. The cap is equipped with a locking device which is flush with the wing upper surface. a cap and a filter.ATR Training Centre .

More than one bonding lead missing.6 .ATA 28 Fuel ventilation description Page 30/ 107 Fuel ventilation description Î CDCCL Item: Bonding of pipes within the fuel tanks is part of the design protection against electrostatic discharge. damage or untightened on each pipe inside the fuel tanks can introduce unsafe condition.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2808 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

caused by thermal expansion of the fuel. The vent surge tank can contain 5 times vent line volume.6 . It has a capacity of approximately 100 liters. Fuel is recovered by siphoning. Î The vent line is vented through a NACA intake installed on the wing lower surface.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The vent surge tank recovers fuel from the vent line.ATA 28 Fuel ventilation description Page 31/ 107 Î Both tanks are vented in all flight configuration and on ground by a vent line and a float valve connected to a vent surge tank. V2808 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre . It is ducted into the wing centre box at front spar level.ATA 28 Fuel ventilation description Page 32/ 107 Î The wing centre box has its own venting system. They also serve for draining. on either side of the fuselage. V2808 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Two air vent ports are located at the lowest points of the wing centre box exhaust outside of the karmans.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The system is designed to renew the volume of air in the wing centre box every three minutes. Î Air ventilation is supplied from the left side of the fuselage to wing fairings through a scoop. This system serves to evacuate any vapor and fuel due to leaks in the lines routed through the centre compartment.

6 . or fuel tank full. Î The float valve allows direct tank ventilation through the vent surge tank. Î A water drain installed in the lower point of the surge tank allows to avoid the accumulation of water wich in icing condition could freeze up to the vent line syphon level and prevent the tank to be vented.Fuel ventilation description ATA 28 Page 33/ 107 Î The NACA intake enables a slight overpressure of 0.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The rubber drain allows fuel and water trapped in the vent line to drain back into the tank.3 PSI (20 mb). to prevent fuel entering the vent surge tank. It closes during roll back. to be applied in the tank during the flight.ATR Training Centre . V2808 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 28 Fuel engine feed distribution description Page 34/ 107 Fuel engine feed distribution description V2809 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

System controls and indicators are displayed on the fuel panel located on the overhead panel in the flight compartment.ATR Training Centre . a low pressure switch. a low pressure shut-off valve.ATA 28 Fuel engine feed distribution description Page 35/ 107 Î Fuel is fed to each engine from a corresponding tank by means of a system installed in a feeder tank between ribs 4 and 5. Î The feeder tank has a capacity of approximately 160 kg (353 lbs).6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. an electrical auto control pressure switch. an engine feed jet pump. V2809 Copyright © 2001-2008 . two relief valves. a cross feed valve. a feeder jet pump. Î The fuel system is composed of : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an electrical pump. a motive flow valve.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 28 Fuel engine feed distribution operation Page 36/ 107 Fuel engine feed distribution operation V2823 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 . it supplies the feeder jet pump. Both electrical pump are energized.energized and the motive flow valve is supplied to close. causes the amber Master caution light to flash. single chime. If the feeder jet pump fails. the valve opens. At the same time. send an audible. The fuel flow rate delivered at engine starting in 450 l/h for a pressure of 5. FEED LO PR ambert light are illuminated because fuel feed pressure. The engine is fed through the opposite tank. it closes associated LP shut off valve. the pressure switch 17 (18) QA installed on the engine jet pump outlet deenergizes the electric pump after 30 s time delay. the motive flow valve installed on the fuel engine HP return line. is < 4 PSI. In case of engine Fire. Î After engine starting. The electric pump delivers the necessary flow rate for engine consumption. driving flow for the engine feed jet pump is supplied through a return line from HMU. Î In the event of engine feed jet pump failure. detected by LP pressure switch. The 28 VDC electric pumps are energized and begin to supply fuel to engines. V2823 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î When pressure supplied by the engine feed jet pump reaches 8.5 PSI (380 mb). FEED LO PR extinguishes. the pressure switch 17 (18) QT provides electric pump running control which ensures fuel supply to the engine. the engine feed jet pump is not supplied. Î By selecting OFF the corresponding PUMP push button. Î Cross feed valve could be used to supply an engine from the opposite tank. Î At this step. illuminates the amber fuel warning light on the CHP. the system : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ energized the MFC bite loaded. opens in order to supply the engine feed jet pump. At the same time. The LP shut off valve is open. Feeder tank pump is designed to maintain feeder tank full by collecting fuel from main tank with feeder jump suction pipe. With the X feed valve push button pressed IN. green flow bar is horizontal. the feeder tank is connected to the main tank through flap valves (installed at the bottom of rib 5) which allows fuel to flow from the tank to the feeder tank. (monitoring of the feeder tank fuel level is provided by a dedicated probe) Î When a feeder tank not full is detected. Î Both fuel engine electric pumps push buttons are pressed IN and green RUN lights illuminate. automatically energized the correspnding electrical pump. the motive flow valve and X-feed valve are closed.ATA 28 Fuel engine feed distribution operation Page 37/ 107 Î The aircraft is energized and both engines are not running.5 PSI.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. In presence of return pressure. the electric pump is de. when corresponding engine fire handle is pulled. The engine feed jet pump begins to operate by driving fuel from the feeder tank. Î The fuel flow supplied by the feeder jet pump is suficient to maintain the feeder tank full in all configurations.ATR Training Centre . the feeder jet pump is activated by the electric pump output pressure.

6 .ATA 28 Electrical pump description Page 38/ 107 Electrical pump description V2811 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Electrical pump description Page 39/ 107 This page intentionally left blank V2811 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 28 V2811 Electrical pump description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 40/ 107 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Electrical pump description ATA 28 Page 41/ 107 Î A 28 VDC electric pump is installed in each feeder tank between ribs 4 and 5. Î CDCCL Item: The pump has been covered by extensive testing that demonstrated the compliance of the fuel pump with requirements of the Fuel Tank Safety Regulations.5 PSI (380 mb). Î Access is gained through an access door located on the upper wing surface panel between ribs 4 and 5.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The check valve located on the canister outlet avoids any fuel leakage when removing the electric pump. It is installed on the tank lower surface. The 28 VDC electric pump installed in a canister supplies fuel to the engine during starting. Î It also serves to supply an engine when an engine jet pump failure occurs. V2811 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î On cockpit fuel panel. Any deviation to the approved pump configuration can lead to questioning of the test results and therefore can potentially introduce an unsafe condition.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The canister equipped with a self sealing system is a self-contained explosive type. It allows the electric pump to be removed without emptying the fuel feeder tank. RUN and OFF push button lights indicate electrical pump configuration. Î The flow rate delivered at engine starting is 450 liters / hour at a pressure of 5.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Feeder jet pump description Page 42/ 107 Feeder jet pump description V2813 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V2813 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The inlet flow rate creates a depression at the venturi inlet. Î Access to the jet pumps is through the feeder door located on the upper surface panel between ribs 4 and 5. by drawing the fuel from beyond rib 5. allowing the feeder tank to be full in all flight configurations.ATR Training Centre . throughout the flight.6 . Î In the event of a jet pump failure. Operated by fuel from the engine feed system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This depression induces a fuel flow rate at jet pump suction. the jet pump maintains the feeder tank with fuel. the feeder tank is connected with the tank through flap valves installed at the bottom of rib 5.Feeder jet pump description ATA 28 Page 43/ 107 Î The feeder tank pump is installed on the semi-sealed rib 5. Flap valves allow the fuel to flow from the main tank to the feeder tank.

but also maintain a low level detection in case of wrong information coming from the FQI. V2851 Copyright © 2001-2008 . And on the MFC Maintenance Panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This permits to detect a failure of the feeder jet pump. and CCAS is activated if the feeder tank is not full.ATA 28 Feeder jet pump operation Page 44/ 107 Feeder jet pump operation The LO LVL lights illuminates.ATR Training Centre . bite loaded is activated.6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 28 Feeder jet pump operation Page 45/ 107 This page intentionally left blank V2851 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Engine feed jet pump description Page 46/ 107 Engine feed jet pump description V2814 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

It induces a fuel suction at the jet pump inlet. the engine jet pump supplies fuel to the engine throughout the flight envelope certified for the A/C. the other engine's feed jet pump is able to supply both engines during all flight phases (other than take-off).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Engine feed jet pump description Page 47/ 107 Î The engine feed jet pump delivers fuel to the engine after starting. or equal to. 12 PSI (840 mb) to ensure correct engine fuel supply. Î The jet pump outlet is equipped with a check valve. Î The fuel inlet flow rate from the engine creates a depression at the engine feed jet pump venturi inlet. Î In the event of a failure of the opposite engine feed system.6 . In normal operation. V2814 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î Pressure at the engine feed jet pump outlet. for the previous flow rates should be greater than. Driving fuel flow is supplied through a return line from the hydromechanical unit (HMU).

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 28 Motive flow valve description Page 48/ 107 Motive flow valve description V2815 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The motive flow valve is located near the LP shut-off valve and controls supply to the engine feed jet pump.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î It is controlled by the pump push button switch located on the fuel panel (25 VU). Î It closes if there is no fuel pressure or with the solenoid energized. Access is gained through the wing leading edge. It is open when the valve solenoid is not energized and with fuel pressure. Î CAUTION : To install or remove the motive flow valve.ATA 28 Motive flow valve description Page 49/ 107 Î The motive flow valve is installed on the wing forward spar. the tanks must be partially empty and the fuel electrical circuit de-energized. on the engine feed high pressure return line. on the cockpit overhead panel. V2815 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Relief valve description Page 50/ 107 Relief valve description V2816 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 . V2816 Copyright © 2001-2008 . It allows the fuel to escape directly into the tank in the event of overpressure. It allows any air in the line to be expelled. A thermal relief valve is installed on the fuel line. When the motive flow valve is closed.ATR Training Centre . the thermal relief valve also allows fuel trapped between the motive flow valve and the engine to run to the fuel tank.Relief valve description ATA 28 Î Î Î Î Î Page 51/ 107 A vapor relief valve is located at the high point directly above each electrical pump.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This valve is airtight when the line is pressurized.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 LP shutoff valve description Page 52/ 107 LP shutoff valve description V2817 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Valve operation is controlled by the corresponding engine fire handle located on the overhead panel in the flight compartment. This valve is located between the tank outlet and the associated engine. The line between the LP valve and the fire wall is reinforced and drained to avoid fuel leaks reaching hot parts of the engine. the LP valve is fitted on the wing front spar between ribs 11 and 12 at engine level.ATR Training Centre .plug. Valve position is displayed on the fuel panel.ATA 28 Î Î Î Î LP shutoff valve description Page 53/ 107 The LP fuel shut-off valve comprises a dual motor spherical. V2817 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 28 Cross feed valve description Page 54/ 107 Cross feed valve description V2819 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 28 Cross feed valve description Page 55/ 107 Î The left and right feed systems are interconnected by a cross feed line including a single motor electric valve. Î The cross feed valve is installed on the fuel line inside the wing center box section. Supplied with 28 VDC. Î Access is gained through an access door on the wing center box upper surface. cross feed valve control and indication are located on the fuel section of panel 25VU on the flight compartment overhead panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V2819 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 28 LP pressure switches description Page 56/ 107 LP pressure switches description V2821 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

V2821 Copyright © 2001-2008 .A.ATA 28 LP pressure switches description Page 57/ 107 Î The fuel Low Pressure (LP) switch is installed downstream the Low Pressure valve.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . the FUEL caution amber light illuminates on the C. Î The fuel LP switch detects pressure drops in the corresponding engine feed system. Î Note : It is not necessary to drain the tanks for LP switch removal and installation (switch fitted downstream of the LP valve). Î When the LP switch detects a low pressure (P<4 PSI) : ♦ ♦ ♦ the FEED LO PR amber caution light illuminates on the fuel panel..P.6 . the MASTER CAUTION amber light flashes and is followed by a single chime.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Electric pump auto control pressure switch description Page 58/ 107 Electric pump auto control pressure switch description V2822 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

it provides electric pump running control to ensure fuel supply to the engine. V2822 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î CAUTION : It is necessary to partially drain the tanks to install or remove the electric pump auto-control pressure switch. Î The pressure switch de-energizes the electric pump after engine starting. is installed on the wing leading edge.5 PSI + 30 s delay. when the pressure supplied by the engine feed jet pump reaches 8.ATA 28 Electric pump auto control pressure switch description Page 59/ 107 Î In the event of a jet pump failure.6 . Î The electric pump auto-control pressure switch (17QA Æ ENG1 and 18QA Æ ENG2). on the engine feed jet pump outlet. between ribs 4 and 5.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 28 Fuel indicating system description Page 60/ 107 Fuel indicating system description V2824 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

a Boeing 747 was involved in an in flight break-up after take-off due to a short circuit in the center wing fuel tank. Î Fuel tank temperature indicator : A temperature measuring device is installed in the LH feeder tank. Î Test push-button: the test push-button checks both measurement channels.ATA 28 Fuel indicating system description Page 61/ 107 Î Six probes are installed in each tank and electrically connected to the cockpit and refuelling panel fuel quantity indicators. This SFAR requests that operators implement the maintenance tasks in their maintenance program. LO LVL lights illuminates and CCAS is activated to indicate that the fuel quantity lower than 160 Kg (353 LB) is detected on the corresponding fuel quantity indicator.6 . The temperature is displayed on the Fuel panel. a refueling panel is located on the forward RH landing gear fairing. The corresponding electrical pump is automatically activated. Î One high level sensor is fitted in each fuel tank in the vent surge tank. Î Fuel quantity indicating: the fuel tank capacity measurement system is such that the figures appear in terms of weight. 12QU / 11QU). 3QL. The corresponding electrical pump is automatically activated. Î Magnetic fuel quantity indicators : Magnetic indicators located on the lower surface of each wing are used to manually determine the fuel quantity when the respective electronic indicating system is inoperative. Fuse adapters are installed on connector (located on the wing spar) wired to fuel tank components (on probe 15QT / 16QT. Both independant fuel quantity indicating channels (one per tank) transmit the fuel information to a dual indicator located on the cockpit central panel and refuel / defuel panel. If the system operates correctly the display shows 8888 code. Î Note : all digits on fuel quantity indicators may be tested by placing the ANN LT switch on the overhead panel to the test position. Fuel tanker connects the refuel / defuel line to the fuel coupling located on the RH rear landing gear fairing. Î On july 1996. "LO LVL" amber lights illuminate and the CCAS is activated. V2824 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î To control refuel / defuel operations.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . The FAA issue a Special Federal Aviation Requirement (SFAR) n°88 effective since of june 2001. Î LO LVL lights illuminates and CCAS are also activated in case of FEEDER TANK NOT FULL detection by 15QT (16QT) probe.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Fuel indicating system operation Page 62/ 107 Fuel indicating system operation V2833 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

fuse adapters are installed on connector (located on the wing spar) wired to fuel tank components (on probe 15QT(16QT)). Î To protect against short circuit on wiring external to the fuel tank. Î CDCCL Item: Particular attention during remove/installation of Fuel quantity Probes (JIC 28-42-72 RAI 10000). They use temperature information coming from the 15 (16QT) probes located in the feeder tank. to avoid arcking at the internal contactor level.ATA 28 Fuel indicating system operation Page 63/ 107 Î The summing of the fuel quantity in a tank is performed by connecting the six probes in parallel. 3QL. Î The dual indicator in the flight compartment includes two amplifiers which process electrical signals from the probes. One information give a low level signal for MFC. Î The repeater is supplied through the ground handling bus (access door open) to allow refuel/defuel operation without energizing A/C network. If the FEEDER TANK is not full 10 mn after fuel electrical pump energisation. Î Fuel quantity indicator is located in the flight compartment and a repeater is fitted in the refueling/defueling panel installed in the RH main landing gear fairing. Six electrical harnesses installed inside the tank. 12QU(11QU)). Î In addition current limiters are installed on high level sensor lines (12QU. High Level Sensors (JIC 28-25-73 RAI 10000) and Harness (JIC 28-42-72 RAI 10010). A change in caliber gauge of a fuse can modify the level of protection and the current intensity entering the fuel tank in case of an external short circuit.6 . Note: These current limiters are not installed on 15QT and 16QT low level sensors. V2833 Copyright © 2001-2008 . connect the probes to the bulkhead connectors to junction box fuel probes. to methodology and guidelines for securing harnesses on probes and sensors. It is important to notice that no deviation to the approval design of harnesses and probes is permitted. Î Probes 15 (16QT) give two signals : ♦ ♦ One information give a compensation capacitance signal for FQI.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. when high level is detected. The two channels. as they are supplied and limited in current by MFCS.ATR Training Centre . Î MPD Scheduled Check: A resistance check of the fuses within the adapters (JIC 28-42-72 FUT 10005) permits to verify the drift of the fuses resistance characteristic overtime. the MFC send a signal to FQI (LO LVL lights illuminated) and memorise it (Bite loaded magnectic indicator on RH maintenance panel). 11QU). are completely isolated. supplied with 28 VDC.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Indicator probes (15QT and 16QT) description Page 64/ 107 Indicator probes (15QT and 16QT) description V2826 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Indicator probes (15QT and 16QT) description Page 65/ 107 This page intentionally left blank V2826 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 66/ 107 ACOS v1.ATA 28 V2826 Indicator probes (15QT and 16QT) description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

Î Electrical harnesses installed inside the tank. Any change in fuel quantity results in a change in probe immersion and in a consequent change in probe capacitance.ATA 28 Î Î Î Î Indicator probes (15QT and 16QT) description Page 67/ 107 The quantity indicating system provides information about the mass quantity of fuel available in each tank throughout the flight. The quantity is read on the fuel quantity indicator which indicates the fuel mass in each tank. and if the fuel feeder tank not full after 15 sec.6 . The summing of the fuel quantity in a tank is performed by connecting probes in parallel. Î Probes access doors are located on the upper surface panel. connect the probes to the bulkhead connectors.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. and MFC BITE loaded is activated on RH Maintenance Panel. the electric pump is energized through FQI. 15 and 16 QT probes are attached to the feeder tank upper surface wall between ribs 4 and 5. V2826 Copyright © 2001-2008 . A capacitance and a low level system allow a failure signal to be sent to corresponding alert systems.ATR Training Centre . It is used to transmit fuel temperature information to the fuel quantity indicators to convert fuel volume into weight. If the fuel pump is selected during 10 mn. 15 and 16 QT probes are fitted with a feed failure detector for feeder tank boosting. Î Probes can be removed without emptying the fuel tanks. Î A temperature sensor is also installed on 15 and 16 QT probes. The fuel mass is measured by capacity probes installed in each tank.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Indicator probes (151QT and 152QT) description Page 68/ 107 Indicator probes (151QT and 152QT) description S2827 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

151 and 152 QT probes are fitted with a fuel float type high level sensor.6 . S2827 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Probe access doors are located on the upper surface panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. 151 and 152 QT probes are attached to the tank upper surface wall between ribs 9 and 10. They can be removed without emptying the fuel tanks.ATA 28 Î Î Î Î Î Î Indicator probes (151QT and 152QT) description Page 69/ 107 The fuel mass is measured by capacity probes installed in each tank. The summing of fuel quantity in a tank is performed by connecting probes in parallel.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Indicator probes (17QT+others) description Page 70/ 107 Indicator probes (17QT+others) description V2828 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

Î Probes access doors are located on the upper surface panel. ribs 5 and 6.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Indicator probes (17QT+others) description Page 71/ 107 Î Probes are attached to the tank upper surface wall between ribs 4 and 5. V2828 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Probes can be removed without emptying the fuel tanks. ribs 14 and 15 and ribs 20 and 21. The summing of the fuel quantity in a tank is performed by connecting probes in parallel.ATR Training Centre . ribs 9 and 10.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 S2828 Indicator probes (17QT+others) description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 72/ 107 ACOS v1.

ribs 14 and 15 and ribs 20 and 21. Î Probes access doors are located on the upper surface panel. The summing of the fuel quantity in a tank is performed by connecting probes in parallel. ribs 9 and 10.ATA 28 Indicator probes (17QT+others) description Page 73/ 107 Î Probes are attached to the tank upper surface wall between ribs 4 and 5. S2828 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Probes can be removed without emptying the fuel tanks. ribs 5 and 6.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 28 Fuel quantity indicators description Page 74/ 107 Fuel quantity indicators description V2829 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Fuel quantity indicators description Page 75/ 107 This page intentionally left blank V2829 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 28 V2829 Fuel quantity indicators description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 76/ 107 ACOS v1.

The fuel quantity repeater is located on the refuel/defuel panel. The two mesurement channels. The indicator channels include a low level detection system. It displays fuel quantity when refuel/defuel panel access door is opened. single chime. Î This indicator includes two amplifiers which process electrical signals from the tank.A. V2829 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 28 Fuel quantity indicators description Page 77/ 107 Î The fuel quantity indicator indicates the mass of fuel in each tank. ♦ causes the amber MASTER CAUTION light to flash. In the event of a LO LVL detection. ♦ automatically energizes the corresponding electrical pump. ♦ illuminates the amber FUEL warning light on the C.P.. are completely isolated. Î The low level detection is set at 160 kg (353 lbs) for each fuel tank. detected by 15QT (16QT). The indications are given in kg or lbs according to the aircraft version. supplied with 28VDC. ♦ sends an audible.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . The low level detection is also activated in case of FEEDER TANK NOT FULL. the system : ♦ illuminates the corresponding low level amber caution light on the indicator.ATR Training Centre . Î The fuel quantity information is displayed in digital form on the dual fuel quantity indicator located on the flight compartment.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Fuel temperature sensor description Page 78/ 107 Fuel temperature sensor description V2831 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 28 Fuel temperature sensor description Page 79/ 107 Î A fuel temperature sensor is located in the left feeder tank.6 . Î Fuel tank temperature is displayed on the indicator located in the flight compartment.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2831 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î There is only one fuel temperature indicator.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 28 Dipstiks and clinometer description Page 80/ 107 Dipstiks and clinometer description V2832 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

Î When not being used for manual checks. the dipstick is locked in its raised position. A dipstik is mounted between rib 5 and 6 near the feeder tank. Î The other one is mounted between rib 22 and 23 near the vent surge tank. V2832 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Dipstiks and clinometer description ATA 28 Page 81/ 107 Î Each tank is equipped with two manual magnetic indicators.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. A chart is used to convert cm into liters and units of weight (Kg or lbs) as a function of A/C attitude and fuel density. By means of a graduated scale.6 . Access to the indicators is gained from the wing lower surface. Î A clinometer located on the left rear landing gear fairing gives the A/C roll attitude in order to perform the corrections for limiting A/C attitude effects for dipstik reading. the dipstik gives an indication of the residual fuel quantitycontained in the tank.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 V2832 Dipstiks and clinometer description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 82/ 107 ACOS v1.

which holds the measurement and check assembly. releases the gratuated scale. V2832 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Unlocked position : by pressing and turning the control knob. Î Locked position : the control knob is flush with the outer face of the gauge body and wing lower surface.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Inside the gauge body are : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an assembly consisting of a magnet and float. falls under its own weight. The fuel level is read in cm on the section of the scale which protrudes from the wing lower surface. which defines the position on the scale during a level check. the rod magnetically linked to the float. a stop ring.6 .ATA 28 Dipstiks and clinometer description Page 83/ 107 Î The dipstik comprises a gauge body with a mounting base. by simple rotation. a graduated scale.ATR Training Centre . a control knob which. a stop (or lock) which receives the control knob when the assembly is locked.

Î Controls and indicators associated with this system are located on the refueling panel installed on the right landing gear fairing. defuel the tanks by suction. V2834 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Fuel and defuel distribution description Page 84/ 107 Fuel and defuel distribution description Î The fuel/defuel system serves to : ♦ ♦ refuel the tanks under pressure.6 .

The ground connection is located on the RH main landing gear fairing. V2839 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The coupling cap is removed and the refuel hose is connected.ATA 28 Fuel and defuel distribution operation Page 85/ 107 Fuel and defuel distribution operation Î The ground cable is connected to the A/C RH side.ATR Training Centre . Î Opening of the refueling panel door energizes electrical supply of the refuel / defuel system and the quantity indicating system from the ground handling bus bar.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 28 V2839 Fuel and defuel distribution operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 86/ 107 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Î Refueling and defueling operation can be done manually. The refuel / defuel valve indicator blue lights extinguish. Î Fuel quantity (LH + RH Fuel tanks) is selected on the fuel quantity preselector (3 000 kg). Î When the defueling operation is finished. This selected fuel quantity will be the required fuel load for dispatch. Î In case of failure of the automatic valve closure.. Î The refuel / defuel valves are open for defueling operation by placing the refuel / defuel switch in the DEFUEL position and the refuel valves switches in the OPEN position. Î Refuel position is selected on the refuel / defuel switch. If both the automatic valve closure and the first safety device are not working. FQI test push button is pressed and the 8888 code is displayed on the fuel quantity repeater indicator located on the refuel / defuel panel. manual defueling operation is as follows. Defuel / refuel valve position indicator blue lights extinguish.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. For example. It opens the refuel / defuel valves and the blue indicator lights illuminates.785). the FQI shows its previous display. Î Each tank has a capacity of 2 500kg (5 500 lbs) (for a density of 0. and the refuel valves switches are reset to the NORM position. Î When the test push button is released. Î When the selected quantity is reached (3 000 kg). The refueling panel access door is closed and the ground panel cable is disconnected. REFUELING / DEFUELING SEQUENCE COMPLETED V2839 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the refuel / defuel switch is reset to the OFF position. Î The refueling hose is disconnected from the refuel / defuel coupling and the refuel coupling cap is closed. Refueling starts when the pressure has been built up by the tanker and the refuel load is displayed on the tanker indicator. MANUAL DEFUELING IS IN PROGRESS . the FQI test must be performed.ATA 28 Fuel and defuel distribution operation Page 87/ 107 Î Before starting the refueling operation. Î The mode selector switch must be set to OFF after refuelling is complete.. the fuel preselector sends an electrical signal via relays to close the refuel / defuel valves (normal operation). the refuel / defuel valves are closed and the surge valve switch is set to the OPEN position. an high level signal is send by the fuel quantity indicator to close the valve when maximum fuel quantity is reached (2 500 kg) (first safety device). Î The refueling duct between the valves and the coupling can be drained by gravity or by suction. To test high level and refueling valve indicator bulb lights..5 bars)).77 bar).. AUTOMATIC REFUELING IS IN PROGRESS . Î Make certain that the refuel / defuel valves switches are in "Norm" and guarded position. A complete refueling (5 000 kg = 6 370 liters) takes about 20 minutes (maximum inlet pressure = 50 PSI (3. you have to press on the light. The fuel is drawn back to the tanker under a negative pressure of 11 PSI (0. Î In the event of the drainage by suction. The two safety devices are inhibited. high level sensor (second safety device) will cut off the power supply to the refuel / defuel valves to avoid over fuelling.ATR Training Centre . The refuel / defuel valve indicator blue lights illumintate.6 .

6 .ATA 28 Refuel and defuel valve description Page 88/ 107 Refuel and defuel valve description V2836 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 Refuel and defuel valve description Page 89/ 107 This page intentionally left blank V2836 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 V2836 Refuel and defuel valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 90/ 107 ACOS v1.6 .

It is connected to the refuel/defuel valves.6 . The element called manual override enables the valves to be operated manually. coming from the cabin and drained at the bottom of the landing gear fairing. V2836 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The fuel/defuel assembly is installed in a dry bay which is drained.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Î Î Î Î Diffusers are located at the end of the two filling lines to limit formation of foam and vapor.ATA 28 Refuel and defuel valve description Page 91/ 107 Î Each 28VDC refuel/defuel valve is equipped with a metal ring located under the electrical connection. This duct is housed in a second duct to avoid cabin fuel leaks. A refuel/defuel coupling is installed in the rear part of the right main landing gear fairing. This stainless steel duct has no coupling and is shrouded inside the fuselage.ATR Training Centre . The area between two concentric pipes is ventilated by air. Î Two restrictors located at the valve outlet allow fuel flow in the circuits to be balanced for simultaneous filling of tanks. Fuel through the lines is admitted into the tanks at the tank low points. in the event of an electrical control failure.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 High level sensor description Page 92/ 107 High level sensor description V2837 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The associated high level amber light illuminates on the refueling panel.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2837 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the high level sensors send an electrical signal to close the refueling valves. Access is gained from wing upper surface panel.High level sensor description ATA 28 Î Î Î Î Page 93/ 107 When the fuel reaches the maximum fuel quantity value. for each RH and LH surge tank) which is located between ribs 23 and 24.ATR Training Centre . One high level sensor is installed on probe 12QU (11QU.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 28 Gravity refuel cap description Page 94/ 107 Gravity refuel cap description V2838 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Each gravity filling port includes a support attached to the structure and a filter.ATR Training Centre . installed near the cap.ATA 28 Gravity refuel cap description Page 95/ 107 Î Gravity refueling is performed through two overwing gravity filling ports installed on the wing upper surface between ribs 22 and 23. Î A ground connection. Î The cap of the gravity filling port is equipped with a locking device which is flush with the wing upper surface.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. provides an electrical connection between the refueling cap and the aircraft structure.6 . V2838 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Roll A/C attitude can be checked on a clinometer located on the main landing gear fairing.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Opening of the refueling panel door energizes electrical supply of the refuel / defuel system and the quantity indicating system from the gnd / hldg XFR bus bar.ATA 28 Refueling electrical control panel Page 96/ 107 Refueling electrical control panel Î The ground cable is connected to the aircraft RH side. P1211 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The ground connection is located on the RH main landing gear fairing. Î The coupling cap is removed and the refuel hose is connected.ATR Training Centre .

in the event of an electrical control failure. P1211 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Diffusers are located at the end of the two filling lines to limit formation of foam and vapor. The element called manual override enables the valves to be operated manually. Î The refuel / defuel assembly is installed in a dry bay which is drained so that any fuel leakage cannot run to the engine inside the leading edge.6 . Access is gained through an access door in the RH wing leading edge. Î Two restrictors located at the valve outlet allow fuel flow in the circuits to be balanced for simultaneous filling of tanks. Fuel through the lines is admitted into the tanks at the tank low points.ATA 28 Refueling electrical control panel Page 97/ 107 Î Each 28 VDC refuel / defuel valve is equipped with a metal ring located under the electrical connection.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 28 High level sensor description Page 98/ 107 High level sensor description S2837 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

as a safety device. for each RH and LH inner tank) which is located between ribs 9 and 10. Î The associated high level amber light illuminates on the refueling panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. send an electrical signal to close the refueling valves.ATR Training Centre . on probe 12 QU (11 QU. S2837 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .High level sensor description ATA 28 Page 99/ 107 Î When the fuel reaches the maximum fuel quantity value and the refueling does not stop. the high level sensors. Î Two float type high level sensors are installed: ♦ ♦ on probe 152 QT (151 QT. for each RH and LH outer tank) which is located between ribs 19 and 20. Î Access is gained from wing upper surface panel.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Fuel panel Page 100/ 107 Fuel panel V2840 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

<1> FEED LO PR Illuminates amber when fuel delivery is < 4 PSI in case of pump failure or fuel shortage. Or fuel LO LVL (<160kg).Fuel panel ATA 28 Page 101/ 107 Î Have a look at the Fuel Panel. Or X feed in line. Runs automatically if : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Jet pump press < 8. Location : Overhead panel. <2> PUMP Control electrical pump power and motive flow valve solenoid.5 PSI. Range : -60°C/0°C V2840 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <5> FUEL TANK TEMP INDICATOR LH tank only. RUN : Illuminates green when elect fuel pump is running. Each electrical pump is able to supply one engine in the all flight envelope. Stops automatically 30 s after jet pump press > 8.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <3> LP VALVE Shows position of LP valve : IN LINE:OPEN X LINE:CLOSED <4> X FEED Controls X feed valve : IN LINE:OPEN X LINE:CLOSED Activates both electrical pumps.5 PSI. Or feeder tank not full. Or during quantity test.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 28 Refueling/defueling panel Page 102/ 107 Refueling/defueling panel V2841 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

<9> SELECTED QTY INDICATOR The quantity for automatic refueling is controlled by setting the preselector. OPEN : Valves open when the mode selector switch is in the refuel or defuel position and the high level sensor is not submerged. <7> MAIN L/G LT This switch controls the main landing gear bay light. With the mode selector in DEFUEL position. <1> FQI TEST Pressing the test button will check both measurement channels and. It will also shut the refuel valves. SHUT : The surge valve is closed.ATA 28 Refueling/defueling panel Page 103/ 107 Î Have a look at the Refueling Panel. display 8888 code on the FUEL QTY ind (on the refueling panel as well as in the cockpit). They extinguish during the fuel circuit test. <5> REFUEL VALVES SWITCHES Control the operation of the valves for each tank.ATR Training Centre . indicating the valves have closed. The counter displays the preselected total fuel quantity. DEFUEL : Refuel valves may be operated by manual defueling operation. Valves close automatically when high level is detected. if working normally. switches are not activated. <2> MODE SELECTOR SWITCH Controls the operating mode for automatic fueling and the activation of refuel valves switches for manual operation. They are kept at NORM position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <3> HIGH LEVEL LIGHTS The light illuminates amber when an high level sensor is submerged (maximum refueling quantity reached). <6> SURGE VALVE Provides air vent of the refuel line draining of this line OPEN : The surge valve opens. OFF : Refuel valves are closed. SHUT : Valves close regardless of the mode selector switch position. simulating a maxi level in both tanks. The corresponding refuel valve closes automatically. <8> FUEL QTY INDICATOR The indicator has the same presentation as that used in the cockpit without test pushbutton. Location: forward RH main landing gear fairing. depending on position of the mode selector switch and quantity preselection. V2841 Copyright © 2001-2008 . NORM : Valves are controlled by automatic fueling logic. and the refuel valves in OPEN position. all level protections are inhibited.6 . <4> REFUEL VALVES POSITION LIGHTS The lights illuminate blue when the refuel valve is opened. Mode selector switch must be in OFF position. REFUEL : Refuel valves may be operated by auto refueling logic (refuel valves switches on NORM) or manual refueling operation.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 28 Functionnal test of high level sensors and auto closure of valves Page 104/ 107 Functionnal test of high level sensors and auto closure of valves V2844 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

Coupling and equipotential connection between the tanker and the aircraft are disconnected.ATA 28 Î Î Î Î Î Î Functionnal test of high level sensors and auto closure of valves Page 105/ 107 Before performing functional test of high level sensor and auto closure of valves. Coupling and equipotential connection between the tanker and the aircraft are connected. the aircraft is energized (DC and AC constant frequency network).6 . Warning notice is installed in the flight compartment to prohibit energization of fuel system. place "refueling/refuel valve/LH and R switches in "norm" position. refuel / defuel valves indicator blue lights extinguishes. d. a.Refuel. Î Functional test of high level sensors and auto closure of valves has been performed successfully ! V2844 Copyright © 2001-2008 . pointer is set to zero. c. Make certain that working area is clean and clear of tools and miscellaneous items of equipment. Fuel tanker is positionned.ATR Training Centre . Refueling valve access panel and refuel/defuel panel door are open on RH main landing gear fairing. The aircraft is de-energized (DC and AC constant frequency network). place "refueling/refuel valve/LH and R switches in "open" position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. per tank. Æ "refueling/valve LH/RH open" blue lights are illuminated. fuel system safety requirements have to be applied. First. Refueling panel door is closed and fuel tanker is removed from working area. Æ refueling valves are closed.785) : ♦ "high level/tank1 and tank2" amber lights are illuminated.On refueling panel 5004VU : ♦ ♦ place "refuel/defuel" switch in "refuel" position. above maximum value of 2500 (5510 lbs) or 3185 liters (for a density = 0. Remove "smoking prohibited" warning notices and access platform.On refueling panel 5004VU : ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î place "refuel/defuel" switch in "off" position. Check correct operation of high level sensors. Æ "high level/tank1 and tank2" amber lights are extinguished.On fuel tanker indicator. b.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 28 Page 106/ 107 ATA 28 FUEL V2844 General description 2 Cockpit panel location 9 Interfaces 10 Features 11 Safety and precautions 15 Fuel storage description 22 Fuel tanks description 26 Fuel ventilation description 30 Fuel engine feed distribution description 34 Fuel engine feed distribution operation 36 Electrical pump description 38 Feeder jet pump description 42 Feeder jet pump operation 44 Engine feed jet pump description 46 Motive flow valve description 48 Relief valve description 50 LP shutoff valve description 52 Cross feed valve description 54 LP pressure switches description 56 Electric pump auto control pressure switch description 58 Fuel indicating system description 60 Fuel indicating system operation 62 Indicator probes (15QT and 16QT) description 64 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .Summary ATA 28 V2844 Page 107/ 107 Indicator probes (151QT and 152QT) description 68 Indicator probes (17QT+others) description 70 Fuel quantity indicators description 74 Fuel temperature sensor description 78 Dipstiks and clinometer description 80 Fuel and defuel distribution description 84 Fuel and defuel distribution operation 85 Refuel and defuel valve description 88 High level sensor description 92 Gravity refuel cap description 94 Refueling electrical control panel 96 High level sensor description 98 Fuel panel 100 Refueling/defueling panel 102 Functionnal test of high level sensors and auto closure of valves 104 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.6 ATA 29 HYDRAULIC POWER Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 General description Page 2/ 71 General description V2901 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

the propeller brake for the RH engine.6 .ATR Training Centre . Î Both blue and green systems have a hydraulic fluid low quantity warning. through a pushbutton. "OVHT": Overtemperature. Î The blue system supplies: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ nose wheel steering. supplied by ACW power. the emergency and parking brakes. Each of the blue and green systems are pressurized by an electric pump. There are also three pressure gages. made up of two independent sub-systems identified as the blue and the green systems. spoilers. This pump is controlled in automatic or manual mode. Î The three pumps are monitored by two caution lights: ♦ ♦ "LO PR": Low pressure. which display each accumulator pressure. located in the hydraulic bay.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The auxiliary hydraulic system contains a crossfeed valve and an auxiliary pump supplied by DC power. "LO LVL": Low level. V2901 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the green and the brake accumulator pressures.ATA 29 Î Î Î Î General description Page 3/ 71 The aircraft has a main hydraulic system. wing flaps extension / retraction. The common hydraulic reservoir is located in the hydraulic bay (LH landing gear fairing). using a specific brake accumulator. The normal pressure value is 3000 psi. Î The green system supplies: ♦ ♦ landing gear extension / retraction. Î A triple indicator displays the blue. Î Each system contains a power accumulator installed in the hydraulic bay. normal braking.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Cockpit panels location Page 4/ 71 Cockpit panels location V2902 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 29 Interfaces Page 5/ 71 Interfaces V2903 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 Features Page 6/ 71 Features V2904 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 7/ 71 ACOS v1.ATA 29 V2904 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 8/ 71 ACOS v1.ATA 29 V2904 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 9/ 71 ACOS v1.ATA 29 V2904 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 29 Safety precautions Page 10/ 71 Safety precautions V2905 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

a coloured band for the systems (green or blue).6 .ATR Training Centre . the lines of each system are separated in the exposed zone. Î A maximum of components are installed in the LH pod to ensure longer life for pipes and fittings which are not handled when components are removed and to facilitate maintenance tasks. Î The pipes are identified by labels: ♦ ♦ a hydraulic pipe (black dots). V2906 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 29 Main hydraulic system description and operation Page 11/ 71 Main hydraulic system description and operation Î For safety reasons.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. its function (case drain) and the direction of flow (arrow).

6 .ATA 29 V2906 Main hydraulic system description and operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 71 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

A return line from the users drives the fluid via a return pressure filter to the reservoir. A pressure line transmitter sends a signal to the pressure indicator located in the cockpit. A check valve is installed between the filter and the reservoir. A case drain will send leaks from the pump to the reservoir. The high pressure filter has a red indicator which pops out when the filter is clogged (Δp > 100 PSI). its by-pass opens. for normal braking and landing gear operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. an acoustic filter reduces the hoses noise.ATA 29 Main hydraulic system description and operation Page 13/ 71 Î A common reservoir divided in two equal compartments by a diaphragm. High pressure is delivered.6 . If the return filter clogs. Î Î Î Î Î Î Î A valve is fitted on the case drain to provide pressure relief in case of pump regulating system failure. via a high pressure filter. An overheat sensor illuminates "OVHT" light when temperature reaches 121 °C. V2906 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . contains fluid which is drawn by one ACW (Alternative Wild Current) electrical pump. Î The reservoir has two low level switches which trigger the "LO LVL" caution light when there is less than 2.5 liters in one compartment. Î On the pressure line. an indicator appears and its by-pass opens. Downstream the pump. Î The ACW green electric pump pressurizes the system at 3000 PSI. a line accumulator damps pump delivery pulsation and any pressure surges and compensates for pump response time when there is a high output demand. via a filter . A low pressure switch illuminates the green system "LO PR" light when the green system pressure is below 1500 PSI. When the case drain filter clogs.

ATA 29 V2906 Main hydraulic system description and operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 71 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

the flaps and the right propeller brake.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The first line supplies the spoilers.6 .ATR Training Centre . ACW blue pump low pressure. Note: The propeller brake return line is directly connected to the reservoir. Î The second line supplies the parking and emergency brake as well as the brake accumulator. The first line is identical to the green system. propeller brake disengaged.ATA 29 Main hydraulic system description and operation Page 15/ 71 Î The blue hydraulic system has two main power lines. landing gear lever in "DOWN" position. Î The parking brake accumulator is provided with a pressure release valve enabling the blue system pressure lines to be connected to return. the nose wheel steering. Components operation are identical. V2906 Copyright © 2001-2008 . at least one engine running. Î The blue system is also fitted with an auxiliary DC motor driven pump operating automatically when the following conditions are met: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ push button "AUX PUMP" in pressed position ("OFF" legend extinguished). The valve is ususable only on ground.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2906 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 29 Main hydraulic system description and operation Page 16/ 71 Î A common ground service panel is located on the upper part of the hydraulic bay.ATR Training Centre . Î On this panel there are ground power pressure and suction quick-disconnect fittings to apply external hydraulic power to the green or blue systems. or for drainage.6 . or for reservoir refilling.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 29 Main hydraulic system description and operation Page 17/ 71 This page intentionally left blank V2906 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Reservoir description Page 18/ 71 Reservoir description V2908 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 29 Reservoir description Page 19/ 71 This page intentionally left blank V2908 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATA 29 V2908 Reservoir description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 20/ 71 ACOS v1.

5 liters in each compartment). Î It is an unpressurized type.ATR Training Centre . V2908 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. in the hydraulic bay.ATA 29 Reservoir description Page 21/ 71 Hydraulic Bay Î The reservoir is located in the rear area of the left main gear well.6 . a strainer filter for refiling. an overflow port and two low level switches (level less than 2. divided in two equal compartments by a diaphragm opened in the upper part. baffles to prevent fluid sloshing during sideslip maneuvers and minimize fluid emulsion in case of high return fluid flow. Î It is equipped with: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a cap vented to atmosphere. a direct reading quantity gauge.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 ACW electric pumps description Page 22/ 71 ACW electric pumps description V2909 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

the blue electric pump operates with time delay of 1 second respect to the green pump.ATR Training Centre . Electric motors have a variable frequency (338 to 493 Hz) and a rotational speed (6700 to 9700 rpm). V2909 Copyright © 2001-2008 .9 liters/mn at 2850 PSI. in the hydraulic bay.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The nominal fluid flow is 7. To avoid electric and hydraulic demand peaks during ACW power on. The ACW electric pumps are conventional axial piston types.6 . The nominal pressure is 3000 PSI.ATA 29 ACW electric pumps description Page 23/ 71 Hydraulic Bay Î Î Î Î Î Î The ACW electric pumps are located in the left main gear well.

ATA 29 ACW electric pumps operation Page 24/ 71 ACW electric pumps operation Î 7GX contactor is supplied by the push button "Blue pump" 5GX via the generator line contactor 5XU or the bus tie contactor 7XU.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î 7GX contactor is self held. with time delay of 1 second. V2910 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î To avoid the simultaneous insertion of both pumps 7GX contactor negative signal is sent to the MFC 1A.

ATR Training Centre . V2910 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 29 ACW electric pumps operation Page 25/ 71 Î Green system has no time delay.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Filter description Page 26/ 71 Filter description V2911 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Filter description Page 27/ 71 This page intentionally left blank V2911 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 V2911 Filter description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 28/ 71 ACOS v1.6 .

Return filters have a bypass valve which opens at 49. They are intended to reduce the noise. The LP filters have a bypass valve which opens at 50. V2911 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .7 psi. A thermal lockout ring prevents indicator actuation at low temperature ranges. between pressure ports and relevant hoses. Î Î Î Î The HP filters do not have a bypass valve installed on the pressure line. Their clogging indicator pops out at Δp = 36. They are disposable and equipped with a shut-off valve diaphragm. Their clogging indicator pops out at Δp = 24.8 psi.ATA 29 Filter description Page 29/ 71 Î All the filters are cartridge types and have the same bowl.3 psi. They are located downstream the ACW pumps.6 . They have a clogging indicator. which prevents hydraulic fluid loss. Their clogging indicator pops out at Δp = 100 psi. The hydraulic system is also provided with accoustic type filters.3 psi.

V2912 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 29 Pressure transmitters description Page 30/ 71 Pressure transmitters description Î Two pressure transmitters are located in the hydraulic bay. in the left main gear well.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The normal pressure is 3000 PSI. below the emergency and parking brake accumulator.6 . on the case drain. Î The third pressure transmitter is located in the hydraulic bay.ATR Training Centre . Î The three pressure transmitters send a signal to the pressure triple indicator.

Î The third pressure transmitter is located in the hydraulic bay.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V2912 Copyright © 2001-2008 . on the case drain. Î The three pressure transmitters send a signal to the pressure triple indicator.ATA 29 Pressure transmitters description Page 31/ 71 Î Two pressure transmitters are located in the hydraulic bay.6 . The normal pressure is 3000 PSI. below the emergency and parking brake accumulator.ATR Training Centre . in the left main gear well.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 Low pressure switch description Page 32/ 71 Low pressure switch description V2913 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre . V2913 Copyright © 2001-2008 . on the case drain. Î The threshold pressure is 1500 PSI.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Each low pressure switch sends a signal to the pressure caution light ("LO PR").6 .ATA 29 Low pressure switch description Page 33/ 71 Î The three low pressure switches are located in the hydraulic bay.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 Overtemperature sensors description Page 34/ 71 Overtemperature sensors description V2914 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 29 Overtemperature sensors description Page 35/ 71 Î The three overtemperature sensors are located in the hydraulic bay. Î Each overtemperature sensor sends a signal to the overtemperature caution light ("OVHT").All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . on the case drain line. Î The threshold temperature is 121 °C. V2914 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 29 Low level switch description Page 36/ 71 Low level switch description V2915 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î The fluid quantity threshold is 2. on the reservoir. Î Each low level switch sends a signal to the low level caution light ("LO LVL").ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Low level switch description Page 37/ 71 Î The low level switches are located in the hydraulic bay. V2915 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.5 liters.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 29 Pressure relief valves description Page 38/ 71 Pressure relief valves description V2916 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 Î Î Î Î Pressure relief valves description Page 39/ 71 The two pressure relief valves are located in the hydraulic bay.ATR Training Centre . The valve closing threshold pressure is 3133 PSI. Each valve provides pressure relief in case of a pump regulating system failure. V2916 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The valve opening threshold pressure is 3535 PSI. on the case drain.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 29 Green & blue accumulators and indicators description Page 40/ 71 Green & blue accumulators and indicators description V2917 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î The precharge pressure is 1500 ± 4% PSI at 20 °C. above the green and the blue accumulators.ATR Training Centre . Î A gas pressure jauge is installed on each accumulator to indicate accumulator pressure. to absorb pump pulsations and surges caused by high fluid demands. They compensate for pump response time in the event of high output demand. Î Each accumulator incorporates a floating piston to separate the hydraulic fluid from the nitrogen precharge. on the RH of the hydraulic bay. Î Two nitrogen-charged accumulators are installed in the blue and the green systems.ATA 29 Green & blue accumulators and indicators description Page 41/ 71 Î The green and the blue accumulators are installed in the left main gear well. V2917 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The green and the blue pressure gauges are located in the hydraulic bay.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Parking brake & emergency accumulator and indicator description Page 42/ 71 Parking brake & emergency accumulator and indicator description V2918 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 29 Parking brake & emergency accumulator and indicator description Page 43/ 71 This page intentionally left blank V2918 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 V2918 Parking brake & emergency accumulator and indicator description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 44/ 71 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The parking and emergency brake accumulator is provided with a pressure release valve (located on the bottom of the accumulator) and a relief valve (located on the top of the accumulator). Î The parking and emergency brake accumulator pressure gauge is located in the hydraulic bay.ATA 29 Parking brake & emergency accumulator and indicator description Page 45/ 71 Î The parking and emergency brake accumulator is installed on the RH of the hydraulic bay. Î The parking and emergency brake is available as soon as the parking and emergency brake accumulator pressure is above 1600 PSI. above the parking and emergency brake accumulator. V2918 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The release valve of the parking and emergency brake accumulator is a faucet. Î The parking and emergency brake accumulator is also provided with a relief valve against nitrogen pressure when the temperature increases. This valve is usuable only on ground. Î The parking and emergency brake accumulator is provided with a pressure release valve enabling the blue system pressure lines to be connected to the return. between the green and blue accumulators.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 29 Check valves description Page 46/ 71 Check valves description Î There are several check valves in the hydraulic systems. Î Check valves are used when protection or isolation are required.ATR Training Centre . They are located in the hydraulic bay. V2919 Copyright © 2001-2008 . in particular on the pressure line of the pump.

or blue electric pump.ATA 29 Auxiliary hydraulic system description Page 47/ 71 Auxiliary hydraulic system description Î The auxiliary hydraulic system consists of an auxiliary pump system and a crossfeed system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. without a low level advisory ("LO LVL" caution light ON).6 . V2920 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î An auxiliary pump provides hydraulic power to supply the blue hydraulic system. the remaining operative pump provides hydraulic supply to all services by means of a crossfeed (or X FEED) valve. Î In case of a failure of the green.

ATA 29 Auxiliary hydraulic system operation Page 48/ 71 Auxiliary hydraulic system operation V2926 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

but the crossfeed valve cannot be opened even if the crossfeed pushbutton is set to "ON".ATR Training Centre . The "LO PR" caution light illuminates. imagine the green pressure decreases. Î The green hydraulic pressure is less than 1500 PSI. You have to shut off the green pump. Click on the green pump pushbutton.ATA 29 Auxiliary hydraulic system operation Page 49/ 71 Î Blue and green pumps are supplied by ACW electrical power running. V2926 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Î The green pump stops. The crossfeed valve has to be opened to pressurize the green system with the blue system. Î In the case of a low level problem. Now. the blue and green systems are pressurized at 3000 PSI.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The crossfeed valve is open. The crossfeed valve "ON" light illuminates. the corresponding pump has to be shut off. Î In the case of an overheat problem. Blue and green hydraulic pressures are 3000 PSI. The "OFF" light illuminates. Now. and the crossfeed valve has to be opened in the same way as the previous procedure. the corresponding pump has to be shut off. Click on the crossfeed valve pushbutton.

ATA 29 V2926 Auxiliary hydraulic system operation Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 50/ 71 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Propeller brake disengaged. aircraft on ground and propeller brake engaged).ATR Training Centre . the auxiliary pump is supplied by 28 VDC bus 2 and starts to run. At least one engine running. Î Auxiliary pump manual mode operation (continued): In manual mode. Î Auxiliary pump manual mode operation: On ground. Engine(s) running Propeller brake disengaged V2926 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Auxiliary pump automatic mode operation (continued): When these five conditions are met. If one of the conditions is lost. Click on the auxiliary pump pushbutton. This to avoid a long time running of the DC pump without any blue hydraulic pressure needed.6 . auxiliary pump operates in manual mode when its pushbutton is pressed in. the auxiliary pump is supplied by 28VDC Hot main bat bus. It operates for 30 seconds. the pump stops (For example.ATA 29 Auxiliary hydraulic system operation Page 51/ 71 Î Auxiliary pump automatic mode operation: Auxiliary pump operating conditions in automatic mode are the following: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Auxiliary pump pushbutton in pressed position ("OFF" legend extinguished). or for as long as the auxiliary hydraulic pump pushbutton is maintened pushed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Landing gear lever in down position. Low pressure main blue pump.

ATA 29 DC electrical pump description Page 52/ 71 DC electrical pump description V2922 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

V2922 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The electric motor has rotational speed of 10 300 rpm.ATA 29 Î Î Î Î Î DC electrical pump description Page 53/ 71 The DC electrical (or also auxiliary) pump is located in the hydraulic bay. The auxiliary pump is a conventional axial piston type.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . at the rear of the ACW electrical pumps (green and blue pumps).6 liters/mn at 2850 PSI. The nominal pressure is 3000 PSI.6 . The nominal fluid flow is 2.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 DC electrical pump operation Page 54/ 71 DC electrical pump operation V2923 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The auxiliary electric pump is also directly supplied by the hot main bat bus through 3GF contactor and the 5GF auxiliary hydraulic pump pushbutton. propeller brake operation.6 . propeller brake disengaged. low pressure of main blue hydraulic power system. if the MFC is supplied. and for maintenance purposes. in automatic mode only. parking brake and maintenance uses). following release of the auxiliary hydraulic pushbutton. or the propeller brake engaged. the auxiliary hydraulic pump operates as long as its pushbutton is maintened pushed. In this manual mode. The auxiliary pump operates manually or automatically on ground. the MFC2 allows pump operation when the following five conditions exist: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ The auxiliary pump pushbutton in pressed position (legend "OFF" extinguished). Î The auxiliary electric pump is supplied by 28 VDC bus 2 through 8GF in automatic mode and by 28 VDC Hot main bat bus through 3GF contactor in manual mode.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. at least one engine running. during approach or landing. (For example. With the MFC supplied or not. the auxiliary pump can be used with both engines not running. V2923 Copyright © 2001-2008 . an impulsion on the auxiliary hydraulic pump pushbutton enables the auxiliary pump to be operated for 30 seconds. Î In automatic mode.ATA 29 DC electrical pump operation Page 55/ 71 Î The auxiliary pump provides hydraulic power to operate the users of the blue system in case of blue pump fault or stop. This mode is inhibited by the automatic mode via the 8GF contactor. Î In manual mode. Î The 8GF auxiliary system pump main power contactor is energized by pressing 6GF HYD PWR / AUX PUMP pushbutton and is controlled by MFC2 1UA2.ATR Training Centre . landing gear lever in down position.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 Cross feed valve description Page 56/ 71 Cross feed valve description V2924 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Cross feed valve description Page 57/ 71 This page intentionally left blank V2924 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 29 V2924 Cross feed valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 58/ 71 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 . the other can assume an auxiliary function. V2924 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the valve opens and the hydraulic circuits are connected. under pilot control.ATR Training Centre . spring-loaded closed. both hydraulic circuits are separated. or the blue system fails to operate without a low level advisory occurence. and no low level detection. on the case drain. Î When the crossfeed valve pushbutton is pressed to the "ON" position. Î If either the green.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The crossfeed is a solenoid operated valve.ATA 29 Cross feed valve description Page 59/ 71 Î The crossfeed (or X FEED) valve is located in the hydraulic bay. Î The crossfeed (or X FEED) valve is installed between the green and blue systems to interconnect them in case of one of the systems fails. using the crossfeed valve. Î The crossfeed valve opening conditions are: ♦ "ON" X FEED switch pressed in. Î When the crossfeed valve pushbutton is released.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Blue hydraulic system Auxiliary hydraulic system V2927 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Caution lights schematics: Green hydraulic system Î Green system's low pressure (LO PR) indication transists by MFC 1B to avoid "LO PR" caution indication during the landing gear extension.ATA 29 Indicating/Hydraulic panel Page 60/ 71 Indicating/Hydraulic panel Î Select a caution light schematic. due to main landing gear actuators suction.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Indicating/Hydraulic panel Page 61/ 71 Î Select a caution light schematic.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Caution lights schematics: Green hydraulic system Blue hydraulic system Auxiliary hydraulic system V2927 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 . Caution lights schematics: Green hydraulic system Blue hydraulic system Auxiliary hydraulic system V2927 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 Indicating/Hydraulic panel Page 62/ 71 Î Select a caution light schematic.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 29 Indicating/Hydraulic panel Page 63/ 71 This page intentionally left blank V2927 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 29 Hydraulic panel Page 64/ 71 Hydraulic panel V2928 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.5 liters (0. ♦ The light illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when the auxiliary pump outlet pressure is detected lower than 1500 PSI and functioning conditions are met. ♦ The light illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when pump case drain line overheat is detected (T > 121 °C or T > 250 F).67 US Gal). <3> X FEED pushbutton. It controls opening and closure of the crossfeed valve. The X FEED automatically closes if open.ATA 29 Hydraulic panel Page 65/ 71 Î Look at the Hydraulic Power Panel. Both hydraulic circuits are isolated. ♦ The light illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when the associated pump delivered fluid pressure drops below 1500 PSI (103. <4> Overheat (OVHT) light. <2> Low pressure (LO PR) light. the X FEED pushbutton is released and the crossfeed valve is closed. Otherwise. ♦ ♦ In "ON position. ♦ The light illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when associated tank compartment fluid quantity drops below 2. V2928 Copyright © 2001-2008 .5 bar). <1> Low pressure (LO PR) light. <5> Low level (LO LVL) light. the X FEED pushbutton is pressed and the crossfeed valve is open. Both hydraulic circuits are connected.6 .

ATA 29 Cross feed valve inhibition Page 66/ 71 Cross feed valve inhibition V2932 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

V2932 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 29 Cross feed valve inhibition Page 67/ 71 Î In order to verify the correct operation of the crossfeed valve without or with low level inhibition.6 . low fluid level in the reservoir. press crossfeed pushbutton switch.ATR Training Centre . On panel 26 VU. Release crossfeed pushbutton. Cut-off the green pump by releasing the pushbutton. the test will be performed in two steps: ♦ ♦ normal fluid level in the reservoir. Verify that the "B" pointer of the triple indicator displays 3000 PSI (206 bar) confirming the correct operation of the crossfeed. Î Normal fluid level in the reservoir: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Check the sight glass indicator that the fluid level in the reservoir is in full position.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 68/ 71 ACOS v1.ATA 29 V2932 Cross feed valve inhibition Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Connect the suction hose of the hand pump to the blue suction quick disconnect fitting. Repeat functional test for the green system. V2932 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Verify that the "B" pointer of the triple indicator displays 0 PSI confirming the correct operation of the crossfeed.illumination of "HYD" on the CAP. Release crossfeed pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.illumination of blue "lo level" caution light on the hyd pwr panel (26 VU).ATR Training Centre .0 (206 bar). Switch on the green pump by pressing the pushbutton.single chime sounds. On panel 26 VU.6 . drain 3. press crossfeed pushbutton. Through hand pump. On the triple indicator verify that the "G" pointer reads 3000 PSI + 50/.ATA 29 Cross feed valve inhibition Page 69/ 71 Î Low fluid level in the reservoir: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Open the blue suction port dust CAP on the ground service panel.5 liters (0. .91 USG) of fluid from the aircraft reservoir blue suction and verify: . .illumintation of masters "caution" lights on panels 2 VU and 3 VU. .

Summary ATA 29 Page 70/ 71 ATA 29 HYDRAULIC POWER V2932 General description 2 Cockpit panels location 4 Interfaces 5 Features 6 Safety precautions 10 Main hydraulic system description and operation 11 Reservoir description 18 ACW electric pumps description 22 ACW electric pumps operation 24 Filter description 26 Pressure transmitters description 30 Low pressure switch description 32 Overtemperature sensors description 34 Low level switch description 36 Pressure relief valves description 38 Green & blue accumulators and indicators description 40 Parking brake & emergency accumulator and indicator description 42 Check valves description 46 Auxiliary hydraulic system description 47 Auxiliary hydraulic system operation 48 DC electrical pump description 52 DC electrical pump operation 54 Cross feed valve description 56 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 29 V2932 Page 71/ 71 Indicating/Hydraulic panel 60 Hydraulic panel 64 Cross feed valve inhibition 66 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

.6 ATA 30 ICE & RAIN PROTECTION Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

ATA 30 General description Page 2/ 216 General description Î Î Î Î The Ice and Rain Protection system permits aircraft operation in icing conditions or heavy rain.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . monitors ice accretion. An ice detector provided below the left wing leading edge and connected to the CCAS. A visual indicator.6 . Aircraft ice protection is provided by a pneumatic and an electrical system adapted for the critical areas. or Ice Evidence Probe (IEP) located on the lower frame of the left side window provides information of ice accretion and is shaped to retain ice when all others parts of aircraft airframe are free of ice. V3001 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.General description ATA 30 Page 3/ 216 Î Three levels of icing protection are provided and presented on the ice protection panel in flight compartment: ♦ ♦ ♦ the permanent protection or level 1 protection. the de-icing protection or level 3 protection. V3001 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . the anti-icing protection or level 2 protection.6 .

or level 1 protection.ATR Training Centre . the 6 static ports. is ensured by electrical heating of the windshields and different probes provided on the aircraft.6 . the 2 alpha probes.ATA 30 General description Page 4/ 216 Î The permanent ice protection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3001 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The electrically heated probes are: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ the 3 pitot probes. the 2 temperature probes.

6 . are: w the aileron. elevator and rudder horns. w the propeller blades. w the side windows. or level 2 protection. V3001 Copyright © 2001-2008 . consists of electrical heating of several specific aircraft zones. for anti-icing protection.ATR Training Centre . Î The AC wild current primarily supplies the anti-icing system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 General description Page 5/ 216 Î The anti-icing protection. Î The zones heated by electrical power.

6 .ATA 30 V3001 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 6/ 216 ACOS v1.

♦ the horizontal stabilizer leading edges. The visibility is then lower than 1 mile.6 . Or TAT in flight is 7°C or less. ♦ the engine air intakes and gas paths.ATR Training Centre . And visible moisture in the air is present in any form. w the median wing leading edges. Î Ice accretion means that ice is building up on the airframe. Î This drawing gives a summary of anti-icing and de-icing utilization conditions. w the inner wing leading edges. Î Residual ice means that some ice is remaining on the airframe. V3001 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Atmospheric icing conditions exist when: ♦ ♦ ♦ OAT on ground or for take-off is 5°C or less. Î The zones de-iced pneumatically are: w the outer wing leading edges. It may be in or out of icing conditions. ICING amber light illuminates in this case. or level 3 protection.General description ATA 30 Page 7/ 216 Î The de-icing protection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. is a pneumatic system supplied by air bled from the engine HP compressor and which operates on areas of the airframe.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 General description Page 8/ 216 Î A rain removal system consisting of two windshield wipers. V3001 Copyright © 2001-2008 . protects the Captain and First Officer windshield panels and maintain clear vision through the windshield during flight.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Cockpit panels Page 9/ 216 Cockpit panels V3002 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 30 Interfaces Page 10/ 216 Interfaces V3003 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 30 Features Page 11/ 216 Features V3004 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 216 ACOS v1.ATA 30 V3004 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 216 ACOS v1.ATA 30 V3004 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 30 V3004 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 216 ACOS v1.

ATA 30 V3004 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 15/ 216 ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Safety and precautions Page 16/ 216 Safety and precautions V3005 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Safety and precautions Page 17/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3005 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Detection general description Page 18/ 216 Detection general description V3006 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Detection general description Page 19/ 216 Î The purpose of the ice detection system is to help the crew to detect icing conditions. an Anti-Icing Advisory System is also provided on the aircraft.6 . Atmospheric icing conditions exist when : ♦ ♦ ♦ OAT on ground and for take-off is 5°C or less. V3006 Copyright © 2001-2008 . or TAT in flight is 7°C or less. The APM function (Aircraft Performance Monitoring) of the MPC. This new function allows to react and to take corrective actions well before icing consequences on the aircraft. and visible moisture in the air is present in any form (Visibility is lower than 1 mile).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î The ice detection system consists of the following : ♦ The ice detector located under the left wing. ♦ The Ice Evidence Probe (IEP). In addition to the ice detection system. Note that the primary mode of detection remains visual detection of ice formation on any aircraft surface by the crew. reinforces the knowledge and the awareness of the crew with regard to severe icing conditions during flights.

6 . which is modified by ice accretion. an Anti-Icing Advisory System is also provided on the aircraft. In addition to the ice detection system. When ice is detected. V3007 Copyright © 2001-2008 . triggering the warning signal. approximately 40 KHz. The detection probe has its own axial vibration frequency. Note that the primary mode of detection remains visual detection of ice formation on any aircraft surface by the crew.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This frequency change is electronically detected.ATA 30 Ice detection system description Page 20/ 216 Ice detection system description Î Î Î Î Î The ice detector alerts the crew as soon as and as long as ice accretion is sensed by the probe.ATR Training Centre . and single chime aural alert. Alert is generated by the amber ICING light on the Ice detection test and indicating panel. a heater installed in the mast at the bottom of the probe eliminates the accreted ice.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Ice detection system description Page 21/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3007 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Ice detector operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 22/ 216 Ice detector operation and cockpit controls & indicators V3010 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

Î When the test is succesful. This self monitoring is continuous. Î If the test has failed. Master Caution light extinguishes. Master Caution and Single Chime are triggered. Let's consider that both horns anti-icing have been set to ON. ANTI-ICING caution light illuminates amber. Select the anti-icing system. Î Any anomaly is indicated by a fault signal. Master Caution and Single Chime are then triggered. Icing stops flashing and illuminates steady amber on the front instrument panel. If airframe de-icing system and / or horns anti-icing have not been selected before. the FAULT amber legend illuminates. Both horns anti-icing and airframe de-icing are now selected ON. V3010 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The ice detection system incorporates an internal test of its circuits and warning circuits. On the Crew Alerting Panel. Press the Ice Detector PTT pushbutton. Master CAUTION and Single Chime are triggered. On the Crew Alerting Panel. ANTI-ICING caution light illuminates amber. set airframe de-icing to ON. ICING flashes amber on the front instrument panel.6 . Î On the front instrument panel. the FAULT amber legend illuminates. icing signal is activated.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Î Ice detector operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 23/ 216 When ice accretion is detected. Master Caution and Single Chime are triggered. As we saw previously.ATR Training Centre . the ice detector can be tested by the flight crew or the ground crew.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the ICING legend flashes amber if horns anti-icing and / or airframe de-icing are not selected ON or illuminates steady amber provided both horns anti-icing and airframe de-icing are selected ON. Press the RUD & L ELEV HORN pushbutton. Now.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 Ice detector description Page 24/ 216 Ice detector description V3008 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The sensing element consists of a cylindrical probe which is 1/4 inch (6. The detector consists of a cylindrical box containing the electronic part and an aerodynamic mast which maintains the sensing element in the air flow. V3008 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .4 mm) long.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Ice detector description Page 25/ 216 The ice detector is located on the lower surface of the left wing leading edge. The ice detector is power supplied by the 115 ACW Bus 2 as soon as it is available.35 mm) in diameter and 1 inch (25.ATR Training Centre .

inform the crew of the airfoil de-icing system operation when ice accretion is no longer detected. decrease the stall warning threshold in icing conditions with thresholds different in cruise and at take-off. Its purpose is to: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ draw the crew attention when ice accretion is detected. an Anti-icing Advisory system (AAS) is installed on the aircraft. with the Ice Evidence Probe. V3011 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 AAS description Page 26/ 216 AAS description Î In addition to the primary means of ice detection. inform the crew that the warning triggering threshold is decreased via the ICING AOA pushbutton switch.

the ICING amber light on the Ice Detector panel. 3 lights in the cockpit: .the DE ICING blue light on the Memo panel.ATA 30 AAS description Page 27/ 216 Î The AAS is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ the ice detector. V3011 Copyright © 2001-2008 .the ICING AOA green light on the Ice Detector panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. .ATR Training Centre . . the Ice Evidence Probe (IEP).6 .

ATA 30 V3011 AAS description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 28/ 216 ACOS v1.

ATA 30 AAS description Page 29/ 216 Î Here is the Anti-icing Advisory system principle: ICING amber light.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î ICING Angle Of Attack green light. The ICING Angle Of Attack green light illuminates as soon as one of the horn anti-icing pushbuttons is selected ON.6 . As soon as ice accretion is detected on the ice detector. The DE-ICING blue light illuminates when the airframe de-icing system is selected ON. Î The light flashes blue when the airframe de-icing system is still selected ON five minutes after the last accretion detection. the ICING light flashes amber.ATR Training Centre . Î DE-ICING blue light. the stall warning Angle Of Attack threshold returns to those values as defined for flight in normal conditions. this flashing light must be ignored as the de-icing system now must remain ON until the aircraft is clear of ice conditions. This should be done after pilots have confirmed that aircraft is clear of ice. provided both horns anti-icing pushbuttons are selected OFF. if the crew has forgotten to select both ice protection systems (horns anti-icing and airframe de-icing are not selected ON). Î ICING illuminates steady amber when ice accretion is detected provided both horns anti-icing and airframe de-icing are selected ON. V3011 Copyright © 2001-2008 . With the new operating procedure. This reminds the crew that the stall warning Angle Of Attack threshold is lower in icing conditions. Î The ICING Angle Of Attack green light can only be extinguished manually by depressing it. ICING amber light illuminates on the ice detector panel. Two cases are possible.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The reduced stall warning AOA threshold can be tested through the stick pusher / shaker tests on the LH maintenance panel. the bite loaded magnetic indicator turns amber on the RH maintenance panel.6 . In case of AAS system failure.ATA 30 AAS description Page 30/ 216 Î The MFCs ensure acquisition and management of fault signals and generate associated audio and visual warnings.ATR Training Centre . V3011 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 AAS description Page 31/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3011 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 30 AAS operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 32/ 216 AAS operation and cockpit controls & indicators V3012 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î Aircraft is in normal conditions and is returned to the normal stall warning threshold.6 . ICING flashes amber on the Ice Detector panel. ICING AOA green light remains illuminated and stall warning threshold in icing conditions is still maintained. Press the airframe de-icing pushbutton. meaning that the stall warning threshold is lower in icing conditions. If aircraft is still in icing conditions. DE-ICING blue light will start to flash. airframe de-icing system have to be disengaged. Let's pass 5 minutes Î DE-ICING blue light is now flashing. Î Anti-icing system is deselected. anti-icing and de-icing systems remain selected. To return to the normal stall warning threshold.ATA 30 AAS operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 33/ 216 Î When ice accretion is detected. Master Caution and Single Chime are triggered by the CCAS. Depress the horns RUD & L ELEV pushbutton.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Press the Horns AIL & R ELEV pushbutton. this pushbutton has to be pressed to set it OFF. After a temporization of 5 minutes. The pilot can verifiy it by looking at the Ice Evidence Probe or the propeller spinners. ICING is still flashing amber. ICING amber light extinguishes on the Ice Detector panel. blue DE-ICING light illuminates on the Memo panel. Now let's deselect the anti-icing system. Press the horns RUD & L ELEV pushbutton. without airframe de-icing and / or horns anti-icing selected ON. Press the ICING AOA pushbutton. Î Both horns anti-icing pushbuttons are set to ON. the ICING AOA green light illuminates on the Ice Detector panel. As soon as aircraft leaves icing conditions. Now. Icing is still flashing amber. Because of the airframe de-icing system on. Î The aircraft can return to the normal stall warning threshold as soon as airframe is free of ice. switch ON the de-icing system. Î As soon as one horns pushbutton is ON. V3012 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Airframe de-icing system is deselected. But as you noticed. Î Both anti-icing and de-icing system are now selected ON. Icing stops flashing and illuminates steady amber. Î ICING AOA green light is also a momentary switch. Î Then. Aircraft airframe is now free of ice. depress horns AIL & R ELEV pushbutton. Î Switch ON the anti-icing system. Î When no more ice accretion is detected by the ice detector. Depress the airframe deicing pushbutton. Master Caution light extinguishes.

Only during take-off a greater value is validated when the flaps are at 15° and the aircraft is on ground or in flight for less than 10 minutes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 AAS operation and cockpit controls & indicators Page 34/ 216 Î A logic inside the MFC's validate.ATR Training Centre . in icing conditions. with anti-icing selected.6 . Î For example. the stall warning threshold is greater than normal icing conditions threshold. an intermediate alpha angle value for take-off and for a maximum of 10 minutes after take-off. Î With anti-icing selected the stall warning threshold is activated at 11° AOA. during take-off. V3012 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Ice evidence probe description Page 35/ 216 Ice evidence probe description V3013 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î During night operation. Î The Ice Evidence Probe is made up of a base secured to the fuselage and a mount which maintains the sensing element in the airstream. The sensing element consists of matt block cylinder.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ice accumulation is shown on the profiled block to the cockpit crew members.ATA 30 Ice evidence probe description Page 36/ 216 Î An Ice Evidence Probe (IEP) is provided close to the left side window and enables the cockpit crew members to: ♦ ♦ visually detect the beginning of ice formation. Î In icing conditions. V3013 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . ice accumulation masks a light source controlled by the NAV lights switch.6 . visually check that aircraft is free of ice after an icing encounter.

cockpit controls and indicators Page 37/ 216 Ice evidence probe operation.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 Ice evidence probe operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3014 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Ok. Please do it. cockpit controls and indicators Î Light source of the Ice Evidence Probe is supplied when the Navigation lights selector is set to ON. The visual indicator is lighted by a floodlight through the translucent light diffuser. The check point enables the light on to be checked.

V3015 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . engine air intakes and engine gas paths.6 . Î The HP bleed air is used for de-icing.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Areas de-iced in this manner are: ♦ ♦ wings and horizontal tailplane leading edges.De-icing description ATA 30 Page 38/ 216 De-icing description Î A De-Icing system on exposed critical areas uses pneumatically inflated boots to shed ice accumulation.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When deflated. annular boots for engine air intake. Î With this type of boot. The system must be used as soon as ice accretion starts.ATA 30 De-icing description Page 39/ 216 Î Two types of boots are used: ♦ ♦ transversal boots which inflate alternate chambers (A & B) along the length of the boot for leading edges and engine gas paths.6 . V3015 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the boots are held to the structure thanks to a venturi supplied by bleed air.ATR Training Centre . there is no need to wait for ice accumulation before selecting the system ON.

ATA 30 De-icing description Page 40/ 216 Î Median and external boots have been extended on the upper surface.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3015 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . This minimizes the chances of ridge ice accretion and so reduces potential degradation in performances.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 De-icing description Page 41/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3015 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing description Page 42/ 216 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing description V3016 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. inflation and deflation of the wing and horizontal stabilizer de-icers boots. are used to isolate the engine from the airframe de-icing systems in case of engine fire or leaks. Î The airframe de-icing system utilizes five automatic water drains. Î Five dual distributor valves provide. Î The high pressure is regulated through two pressure & regulator shut-off valves. Î A pressure switch installed on the crossfeed duct of the icing protection system. V3016 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The valves regulate the pressure of the air bleed from the engine to the same pressure value supplying the de-icers. alternately.ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing description Page 43/ 216 Î Wing and horizontal stabilizer de-icing is ensured by pneumatic de-icers consisting of boots A and B. together with the MFCs.6 . alternately inflated by air bled from the High Pressure compressors of engine 1 and 2. They are used to collect liquid from condensation in the ducts.3 PSI (1. ensure the control and monitoring of the wing de-icing system. The air bleed pressure is 20. monitors the pressure of the air in the airframe supply duct and signals any pressure drop in the circuit.4 bar). also called de-ice valves. One engine is able to supply the whole system. the FAULT legend illuminates on the Airframe Airbleed pushbutton to indicate this overtemperature. except icing protection of the inoperative engine which is lost. Î The system is protected against overtemperature by two overheat thermal switches located on the supply ducts.ATR Training Centre . When temperature is above 230°C upstream of de-ice valve. Water is evacuated by gravity when the circuit is no longer pressurized. With Airframe Airbleed pushbutton selected ON. also called isolation valves. the FAULT legend illuminates on the Engine De-Ice pushbuttons with CCAS single chime triggered. Î Two shut-off valves. with Airframe Airbleed pushbutton selected OFF. Î Switches located on the De-Icing panel.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre . cockpit controls & indicator V3033 Copyright © 2001-2008 . cockpit controls & indicator Page 44/ 216 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation.ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation.

all the indications are inhibited.6 . Î If an overheat or low pressure failure is detected in flight. Î As no pressure is available. V3033 Copyright © 2001-2008 . both Pressure & Regulator Shut-Off Valves and Shut-Off Valves are supplied to close. when the fire handle is pulled. so the valves' solenoids are not supplied. regulated air pressure is available for the airframe and the engine dual distributor valves. isolating the engine. if this engine's air intake de-icing is not selected while that of the opposite engine is selected. Î AFR AIR BLEED pushbuttons has to be selected OFF. If it becomes greater than 230°C on one engine. Î Note that engine 1 or 2 overheat is determined by a procedure shown in the Engine & Air Intake De-icing chapter. no air bleed is available. Î Airframe de-icing is now lost.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a low pressure is detected in the system by the airframe cross feed line pressure switch. Î Temperature of the HP bleed air is monitored by thermal switches. but engine de-icing can be selected. Press the de-icing ENG1 pushbutton. Î As soon as the AFR AIR BLEED pushbutton is selected OFF. If a low pressure in the system is now detected. except the fire handles. FAULT amber legend illuminates on the AFR AIR BLEED pushbutton and the alerts are triggered after a delay of 5 seconds. Î In case of fire detection. Î Î Î Î As soon as engines are running. both valves of an engine are energized to close. OFF light illuminates white and alerts are also triggered. FAULT on the AFR AIR BLEED and associated alerts are triggered. both Pressure & Regulator Shut Off Valves and both Shut Off Valves are spring-loaded to close. Î Both de-icing ENG pushbuttons have been selected ON. cockpit controls & indicator Page 45/ 216 Î Without engine running. this protects the engine or the airframe. FAULT legend illuminates on the AFR AIR BLEED pushbutton and the associated alerts are triggered. Î As soon as the standby de-icing is selected.ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation. Shut-off Valves keep closed. Î In flight. FAULT light on the AFR AIR BLEED pushbutton extinguishes. while the Pressure and Regulator Shut-off valves supply the engine distributor valves. the FAULT legend extinguishes and the four valves close.ATR Training Centre . Î De-icing AFR AIR BLEED pusbutton is normally pressed. depending on the failure. High Pressure air bleed is available as it comes directly from the HP stage of the engines. The four valves open. needing air pressure to open.

ATA 30 V3033 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation.ATR Training Centre .6 . cockpit controls & indicator Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 46/ 216 ACOS v1.

Airframe pushbutton has to be selected ON to start de-icing of the wings and horizontal stabilizer. When SAT becomes below -20°C.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Press the AIRFRAME pushbutton. Î All normal lights extinguish. Continuous monitoring of this automatic selection is made by MFCs. MFCs authority on the system is lost. V3033 Copyright © 2001-2008 . MFCs switch automatically from FAST to SLOW cycle. no light is on. ADC's outputs state change. If one of these components fails (no validity or discrepancy output) FAULT is triggered on the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton. Î When standby de-icing is selected. Î Cycle selection can be operated manually with the MODE SEL SLOW / FAST pushbutton by selecting the FAST or SLOW cycle depending on SAT greater or lower than -20°C. Time base in the MFCs will supply dual distributor valves in the 1 minute cycle. As soon as airframe de-icing pushbutton is ON. de-icing starts following the FAST cycle as SAT is greater than -20°C.ATR Training Centre . OVRD illuminates white on the de-icing MODE SEL / NORM pushbutton. Normal airframe de-icing cycle selection is automatically performed by MFCs. Set the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton to MAN. Time base in the MFCs will supply dual distributor valves in the 3 minutes cycle. using ADC's outputs.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation. cockpit controls & indicator Page 47/ 216 Regulated pressure is now available for each airframe dual distributor valves.6 . Automatic cycle selection is performed by both MFC's module B using both ADC's temperature outputs. MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton is released.

FAULT extinguishes during the rest of the de-icing cycle. cockpit controls & indicator Page 48/ 216 Î Each time the AIRFRAME de-icing pushbutton is selected ON. illuminates each time the failed boot is supplied.ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation. consequent to boot A (or B) failure of distributor valve. a blue DE-ICING light illuminates on the memo panel. according to the selected cycle. the FAULT light.ATR Training Centre .6 . FAULT light illuminates on the AIRFRAME pushbutton and associated alerts are triggered. if a boot A low pressure is detected by any MFC module or all MFC modules. Î MFC 1 and 2 monitor correct operation of the valves and the boots with the pressure switches fitted at each dual distributor valve outputs. V3033 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î During de-icing cycle. Î During operation. a failure code is recorded in the MFC maintenance memory.

ANTI-ICING caution light on the CAP and both Master Caution amber lights. correct operation of the controllers concerning the engine supplies. Time base in the standby controller will supply dual distributor valves in the 1 minute cycle.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation. V3033 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Press the MODE / NORM pushbutton to select the standby system. Î Standby de-icing cycle start without monitoring. during normal de-icing. Î Once MODE / NORM pushbutton released. the standby unit triggers a FAULT amber legend on the de-icing MODE SEL / NORM pushbutton. The normal system is automatically neutralized. the OVRD white legend illuminates and the FAULT light extinguishes. Î In case of failure detection. It monitors. Each valve will be supplied following the cycle. until pushbutton is selected off. cockpit controls & indicator Page 49/ 216 Î Standby de-icing unit is supplied by 28 VDC EMER BUS or BUS 2.

The horizontal stabilizer is still supplied by the "half wave" supply. Î As soon as the temperature drops below 3°C. with temperature above 3°C. cockpit controls & indicator Page 50/ 216 Î On ground.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . when outside temperature given by the ADC's is above 3°C or with the external power connected. heater elements inside dual valve are not supplied. V3033 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation. heaters are not supplied.ATR Training Centre . wing heater elements inside dual valve are supplied by the "full" 115 VAC. Î When temperature drops below 3°C without external power connected. Î In flight. heaters are supplied by a "half wave" which provides less power supply than the "full" 115 VAC.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. cockpit controls & indicator Page 51/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3033 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Bleed port description Page 52/ 216 Bleed port description V3018 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3018 Copyright © 2001-2008 . High pressure stage of each engine is used to supply the de-icing system.ATR Training Centre . High pressure is available for the de-icing system as soon as an engine is running even if the high pressure bleed valve is closed as the air tapping is upstream the valve. Air pressure comes directly from the engine bleed ducts.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Bleed port description Page 53/ 216 The HP bleed port is located at the HP compressor level.6 .

ATA 30 Thermal switch description Page 54/ 216 Thermal switch description V3019 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î Each comprises a cylindrical body consisting of a detection sensing element linked to an electrical contact in the lower section and a 3 pin electrical connector in the upper section.ATR Training Centre . the detection sensing element trips and establishes a contact between pin 1 and pin 2 of the electrical connector.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Thermal switch description Page 55/ 216 Î Two thermal switches are provided in each nacelle on the supply duct. Î For an air temperature above 230°C ± 11°C.6 . Î The thermal switches are 28 VDC electrical supplied. upstream of the pressure & regulator shut-off valve. Î The thermal switches are used to detect supply air overheat. Î Contact opens when the temperature decreases to 207°C ± 12°C. V3019 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Pressure and regulator shut-off valve description Page 56/ 216 Pressure and regulator shut-off valve description V3020 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Pressure and regulator shut-off valve description Page 57/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3020 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3020 Pressure and regulator shut-off valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 58/ 216 ACOS v1.6 .

a ground test port.3 PSI (1.ATR Training Centre . Î The valve is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a check valve. a regulating valve. to the same pressure supplying the deicers. The air bleed pressure is 20.ATA 30 Pressure and regulator shut-off valve description Page 59/ 216 Î The right and left pressure & regulator shut-off valves are located in the nacelle on each engine. a pressure relief valve.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.4 bar). Î Two pressure & regulator shut-off valves (or de-ice valves) regulate the pressure of the air bleed from the engines. an electrovalve.6 . V3020 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Shut-off valve description Page 60/ 216 Shut-off valve description V3022 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 30 Shut-off valve description Page 61/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3022 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 62/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3022 Shut-off valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

leakage or rupture of airfoil de-icing duct. Î In the event of leakage or rupture associated to one engine de-icing duct.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Shut-off valve description ATA 30 Page 63/ 216 Î The right and left shut-off valves are located in the nacelle on each engine. the shut-off valve isolates that engine while de-icing system is still supplied through the other engine.ATR Training Centre . a valve.6 . V3022 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The shut-off valve is composed of: ♦ ♦ a solenoid which is 28VDC supplied. Î Two shut-off valves (or isolation valves) are provided to isolate the engine air intake or airfoil de-icing system in case of local failures such as: ♦ ♦ ♦ engine fire. leakage or rupture of engine air intake de-icing duct.

ATA 30 Pressure switch description Page 64/ 216 Pressure switch description V3024 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î The pressure switch monitors any pressure drop in the airframe de-icing system supplying the pneumatic de-icers.172 bar ± 0.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.931 bar).Pressure switch description ATA 30 Page 65/ 216 Î The pressure switch is installed on the crossfeed duct of the airframe de-icing system.5 ± 1 PSI (0.ATR Training Centre . V3024 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The pressure switch is 28VDC electrical supplied.069 bar). for decreasing pressure. the electrical circuit closes between A and C when the pressure P < 13.6 . the electrical circuit closes between A and B when the pressure P = 17 ± 1 PSI (1. Î The pressure switch detects the following pressure level: ♦ ♦ for increasing pressure.

6 .ATA 30 Water drains description Page 66/ 216 Water drains description V3025 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Water drains description Page 67/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3025 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3025 Water drains description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 68/ 216 ACOS v1.6 .

a water drain is located in the rear cone upstream of the dual distributor valve. a water drain is located at the beginning of the empennage supply duct in the wing center box.ATA 30 Water drains description Page 69/ 216 Î The airframe de-icing system comprises five water drains: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ two water drains are located in the LH and RH wing leading edge at RIB13. a water drain is located in the right wing leading edge at RIB3. Water present in the circuit is then collected.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3025 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The water drain comprises a cylindrical body in which slides a teflon valve maintained open by a spring when at rest.6 . Î At system shut-down. as soon as the pressure drops below 0. the valve is opened by the action of the spring and the collected water flows normally by gravity.29 PSI (20 mbar).725 PSI and 1.ATR Training Centre .08 PSI (50 mbar and 75 mbar). Î The pressurized air maintains the drain in closed position when the air pressure is between 0.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Dual distributor valves description Page 70/ 216 Dual distributor valves description V3028 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Dual distributor valves description Page 71/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3028 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 72/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3028 Dual distributor valves description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î When the system is not operative. a pressure relief valve. Î Plugs A and B are used to supply the solenoid valves with 28VDC and monitor the pressure in boots A and B.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. two pressure switches. the dual distributor valve serves to supply pressure for alternate inflation and deflation of the de-icers boots. Î When operating. to prevent icing inside the valve. Î Plug C is used to supply with 115VACW heater elements integrated inside the dual distributor valve. two inflating valves. two chambers A and B. one permanent drain. The valves and drains are electrically heated. V3028 Copyright © 2001-2008 . negative pressure maintains the de-icers against the structure. one heating resistor power supplied by 115 VACW. two are located in the LH and RH wing leading edge at RIB22. Î The airframe dual distributor valves installed on the aircraft incorporate a water drain and are interchangeable. two solenoids power supplied by 28VDC.Dual distributor valves description ATA 30 Page 73/ 216 Î The airframe de-icing system comprises five dual distributor valves: ♦ ♦ ♦ two are located in the LH and RH wing leading edge at RIB13. Î The dual distrubutor valve mainly consits of ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a jet pump. one is located on the bottom of the vertical stabilizer. two deflating valves.6 .

ATA 30 P30F5 Dual distributor valves description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 74/ 216 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î Plug C is used to supply with 115VACW heater elements integrated inside the dual distributor valve. a pressure relief valve. one is located on the bottom of the vertical stabilizer. the dual distributor valve serves to supply pressure for alternate inflation and deflation of the de-icers boots. negative pressure maintains the de-icers against the structure. Î When operating.Dual distributor valves description ATA 30 Page 75/ 216 Î The airframe de-icing system comprises four dual distributor valves: ♦ ♦ ♦ two are located in the LH and RH wing leading edge at RIB19. one permanent drain.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. one is located on the wing centre box. two chambers A and B.ATR Training Centre . two deflating valves. Î The airframe dual distributor valves installed on the aircraft incorporate a water drain and are interchangeable. Î The dual distrubutor valve mainly consits of ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a jet pump. two solenoids power supplied by 28VDC. two pressure switches. Î Plugs A and B are used to supply the solenoid valves with 28VDC and monitor the pressure in boots A and B. to prevent icing inside the valve. one heating resistor power supplied by 115 VACW.6 . P30F5 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î When the system is not operative. The valves and drains are electrically heated. two inflating valves.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 Pneumatic de-icers description Page 76/ 216 Pneumatic de-icers description V3030 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

They have chordwise type boots A and B feeding with two supply valves. integrated to the de-icers.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Pneumatic de-icers description Page 77/ 216 The pneumatic de-icers are made of elastomer with average thickness of 2. V3030 Copyright © 2001-2008 . They are cemented on the leading edges made of composite for the wings and metal for the horizontal stabilizers. two feeding boots A and B provide alternately the active de-icer chamber.5 mm.6 . In the lower surface.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3030 Pneumatic de-icers description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 78/ 216 ACOS v1.

compared with the internal wing and horizontal stabilizer de-icers.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the lower surface of the wing: 7%. Î Chord protection are for the median and external wing de-icers: ♦ ♦ the upper surface of the wing: 12. compared with the internal wing and horizontal stabilizer de-icers.5%. Î The chord protection is extended for the median and external wing de-icers.ATR Training Centre .6 . the lower surface of the wing: 7%. V3030 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Chord protection are for the median and external wing de-icers: ♦ ♦ the upper surface of the wing: 12.Pneumatic de-icers description ATA 30 Page 79/ 216 Î The chord protection is extended for the median and external wing de-icers. the lower surface of the wing: 7%. Î This is to avoid aerodynamic perturbations made by ice accretion. Î Chord protection are for the internal wing and horizontal stabilizer de-icers: ♦ ♦ the upper surface of the wing: 5%. Î This is to avoid aerodynamic perturbations made by ice accretion. the lower surface of the wing: 7%.5%. Î Chord protection are for the internal wing and horizontal stabilizer de-icers: ♦ ♦ the upper surface of the wing: 5%.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 De-icing control description Page 80/ 216 De-icing control description V3031 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 De-icing control description Page 81/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3031 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 30 V3031 De-icing control description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 82/ 216 ACOS v1.

normal or slow. MFC 1 and 2 transmit current pulses to the dual distributor valve solenoids following two cycles. Î When operating. The computers include an electrical time base which controls the dual distributor valves. Î Controls and monitoring of dual distributor valves is duplicated: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ MFC 1 module A: controls boots A monitors boots A and B MFC 1 module B: controls boots A MFC 2 module A: controls boots B monitors boots A and B MFC 2 module B: controls boots B V3031 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Correct operation of the system is permanently monitored by the MFCs.ATA 30 De-icing control description Page 83/ 216 Î The engine and airframe pneumatic de-icing is controlled and monitored by the MFCs.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 De-icing control description Page 84/ 216 Î The MFCs module B include a logic in order to select automatically the type of cycles (fast or slow) using SAT derived from Air Data Computer 1 and 2. V3031 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre . V3031 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the airframe and engines de-icing low speed cycle is selected by the MFCs. The cycle duration is then 60 seconds.6 . The MAN white legend then illuminates. the airframe and engines de-icing high speed cycle is selected by the MFCs. if SAT is lower than -20°C. The cycle duration is then 180 seconds.ATA 30 De-icing control description Page 85/ 216 Î The MFCs process the selected cycle duration in normal mode.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The fast and slow cycles are automatically selected by the MFCs when the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton is not pressed on the De-icing panel. as follows: ♦ ♦ if SAT is greater than -20°C. Î Manual selection is possible if one of the automatic selection components has failed by pressing the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton to MAN.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Standby controller description Page 86/ 216 Standby controller description V3032 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Standby controller description Page 87/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3032 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 30 V3032 Standby controller description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 88/ 216 ACOS v1.6 .

failure of both engines at the same time has to be detected.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Two functions are ensured by this unit: ♦ ♦ Detection of normal de-icing system malfunctions (normal mode). Energization of all the dual distribution valves in one single cycle (standby de-icing mode).ATA 30 Standby controller description Page 89/ 216 Î A standby de-icing control unit is there to ensure an emergency de-icing in case of failure of the normal system.6 . V3032 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î To trigger the FAULT legend on the MODE SEL/NORM pushbutton. Boot A supplied for 20 seconds while the boot B is not supplied. Î Three cases of failure can be detected: ♦ ♦ ♦ A permanent supply of both boots A and B for 200 seconds. No supply of both boots A and B for 200 seconds.

the standby de-icing system is selected on and MFCs authority on the system is lost. V3032 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The airframe and engines de-icing override cycle duration is 60 seconds. the standby controller generates a signal which triggers illumination of the FAULT legend of the MODE SEL / NORM pushbutton when this is released and OVRD legend off.ATR Training Centre . All normal lights extinguish and OVRD white legend illuminates.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Standby controller description Page 90/ 216 Î When a failure is detected.6 . Î By pressing the MODE SEL / NORM pushbutton. FAULT light extinguishes.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Standby controller description Page 91/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3032 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Engine & air intake de-icing description Page 92/ 216 Engine & air intake de-icing description V3034 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

When temperature is above 230°C upstream of de-ice valve. The valves regulate the pressure of the air bleed from the engine to the same pressure value supplying the de-icers. Î The engine de-icing system utilizes two automatic water drains.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3034 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The air bleed pressure is 20. monitor the pressure of the air in the engine de-icers supply ducts. Î Switches located on the De-Icing panel. the FAULT legend illuminates on the Airframe Airbleed pushbutton to indicate this overtemperature. One engine is able to supply the whole system. Î Two pressure switches installed on each engine. ensure the control and monitoring of the engine de-icing system. with Airframe Airbleed pushbutton selected OFF. also called isolation valves. alternately inflated by HP air. Water is evacuated by gravity towards the outside when the circuit is no longer pressurized. except icing protection of the inoperative engine which is lost. Î The high pressure is regulated through two pressure & regulator shut-off valves.3 PSI (1.6 .ATR Training Centre . They are used to collect water obtained by condensation in the ducts. Î Two dual distributor valves alternately provide inflation and deflation of the engine air intakes and gas path de-icers boots. downstream of the dual distributor valves and signal any pressure drop in the circuit. are used to isolate the engine from the airframe de-icing systems in case of engine fire or leaks. also called de-ice valves. Î Two shut-off valves. the FAULT legend illuminates on the Engine De-Ice pushbuttons with CCAS single chime triggered. together with the MFCs. With Airframe Airbleed pushbutton selected ON. Î The system is protected against overtemperature by two overheat thermal switches located on the supply ducts.4 bar).ATA 30 Engine & air intake de-icing description Page 93/ 216 Î Engine air intakes and gas path de-icing is ensured by pneumatic de-icers consisting of boots A and B.

Select OFF the AFR AIR BLEED pushbutton.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. An overheat is detected on one engine. the overheat has been detected. in case of icing conditions. V3038 Copyright © 2001-2008 . AIr bleed source and regulation are common with the engine de-icing and the airframe de-icing.ATR Training Centre . FAULT amber light illuminates on the AFR /AIR BLEED pushbutton and the associated alerts are triggered. cockpit controls & indicators Î This complete operation is shown in the airframe de-icing operation module. cockpit controls & indicators Page 94/ 216 Engine & air intake de-icing operation. in the airframe de-icing chapter. Î Regulated air pressure is available for the engine air intakes de-icers. Î A special procedure has to be followed to know.ATA 30 Engine & air intake de-icing operation.6 . on which engine. Engine 1 and 2 pushbuttons have to be selected ON. Î Both engine 1 and 2 pushbuttons have been selected ON.

Now. deselect the faulty engine pushbutton.6 . Î Note that AFR AIR BLEED FAULT light will extinguish as soon as HP air temperature decreases. a logic inside each MFC module illuminates the FAULT amber light on the faulty engine pushbutton.ATA 30 Engine & air intake de-icing operation. Î The faulty engine has been deselected and the AFR / AIR BLEED pushbutton has been selected ON once again. As we are in flight. a special logic keeps the faulty engine valves closed while the opposite engine ensures its own de-icing and the airframe de-icing. cockpit controls & indicators Page 95/ 216 Î FAULT amber light extinguishes and OFF white light illuminates on the AFR AIR BLEED pushbutton.ATR Training Centre . Î 10 seconds later.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3038 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The shut-off valves close.

cockpit controls & indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 96/ 216 ACOS v1.ATA 30 V3038 Engine & air intake de-icing operation.

ATA 30 Engine & air intake de-icing operation. You can refer to the airframe de-icing operation module in the airframe de-icing chapter. de-icing starts following the FAST cycle as SAT is greater than . using ADC's outputs. according to the cycle.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3038 Copyright © 2001-2008 . MFCs authority on the system is lost. FAULT amber light illuminates on the ENG 2 pushbutton. The associated alerts are triggered and a failure code is recorded in the MFC maintenance memory.6 . All normal lights extinguish.ATR Training Centre . Time base in the MFC's will supply engine dual distributor valves in the 1 minute cycle. For example. MFC's will switch automatically from FAST to SLOW cycle and the time base will change to the 3 minutes cycle. Î As soon as engine de-icing pushbuttons are selected ON. cockpit controls & indicators Page 97/ 216 Î Normal engine air intake de-icing cycle is automatically performed by the MFCs. ADC's outputs state will change. Î When standby de-icing is selected.20°C. Î When a low pressure is detected by a boot pressure switch.20°C. Î When SAT becomes below . an engine 2 low pressure boots B is detected. a failure signal is triggered by the MFC's.

cockpit controls & indicators Page 98/ 216 Î Standby de-icing unit monitors. correct operation of the MFCs concerning the engine supplies. during normal de-icing.6 .ATA 30 Engine & air intake de-icing operation. V3038 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Please refer to the airframe de-icing operation module in the airframe de-icing chapter to see the whole operation of the standby de-icing.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 30 Engine & air intake de-icing operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . cockpit controls & indicators Page 99/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3038 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 Dual distributor valves description Page 100/ 216 Dual distributor valves description V3036 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 30 Dual distributor valves description Page 101/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3036 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 102/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3036 Dual distributor valves description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

♦ two chambers A and B. V3036 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ♦ two solenoids power supplied by 28VDC.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Dual distributor valves description Page 103/ 216 When operating. ♦ a pressure relief valve. ♦ two inflating valves. When the system is not operative. the dual distributor valve serves to supply pressure for alternate inflation and deflation of the de-icers boots.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ two deflating valves.ATR Training Centre . The dual distributor valves installed on the aircraft incorporate a water drain and are interchangeable. negative pressure maintains the de-icers against the structure. The dual distrubutor valve mainly consits of: ♦ a jet pump.6 .

ATA 30 Dual distributor valves description Page 104/ 216 Î Plugs A and B are used to supply the solenoid valves with 28 VDC.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Monitoring of the valve is done through separate pressure switches fitted on the engine de-icing ducts.6 . V3036 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 30 Dual distributor valves description Page 105/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3036 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Pneumatic de-icers description Page 106/ 216 Pneumatic de-icers description V3037 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Pneumatic de-icers description Page 107/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3037 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 30 V3037 Pneumatic de-icers description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 108/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

air supplied independently one from the other. Î Engine ice protection is composed of the following de-icers: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ air intake leading edge de-icer. Î Each pneumatic de-icer is composed of 2 series of deformable boots A and B. Î In icing conditions. when the system is selected. cooler upper de-icers.ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This air is then distributed to the engine de-icers by means of the dual distributor valves. V3037 Copyright © 2001-2008 .5 mm as for the airframe pneumatic de-icers. gas path floor de-icer. upper gas path throat de-icers.ATA 30 Pneumatic de-icers description Page 109/ 216 Î The engine pneumatic de-icers are made of elastomer with average thickness of 2. air is bled from the engine compressors.

6 . the propellers. the front windshields (permanently heated). the side windows (heated for defogging only.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The power is supplied primarily by AC Wild frequency current.ATR Training Centre . the flight controls horns. V3039 Copyright © 2001-2008 . not for ice protection).ATA 30 Anti-icing system description Page 110/ 216 Anti-icing system description Î The Anti-Icing system is provided on the aircraft and consists of electrical heating of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ the probes (permanently heated).

ATA 30 Anti-icing system description Page 111/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3039 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Propeller anti-icing description Page 112/ 216 Propeller anti-icing description V3040 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Propeller anti-icing description Page 113/ 216 Î The propeller blade leading edge ice protection system is normally selected only when icing conditions are encountered. The electrical connection between the fixed part and the rotating part is provided by one brush block per engine. following two operating modes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Propellers anti-icing is inhibited when Np is below 63 % to prevent overheating. The MFCs serve to control the heating element cycles. In case of auto mode failure.ATR Training Centre . a manual mode is available. Î Blade anti-icing is ensured by a heating element consisting of electrical resistors embedded in an insulation material and supplied with 115 VACW. V3040 Copyright © 2001-2008 . It is designed to minimize loss of propeller performance and possible damage which could result from operation in icing conditions. Î If significant vibrations occur because of ice accretion on the blades. The MAN white legend then illuminates. ON is selected when the SAT is lower than -10°C. The automatic mode selector (MODE SEL AUTO) automatically controls heating sequence between low or high power cycle according to SAT value. A minimum of 82 % Np is required at all times whilst in icing conditions to ensure sufficient centrifugal force is developped to remove loose ice. The MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton must be depressed for anti-icing MODE SEL pushbutton to be operative. Propeller heating is controlled by the respective MFC and is individually selected by the associated PROP 1 or 2 pushbutton. Î Î Î Î The heating elements are electrically supplied in cycles. the Condition Levers must be set to 100 % OVRD position for not less than 5 minutes.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3040 Propeller anti-icing description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 114/ 216 ACOS v1.

the Condition Levers must be set to 100 % OVRD position for not less than 5 minutes. following two operating modes. Î If significant vibrations occur because of ice accretion on the blades.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. A minimum of 82 % Np is required at all times whilst in icing conditions to ensure sufficient centrifugal force is developped to remove loose ice. The electrical connection between the fixed part and the rotating part is provided by one brush block per engine. The MFCs control the heating element cycles. Î Propellers anti-icing is inhibited when Np is below 63 % to prevent overheating. It is designed to minimize loss of propeller performance and possible damage which could result from operation in icing conditions.ATR Training Centre . ON is selected when the SAT is lower than -10°C. Î Î Î Î The heating elements are electrically supplied in cycles. The MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton must be depressed for anti-icing MODE SEL pushbutton to be operative. a manual mode is available. The MAN white legend then illuminates. V3040 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The automatic mode selector (MODE SEL AUTO) automatically controls heating sequence between low or high power cycle according to SAT value.6 . In case of auto mode failure.ATA 30 Propeller anti-icing description Page 115/ 216 Î The propeller blade leading edge ice protection system is normally selected only when icing conditions are encountered. Î Blade anti-icing is ensured by a heating element consisting of electrical resistors embedded in an insulation material and supplied with 115 VACW. Propeller heating is controlled by the respective MFC and is individually selected by the associated PROP 1 or 2 pushbutton.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 116/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 V3040 Propeller anti-icing description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

following two operating modes. In case of auto mode failure.ATR Training Centre . Î Propellers anti-icing is inhibited when Np is below 63 % to prevent overheating. It is designed to minimize loss of propeller performance and possible damage which could result from operation in icing conditions. V3040 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The MFCs serve to control the heating element cycles. Î Î Î Î The heating elements are electrically supplied in cycles. a manual mode is available.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The electrical connection between the fixed part and the rotating part is provided by one brush block per engine. The MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton must be depressed for anti-icing MODE SEL pushbutton to be operative. Î Blade anti-icing is ensured by a heating element consisting of electrical resistors embedded in an insulation material and supplied with 115 VACW. The automatic mode selector (MODE SEL AUTO) automatically controls heating sequence between low or high power cycle according to SAT value. Î If significant vibrations occur because of ice accretion on the blades. the Condition Levers must be set to 100 % OVRD position for not less than 5 minutes.6 . The MAN white legend then illuminates. ON is selected when the SAT is lower than -10°C. A minimum of 82 % Np is required at all times whilst in icing conditions to ensure sufficient centrifugal force is developped to remove loose ice. Propeller heating is controlled by the respective MFC and is individually selected by the associated PROP 1 or 2 pushbutton.ATA 30 Propeller anti-icing description Page 117/ 216 Î The propeller blade leading edge ice protection system is normally selected only when icing conditions are encountered.

Î When propeller 1 or 2 pushbuttons are selected ON. V3046 Copyright © 2001-2008 . MFC 1 controls and monitors propeller 1 heating system while MFC 2 controls and monitors propeller 2 heating system. system is ready to start but propeller Np greater than 63% is required to start automatically the system in order not to damage propeller assembly.ATR Training Centre . Î 28 VDC. Engines are running.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. coming from Emergency bus is used to supply the control system. cockpit controls and indicators Î As propeller 1 system is similar to propeller 2 system. Please press the ANTI-ICING PROP 2 pushbutton.ATA 30 Propeller Anti-icing operation.6 . Î 115 VAC Wild from main bus 1 ÆC and main bus 2 ÆA are used for the blades heating elements. cockpit controls and indicators Page 118/ 216 Propeller Anti-icing operation. here is shown propeller 2 system as example.

In this example. Î Np 1 is used for system 1 while Np 2 is used for system 2. 4 and 6 heater elements to heat. A signal is then sent to the MFC 2. the MFC 2 has closed the blades 2. propeller 2 after propeller 1. cockpit controls and indicators Page 119/ 216 Î The blue ON legend illuminates on the ANTI-ICING PROP 2 pushbutton indicating that the system has been selected ON. As you can see. 4 & 6 contactor to allow the blades 2. Np 2 is greater than 63%.6 .ATA 30 Propeller Anti-icing operation. The time base in the MFC supplies 10 seconds each group of three blades. V3046 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Fast cycle can start to work.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 30 V3046 Propeller Anti-icing operation. cockpit controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 120/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

They receive ADC 1 and ADC 2 temperatures IAS valid signals. the MFC's need all inputs / outputs to be in good state. the MFC's triggers a FAULT signal and selection has to be selected manually. when the AUTO MODE SEL pushbutton is released. let's return to the previous schematic. Press this pushbutton to select the manual mode. To achieve this goal. Î Î Î Î When a failure is detected by the MFC's. Î A failure has occured and the FAULT amber light illuminates on the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton. Î When the Static Air Temperature (SAT) signals given by both ADC's change.ATR Training Centre . As soon as one element is not in accordance with the others. V3046 Copyright © 2001-2008 . cockpit controls and indicators Page 121/ 216 Î Normal cycle selection is automatic. MFC's automatically switch from FAST to SLOW cycle for boots or propeller cycle depending on the temperature. Once selected. ♦ discrepancy between ADC's outputs.ATA 30 Propeller Anti-icing operation. Let's see how the automatic selection works. No light is illuminated on this pushbutton. A cross check is permanently made by the MFC's. Failure detection works for the following cases: ♦ no validity of ADC 1 or ADC 2 or no validity of MFC 1 or MFC 2. Î Normal de-icing and anti-icing cycle selection is automatic. Î To work properly. Now. ♦ discrepancy between ADC 1 outputs or discrepancy between ADC 2 outputs.6 . the SLOW cycle control will be manually activated by the MODE SEL pushbutton. both MFCs are involved in this system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the FAULT amber light illuminates on the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton which has to be selected to MAN. also using an ARINC bus to validate the SLOW cycle control.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 122/ 216 ACOS v1. cockpit controls and indicators Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 30 V3046 Propeller Anti-icing operation.6 .ATR Training Centre .

5 seconds later. Î Note that the test can also be done using the TEST pushbutton on the Np indicator. by selecting the MODE SEL pushbutton to ON.6 .ATA 30 Propeller Anti-icing operation. Press this pushbutton to select the manual mode. V3046 Copyright © 2001-2008 . cockpit controls and indicators Page 123/ 216 Î A failure has occured and the FAULT amber light illuminates on the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton. A FAST anti-icing cycle is then performed. a failure indication is triggered and. The time base in the MFC supplies 20 seconds each group of three blades. 2. They monitor the load in the blade heating elements supply circuits. 7 seconds later. Please. Î FAULT amber light extinguishes and the MAN white legend illuminates. Î The blue ON legend illuminates on the MODE SEL pushbutton. using current transformer and pushbuttons information triggers a failure signal in case of MFC abnormal operation for more than 150 seconds. Î If abnormal signal is read by MFC.ATR Training Centre . Î A monitoring logic inside the MFC's. Î The MFC's use current transformers information to detect heating element failures.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Caution: blade heaters power supply has to be cut off if the propeller is not running to avoid damaging the brush block and slip rings. Manual selection of the SLOW cycle can be operated when SAT decreases below -10°C. Propeller heating slow cycle starts. a failure code is recorded in the MFC's maintenance memory. do it. Î The propeller anti-icing system can be tested on ground with engines running by means of the PROP A / ICING / CAUTION PUSH ONLY PROP RUNNING / PTT pushbutton.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Anti-icing control description Page 124/ 216 Anti-icing control description V3042 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre . An independant electrical circuit is incorporated for each propeller heating. Î Propeller n°1 anti-icing is controlled by MFC 1 modules A and B.ATA 30 Anti-icing control description Page 125/ 216 Î The propeller anti-icing is controlled and monitored by the MFCs.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Propeller n°2 anti-icing is controlled by MFC 2 modules A and B. V3042 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Anti-icing control description Page 126/ 216 The MFC's module B includes a logic in order to automatically select the type of cycles (fast or slow) using SAT derived from ADC 1 and 2.ATR Training Centre .6 . The slow cycle can then be manually selected by pressing the MODE SEL pushbutton to ON.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The MAN white legend illuminates . The MFC's process the selected cycle duration in normal mode. The fast and slow cycles are automatically selected by the MFC's when the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton is not pressed on the de-icing panel. Manual selection is possible if one of the automatic selection components has failed by pressing the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton to MAN. V3042 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 . V3042 Copyright © 2001-2008 . If SAT is lower than -10°C.ATR Training Centre . There is a pause of 10 seconds before each new cycle. The MFC's supply each group of three blades for 10 seconds. the propellers anti-icing is selected by the MFC's. The cycle duration is then 83 seconds.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The MFC's supply each group of three blades for 20 seconds. The cycle duration is then 50 seconds .ATA 30 Anti-icing control description Page 127/ 216 Î The fast and the slow cycles are performed according to the following: ♦ ♦ If SAT is greater than -10°C. the propellers anti-icing low speed cycle is selected by the MFC's. There is a pause of three seconds before each new cycle.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Brush block description Page 128/ 216 Brush block description V3043 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

The anti-icing system comprises two removable brush blocks. ensures electrical supply to the blade heating elements. ♦ a regulating valve. ♦ an electrovalve. ♦ a ground test port. The brush block.Brush block description ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Page 129/ 216 The right and left pressure & regulator shut-off valves are located in the nacelle on each engine.ATR Training Centre .6 . two per track. one per engine.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. in contact with the three slip ring strips. Each brush block includes six brushes. V3043 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Slip ring description Page 130/ 216 Slip ring description V3044 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î The slip ring is composed of three tracks on which the brushes are in contact.6 . thus providing electrical connection and supplying electrical power to the blade heating elements. V3044 Copyright © 2001-2008 . an electrovalve. ensures electrical supply to the blade heating elements. in contact with the three slip ring strips. Î Each propeller assembly integrates a bulkhead with a slip ring. a regulating valve. Î The brush block.ATA 30 Slip ring description Page 131/ 216 Î The right and left pressure & regulator shut-off valves are located in the nacelle on each engine. ♦ ♦ ♦ a ground test port.

ATA 30 Heater description Page 132/ 216 Heater description V3045 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î Anti-icing is ensured by a heating element bonded to the lower part of the blade leading edges.ATA 30 Heater description Page 133/ 216 Î The propeller is a 568 F Hamilton standard. Î Power of each heating element is 1324 Watts.ATR Training Centre . V3045 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 . V3047 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ailerons and right elevator horns.ATA 30 Horns anti-icing description Page 134/ 216 Horns anti-icing description Î The five horns are electrically heated to avoid ice formation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î The horns anti-icing system is separated for safety reasons. comprising: ♦ ♦ rudder and left elevator horns. They are supplied by 115 VACW.

V3047 Copyright © 2001-2008 . When electrical power is lost on one heater.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Horns anti-icing description Page 135/ 216 Î When the horns anti-icing pushbuttons are selected ON.ATR Training Centre . Î Note that ICING illuminates steady amber on the Ice Detector panel when ice accretion is detected. the ICING AOA green light illuminates on the Ice Detector panel. the associated amber FAULT light illuminates and CCAS is activated. To prevent any ice accretion. Two controllers serve to control the current flow through the horn resistors. Î When the pushbuttons are released. the heaters are not supplied. stick shakers activation and stick pusher activation are reduced depending on the flaps position. The thresholds for stall alert. Î As soon as at least one of the HORNS anti-icing pushbuttons is selected ON.6 . provided both horns anti-icing and airframe de-icing are selected ON. the horn heaters are supplied. the minimum horn temperature is 10°C.

ATA 30 Horns operation. cockpit controls & indicators V3052 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . cockpit controls & indicators Page 136/ 216 Horns operation.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

AC wild bus 1 and 2 different phases are used to balance the load. ICING AOA green indicator light on the Ice Detector panel illuminates and a discret is sent to the CCAS to change stick shaker / pusher activation from normal to icing condition threshold. Î ON light illuminates blue on the RUD& L ELEV pushbutton. FAULT light on the pushbutton. Controllers are selected one by one with RUD & L ELEV pushbutton and L / R AIL & R ELEV pushbutton. Select the HORNS RUD & ELEV pushbutton ON.6 . Select the HORNS L / R AIL & R ELEV pushbutton ON. If the pushbutton is selected OFF.ATA 30 Horns operation.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. cockpit controls & indicators Page 137/ 216 Î Without horns anti-icing pushbuttons selected ON. Î When aircraft is in flight. alerts and FAULT / ON light will extinguish. Î When the failure has been detected by the controller comparator. anti-ice horns are supplied according to the selected controllers. Î In the same time. associated alerts and red faulty channel are triggered by the controller. Î ON light illuminates blue on the L /R AIL & R ELEV pushbutton. DC supplies for the controllers and AC supplies for the anti-ice horns are available. V3052 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Horns controller description Page 138/ 216 Horns controller description V3049 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î Controller n°1 supplies and monitors the rudder horn and the left elevator horn.6 . V3049 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 30 Horns controller description Page 139/ 216 Î The horns are controlled and monitored by two controllers incorporating power relay. They supply power to the horn heating resistors and monitor correct operation of the horns anti-icing system. Î Controller n°2 supplies and monitors left and right aileron horns and right elevator horn.

ATR Training Centre .6 . Î Power supply of each controller is 28 VDC. Connector 2: AC supplies. power supply of each horn is 115 VACW through the controller. V3049 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 30 Horns controller description Page 140/ 216 Î Three annunciator lights located on the front face of each controller and a test circuit integral with the controllers serve to test the correct operation of the controller internal circuit. They are assigned as follows: ♦ ♦ Connector 1: DC supplies. Î Power is supplied to the controllers via two fixed electrical connectors 1 and 2.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 Horns controller description Page 141/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3049 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Horns description Page 142/ 216 Horns description V3051 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î Each horn is equipped with an electrical connector. Î The horns are made of nickel. The nickel sheath of a coaxial cable which is brazed on the innner surfaces of the horn. the minimum horn temperature is 10°C.6 . to prevent ice accretion. incorporates a chromium-nickel resistor.ATR Training Centre . Î In flight when HORN ANTI-ICING pushbuttons are selected ON.ATA 30 Horns description Page 143/ 216 Î The aircraft is equipped with five horns. V3051 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 30 Probes heating description Page 144/ 216 Probes heating description V3053 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

First Officer (F/O). Î On ground. It is composed of three subsystems: ♦ ♦ ♦ Captain (CAPT). Î The probes heating panel.ATA 30 Probes heating description Page 145/ 216 Î Air data sensors are electrically heated to prevent ice accretion. Logic is identical for ALPHA lights. Î The electrically heated probes are: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ the 3 pitot probes.ATR Training Centre . Î In flight. TAT light illuminates amber and CCAS is activated if the probe is not heated when the associated pushbutton is selected ON. Î PITOT light illuminates amber and CCAS is activated if the pitot is not heated when the associated pushbutton is selected ON.6 . is used to select probes heating. Standby (STBY). except TAT sensors heating which is inhibited on ground. the 2 temperature probes (TAT). the 6 static ports. located on the overhead panel. the 2 alpha probes. STAT light illumination due to heating element failure detection is inhibited in flight.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. STAT light illuminates amber and CCAS is activated if one of the static ports is not heated when the related pushbutton is selected ON. V3053 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The probes are heated both on ground and in flight.

ATA 30 Probes heating operation.ATR Training Centre . cockpit controls & indicators V3059 Copyright © 2001-2008 . cockpit controls & indicators Page 146/ 216 Probes heating operation.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Statics are not monitored in flight. 28 VDC is used to supply static heating elements. STAT and ALPHA amber lights illuminate. PITOT. V3059 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The pushbutton has to be selected to start the supply of the probe heating elements. pitot and TAT heating elements.ATR Training Centre . It triggers a failure signal in case of abnormal value.6 . TAT is not heated and monitored on ground.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Probes heating operation. Please select it.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Each supply passes through a current sensor which monitors the heating element current load. 115 VAC Wild is used to supply alpha. OFF white light also illuminates on the CAPT pushbutton. cockpit controls & indicators Page 147/ 216 When the aircraft is energized.

V3059 Copyright © 2001-2008 . cockpit controls & indicators Page 148/ 216 Î As the system is similar to the Captain subsystem.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Probes heating operation. please refer to it.ATR Training Centre .6 .

PITOT and STAT amber lights illuminate. cockpit controls & indicators Page 149/ 216 This subsystem is used to protect against ice the standby probes. 28VDC ESS Bus and 115 VAC STBY Bus are used. V3059 Copyright © 2001-2008 . even in emergency situation.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Î Î Probes heating operation. statics are not monitored in flight. Select the STBY pushbutton. With the STBY pushbutton selected OFF.6 .ATR Training Centre . STBY subsystem failure is also made by current sensors.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. As for CAPT and F/O subsytems. To perform it.

ATA 30 Pitot probe description Page 150/ 216 Pitot probe description V3055 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre . Î The three pitot probes are electrically anti-iced by an heating element embedded in the probe's body. First Officer and Standby subsystems.ATA 30 Pitot probe description Page 151/ 216 Î Three pitot probes are provided on the aircraft. Î One pitot probe is provided for each Captain.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3055 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V3055 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Pitot probe description Page 152/ 216 Î The captain's pitot probe is electrically heated by 115 VAC Wild Bus 1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3055 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 30 Pitot probe description Page 153/ 216 Î The first officer's pitot probe is electrically heated by 115 VAC Wild Bus 2.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Pitot probe description Page 154/ 216 Î The standby's pitot probe is electrically heated by 115 VAC Wild Bus 1 in normal supply and by 115 VAC Standby Bus in emergency supply. V3055 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Pitot probe description Page 155/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3055 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Static port description Page 156/ 216 Static port description V3056 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 . Î The six static ports are electrically anti-iced by an heating element embedded in the static port's body.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. First Officer and Standby subsystems. V3056 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Two static ports are provided for each Captain.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Static port description Page 157/ 216 Î Six static ports are provided on the aircraft.

V3056 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 30 Static port description Page 158/ 216 Î The captain's static ports are electrically heated by 28 VDC Bus 1.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 30 Static port description Page 159/ 216 Î The first officer's static ports are electrically heated by 28 VDC Bus 2.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V3056 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Static port description Page 160/ 216 Î The standby's static ports are electrically heated by 28 VDC Bus 1. V3056 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Static port description Page 161/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3056 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 TAT probe description Page 162/ 216 TAT probe description V3057 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

one for each side of the karman.ATA 30 TAT probe description Page 163/ 216 Î Two TAT probes are provided on the aircraft. Î Both TAT probes are electrically anti-iced by an heating element embedded in the TAT probe's body.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V3057 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î One TAT probe is provided for each Captain and First Officer subsystems.

ATA 30 TAT probe description Page 164/ 216 Î The captain's TAT probe is electrically heated by 115 VAC Wild Bus 1.ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3057 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 TAT probe description Page 165/ 216 Î The first officer's pitot probe is electrically heated by 115 VAC Wild Bus 2.6 . V3057 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Alpha probe description Page 166/ 216 Alpha probe description V3058 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î One alpha probe is provided for each Captain and First Officer subsystems.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Both alpha probes are electrically anti-iced by an heating element embedded in the alpha's probe body.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 30 Alpha probe description Page 167/ 216 Î Two alpha probes are provided on each side of the aircraft. V3058 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Alpha probe description Page 168/ 216 Î The captain's alpha probe is electrically heated by 115 VAC Wild Bus 1.6 . V3058 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Alpha probe description Page 169/ 216 Î The first officer's alpha probe is electrically heated by 115 VAC Wild Bus 2.ATR Training Centre . V3058 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Windows heating description Page 170/ 216 Windows heating description V3060 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

The windshield are protected against ice formation by an electrically heated transparent film incorporated between two layers of glass. It is supplied with 28 VDC and keeps the inner temperature above 21°C (70°F). It is always selected from take-off to landing. The inner surface remains above 21°C (70°F) to prevent mist formation. a FAULT light illuminates on the associated pushbutton on the overhead control panel.6 . Î The system is divided in 2 parts: ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Î Î the front windshields heating is to protect against ice. when icing conditions are encountered. the side windows heating is only selected for defogging. the windshields and a part of the side windows are electrically heated. When there is a power loss in a system. It is supplied with 200 VAC Wild and temperature is controlled by an electronic controller which keeps the outer windshield temperature above 2°C (70°F). fog and also to improve impact resistance under low temperature. Overheat protection is provided for all windows heating systems. The side windows are protected by an electrically heated system consisting of small wires embedded between two layers of glass. V3060 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Windows heating description Page 171/ 216 Î To ensure good visibility for pilots during aircraft operations.ATR Training Centre .

When there is a power loss in a system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . V3060 Copyright © 2001-2008 . It is supplied with 28 VDC and keeps the inner temperature above 21°C (70°F).6°C (35°F).ATA 30 Windows heating description Page 172/ 216 Î The windshields are protected against ice formation by an electrically heated transparent film incorporated between two layers of glass. a FAULT light illuminates on the associated pushbutton on the overhead control panel. Overheat protection is provided for all windows heating systems. The side windows are protected by an electrically heated system consisting of small wires embedded between two layers of glass.ATR Training Centre . Î It is supplied with 200 VAC Wild and temperature is controlled by an electronic controller which keeps the outer windshield temperature above 1. Î Î Î Î The inner surface remains above 21°C (70°F) to prevent mist formation.

6 .ATA 30 Windows heating description Page 173/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3060 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 30 Windows heating operation. cockpit controls & indicators Page 174/ 216 Windows heating operation.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. cockpit controls & indicators V3066 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Windshield heating film is supplied by using 200 VAC Wild made by phase A and B Bus 1. indicating that the system is not selected.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . overheat sensor in open or short circuit. The OFF light illuminates white on the windshield pushbutton. it allows FAULT amber legend on the windshield pushbuttons to illuminate and a BITE failure code to be recorded in the MFC maintenance memory. Î When this switch is pressed and held for a least 5 seconds. Î A bite circuit triggers a fault signal in case of : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ over current output.ATA 30 Windows heating operation.4. Î Each controller is designed to test the entire circuit by the windshield HTG PTT switch located on the right hand maintenance panel. Î If a failure is detected. overheat detected : 60 +/. Please select the windshield heating system ON. Î Power supply of the windshield heating control unit is activated using 115 VAC Wild. microcomputer failure. cockpit controls & indicators Page 175/ 216 Î 28 VDC is only used for signalisation. FAULT legend remains on.ATR Training Centre . the pushbuttons extinguish after 15 seconds. V3066 Copyright © 2001-2008 .5°C (140 +/.5°F).2. normal sensor in open or short circuit. Î If the test is satisfactory.

ATA 30 Windows heating operation. Î The MFC 1 monitors Captain side window normal sensor and spare sensor.6 . overheat control unit failure.ATR Training Centre . V3066 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î A constant monitoring of thermal sensors is made by the overheat control circuit.5. cockpit controls & indicators Page 176/ 216 Î Left and right side windows are heated by selecting ON the side windows pushbutton.3 °C (129.4°F). overheat sensor is open or short circuit. The ON blue light illuminates to indicate that the system is on. The MFC 2 monitors First Officer side window normal sensor only.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î They trigger a failure signal in case of : ♦ ♦ ♦ overheat condition : 54 +/.2 +/.

ATR Training Centre .6 . cockpit controls & indicators Page 177/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3066 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Windows heating operation.

ATA 30 Windshield description Page 178/ 216 Windshield description V3062 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

A heating film is fed with bus bars located at two edges of the transparency day opening.ATA 30 Windshield description Page 179/ 216 Î The aircraft features two front windshields. A third one is provided as a spare. It is located behind the outer glass layer. Î Two temperature sensors are used for windshield heating regulation.6 . V3062 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The windshield is a glass multi-layer assembly.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Windshield heating control description Page 180/ 216 Windshield heating control description V3063 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Windshield heating control description Page 181/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3063 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 30 V3063 Windshield heating control description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 182/ 216 ACOS v1.

which monitors the temperature value up to 60 +/.6°C (35°F) and that the inner surface temperature remains above 21. which monitors the temperature value up to 43.1°C (70°F). Î This wide temperature range is necessary to reduce the overheat relay cycling.2.6 .4. one per windshield. identified as a normal circuit.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The temperature control is ensured by two protection circuits.5°F) and the OFF setpoint at 42. Î The Windshield Heating Control Unit (WHCU) is capable of supplying up to 4 kW of power to the window heater in response to demands generated by the temperature sensors to maintain the window at a predetermined temperature. Î The WHCU is an ON/OFF controller.3°C (104. are installed on the forward fuselage section. with the ON setpoint at 40. Î The system ensures that the outer surface temperature remains above 1. V3063 Copyright © 2001-2008 . just after the pressure bulkhead.5°F). inside each conroller. and as an overheat control circuit. this one also located inside each controller extending its deenergizing state in case of prolonged system operation after normal circuit failure.5°C (140 +/.8°C (108°F).3 +/.5°F).2.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Windshield heating control description Page 183/ 216 Î Two Windshield Heating Controls Units.8°C (110 +/.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Side windows description Page 184/ 216 Side windows description V3064 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

The side window is an acrylic plastic multi-layer assembly. is located behind the outer acrylic plastic layer. V3064 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. A temperature sensor is used for side window heating regulation.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Side windows description Page 185/ 216 The aircraft features two heated side windows on each side of the cockpit. A second one is provided as a spare. A heating element.ATR Training Centre .6 . composed of nearby invisible wires and fed with bus bars.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Side window heating control description Page 186/ 216 Side window heating control description V3065 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

which monitors the temperature value up to 39 +/. They ensure monitoring of the system. Î The temperature control is ensured by one protection circuit.5°C (102 +/.ATA 30 Side window heating control description Page 187/ 216 Î The MFCs are located in the electronic rack (90VU).5.2 +/.1°C (70°F). V3065 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .6°C (35°F) and that the inner surface temperature remains above 21.9°F).0.ATR Training Centre .4°F). inside each computer. Î Both MFC's are involved in the side window heating system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. failure detection and also that the outer surface temperature remains above 1.3°C (129. and as an overheat control circuit. identified as a normal circuit. which monitors the temperature value up to 54 +/.0.

Î The maximum wiper operating speed is 160 knots. Above this speed. controlled by the Captain and First Officer selector switch respectively. V3067 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre . 80 cycles per minute on SLOW and go to a park position at OFF selection.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. rain removal is ensured by air flow. Î The wiping system is divided into two symmetrical and completely independent subsystems. Î Wipers operate at 130 cycles per minute on FAST.ATA 30 Rain protection description Page 188/ 216 Rain protection description Î Rain is removed from the windshields by means of the windshields wipers.

Set the Capt wiper selector to SLOW. Î The wiper blade. FAST coil is supplied. Electrical motor is now supplied by the SLOW coil.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Set the Capt wiper selector to FAST. Î Î Î Î It is activated by selecting SLOW or FAST the dedicated rotary selector.ATR Training Centre . attached on the wiper arm. Microswitch is always closed during SLOW or FAST operation. is a rubber blade mounted in a light alloy. V3071 Copyright © 2001-2008 . This causes a reverse rotation until the wiper arm reaches the parking position.ATA 30 Rain protection operation. Set the Capt wiper selector to OFF.6 . cockpit controls and indicators Î Captain and First Officer wiper systems are similar. Each wiper system is supplied by 28 VDC. The Capt wiper system is supplied by ESS Bus and the F/O wiper system by the Main Bus 2. Normal supply is now cut off. cockpit controls and indicators Page 189/ 216 Rain protection operation. Microswitch on the cam closes. Motor is still supplied through the microswitch.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Moto-converter description Page 190/ 216 Moto-converter description V3069 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre . 6100 RPM ± 10% or 80 ± 8 wiper arm strokes/mn.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the second one. 9000 RPM ± 10% or 130 ± 13 wiper arm strokes/mn.Moto-converter description ATA 30 Page 191/ 216 Î The electrical motor has two different speeds: ♦ ♦ the first one. V3069 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

with the normal supply cut off. installed on a cam linked to the output drive shaft. Î A microswitch. V3069 Copyright © 2001-2008 . to supply the electrical motor until the wiper reaches the parking position.ATA 30 Moto-converter description Page 192/ 216 Î The electrical motor is equipped with a thermal protection and noise filters. is used when the selector is set to OFF.ATR Training Centre . Î The mechanical converter transforms continuous clockwise rotation in short alternative rotations.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Moto-converter description Page 193/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3069 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 30 Wipers description Page 194/ 216 Wipers description V3070 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

is a rubber blade mounted in a light alloy.868 lbs) in extreme position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. It is possible to provide a correct blade pressure on the windshield through an adjustable screw located on arm support. V3070 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The wiper arm is made in aluminium and is articulated on a support which is attached to the output drive shaft.Wipers description ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Page 195/ 216 Each aircraft windshield is provided with its own wiper. This screw acts on the spring fitted in the splined joint.5 kg (7. Î The wiper blade. Î The pressure is 3. It is equipped with a roller. attached on the wiper arm.6 . which ensures the raising up of the blade in parking position.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Controls and indicators panels Page 196/ 216 Controls and indicators panels V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

<6> The engine pushbuttons control the pressure & regulator shut-off valves also called de-ice valves. click on a button or an indicating light. When the pushbutton is pressed in. <3> The anti-icing and de-icing cycles duration is provided by MFC's using ADC's outputs.6 . When selected ON. <8> When the pushbutton is released. both pressure & regulator shut-off valves and shut-off valves are open. the ON blue light illuminates and associated horns anti-icing units are activated. FAULT amber light illuminates to indicate that electrical power is lost on a blade. When the pushbutton is V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <9> The Airframe Airbleed pushbutton controls both pressure & regulator shut-off valves (also called de-iced valves) and isolation valves (also called shutoff valves). the pressure & regulator shut-off valves are controlled open even if Airframe Airbleed pushbutton is not selected ON. All de-icing lights extinguish. the stall alert threshold is reduced. ♦ associated distribution valve output has been controlled closed but a downstream pressure is detected. Horns heating is inhibited on ground. FAULT amber light illuminates and the CCAS is activated when there is a power loss. When the pushbutton is pressed. ON light illuminates blue. SLOW light illuminates blue. Note that as soon as at least one of the horns anti-icing pushbuttons is selected ON. It also controls pressure & regulator shut-off valves in closed position. ♦ inflation sequencing of engine boots A or B is not correct. <7> The De-Icing Mode Sel pushbutton controls the selection of wings / engines boots inflation cycles when MAN is selected on Mode Sel Auto pushbutton. power is supplied to both side windows heat ststems and the ON blue light illuminates. the SLOW mode is selected and timing cycle is 180 seconds. the FAST mode is selected and timing cycle is 60 seconds. A signal is sent to the MFC in order to initiate a de-icing cycle. <1> ON blue light illuminates when the heating elements are supplied according to the Mode Sel pushbutton and if NP is greater than 63%. The FAULT amber light illuminates when both MFC modules associated to air intake boots control fail resulting in an incorrect inflation sequencing. ON light extinguishes and associated boots stay deflated.Controls and indicators panels ATA 30 Page 197/ 216 Î Have a look at the anti-icing and de-icing panels. MAN illuminates white and the AntiIcing and De-Icing Mode Sel pushbuttons are operative. They allow the pilots to select the appropriate timing cycle depending on SAT. and the outputs A and B of respective engine distribution valves. after Airframe Airbleed FAULT and Eng FAULT. <5> When pressed in. the propeller LOW power cycle is selected. When extinguished. This position is used when the associated FAULT light illuminates. FAULT light illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when one of the parameters used for the automatic cycle selection is not validated. ON light illuminates blue. the HIGH power cycle is selected. <4> When a pushbutton is pressed in. normal de-icing operation is performed.off valve exceeds 230°C for more than 6 seconds. FAULT amber light illuminates and CCAS is activated when: ♦ associated distribution valve output has been controlled open but no downstream pressure is detected or. When the pushbutton is pressed.ATR Training Centre . The FAULT amber light illuminates and the CCAS is activated when electrical power is lost on one of the associated units. For more details. When the pushbutton is pressed in. When the pushbutton is released. <2> When ON light is extinguished. the heating elements are not supplied.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. When the pushbuttons are released. When the pushbutton is pressed. ♦ Airframe Airbleed pushbutton is selected OFF and air temperature upstream of the pressure & regulator shut. the OVRD white legend illuminates and the emergency de-icing activation is selected with the FAST mode.

The alert is inhibited when the pushbutton is released. OVRD pushbutton has to be pressed (OVRD illuminates white) to transfer STBY BUSSES (DC and AC through INV 1) to EMER BAT. OFF light illuminates white and both pressure & regulator shut-off valves and shut-off valves are closed. associated distribution valve output has been controlled closed but a downstream pressure is detected. Indicates the change charge (CH) / discharge (DCH) current of the selected battery. V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î BAT AMP reading selector.ATR Training Centre .6 . ON light is extinguished and associated boots stay deflated. Enables to select the battery checked by the ammeter. ON blue light illuminates when the pushbutton is pressed in and a signal is sent to the MFC in order to initiate a de-icing cycle depending on Mode Sel pushbutton. "UND / V" illuminates amber when the MAIN BAT is discharging (STBY BUS below 19. air temperature upstream of the pressure & regulator shut-off valves exceeds 230°C.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î DC AMP ind. but airframe de-icing is never available. When the pushbutton is released. FAULT amber light illuminates and the CCAS is activated when: ♦ ♦ associated distribution valve output has been controlled open but no downstream pressure has been detected or.ATA 30 Controls and indicators panels Page 198/ 216 released. Î OVRD pushbutton. <10> The Airframe pushbutton controls the outputs A and B of both wings and stabilizers distribution valves. Following a dual DC GEN loss. However.5 volt). engine de-icing may be used. FAULT amber light illuminates and the CCAS is activated when: ♦ ♦ air pressure downstream of the pressure & regulator shut-off valves stays below 14 PSI for more than 10 seconds.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Controls and indicators panels Page 199/ 216 This page intentionally left blank V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATA 30 V3072 Controls and indicators panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 200/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

OFF light illuminates white and window heat system is deactivated.6 . OFF light illuminates white and probe heating is deactivated. FAULT amber light illuminates and the CCAS is activated when there is a power loss.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <1> The TAT and ALPHA lights illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated when the respective probe is not heated. <2> The PITOT light illuminates amber and the CCAS is activated if the associated pitot is not heated in flight or on ground.ATA 30 Controls and indicators panels Page 201/ 216 Î Look at the horns and windshields heating panel. V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <4> The CAPT. In flight. F/O and STBY pushbuttons control the activation of probe heating of their respective circuits. static ports are not monitored by the CCAS. Respective probe heat amber light illuminates.ATR Training Centre . <3> The STAT lights illuminate amber and the CCAS is activated when the respective probe is not heated. When a pushbutton is released. When released. The light also illuminates during MFC test. <5> When pressed in. power is supplied to the associated window heat system and OFF light is extinguished.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 202/ 216 ACOS v1.ATA 30 V3072 Controls and indicators panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .

reminding the crew of stall alarm threshold being lower in icing conditions. <4> The DE-ICING blue light illuminates when airframe de-icing system is ON. <1> The ICING AOA light illuminates green as soon as one horns anti-icing pushbutton is selected ON. <2> The Ice Detector PTT pushbutton is used to check the ice detector correct operation. It flashes when airframe de-icing system is still selected ON five minutes after last ice accretion detection.Controls and indicators panels ATA 30 Page 203/ 216 Î Look at the ice detector and the memo panels. V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . click on a button or an indicating light.6 . <3> The ICING light illuminates steady amber when ice accretion is detected provided both horns anti-icing and wing de-icing are selected ON.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. In this case. ICING AOA light can only be manually extinguished by depressing it. provided both horns anti-icing are selected OFF. FAULT amber light illuminates when a system failure is detected ( a detector fault or a loss of power supply). stall alarm threshold recovers the values defined for flight in normal condition. For more details. ICING light flashes amber when ice accretion is detected and horns anti-icing and / or wing de-icing are not selected ON.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 204/ 216 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 V3072 Controls and indicators panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .

AC VOLTAGE INDICATOR Indicates voltage on selected AC source.ATR Training Centre . Normal reading is below 0. (For Maintenance purposes only). Î Î Î Î Î DC CURRENT INDICATOR Indicates the current generated by selected sources. ROTARY SELECTOR Allows for selected sources to display relevant current parameters on indicators. Normal reading is: 400 Hz ± 5 Hz.5. FREQUENCY INDICATOR Indicates frequency.6 . in Hz.ATA 30 Controls and indicators panels Page 205/ 216 Î Look at the propeller anti-icing and windshield heating PTT pushbutton. Normal reading for each generator is: less than 300 A. AC LOAD INDICATOR Indicates in hundred percent the load of selected AC source. of selected AC source. V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Normal reading is 115 V ± 4 V. <1> This pushbutton enables ground testing of the propeller anti-icing system with engines running. For more details. click on a button or an indicating light. <2> This pushbutton enables the entire system of windshield heating to be tested.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 30 V3072 Controls and indicators panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 206/ 216 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

V3072 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Normal reading is 115 V ± 4 V. Normal reading for each generator is: less than 300 A. wiper operates at 80 cycles per minute. Normal reading is: 400 Hz ± 5 Hz. in Hz.5. Normal reading is below 0. FREQUENCY INDICATOR Indicates frequency. click on a button or an indicating light.ATR Training Centre .ATA 30 Controls and indicators panels Page 207/ 216 Î Look at the Capt and F/O wiper rotary selectors. <1> The Captain and First Officer wiper rotary selector controls their respective windshield wiper. AC VOLTAGE INDICATOR Indicates voltage on selected AC source. When selected to FAST. wiper operation stops at the end-of-travel to parking position.6 . For more details.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ROTARY SELECTOR Allows for selected sources to display relevant current parameters on indicators. DC CURRENT INDICATOR Indicates the current generated by selected sources. When selected to SLOW. wiper operates at 130 cycles per minute. When selected to OFF. AC LOAD INDICATOR Indicates in hundred percent the load of selected AC source. Î Î Î Î Î Î This pushbutton enables the entire system of windshield heating to be tested. of selected AC source.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 30 Boots MFC maintenance test Page 208/ 216 Boots MFC maintenance test V3076 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V3076 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Once the system selector is on the "BOOTS" position. and bite loaded has turned amber.ATA 30 Î Î Î Î Î Boots MFC maintenance test Page 209/ 216 A bite advisory. Î The definition of this failure is given in the Job Instruction Card or in the Flight Crew Operating Manual and is "Left Wing Boot A Fault". all failure codes recorded by MFCs during operation. you can either note which "F" number is illuminated (here the 4 and 1 "F") or add the "F" number (4 plus 1 = 5).6 . is used to read. Î The four "F" lights illuminate. displayed on the right maintenance panel. Aircraft is on ground. Î The 4 and 1 "F" lights illuminate amber so a failure has been memorized in the "BOOTS" system. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. the PTA / ERS pushbutton has to be pressed in order to check the system. This means that all the failure codes related to the selected system have been displayed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The rotary selector is initially set on the "NORM-FLT" position. A dedicated "BOOTS" position is available on the rotary selector. Please select the "BOOTS" position to check if there is a boots failure recorded in the MFC maintenance memory. By depressing the PTA / ERS pushbutton once again.ATR Training Centre . on the ground. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. To define which kind of failure it is. the following failure code will be displayed.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 30 Propellers anti-icing test Page 210/ 216 Propellers anti-icing test V3078 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

All MFC's modules must be ON.e. the following breaker must be open: 25DH PROP1 / ANTI-ICING / PWR SPLY. Î The CCAS warnings are activated simultaneously to the FAULT illumination. Î Now. No warnings must appear. The propellers Np is above 63% as indicated by the Np Indicators. Note that the test must not exceed 160 seconds. let's continue with the propellers anti-icing and associated warnings test. This corresponds to the period of time when the controllers supply the propeller 1 group of blades. On the PROP 1 pushbutton. Î On panel 126VU. The FAULT light is extinguished when the propeller 2 blades are supplied. Î The test can also be accomplished by using the PROP A/ICING/PTT on the right hand maintenance panel. Î This test must also be performed in the same way with the propeller 2 power supply circuit breaker open. ANTI-ICING caution light illuminates on the CAP. deactivate each MFC's module B. Î Note that after 150 seconds. Î On panel 126VU. PROP 1 and 2 blue lights illuminate. Release the PROP MODE SEL to OFF. Î Î Î Î Set the MODE SEL AUTO pushbutton to MAN. 83 seconds. PROP MODE SEL ON blue light illuminates. FAULT legend on the PROP 1 pushbutton remains ON as well as the associated warnings. Then set the PROP 1 and 2 pushbutton to ON. Wait a complete anti-icing cycle i. Î The FAULT amber light illuminates twice in 20 seconds on the PROP 1 pushbutton. the Master CAUTION lights come on and the Single Chime is broadcast.ATR Training Centre . engines are running. Let's perform the propellers anti-icing test.e. Check that PROP MODE SEL is set to OFF.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the breaker previously open is closed. The white MAN light illuminates. 50 seconds.Propellers anti-icing test ATA 30 Page 211/ 216 Maintenance Operations System studied:Propellers anti-icing test Î Aircraft is on ground. Set the PROP MODE SEL to ON.6 . V3078 Copyright © 2001-2008 . First of all. Î PROP MODE SEL ON blue light extinguishes. As with MFC's module B OFF. Wait a complete anti-icing cycle i. this test must be performed in the same way with MFC's module B ON and MFC's module A OFF. No warnings must appear. FAULT legend must extinguish as well as the associated warnings.

6 .ATA 30 Horns anti-icing test Page 212/ 216 Horns anti-icing test V3079 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

it means that an internal fault has been detected. Set the Weight On Wheels guarded selector to FLT position. note that horns quickly reach a high temperature in about 10 seconds. ANTI-ICING caution light illuminates on the CAP. It is important not to heat horns for more than 10 seconds and particularly not to touch horns.ATR Training Centre . Î Î Î Î Î The Channel 2 red light extinguishes. The CCAS warnings are activated simultaneously to the FAULT illumination. By opening the following breakers.Horns anti-icing test ATA 30 Page 213/ 216 Maintenance Operations System studied:Horns anti-icing test Î Warning: Before to perform the horns anti-icing test. the channel 1. AC wild must be available for the test (engines running or GPU). V3079 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . the Master CAUTION lights come on and the Single Chime is broadcast. at the same time. Î On the front face of the associated anti-icing horns controller located on shelf 93VU in the electrics rack.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The blue ON light illuminates and. the following breaker must be open: 51DM HORNS / ANTI-ICING / PWR SPLY / RUD The FAULT amber light illuminates on the RUD & L ELEV HORN pushbutton. This test should be performed in the same way with the AIL & R ELEV HORN pushbutton. Î Î Î Î Then set RUD & L ELEV HORN pushbutton to ON. after having pressed the TEST switch. Î On panel 126VU. On panel 126VU. The FAULT amber light extinguishes on the RUD & L ELEV HORN pushbutton as well as the associated warnings. 2 and 3 red lights will illuminate on the AIL & R ELEV anti-icing horns controller: 32DM HORNS / ANTIICING / PWR SPLY / R ELEV Channel 1 red light 48DM HORNS / ANTI-ICING / PWR SPLY / L AIL Channel 2 red light 50DM HORNS / ANTI-ICING / PWR SPLY / R AIL Channel 3 red light Î Note that if a light remains illuminated on the front face of the anti-icing horns controller. place aircraft in flight configuration. the Channel 2 red light illuminates. the breaker previously open is closed. This test must also be performed with the following power supply circuit breaker open: 63DM HORNS / ANTI-ICING / PWR SPLY / L ELEV The Channel 1 red light will illuminate on the front face of the anti-icing horns controller during the test. Press the TEST pushbutton on the front face of the anti-icing horns controller. the ICING AOA green light illuminates on the Ice Detector panel. Î First of all.

ATR Training Centre . cockpit controls and indicators 37 De-icing description 38 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing description 42 Wing & horizontal stabilizer de-icing operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 30 Page 214/ 216 ATA 30 ICE & RAIN PROTECTION V3079 General description 2 Cockpit panels 9 Interfaces 10 Features 11 Safety and precautions 16 Detection general description 18 Ice detection system description 20 Ice detector operation and cockpit controls & indicators 22 Ice detector description 24 AAS description 26 AAS operation and cockpit controls & indicators 32 Ice evidence probe description 35 Ice evidence probe operation. cockpit controls & indicator 44 Bleed port description 52 Thermal switch description 54 Pressure and regulator shut-off valve description 56 Shut-off valve description 60 Pressure switch description 64 Water drains description 66 Dual distributor valves description 70 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

cockpit controls & indicators 146 Pitot probe description 150 Static port description 156 TAT probe description 162 Alpha probe description 166 Copyright © 2001-2008 . cockpit controls and indicators 118 Anti-icing control description 124 Brush block description 128 Slip ring description 130 Heater description 132 Horns anti-icing description 134 Horns operation. cockpit controls & indicators 94 Dual distributor valves description 100 Pneumatic de-icers description 106 Anti-icing system description 110 Propeller anti-icing description 112 Propeller Anti-icing operation.6 . cockpit controls & indicators 136 Horns controller description 138 Horns description 142 Probes heating description 144 Probes heating operation.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Summary ATA 30 V3079 Page 215/ 216 Pneumatic de-icers description 76 De-icing control description 80 Standby controller description 86 Engine & air intake de-icing description 92 Engine & air intake de-icing operation.

cockpit controls & indicators 174 Windshield description 178 Windshield heating control description 180 Side windows description 184 Side window heating control description 186 Rain protection description 188 Rain protection operation. cockpit controls and indicators 189 Moto-converter description 190 Wipers description 194 Controls and indicators panels 196 Boots MFC maintenance test 208 Propellers anti-icing test 210 Horns anti-icing test 212 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .Summary ATA 30 V3079 Page 216/ 216 Windows heating description 170 Windows heating operation.

6 ATA 31 INDICATING AND RECORDING SYSTEMS Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis. .MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 General description Page 2/ 186 General description V3101 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre . and miscellaneous panels which do not belong to the groups mentioned above.ATA 31 General description Page 3/ 186 Î The indicating and recording system is divided in two main parts : Î The indicating system provides : ♦ ♦ ♦ systems monitoring through the CCAS (Centralized Crew Alerting System). consoles on the left and right hand sides of the cockpit. Î The instruments and controls panel are grouped into 5 main groups : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ instrument panels in front of the pilots. as well as voices in the cockpit. centre pedestal between the two pilots. V3101 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. overhead panel above the pilots. and time display with electrical clocks. to be recorded. indication and control of the system by means of different panels. Î The recording system enables various aircraft parameters.

ATA 31 General description Page 4/ 186 Î Time is indicated by 2 quartz clocks.ATR Training Centre . Î Both clocks are identical.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The Captain's clock is located on the 3VU panel and the F/O's clock on the 5VU panel.6 . V3101 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 . Î Each MFC is composed of two modules A and B. to manage system failures and flight envelope anomalies and to command triggering of associated warnings.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 General description Page 5/ 186 Î Many systems are controlled by the two Multi-Functional Computers (MFCs). V3101 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î Their main purposes are : ♦ ♦ ♦ to control and authorize operation of aircraft systems. to monitor aircraft systems.

ATA 31 General description Page 6/ 186 Î A Centralized Crew Alerting System (CCAS) continuously monitors all aircraft systems in order to provide the following functions : ♦ ♦ ♦ ALERT the crew of the existence of a system malfunction or aircraft hazardous configuration with a clear indication of the urgency of the situation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. IDENTIFY the malfunction or the situation without ambiguity. Î Two kinds of logic are possible : V3101 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . DIRECT the appropriate corrective action without confusion.ATR Training Centre . Î Logic functions are performed by the MFC's B modules which acquire and process system failures and flight envelope protection signals and generate aural and visual warnings.

Î The main components are : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ the Solid State Flight Data Recorder (SSFDR). and the accelerometer. the Flight Data Acquisition Unit (FDAU).General description ATA 31 Page 7/ 186 Î The recording system collects.6 . V3101 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the Flight Data Entry Panel (FDEP).ATR Training Centre . formats and records various parameters stored in a memory during the last 50 hours of recording.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Cockpit location Page 8/ 186 Cockpit location V3102 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 31 Interfaces Page 9/ 186 Interfaces V3103 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Features Page 10/ 186 Features V3104 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 31 V3104 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 11/ 186 ACOS v1.

ATA 31 V3104 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 12/ 186 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 13/ 186 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 V3104 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 V3104 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 14/ 186 ACOS v1.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Safety and precautions Page 15/ 186 Safety and precautions V3105 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 16/ 186 Instruments and control panels description V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

.the engine indicating panel 400VU.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.the VOR/DME 1 and Flight Directors BARS on panel 131VU. . .ATR Training Centre .and the Crew Alerting Panel 403VU.the pressurization panel 402VU. overhead panel above the pilots. .the power management panel 401VU. consoles on the left and right hand sides of the cockpit.the flight controls and landing gear indication panel 404VU. .Auto-Pilot control panel.the VOR/DME 2 and Flight Directors BARS on panel 132VU. the glareshield 13VU which accomodates: . and the main instruments panels 3VU and 5VU.6 . the upper center instrument panel 4VU which includes: . Î The instruments panel groups the following VU panels: ♦ ♦ ♦ the left and right instruments panels 2VU and 6VU. V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 . .ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 17/ 186 Î The cockpit includes 4 main groups of panels: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ instrument panels in front of the pilots. center pedestal between the two pilots.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . the trim control panel 110VU. the centre pedestal 11VU which contains the radio communication and navigation control units. parking brake. the mechanical centre pedestal 9VU featuring the engine powerplant.ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 18/ 186 Î The centre pedestal groups the following VU panels : ♦ ♦ ♦ the lower centre instruments panel 8VU including the controls of the navigation displays. the ENG TEST panel 114VU. the lights panel 111VU and the recorder panel 112 VU. V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 . and flaps controls panels.

6 . Î The left hand side maintenance panel 101VU is more particulary reserved for avionics.ATR Training Centre . while the right hand side maintenance panel 702VU is more particulary reserved for the tests of the aircraft's general systems.ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 19/ 186 Î The consoles accomodate the maintenance panels.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 . 28VU. V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 20/ 186 Î The overhead panel 20VU is mainly for the control and monitoring of various aircraft systems. 29VU and 34VU. 26VU. 27VU. 24VU. 23VU.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. It accomodates : ♦ ♦ the circuit breakers panel 21VU. 25VU.ATR Training Centre . and the systems controls panels 22VU.

Î In the cockpit.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 21/ 186 Î The aircraft contains miscellaneous panels which do not belong to the groups mentioned previously. the electronics racks 80VU and the observer panel 40VU are provided. on the RH side. the electrics racks 90VU and AC/DC electrical power center 120VU are provided. Î On the LH side. behind the F/O. behind the Captain.ATR Training Centre . V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î In the rear cabin section. V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the cabin attendant panel is installed close to the toilets.ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 22/ 186 Î Close to the cargo door is located the cargo compartment door control panel 5001VU.

6 .ATA 31 Instruments and control panels description Page 23/ 186 Î The refuelling panel 5004VU is located close to the right main gear fairing. Î Installed in the avionics compartment are the AC external power control panel 5000VU and the DC external power control panel 5002VU. V3106 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 31 Electrical clocks description Page 24/ 186 Electrical clocks description V3107 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 31 Electrical clocks description Page 25/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3107 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 26/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3107 Electrical clocks description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .6 . an internal battery maintains the time counter function for 75 days maxi when the aircraft is de-energized. Three setting of function knobs and two bezels are also provided.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. and chronometer information. The clock displays: ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î GMT or local time. Two hands are used for the chronometer function. V3107 Copyright © 2001-2008 . elapsed time. On the back face. One hour hand and one minute hand indicate the time information. The clock is composed of four hands.Electrical clocks description ATA 31 Page 27/ 186 Î Two electrical clocks are provided in the cockpit. Î Each pilot is provided with an electrical clock.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Electrical clocks operation Page 28/ 186 Electrical clocks operation V3108 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

Note. Î Press it as follows: ♦ ♦ ♦ press once to start. and push it to activate the function. V3108 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î A knob located on the lower right hand corner enables the revolving bezel to be set .6 . press once again to stop the second hand. that if you pull the knob a second time.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. pull the knob one notch. the clock is set to off. Î The integral revolving bezel indicates elapsed time from a start mark (12 hours maxi). The chronometer function is ensured by the two narrow hands. Î A knob located on the upper right hand corner enables the chronometer to be set. and press once more to reset both hands to the 12 o'clock position. To do this. The narrow hand with a triangular head is for the minutes while the other is for the seconds. adjust the hour by rotating the knob.ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Î Î Î Î Î Electrical clocks operation Page 29/ 186 The time function is ensured by the two largest hands. A knob located on the lower left hand corner enables the time to be set.

Î Integral lighting of the clock face is provided by three 5VAC / 400 Hz lamps. Î An internal battery provides endurance of 75 days maxi for time counting when the aircraft electrical network is de-energized.6 . V3108 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Electrical clocks operation Page 30/ 186 Î The Captain's and First Officer's clocks are power supplied by the 28VDC EMER BUS and 28VDC BUS 2 respectively.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 Multifunction computer system description Page 31/ 186 Multifunction computer system description Î Numerous logic functions are performed by the MFC system. simplifying definition. replacing small electronic units which ensure weight saving.6 . Î An MFC control panel and an MFC maintenance panel are provided. Î It consists of two computers MFC1 and MFC2 and results in: ♦ ♦ ♦ reducing the number of relays significantly. V3109 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The computers MFC1 and MFC2 are identical and interchangeable.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. installation and modifications of related systems. The system integrates management and monitoring logical functions for different aircraft systems.ATR Training Centre .

6 . Î Each module includes : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a 28VDC dual power supply.ATR Training Centre . a computation unit. Î Both MFCs are electrically and mechanically interchangeable.ATA 31 Multifunction computer system description Page 32/ 186 Î The MFC's modules process data received from several aircraft systems. an input/output circuit. V3109 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Operational differenciation between MFC1 and MFC2 is made through pin programming. a hardwired logic independent of the computation unit.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. for modules 1A and 2A only.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Multifunction computer system description Page 33/ 186 Î After processing. V3109 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . the computation unit transmits orders from the output circuit to the various systems in order to : ♦ ♦ ♦ control and authorize operation of aircraft systems. to monitor aircraft sytems. to manage system failures and flight envelope anomalies and command triggering of associated warnings.

ATA 31 MFC description Page 34/ 186 MFC description V3111 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

if necessary.6 . For specific functions.ATR Training Centre . The signals from each system are taken into account by one or more modules depending on the degree of reliability/safety required for the system. V3111 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This avoids computation errors. the signal processing is performed in the conventional way by a hardwired card.ATA 31 Î Î Î Î MFC description Page 35/ 186 Each signal received by a module is converted. to a digital signal and then sent either to the computation unit for processing.

The hardwired cards are not connected to the ARINC 429 busses.ATA 31 MFC description Page 36/ 186 Î The four MFC's modules are interconnected by ARINC 429 busses. Î Each module sends all its inputs/outputs status and some information from the internal logics to the three others by ARINC 429 busses (there is one bus per module). V3111 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î Two additional synchronisation links are installed between the two MFCs for aural warnings and Master Warning and Master Caution lights flashing synchronisation.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 MFC description Page 37/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3111 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 V3111 MFC description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 38/ 186 ACOS v1.

independant of the presence of 28V. . or ground. the AND gate output (both gates closed) will be set to 1 if both conditions "Gate 1 closed" and "Gate 2 closed" are TRUE. . V3111 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Two kinds of logic are considered: ♦ ♦ The logic is positive if: . Î For example.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.and a ground corresponds to a logic level 0.MFC description ATA 31 Page 39/ 186 Î The MFC central unit uses logic circuits. Î In order not to consider negative or positive logic. Î So the logic levels 1 or 0 do not logically depend on a 28V or a ground presence. The logic is negative if: . this input is validated to logic level 0.and a ground corresponds to a logic level 1.a 28V corresponds to a logic level 1. the following agreements are used in the MFC: ♦ ♦ If the specified condition on a logic gate input is TRUE. this logic is validated to logic level 1. If the specified condition is FALSE.a 28V corresponds to a logic level 0.6 .

6 .ATA 31 MFC overhead panel description Page 40/ 186 MFC overhead panel description V3113 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . ♦ indicates if the module is faulty (FAULT legend on). when selected OFF. During normal operation.ATA 31 Î Î Î Î MFC overhead panel description Page 41/ 186 The MFC panel is shown in light test. Four illuminated pushbuttons are installed on the overhead panel.6 . V3113 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Each of them is dedicated to one module and : ♦ enables module power supply (pushbutton pressed). the FAULT light extinguishes. ♦ indicates if the module is not supplied (OFF legend on).

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 MFC maintenance panel description Page 42/ 186 MFC maintenance panel description V3115 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 MFC maintenance panel description Page 43/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3115 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 31 V3115 MFC maintenance panel description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 44/ 186 ACOS v1.

6 . Î During MFC maintenance memory reading.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When pressed for more than 3 seconds. A " FF " code is then displayed when successful. the magnetic indicator is activated. this pushbutton serves to erase the system memory. the binary code of the failure recorded.ATR Training Centre . Î Note that failure reading is only possible with engines shutdown. BITE advisory display : Î It indicates. PTA pushbutton (Push To Advance) enables recorded failures to be run on the failure display. A "FFFF" code indicates the end of the list of failures. PTA/ERS pushbutton : Î When a system is selected. this selector switch enables the various systems to be selected. System selector switch : Î It is normally placed in "NORM-FLT" position (in all other positions.ATA 31 MFC maintenance panel description Page 45/ 186 Î The right side maintenance panel includes a readout display for failures of systems linked to the MFC system. Î De-activation requires system selector on ERS position and PTA/ERS pushbutton pressed for more than 5 seconds. Î The maintenance team can extract detailed maintenance data for the nine last flights with the TMT (Transportable Memory Terminal) system. Magnetic indicator test pushbutton : Î This pushbutton serves to check operation of the BITE loaded magnetic indicator. if it is depressed for more than 5 seconds. Î But if this pushbutton is depressed for less than 2 seconds. BITE loaded magnetic indicator : Î It indicates that at least one failure has been recorded by the MFCs. the "MAINT PANEL" indicator light shows amber on the CAP). Connector outlet : Î This connector enables the optional MTS (Maintenance Test Set) system to be conected. Î When ERS position is selected. an ARINC test is performed (Cross-talk test). A "F F" code is then displayed during erasing. through illuminated "F" lights. Î The combination of illumination of these four lights enable up to 14 failures per system to be coded : the code/failure definitions are given in the concerned Job Instruction Card (JIC) or in the Flight Crew Operating Manual (FCOM). Î Recording of these failures is performed by the MFC 1A module. in order to consult the failures which have affected the system involved. V3115 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 46/ 186 MFC system operation control & indications V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

if the "BAT" selector is set to "ON" position after this operation. The stick pusher function is available if modules (1A and 2A) or (1A and 2B) or (1B and 2A) or (1B and 2B) operate.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. 1B. partially in two modules.6 .e. Î In case of the "BAT" selector in "OFF" position and following the opening of the cargo door control panel cover. Î All MFC's modules are now tested. both modules have to be operative to process this function. only 1B and 2B modules auto-test will be performed. Î The stall warning is available if modules 1B or 2B operate. Charts of these functions are found in the FCOM. Î MFC 1A and 2A FAULT amber lights flash for few seconds during auto-test of the MFC's A modules. This function is therefore not available if modules 1B and 2B are lost. Set the BAT selector to ON. 2A and 2B. This function is therefore not available if modules (1A and 1B) or (2A and 2B) are lost.ATR Training Centre . This lamp is electrically supplied by the EMER bus. Î Therefore. MFC 1B and 2B FAULT amber lights flash for a few seconds during auto-test of the MFC's B modules. MFC's 1A and 2A modules and their autotest are electrically supplied. The stall warning function is integrated in modules 1B and 2B. an auto-test of the MFC's occurs before allowing the aircraft to be electrically supplied. i. Î Once the MFC's B modules are tested.ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 47/ 186 Î When the BAT selector is set to the "ON" position. Î Just after. An example of these charts follows: The stick pusher function is integrated in modules 1A. one of the two lamps of the MFC light flashes amber for a few seconds on the Crew Alerting Panel and then extinguishes. Set the BAT selector to ON. V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . These functions can be treated: ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î in one module only. Î The MFC monitors nearly all the aircraft functions. in several modules (redundancy).

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 48/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3117 MFC system operation control & indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î The procedures following MFC failure examines every contingency and are as follows: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ MFC 1A fault. MFC 2A + 2B fault. MFC 1B + 2A fault. MFC 1B + 2B fault. MFC 1A + 2A fault.ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 49/ 186 Î The MFCs are very reliable.. Î and the coupling effect: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ MFC 1A + 1B fault.. MFC 1A + 2B fault. The loss of these functions will depend on the specific MFC loss or MFC dual loss. MFC 2B fault. Î Let's see an example of MFC module failures and the corresponding procedure following failure .6 .ATR Training Centre . MFC 2A fault.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. their failure will have consequences on aircraft functions. V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . however should they fail. MFC 1B fault.

. Try reset MFC 1B module. Both Master CAUTION lights flash amber and the single chime is triggered.. Î Î Î Î Î Perform the corrective actions for an MFC 1B failure by referring to the corresponding check list given in the Quick Reference Handbook.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . "MFC" amber light illuminates on the CAP and the associated "FAULT" light illuminates on the MFC control panel. module OFF. Clear the Master CAUTION. V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Let's have a look at the Module Equipment List .ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 50/ 186 EXAMPLE OF ONE MODULE FAILURE: Î A failure is detected on the MFC 1B module. Clear the CAP.ATR Training Centre . if unsuccessful.

ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 51/ 186 Î A summary of equivalent losses following a MFC failure is contained in the module equipment list in the Quick Reference Handbook.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Let's see a dual MFC module failure . here is the rest of the procedure for the specific actions to perform depending on the flight phase.ATR Training Centre . V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 ..ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 52/ 186 Î Following a MFC 1B failure.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.. Î The procedure following a MFC 1B failure is completed.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 53/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 V3117 MFC system operation control & indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 54/ 186 ACOS v1.

Let's have a look at the specific actions to do depending on the flight phase .ATR Training Centre . Clear the CAP.. as in this example. "MFC" amber light illuminates on the CAP and the associated "FAULT" light illuminates on the MFC control panel. aural alert is also lost. Try reset MFC 2B module. Perform the corrective actions for an MFC 1B + 2B failure by referring to the corresponding check list given in the Quick Reference Handbook. In case of both modules failure. Both Master CAUTION lights flash amber. if unsuccessful.ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 55/ 186 EXAMPLE OF A DUAL MODULE FAILURE: Î A failure is detected on the MFC 2B module with the MFC 1B module "OFF". module OFF.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Press the Master CAUTION.. V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Î Î Î Î Î Notice that aural alert is ensured by MFC 1B and MFC 2B.6 .

ATR Training Centre . V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 56/ 186 Î Following a MFC 1B + 2B failure. here is the rest of the procedure for the specific actions to perform depending on the flight phase. Î The procedure following a MFC 1B + 2B failure is completed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 57/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 V3117 MFC system operation control & indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 58/ 186 ACOS v1.6 .

Î Once the system selector is set to the "DOORS" position. As soon as the system selector leaves the "DOORS" position. the "BITE LOADED" magnetic indicator turns on amber.6 . you can either note which "F" number is illuminated (here the 4 and 1 "F") or add the "F" number (4 plus 1 = 5). The system selector is now on the "NAV" position and the PTA / ERS pushbutton has to be pressed in order to check the system. To define which kind of failure it is. the maintenance team can localize the system failed with the MFC maintenance panel.volatile memory located in the CPU card of the MFC 1A module. Select the "DOORS" position. the four "F" lights extinguish. Select the "NAV" position.ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 59/ 186 Î As soon as a failure is recorded in the non. This means that no failure concerning the selected system (DOORS) has been memorized. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. By depressing the PTA / ERS pushbutton once again. V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the PTA / ERS (Push To Advance) pushbutton has to be depressed in order to check the system. the following failure code will be displayed. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. This one is initially set on the "NORM-FLT" position. Let's check the "NAV" system.ATR Training Centre . Î The 4 and 1 "F" lights illuminate amber so a failure has been memorized in the "NAV" system. Î The definition of this failure is given in the Job Instruction Card or in the Flight Crew Operating Manual and is "EADI 2 overheat". Î On ground. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. once engines shutdown. Î Î Î Î The four "F" lights illuminate amber.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î For example let's check the DOORS system.

6 .ATA 31 V3117 MFC system operation control & indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 60/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. the four "F" lights should illuminate. The definition of this failure is "AFCS anomaly". When all "F" lights go off. the system selector has to be placed on the "ERS" position. If a problem is detected during erasing. During erasing the extreme "F" lights illuminate. Select the "NORM-FLT" position. To perform this task. 2 and 1 "F" lights illuminate amber so another failure has been memorized in the "NAV" system. Î Note that the cross talk function is inhibited for 5 minutes after memory erasure. Î A test of correct operation of all ARINC intermodule links (Cross Talk test) is available with the system selector in this position. This means that all the failure codes related to the selected system have been displayed. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton.ATR Training Centre . Depress the PTA / ERS pushbutton once more to check if another failure has been memorized in the "NAV" system. The "BITE LOADED" magnetic indicator is now deactivated. The PTA / ERS must be pressed for less than 2 seconds to perform the test. the memory has been erased and the PTA / ERS pushbutton can be released.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Once all systems have been checked. V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The two middle "F" lights illuminate within the following eight seconds. The PTA / ERS (Erase) pushbutton must be pressed and held for more than 3 seconds to erase the memory. The four "F" light illuminate. Press the PTA / ERS pushbutton. the MFC maintenance memory must be erased. Select the "ERS" position. This code will fade after placing the system selector on the "NORM-FLT" position.ATA 31 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î MFC system operation control & indications Page 61/ 186 The 8.6 .

meaning that the memorization device has failed. setting the system selector on any system results in the illumination of the four "F" lights before depressing the PTA / ERS pushbutton. V3117 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Select the "WOW & L/G" position. Press the MAG IND TEST pushbutton.ATA 31 MFC system operation control & indications Page 62/ 186 Î In case of failure of the memorization device detection.ATR Training Centre . The four "F" lights illuminate amber before pressing the PTA / ERS pushbutton.6 . Î The maintenance memory must be erased as we have seen previously to deactivate the magnetic indicator.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The MAG IND TEST (magnetic indicator test) pushbutton enables the magnetic light to be tested. This pushbutton must be pressed for more than 3 seconds to activate the "BITE LOADED" magnetic indicator. Î Î Î Î Let's have an example of this failure by checking the WOW & L/G system. The maintenance memory has to be erased as we have seen before to enable failure recording once again.

V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 31 CCAS description Page 63/ 186 CCAS description Î The Centralized Crew Alerting System (CCAS) generates the warnings required and which cannot be generated by the systems. The CCAS draws crew's attention when a failure is detected and guides the crew to the system affected by the failure. Î Two kinds of logic are possible: Î The CCAS is capable of generating various audio signal broadcast by the audio system and activating various alert lights located on the Captain's and First Officer's main instrument panels or grouped on a Crew Alerting Panel.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

EXCESS CAB ALT. Î The corresponding warning lights on the CAP are directly illuminated by the respective system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 CCAS description Page 64/ 186 Î The architecture of the CCAS. Î Note that the following warnings are not processed by the MFCs: ♦ ENG FIRE. ensures system protection against any failure.ATR Training Centre .6 . NAC OVHT and SMOKE. EXCESS CAB Δp. independently of the MFCs. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 . using the two MFC's B modules.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 31 CCAS description Page 65/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 31 V3118 CCAS description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 66/ 186 ACOS v1.6 .

CCAS description ATA 31 Page 67/ 186 Î The CCAS is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ two Multi-Functionnal Computers (MFCs).O CONFIG TEST pushbutton.ATR Training Centre . a T. a left maintenance panel. Î The CCAS receives all the WARNING & CAUTION signals from various aircraft systems. Î The MFCs send an audio warning to the Captain's and F/O's loudspeakers and activate the centralized alarms on the CAP.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . a Crew Alerting Panel (CAP). an EMER / AUDIO CANCEL switch. two Master WARNING and Master CAUTION lights. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

They may be switched off by pushing on the light. They provide condensed information of system faults or aircraft abnormal failure configuration. They give detailed information on the failure and also direct the corrective action. The local alert light: These lights are generally integrated in the system central panels. they allow the crew to detect a failure and identify its degree of urgency.ATA 31 CCAS description Page 68/ 186 Î Three kinds of visual devices are used: ♦ ♦ ♦ The Master WARNING and Master CAUTION lights: These flashing lights are used as "attention getters". Together. these lights are used to identify the origin of a failure.ATR Training Centre . as much as possible combined with or adjacent to the corrective action control. with aural signals through two loudspeakers. being.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This crew acknowledgement will also silence the associated aural warning. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . The Crew Alerting Panel: Grouped on a centrally located panel.

Detection sequence: The detection sequence comprises three different phases: 1.6 . 3.CCAS description ATA 31 Page 69/ 186 Î The following two principles have been adopted: ♦ ♦ "ALL FLIGHT DECK LIGHTS OUT" concept. all the lights are extinguished except some green. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 . ISOLATION: on the system control and indicating panel.ATR Training Centre . blue or white lights which indicate system status.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. IDENTIFICATION: on the Crew Alerting Panel. In normal operation. 2. DETECTION: with the attention getters and the loudspeakers.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 31 V3118 CCAS description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 70/ 186 ACOS v1.

Specific alerts: They are not directly identified by a specific CAP light. . Engine fire (CRC). Note: Volume of aural alerts is preset and not affected by position of Captain or First Officer loudspeaker volume control. Excessive cabine D pressure (CRC). 8. 14. Propeller brake failure (CRC). 2. 12.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Nacelle overheat (CRC). Overspeed (clacker). 13. A priority order has been defined for aurals in case of simultaneous occurence of warnings: Priority level 1. Excessive cabin altitude (CRC). 11. Config. Flaps unlocked (CRC). 9. 15. Trim in motion (whooler). Stall (cricket). V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 . 5. the Master CAUTION light or the Master WARNING light.6 . 3. . Landing gear not down (CRC). Please select the corresponding buttons to hear the sound. AP disconnection (cavalry charge).A Continuous Repetitive Chime (CRC) is used for all warnings directly identified by a specific CAP light. (CRC).CCAS description ATA 31 Page 71/ 186 Î Two kinds of aurals have been defined to alert the crew: ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Non specific alerts: They are always associated with an alert light. 7. 10.ATR Training Centre .A Single Chime (SC) is used for all cautions directly identified by a CAP system light. 6. 4. Smoke detection (CRC). Pitch disconnection (CRC). The list opposite gives the audio signals generated by the system. Oil low pressure (CRC).

6 .ATA 31 V3118 CCAS description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 72/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

g stall warning).g engine fire). serious system failure (e. Î These warnings are identified by: ♦ ♦ the Master WARNING light flashing red associated with a Continuous Repetitive Chime (CRC) and a red warning light on the CAP. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . or a specific aural warning.ATR Training Centre . Level 3: "WARNING" Î This corresponds to an emergency situation requiring prompt crew corrective action.ATA 31 CCAS description Page 73/ 186 Î The alerts are classified in four levels (0 to 3) according to their importance and to the urgency of the corrective action required. Î The following alerts fall into this category: ♦ ♦ aircraft in hazardous configuration or limiting flight conditions (e.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre . Î The cautions are identified by the Master CAUTION light flashing amber associated with a Single Chime (SC) and an amber light on the CAP. Î This level mainly comprises system failures having no immediate impact on safety (e. Time for taking action will be left to the crew's discretion.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 CCAS description Page 74/ 186 Î The alerts are classified in four levels (0 to 3) according to their importance and to the urgency of the corrective action required. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Level 2: "CAUTION" Î This corresponds to an abnormal situation of the aircraft requiring timely crew corrective action.g hydraulic low pressure).

ATA 31 CCAS description Page 75/ 186 Î The alerts are classified in four levels (0 to 3) according to their importance and to the urgency of the corrective action required.g Ground Proximity Warning System fault). Î These advisories are identified by an amber local light without Single Chime and without amber Master CAUTION light.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î This level mainly comprises failures leading to a loss of redundancy or degradation of a system (e. Level 1: "ADVISORY" Î This corresponds to a situation requiring crew monitoring. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î Note that there is no CCAS reaction with this level.6 . Î This information is provided by blue.ATA 31 CCAS description Page 76/ 186 Î The alerts are classified in four levels (0 to 3) according to their importance and to the urgency of the corrective action required.ATR Training Centre . Level 0: "INFORMATION" Î This corresponds to an information situation and requires no special action (e. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .g spoilers position lights).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. green or white lights on the control panels.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 31 CCAS description Page 77/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 78/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 31 V3118 CCAS description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 . except for ENG. or by pressing the RCL (Recall) pushbutton on the CAP.ATR Training Centre . INHI (Take-Off Inhibit) pushbutton enables the amber caution lights to be inhibited.O INHI pushbuttons. Î T. Note: the lights illuminated on the Crew Alerting Panel show the specific alerts which can be cleared (action on Clear pushbutton) or inhibited (action on Take-Off Inhibit pushbutton). It also enables inhibition of some red warning lights such as ENG 1 & 2 OIL and the three SMOKE warning lights.ATA 31 CCAS description Page 79/ 186 Î Some alerts can be erased by two pushbuttons located on the Crew Alerting Panel: CLR and T.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ ♦ Note that the amber Advisory lights cannot be cleared by pressing this CLR pushbutton.O.6 . Î CLR (Clear) pushbutton enables the amber Caution lights to be cleared. Î Note: the lights illuminated on the CAP show the specific alerts which can be cleared (action on CLR pushbutton) or inhibited (action on TO INHI pushbutton). ♦ Note that the amber advisory lights can not be inhibited by pressing this pushbutton. EFIS COMP and FLT CTL caution lights during take-off phase. Î Those inhibitions are cancelled: ♦ ♦ automatically as soon as one gear leg is not locked down.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 80/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3118 CCAS description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

O configuration test. after T.ATR Training Centre . VLE. It allows the crew to cancel a nuisance aural for a whole flight. AP disconnection.6 . after pressing RCL (Recall) pushbutton. Stall warning. Î Aural warning will be reactivated: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ at the next aircraft energization. Pitch trim whooler. after MFC 1B / 2B resetting.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. which will be rearmed as soon as the triggering condition disappears. V3118 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Except for: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ LDG GEAR warning. VFE.CCAS description ATA 31 Page 81/ 186 Î Alert can also be inhibited by the EMER AUDIO CANCEL pushbutton located on the center pedestal. VMO.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 CCAS cockpit location Page 82/ 186 CCAS cockpit location V3119 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î A red indication (ENG 1 FIRE handle) illuminates on the control panel of the affected system (local alert) and guides the pilot action (Engine fire handle). V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The "ENG1 FIRE" light illuminates on the CAP. a fire occurs in engine 1.6 . This is the failure alert.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a visual warning: red Master WARNING lights flash on the Captain's and F/O's main instrument panel.ATA 31 CCAS operation with failure Page 83/ 186 CCAS operation with failure Î Aircraft is in flight. Your attention is drawn by: ♦ ♦ an aural warning: continuous repetitive chime is broadcast. This is the failure isolation. This is the failure identification. Suddenly. It indicates the failure which has activated the warning.ATR Training Centre .

Î By pressing on the Master WARNING.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the flashing light extinguishes and the aural alert is cancelled. V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . clear the Master WARNING light. Let's have a look at the check list for corrective procedures.6 .ATA 31 CCAS operation with failure Page 84/ 186 Î First of all.

ATA 31 CCAS operation with failure Page 85/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 31 V3129 CCAS operation with failure Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 86/ 186 ACOS v1.

10 seconds after having pulled the engine 1 fire handle. that the Condition Levers are now in the feather position and that you shut-off fuel on engine 1. The engine 1 fire handle light remains illuminated because the failure persists. Î Note that if the failure does not disappear.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The "DISCH" legend illuminates amber on the AGENT 1 pushbutton indicating that the associated fire extinguisher bottle is depressurized. The local alert "SQUIB" white legend and "DISCH" amber legend on engine 1 fire panel remain illuminated indicating your previous action. Î The fire is now extinguished so the "ENG1 FIRE" light on the CAP and the engine 1 fire handle light go off. Pull the fire handle of engine 1.CCAS operation with failure ATA 31 Page 87/ 186 Î Let's consider that you have set the Power Levers to the Flight Idle position. press the AGENT 1 pushbutton to discharge the associated fire extinguisher bottle. Î The "SQUIB" lights illuminate white on the engine 1 fire panel indicating the AGENT pushbuttons which may be activated. associated local alert lights and CAP light remain illuminated.

By pressing on the Master CAUTION. V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 . This is the failure identification. clear the Master CAUTION light. This is the failure alert. Let's have a look at the check list for the corrective procedures.6 . The "HYD" light illuminates on the CAP. A low pressure in the blue hydraulic system occurs.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. An amber indication ("LO PR") illuminates on the control panel of the affected system (local alert) and guides the pilot action. It indicates the failure which has activated the warning. First of all.CCAS operation with failure ATA 31 Page 88/ 186 Î Aircraft is in flight.ATR Training Centre . the flashing light extinguishes. a visual warning: amber Master CAUTION lights flash on the Captain's and F/O's main instrument panel. Your attention is drawn by: ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î an aural warning: single chime is broadcast. This is the failure isolation.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 CCAS operation with failure Page 89/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 90/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3129 CCAS operation with failure Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The CAP light extinguishes. associated with a failure or a white light "ON" will illuminate. The X FEED "ON" legend illuminates white indicating that the crossfeed valve is open.ATA 31 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î CCAS operation with failure Page 91/ 186 Carry on with the corrective procedures. pressing the CLR pushbutton extinguishes the CAP amber caution light. Press CLR pushbutton. the CAP light. When the RCL pushbutton is pressed. Descent can now be initiated.ATR Training Centre . V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Clear the caution light on the CAP.6 . Before starting descent.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. switch the RCL pushbutton on as notified in the check list. Switch the BLUE PUMP pushbutton off. Switch the hydraulic X FEED pushbutton on. The "OFF" light illuminates white on the hydraulic panel indicating that the hydraulic blue pump is now off. This may affect the approach and landing. When the failure has disappeared.

An advisory "PRKG BRK" amber light illuminates on the CAP. Now you have to set the parking brake on.ATA 31 CCAS operation with failure Page 92/ 186 Î The aircraft arrives at the airport gate and stops. Do that now. Î Good! The parking brake is set to on. No Master CAUTION or aural alert is triggered for this alert level.6 . V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 31 CCAS operation with failure Page 93/ 186 Î The aircraft is in approach. a blue hydraulic low pressure occured and corrective actions were performed. Several information lights can be illuminated. such as the following: ♦ During the flight. The landing gear panel confirms this information by way of the three green triangles illuminated. Î As you can see.6 . the information lights do not lead to any illumination of lights on the Crew Alerting Panel. The blue pump is now off and the crossfeed valve is open. Î The landing gear is down and locked.ATR Training Centre . Two white information lights are then illuminated on the hydraulic panel. V3129 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The aircraft is currently turning to the right and then the right spoiler is extended as indicated on the spoiler indicator panel with the blue information light.

ATA 31 CAP description Page 94/ 186 CAP description V3122 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

The CAP face remains black when lamps are off. a front face with the inscriptions corresponding to each alert. No dimming is provided.67W . three momentary action pushbutton switches.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . 18 amber lights dedicated to the cautions and the advisories.6 .28VDC lamps. Î Each failure indication is illuminated by two 0. Î Inscriptions are sun light readable when lamps are on.CAP description ATA 31 Page 95/ 186 Î The Crew Alerting Panel (CAP) is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ a printed circuit where implanted lamps are illuminated by the different alerts. V3122 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The CAP is comprised of: ♦ ♦ 15 red lights dedicated to the warnings.

Î When pressed: ♦ ♦ ♦ All inhibited or cancelled lights illuminate if the respective system is still degraded.ATA 31 CAP description Page 96/ 186 Î The RCL (Recall) pushbutton with one stable position is provided with a single indication: RCL. V3122 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Inhibits the take-off inhibit function. Î The RCL legend is permanently visible white on a black background in normal daylight conditions and is white on a black background in night conditions.ATR Training Centre . Recall is possible during all phases of operation. All aural warnings previously cancelled are reactivated.

6 . The CLR legend is permanently visible white on a black background in normal daylight conditions and is white on a black background in night conditions The CLR pushbutton when depressed.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Note: the lights illuminated on the CAP show the specific alerts which can be cleared (action on CLR pushbutton). Advisory amber lights can not be cleared by this pushbutton.ATA 31 Î Î Î Î CAP description Page 97/ 186 The CLR (Clear) pushbutton with one stable position is provided with a single indication: CLR. causes amber caution lights to be cleared. V3122 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 31 V3122 CAP description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 98/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Î Pressing this pushbutton also enables the amber caution lights to be cleared as with action on the CLR pushbutton V3122 Copyright © 2001-2008 .O INHI pushbutton). ENG 1(2) OIL and all SMOKE red warning lights are also inhibited.ATR Training Centre . Î Pressing the T. Î This function is cancelled.6 . Î The INHI legend is visible blue on a sunlight readable black background when on. either automatically as soon as the main landing gear starts retracting. Î Note: The lights illuminated on the CAP show the specific alerts which can be inhibited (action on T. Î The T.O for the upper legend and INHI for the lower legend. enables amber caution lights but not the amber advisory lights to be inhibited during take-off except for EFIS COMP. It is not visible when not active. This legend is dimmed by means of the BRT / DIM switch.O INHI (Take-Off Inhibit) pushbutton with one stable position is provided with two indications: T. or manually by action on the RCL pushbutton.ATA 31 CAP description Page 99/ 186 Î The T.O legend is permanently visible white on a black background in normal daylight conditions and is white on a black background in night conditions.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. FLT CTL and ENG.O INHI pushbutton when aircraft is on ground.

ATA 31 Master warning & caution description Page 100/ 186 Master warning & caution description V3124 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î The Master CAUTION lights flash amber when an amber system failure is detected.ATA 31 Master warning & caution description Page 101/ 186 Î Each pilot is provided with a Master WARNING and a Master CAUTION lights on the main instrument panels 3VU and 5VU. The WARNING lights go off and associated aural warning (Continuous Repetitive Chime) is deactivated when one of them is pressed. Î The 28 VDC EMER bus supplies two lamps of each Master WARNING light while the two others are supplied by the 28 VDC bus 2. V3124 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . The CAUTION lights go off when one of them is pressed. Î The Master WARNING lights flash red when a red system failure is detected.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The 28 VDC EMER bus supplies two lamps of each Master CAUTION light while the two others are supplied by the 28 VDC bus 2. Î Each Master WARNING and Master CAUTION light is provided with four lamps.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 TO config test description Page 102/ 186 TO config test description V3125 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 TO config test description Page 103/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3125 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 104/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3125 TO config test description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Please.O CONFIG TEST pushbutton enables. Î Before take-off. no amber or white annuciator light is on in the flight compartment.O CONFIG TEST pushbutton must be pressed and held. or when the Power Levers are in the Take-Off position.6 ..O position without taking the parking brake into consideration.. With aircraft on ground. V3125 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î With the engines running.ATA 31 TO config test description Page 105/ 186 Î The CCAS includes a Take-Off configuration warning function. perform this action .O CONFIG TEST pushbutton is pressed and held.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. performing an automatic Recall (thus reactiving all aural warnings previously cancelled by the EMER AUDIO CANCEL switch). the T.ATR Training Centre . before take-off: ♦ ♦ checking that the aircraft is correct for take-off by simulating Power Levers at T. except the amber "PRKG BRK" advisory light on the CAP if the parking brake is applied. this function is armed: ♦ ♦ either when the T. Î The T.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 106/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3125 TO config test description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

♦ a TLU is in HI SPD position (LO SPEED extinguished). this function causes: ♦ ♦ ♦ the Master WARNING lights to flash red. "FLT CTL" or "ENG" amber caution lights come on on the CAP in case of the following conditions: "FLT CTL" illuminates if: ♦ pitch trim is out of take-off range (green arc). "ENG" illuminates if: ♦ PWR MGT selector is not in T. ♦ flaps are not at take-off position (15°).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.O position with the parking brake applied.O position.ATR Training Centre . in normal operation and not in test. and the "CONFIG" red light to illuminate on the CAP. the Continous Repetitive Chime to sound.6 . if the aircraft is not in the take-off configuration.ATA 31 TO config test description Page 107/ 186 Î When activated. V3125 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î In association. ♦ aileron spring tab is locked (ail lock illuminated on pedestal). ♦ Power Lever are in T.

ATA 31 Emergency audio cancel switch description Page 108/ 186 Emergency audio cancel switch description V3126 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Emergency audio cancel switch description Page 109/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3126 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 V3126 Emergency audio cancel switch description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 110/ 186 ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

after pressing the RCL pushbutton. Î The aural alerts associated with the following will be rearmed as soon as the triggering condition disappears: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ landing gear warning. CRC is not cancelled for any system other than system X. pitch trim whooler. Î If a false system indication generates an undue continuous aural warning.6 . Î The EMER AUDIO CANCEL switch is safety wired guarded. Î For example. if this switch is used to cancel a system X failure CRC (Continuous Repetitive Chime). stall warning.ATA 31 Emergency audio cancel switch description Page 111/ 186 Î The EMER AUDIO CANCEL switch is located on the centre pedestal 902 VU. VLE. AP disconnection. Î Cancelled aural warnings will be reactivated: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ at the next aircraft energization. VMO. after MFC 1B / 2B resetting.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. VFE. the use of this switch will cancel the aural specific to this false alert without loss of the other aural alerts even if they are identical to the inhibited one. following a take-off configuration test.ATR Training Centre . V3126 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 LH maintenance panel description Page 112/ 186 LH maintenance panel description V3127 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 31 LH maintenance panel description Page 113/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3127 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 114/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3127 LH maintenance panel description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The tests are performed by pressing and holding down the PTT (Push To Test) pushbutton. Smoke. Î On the LH maintenance panel. Stick pusher / shaker by means of four different tests. Excessive cabin altitude.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3127 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î A rotary selector is used to activate the desired warning systems which are the following: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Excessive cabin delta pressure. a "WARN" section allows testing of several warnings which cannot be tested on their own system. the "MAINT PNL" amber advisory light illuminates on the CAP. Landing gear not down.ATA 31 LH maintenance panel description Page 115/ 186 Î The WARN section maintenance panel switch is located on the left hand side maintenance panel 101 VU. VMO. Pitch disconnection. Î The "CHAN 1" and "CHAN 2" legends come on during stick pusher / shaker tests to check both angle-of-attack channels for correct operation. Î Note that when the rotary selector is not in the "NORM-FLT" position.ATR Training Centre .6 .

and the Solid State Flight Data Recorder (SSFDR). the recorders are off until one engine is started.ATR Training Centre . V3130 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 31 Recording system description Page 116/ 186 Recording system description Î The aircraft flight recorders are: ♦ ♦ The Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR) which will be described in the Communications ATA Chapter.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The recorders are automatically energized as soon as the aircraft is on its own electrical supply (without external power connected) and are switched off automatically ten minutes after engines shutdown.6 . Î But they can be energized by selecting ON the RCDR pushbutton and de-energized by pushing the RESET pushbutton on the pedestal panel. Î When the aircraft is on external power.

V3130 Copyright © 2001-2008 . and an accelerometer.ATA 31 Recording system description Page 117/ 186 Î The recording system is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a Flight Data Acquisition Unit (FDAU).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a Flight Data Entry Panel (FDEP).6 . a Solid State Flight Data Recorder (SSFDR).ATR Training Centre .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The FDAU also includes the computation of the Objective Torque from the engine system and displays it with an amber bug on the torque indicator. V3130 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î These signals are digitized and transmitted to the SSFDR.ATA 31 Recording system description Page 118/ 186 Î The FDAU receives various signals from aircraft pickoffs.ATR Training Centre .

this extra capacity is to ensure compliance with the law if more parameters are required in the future. a fault signal is sent to the FDAU and to the FDEP. the SSFDR can record for 50 hours . V3130 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 31 Recording system description Page 119/ 186 Î The SSFDR receives parameters from the FDAU in digital format and records them in a memory. Î International regulation requires FDR to record for 25 hours.6 . At present.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . Î In case of failure.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Recording system description Page 120/ 186 Î The FDEP sends documentary data to the FDAU.6 . V3130 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î It receives status warning signals from the FDAU and the SSFDR.. flight number.. Î It displays engine maintenance codes provided by the EEC and the PEC via the FDAU. events.ATR Training Centre . such as time.

V3130 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 31 Recording system description Page 121/ 186 Î The accelerometer sends the lateral.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . longitudinal and vertical acceleration to the FDAU.ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 122/ 186 Recorders operation controls & indications V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

you want to stop recording of the aircraft parameters that you manually initialized. The 11PG relay is then excited and the MFC internal logic causes loss of SSFDR energization. Aircraft parameters will be recorded during the entire flight. Press the RESET pushbutton. The "ON" legend extinguishes on the RCDR pushbutton. Both engines are now running and external power is no longer available. Now. the ground is lost and the 7RK relay opens. Set the RCDR pushbutton to ON. You want to manually run the SSFDR.. As soon as ten minutes have passed. The SSFDR stops recording. The SSFDR is still supplied upon aircraft energization for ten minutes because of the delay in the MFC internal logic.. By pressing the RESET pushbutton. The associated contact closes.ATA 31 Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Recorders operation controls & indications Page 123/ 186 The external power is now available and set to ON. the MFC internal logic causes loss of ground and the 7RK relay opens. Click on the aircraft to disconnect the Ground Power Unit.6 . V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 . As soon as one engine is running the SSFDR is automatically supplied. The MFC logic enables the 7RK relay to be excited and the SSFDR is then supplied. By pressing the RCDR pushbutton. Battery selector is set to ON and the external power is not available.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Note that manual recording can only be achieved with external power set to ON. Aircraft is now on ground and both engines have just stopped. the "ON" legend illuminates blue.ATR Training Centre . The SSFDR is no longer supplied. The external power is now available and set to ON.

the FDAU acquires several parameters which are used for check or investigation.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 124/ 186 Î When the aircraft operates.6 . Î The figure shows the main mandatory parameters acquired. V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

The first word of each SUBFRAME is for message synchronization. The format of the message is a FRAME comprising four SUBFRAMES each having a duration of one second. the parameters are processed and formatted into an ARINC 573 message for the SSFDR. The same word can contain from 1 to 12 different parameters.ATA 31 Î Î Î Î Î Recorders operation controls & indications Page 125/ 186 After acquisition.6 . The synchronization of the recorders system is ensured by the FDAU. It transmits the clock signal (GMT) to the Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR) as soon as it has transmitted the synchronization word to the SSFDR. V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 . or 256) words of 12 bits. Each SUBFRAME comprises 64 (128.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

various parameters). the FDAU monitors the operation of other parts of the system (SSFDR. Î The failure indications are located at two levels: ♦ ♦ on the FDEP: 2 lights "STATUS/SYST" and "STATUS/FDAU" which are OFF during normal operation.ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 126/ 186 Î In addition to its own operation. V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . Î It transmits various items of failure information to several indicators.ATR Training Centre . on the FDAU: 2 lights "DFDR fail" and "FDAU fail" which are green during normal operation. illuminate amber in case of failure. FDEP.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. illuminate red in case of failure.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 127/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 128/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 V3140 Recorders operation controls & indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

the bugs will move: ♦ to 0% in case of FDAU internal processing unit failure. pack valves position. Î The objective torque is calculated for each engine every second. Î The parameters acquired for the calculation of the target torque are the following: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î Î engine rating selection via the power management selector. propeller speed.ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 129/ 186 Î The principle of the objective torque function is to calculate on the basis of certain parameters. if an anomaly is detected. V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Then the objective torque amber bugs are positioned at 100% for 15 seconds before taking real computed value. the bugs remain at 0%. The result of the calculation is converted into voltages proportional to the calculated torque value and displayed on each torque indicator through amber bugs. Indicated Air Speed and Total Air Temperature. When the power is supplied. During operation.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. If the test is successful. compartment temperature High Flow switch position. the objective torque function is self-tested by the FDAU. If the test is not successful. the optimal torque for each engine with respect to the flight phases. ♦ to 23% in case of input parameters invalid or out of tolerance. the objective torque amber bugs are positioned at 23% for approximately 15 seconds.6 . Air Data Computer inputs such as pressure altitude.

on ground and in flight and under certain conditions. This is performed by the FDAU. ARINC 429 messages for the processing unit 2. a set of parameters related to the engines and to store them in a mass memory with a storage capacity of at least 50 flights. Î The processing unit 2 (FDAU part of the FDAU equipment) stores the messages in the mass memory. V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î The processing unit 1 (DMU part of the FDAU equipment) receives all engine parameters and formats them into: ♦ ♦ ARINC 573 messages for SSFDR recording.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When 80% of the mass memory is filled. a ground discrete activates the magnetic indicator on the maintenance panel. Î This discrete is also used to indicate a failure detected at the processing level.ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 130/ 186 Î The principle of the Aircraft Integrated Data System (AIDS) function is to acquire.6 .

6 .ATA 31 V3140 Recorders operation controls & indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 131/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 V3140 Recorders operation controls & indications Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 132/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

5%. "Threshold" report: Î This is made as soon as one of the thresholds of the following parameters is exceeded for more than 3 seconds: ♦ Torque. "Take-off" report: Î Take-off report is made only once per flight. ♦ -0. ♦ -5 kts < IAS variation < +5 kts.5% < Np variation < +0. Engine conditions: ♦ -0. ♦ -100 ft < altitude variation < +100 ft. this report contains: ♦ ♦ Time of operation in hotel mode which is calculated every second.5%.ATR Training Centre .2 g < vertical acceleration variation < +0.6 . ♦ Np. "Cruise" report: Î This is made once per flight when aircraft meets certain stability criteria: General conditions: ♦ Speed > 80 kts. ♦ -0. all AIDS parameters are instantly recorded. w NH. Aircraft in flight (shock absorbers not compressed). ♦ Altitude > 6. Î In addition.2 g. w ITT.ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 133/ 186 Î The AIDS does not permanently store the engine parameters. ♦ -1% < torque variation < +1%. Number of engine cycles. 10 seconds after detection of the following conditions: ♦ ♦ Airspeed > 80 kts.5% < NH variation < +0. Storage is made under specific conditions in the form of reports: "Events" report: Î Recording is triggered manually from the FDEP by pressing the EVENTS pushbutton. V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .000 ft.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When this command is given.

6 . Î When the transfer is valid. Î This function is used for transferring reports from the DMU mass memory to a DMT report file located on the hard disk.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î This is done to prevent previously downloaded reports from being downloaded again.ATR Training Centre . the reports are not erased but the DMU writes a special mark in the file so as to indicate that the report(s) have already been transferred to the DMT program.ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 134/ 186 Î Stored parameters can be extracted by means of a Display Memory Terminal (DMT) connected to the DMT/PC terminal.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Recorders operation controls & indications Page 135/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3140 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 SSFDR description Page 136/ 186 SSFDR description V3132 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 SSFDR description Page 137/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3132 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 31 V3132 SSFDR description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 138/ 186 ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The SSFDR has sufficient memory capability to provide a crash survivable record of the most recent 50 hours of flight data preceding a crash event. Î The label "FLIGHT RECORDER .5 KHz signal for up to 30 days and its detection is possible in deep sea immersion. Î It can transmit a 37. The front face includes a portable analysis unit connector (or ATE connector).ATR Training Centre . Î The Solid State Flight Data Recorder (SSFDR). one containing the data processing part. the other containing the crash protected memory part which is placed on equipment handle side. Î An Underwater Locating Beacon (ULB) is mounted on the front face of the SSFDR. Î The SSFDR encloses two subassemblies. This enables recovery of the SSFDR of an aircraft sunk in deep water. It is automatically activated when immersed in fresh or salt water through an external connection. is the FA2100.ATA 31 SSFDR description Page 139/ 186 Î The SSFDR is located in the unpressurized tail cone on the RH side of the aircraft. The signal can be received by a hydrophone located on search boats. V3132 Copyright © 2001-2008 .DO NOT OPEN" is written on one side.

6 .ATA 31 SSFDR operation Page 140/ 186 SSFDR operation V3133 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

After these 50 hours are up. V3133 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The SSFDR BITE unit sends a status signal to the FDAU and to the FDEP in order to indicate a failure such as : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ absence of more than 10 seconds of the read and write memory signals. Î The Fault signals illuminate the relevant lights on FDAU and FDEP. the new data erases the first data.6 . absence of signal at SSFDR input.SSFDR operation ATA 31 Page 141/ 186 Î The SSFDR receives parameters from the FDAU in digital format and records them in flash memories. SSFDR supply loss. The digital recording capacity is 50 hours. This operation can be performed directly on the aircraft by connecting a portable unit to the ATE connector on the SSFDR front face. Î The SSFDR is power supplied by the 115 VAC standby bus. faults in the recording channel. Î It is not necessary to remove the SSFDR from the aircraft to retreive the recorded data.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î This data is stored and can be analysed in a laboratory on a playback bench.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 31 FDAU description Page 142/ 186 FDAU description V3134 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Parameters are formatted in two formats. The first part of the FDAU performs the basic functions which consist of : ♦ ♦ ♦ Acquisition.ATR Training Centre . The only effect of loss of the DMU part would be loss of acquisition of the objective torque parameter by the FDAU part. Î The second part of the FDAU is the Data Management Unit (DMU).Red when a failure has occured. Î The Flight Data Acquisition Unit is a short unit with black finish.ATA 31 FDAU description Page 143/ 186 Î The FDAU is located in the electronic rack 80VU on shelf 81VU.6 . Generation of the GMT. . formatting and processing of parameters.Out when power is off.Green when everything is OK. Acquisition and storage of the parameters of the AIDS. Generation of the GMT. Î Its front face is composed of : ♦ ♦ an ATE connector. V3134 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Failure of the DMU function can in no case lead to failure of the basic FDAU function which is a regulatory function. two lights FDAU FAIL and DFDR FAIL which can take three states : . This ensures the following functions : ♦ ♦ Calculation of the objective torque. Î The FDAU is functionally designed in two main parts. ARINC 573 for the SSFDR and ARINC 429. .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3134 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 . two lights FDAU FAIL and DFDR FAIL which can take three states : . . Î Its front face is composed of : ♦ ♦ an ATE connector.Red when a failure has occured. .Green when everything is OK.ATA 31 FDAU description Page 144/ 186 Î The Flight Data Acquisition Unit is a short unit with black finish.Out when power is off.

ATR Training Centre . This ensures the following functions : ♦ Calculation of the objective torque. Î Failure of the DMU function can in no case lead to failure of the basic FDAU function which is a regulatory function.ATA 31 FDAU description Page 145/ 186 Î The second part of the FDAU is the Data Management Unit (DMU). The only effect of loss of the DMU part would be loss of acquisition of the objective torque parameter by the FDAU part. V3134 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .ATA 31 FDAU operation Page 146/ 186 FDAU operation V3135 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

as well as the "FDAU" light on the FDAU front face. As soon as aircraft is in flight. Check of ON/OFF discretes by test channels.ATR Training Centre . Î Both analog and discrete input interfaces are connected to the processing unit board trough an internal bus. Check of real time clock. Check of power supplies.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. such as the FDEP and the SSFDR through internal busses. a program permanently checks the correct operation of the FDAU by means of a set self-tests : ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Check of microprocessor. Î The processing unit board manages the data coming from the other units and sends it to the output peripherals. Check of FDAU/FDEP ARINC transmission. Check of PROM and RAM.FDAU operation ATA 31 Î Î Î Î Î Page 147/ 186 The FDAU is power supplied by the 28VDC EMER bus when aircraft is on ground. Î A power supply energizes the accelerometer as well as the FDEP and the internal circuits of the FDAU. This is detected by the de-energization of the Weight On Wheel relay. Check of analog inputs by tests channels. Check of SSFDR ARINC transmission. Î Inside the FDAU processing unit. Î The failure signal coming from the SSFDR is received by the FDAU which energizes the "DFDR" light on the front face and the "SYSTEM" amber light on the FDEP. The multiplexer enables convertion of analog data to numerical data. The real time clock (GMT) is power supplied by an FDAU's internal battery safeguard. The FDAU includes an analog input interface which receives the various signals from the position transmitters and the linear accelerometer and sends them to a multiplexer. V3135 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The unit also includes a monitoring function.6 . Î The result of those tests energizes in case of failure the "SYSTEM" and "FDAU" amber lights on the FDEP front face. They are also connected to the rear connector box and to the ATE connector on the front face. the FDAU is power supplied by the 28VDC ESS bus. Note that the synchro position transmitters sending their signal to the FDAU. are all power supplied by the 26VAC STBY bus. Î A discrete input interface receives the discrete signals.

ATA 31 FDEP description Page 148/ 186 FDEP description V3136 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATA 31 FDEP description Page 149/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3136 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 31 V3136 FDEP description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 150/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

display and select time. send the "EVENT" pulses to the FDAU to trigger the AIDS recording systems. Time and date are modified by means of thumbwheels.6 .segments display window by pressing a pushbutton designated "UP DATE".ATR Training Centre . date and year: Date/Year is displayed on request in a four 7.ATA 31 FDEP description Page 151/ 186 Î The FDEP is located on the centre pedestal (121VU panel).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The Flight Data Entry Panel (FDEP) is connected to the FDAU by two ARINC 429 busses to: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ display the aircraft flight number by means of four pushbuttons each associated with a thumbwheel marked 0 to 9. display the system warnings. display the parameters provided by the Engine Electronic Computer (EEC) and the Propeller Electronic Controller (PEC) via the FDAU. Refer to the Propeller and Power Plant ATA chapters to get a description of this specific function. V3136 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The flight number is acquired permanently by the FDAU.

ATA 31 FDEP operation Page 152/ 186 FDEP operation V3137 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

If the FDEP UP DATE pushbutton is not pressed.. Î Thirdly. you want to update the time and the date data. year has to be entered: 1. The real time clock (GTM) is power supplied by an FDAU's internal battery safeguard. This is detected by the de-energization of the Weight On Wheel relay. the FDEP is power supplied by the 28VDC ESS bus. for example 1058.Press the UP DATE pushbutton.ATR Training Centre . Î The FDAU acquires the data and holds the displays for 10 seconds. 2.Press the UP DATE pushbutton again. Î The displays become blank 5 seconds after the pushbutton has been released. As soon as aircraft is in flight. Insert month and day with the thumbwheels.Place thumbwheel on the left on position "9". the FDAU interrogates the status of the thumbwheels and enters it into the ARINC 573 cycles as a "flight number" parameter. Insert hours and minutes with the thumbwheels.. Î The FDAU acquires the data and holds the displays for 10 seconds.GMT appears flashing. month/days (for example September 22). Î Date and time can be displayed when the thumbwheel on the left is not in position "8" or "9". Î When the UP DATE pushbutton is pressed. the following are successively displayed : ♦ ♦ ♦ hour/minutes (for example 1042).Press the UP DATE pushbutton. are all power supplied by the 26 VAC STBY bus. enter the year. Î Secondly. Î This position is kept during the entire flight. Note that the synchro position transmitters sending their signal to the FDAU. V3137 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Press the UP DATE pushbutton again. month and day have to be entered before displays extinguish: 1.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.Press the UP DATE pushbutton. for example June 17.Month and day appear flashing. hours and minutes have to entered: 1.FDEP operation ATA 31 Î Î Î Î Î Î Page 153/ 186 The FDEP is power supplied by the 28VDC EMER bus when aircraft is on ground.6 . year (for example 2000). 3. Before displays extinguish.. Before displays extinguish. Select one of the followings operations to act on the Flight Data Entry Panel. Firstly. enter the month and the day. 3. 4. Î Now.. 2.

for example 2001. the thumbwheel on the left must be placed on position "8". the displays may show figures corresponding to use in maintenance mode.FDEP operation ATA 31 Page 154/ 186 2. Insert year with the thumbwheels. to check the status SYST and FDAU lights and the seven segments on the display. Let's have a look at the video to review the procedure. Î Press the UP DATE pushbutton. To finish the test procedure. place the thumbwheel on the left in a position other than "8".Press the UP DATE pushbutton again. For maintenance purposes only. After about one second. V3137 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 . do not forget to reset the flight number on the thumbwheels. After updating. Î Î Î Î The FDAU acquires the data and holds the displays for 10 seconds. Î The lights come on amber and the displays show "8888".Year appears flashing. Î The displays and lights then go off. 3.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 31 FDEP operation Page 155/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3137 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Accelerometer description Page 156/ 186 Accelerometer description V3138 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

6 .ATA 31 Accelerometer description Page 157/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3138 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 V3138 Accelerometer description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 158/ 186 ACOS v1.

Î All inputs and outputs are routed in a single connector.ATR Training Centre . an appropriate radio noise filtering circuit. under the cabin floor. a common biasing circuit to provide the desired null outputs. The arrows point in the positive acceleration direction. V3138 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The position of the sensitive longitudinal acceleration axis is shown by a FWD arrow and the position of the vertical acceleration axis by an UP arrow.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the lateral axis and the vertical axis.Accelerometer description ATA 31 Page 159/ 186 Î The three axis accelerometer is located at the aircraft centre of gravity. The three resulting signals are sent to the FDAU. Î The three axis accelerometer is a rectangular unit installed on a machined base which houses the connector and can act as a reference surface. Î The accelerometer package consists of : ♦ ♦ ♦ three identical accelerators mounted in the longitudinal axis.6 .

Î The accelerator output voltage ranges from +200mV to +5000mV.6 . Î The accelerations are measured in the following ranges: ♦ ♦ ♦ Lateral acceleration: from -1g to +1g. Î The accelerometer sends three signals proportional to the acceleration applied on each axis to the FDAU. Vertical acceleration: from -3g to +6g.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3139 Copyright © 2001-2008 .Accelerometer operation ATA 31 Page 160/ 186 Accelerometer operation Î The accelerometer is supplied by the FDAU with the 28VDC EMER Bus when aircraft is on ground and with the 28VDC ESS Bus when aircraft is in flight. Longitudinal acceleration: from -1g to +1g.ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Accelerometer operation Page 161/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3139 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Indicators and recording panels Page 162/ 186 Indicators and recording panels V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <9> Forward cargo smoke.Indicators and recording panels ATA 31 Page 163/ 186 Î Look at the Crew Alerting Panel. <3> Cabin press diff > 6.5 mn after gear up).35 PSI. <12> Propeller brake not fully engaged or disengaged. <13> Spurious retraction if more than 4° difference when flaps extended. Aileron lock actuators not fully retracted.000 ft.6 . <6> Elevator uncoupling. either PL at FI and . PL at TO position or TO config test pressed and: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ PWR MGT not at TO. TLU not at LO SPD. <15> Hydraulic: either tank < 2.ZRA < 500 ft (inhibited until 2. <11> PL at TO position and PRKG Brake Handle not fully released.5 l or either pump case drain > 121 °C or either pump delivery press < 1500 PSI and good conditions to run. Trim out of Green Band. <1> Engine fire detected.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <2> Any gear not seen down. <17> Any door not seen locked. Location: Center Instruments panel. <8> Avionics smoke. Flaps not at 15°. <16> Engine fire loop fault. <10> AFT cargo or lavatory smoke. <5> Oil press < 40 PSI (inhibited for 30 sec during engine start). locked and: ♦ ♦ flaps in Normal Landing position . <14> Any MFC module fault or electrical supply loss. <4> Cabin above 10.ZRA < 500 ft. <7> RH nacelle above 170 °C.

Incorrect ADC switching. HP pump fuel filter pressure drop > 25 PSI = Fuel Clog LT / > 45 PSI = Fuel Clog LT + Fuel filter by pass. <31> Maint panel rotary selector on either panel not in normal FLT position. Air Temp > 230°. <21> Any DC or AC PWR failure.ATR Training Centre . <34> When depressed: Eng Oil. Parking brakes. <28> Two AHRS's disagree ³ 6° (PIT/ROL/ATT). Smoke Lights. Low Pitch detected in flight. <23> RCAU processing board failure or power loss.6 . <33> When depressed: All caution lights are cleared (except PRK BRK. distribution valve fault. GCU fails during start. FLT CTL) are V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <29> Parking brake handle not fully released. PITCH TRIM ASYM. all amber lights (except EFIS comp. All aural warnings previously cancelled are reactivated. prop. Two ILS GS disagree ³ 0. GPWS fault. <32> When depressed: All inhibited or cancelled caution lights will illuminate if the respective system is still degraded. <22> Refer to Comp Temp / air bleed overheat or cabin press on instrument panel. Fuel Tank low level < 160 kg.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. <27> Anti-skid channel fault or brake temp > 150°. Start light ON past 45% NH. homs. <24> ITT > 800 °C (715 °C in Hotel Mode): ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ EEC failure. AIL LOCK actuators not fully retracted.2°. inflation sequence not correct. MAINT panel).Indicators and recording panels ATA 31 Page 164/ 186 <18> Loss of windshield heating. Mode Sel AUTO fault.7° during flaps actuation. MAINT panel. ice detector fault. TLU FAULT. Flaps asymmetry > 6. ENG. PEC fault. <19> Low press system < 50 PSI. Common air manifold < 14 PSI. static probes on GND only. flaps not at 15°. disagreement between AIL LOCK acts and Gust Lock Lever (caution LT after 8 sec). Stick Pusher/Shaker FAULT. PWR MGT not set TO when PLs at TO Pos or TO Config Test. <30> GPWS computer failure or power loss. <20> Feed Low press < 4 PSI.6°. Two ILS Loc disagree ³ 0. <26> Automatic idle gate system failure. <25> TO or TO Config Test: Pitch trim out of green band. ENG START selector for ENG2 selected START (with PROP BRAKE ON but Gust Lock not engaged). GPWS.

INHI illuminates blue.ATR Training Centre . V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Indicators and recording panels Page 165/ 186 inhibited.6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 166/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3141 Indicators and recording panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .

both cockpit voice recorder and digital flight data recorder are energized. storing of different data such as hour.ATR Training Centre . ON light illuminates blue. <10> RESET pushbutton: When depressed. the RESET pushbutton inhibits recording in the manual mode. click on a button or an indicating light. the use of this switch will cancel the aural specific of this false alert. <2> The TO CONFIG TEST pushbutton is used before takeoff: ♦ ♦ To check if aircraft configuration is correct for take-off by simulating Power Levers at TO position without taking parking brake into consideration. the records are marked to identify a special event. <5> UPDATE pushbutton: Enables data displayed to be updated. Once data is inserted. <8> STATUS SYST light: Illuminates amber when the DFDR has failed. the TO CONFIG TEST pushbutton. except when the 8 and 9 positions of its first thumbwheel is selected. flight number and maintenance data. day. Location: Centre Pedestal. <3> Data display: Date and time may be displayed and selected through the UPDATE pushbutton by successive pressures and the data entry panel. month. <9> RCDR pushbutton: When depressed.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. For more details. year. If a false system indication generates an undue continuous aural.ATA 31 Indicators and recording panels Page 167/ 186 Î Look at the EMER AUDIO CANCEL switch. thus reactivating all aural warnings previously cancelled by the EMER AUDIO CANCEL switch. To perform an automatic RECALL. This is the manual mode. the FDEP and the RCDR Panel.6 . do not forget to reset the flight number on the data entry panel. through four thumbwheels. <7> STATUS FDAU light: Illuminates amber when the FDAU has failed. <6> EVENTS pushbutton: When momentarily depressed. minutes. <1> The EMER AUDIO CANCEL switch is safety guarded. V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 . <4> Data entry panel: Enables.

<2> CHAN lights illuminate green when the two angle-of-attacks are checked for correct operation.6 . V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 . (For maintenance purposes only) Location: Left Hand Console.ATR Training Centre . <3> The Push-To-Test (PTT) pushbutton allows the selected test to be activated. It must be replaced in the NORM-FLT position before flight. <1> The rotary selector enables selection of the system to be tested.ATA 31 Indicators and recording panels Page 168/ 186 Î Look at the CCAS Maintenance panel.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Indicators and recording panels Page 169/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only Page 170/ 186 ACOS v1.ATA 31 V3141 Indicators and recording panels Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

FF-" code is displayed successfull. ARINC test is performed. the MAIN PNL light comes on amber on the Crew Alerting Panel. <6> The connector outlet enables the optional Maintenance Test Set system to be connected. <1> The BITE LOADED magnetic indicator indicates that a failure has been recorded by the maintenance system. Push To Advance function allows recorded failures to be run on the failure display.F" code is displayed during erasing. the magnetic indicator is activated. <2> The system selector switch is normally placed in NORM-FLT position. The combinations of illuminations of these four lights enable to up to 14 failures per system to be coded.ATR Training Centre . <4> The PTA / ERS pushbutton enables the following: ♦ ♦ When a system is selected. through illuminated lights. The ". click on a button or an indicating light.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. When pressed for more than 3 seconds. in order to consult the failures which have affected the system involved. if PTA / ERS pushbutton is pressed in for less than two seconds. In all other positions.. V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 . (For maintenance purposes only) Location: Right Hand Console. this switch enables the various systems to be selected.6 . system memory is erased and the "F. For more details. <3> The BITE ADVISOR DISPLAY indicates. The "FFFF" code indicates the end of the list for the selected system. the code of the failure recorded. During maintenance operations.ATA 31 Indicators and recording panels Page 171/ 186 Î Look at the MFC Maintenance panel. When ERS position is selected. But if PTA / ERS pushbutton is pressed in for more than 5 seconds. <5> The TEST pushbutton is used to check operation of the BITE LOADED magnetic indicator.

when the pushbutton is released and then stops the MFC module. The FAULT light also flash during self-test of the module. It illuminates white.Indicators and recording panels ATA 31 Page 172/ 186 Î Look at the MFC PANEL.6 . <2> The OFF light is extinguished when the pushbutton is pressed in.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The associated MFC module then operates.ATR Training Centre . <1> The amber light comes on and the CCAS is activated when a malfunction or electrical supply fault is detected in the associated MFC module. V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The module becomes inoperative. Location: Overhead.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Indicators and recording panels Page 173/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3141 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Page 174/ 186 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal V3142 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . V3142 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Task description: Check that the following circuit breakers are closed on circuit breaker panel 21 VU: ♦ 4TU DFDR / FDAU / DFDR FLT SPLY ♦ 6TU DFDR / DFDR ♦ 8TU DFDR / SYNC ♦ 159TU DFDR / FDAU / DFDR GND SPLY Maintenance Operations Î Preparation: ♦ Remove access door 213CZ.ATA 31 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Page 175/ 186 Maintenance Operations Î This procedure allows all AIDS reports contained in FDAU bulk memory to be transferred into a terminal.

ATA 31 V3142 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 176/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

Î Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal: ♦ ♦ ♦ Call "REPORT FUNCTION" menu.6 . Select an initiate "OTHER TRANSFER / FDAU COMPLETE TRANSFER TO DMT" function. Î Energization of aircraft DC and AC constant frequency network: ♦ Aircraft is energized. a floppy disk must be inserted into the PC to transfer data to the ground based station. Open ATE connector located on front face of FDAU. Connect the PC to ATE connector on FDAU by means of DMT / FDAU cable. Initiate DMT program and run it until display of main menu. Connect the hardware protection key to the PC. The transfer of data from FDAU to the PC begins.ATA 31 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Page 177/ 186 Maintenance Operations Î Preparation: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Remove access door 213CZ. Once transfer is completed.ATR Training Centre . Maintenance Operations Î Operation of DMT / PC program: ♦ ♦ Switch on personal computer. V3142 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre . Remove the floppy disk from the Personal Computer.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Select an initiate "STANDARD PARAMETER-DMT COMPLETE TRANSFER TO DISKETTE" function.ATA 31 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Page 178/ 186 Maintenance Operations Î Transfer of AIDS reports from terminal into a diskette: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Call "REPORT FUNCTION" menu. Insert a floppy disk into the Personal Computer. The data from can be transferred to the ground based station to be analysed (for Engine Condition Trend Monitoring for example).6 . V3142 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 31 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Page 179/ 186 This page intentionally left blank V3142 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATA 31 V3142 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 180/ 186 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Close ATE connector located on front face of FDAU. V3142 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 31 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal Page 181/ 186 Maintenance Operations Î De-energization of aircraft DC and AC constant frequency network: ♦ Aircraft is de-energized.6 . Make certain that working area is clean and clear of tools and miscellaneous items of equipment. Î Close-up: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ Switch off micro computer. Disconnect FDAU / terminal connecting lead.ATR Training Centre . Close access door 213CZ. Remove hardware protection key from Personal Computer.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 31 Test of MFC environment with PHOBOS Page 182/ 186 Test of MFC environment with PHOBOS V3143 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. ♦ Aircraft is energized. ♦ ♦ Check that the following circuit breakers are closed on circuit breaker panel 21VU: 2UA1 MFC/1A NORM SPLY 2UA2 MFC/2A NORM SPLY 3UA1 MFC/1B NORM SPLY 3UA2 MFC/2B NORM SPLY 4UA1 MFC/1A AUX SPLY/TRU CTL 4UA2 MFC/2A AUX SPLY 5UA1 MFC/1B AUX SPLY 5UA2 MFC/2B AUX SPLY Check that the following pushbuttons are pressed on panel 25VU: 6UA1 MFC/1B/FAULT/OFF 6UA2 MFC/2B/FAULT/OFF 7UA1 MFC/1A/FAULT/OFF 7UA2 MFC/2A/FAULT/OFF Î Preliminary operations. ♦ Install PHOBOS software on the Personal Computer.ATR Training Centre .ATA 31 Test of MFC environment with PHOBOS Page 183/ 186 Maintenance Operations Î Check of MFC operation.6 . V3143 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Energization of aircraft DC and AC constant frequency network.

V3143 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . The link between PHOBOS and the MFC is established when the FAULT legend of the module selected on the box flashes.6 .ATA 31 Test of MFC environment with PHOBOS Page 184/ 186 Maintenance Operations Î Preparation. Maintenance Operations Î Operations. go into directory PHOBOS and type PHOBOS command.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. This indicates that the module is in maintenance mode. ♦ Connec the PC to connectors 15UA and 16UA located respectively on shelves 91VU and 92VU through the wire delivered with the software. ♦ ♦ ♦ To run PHOBOS. It is necessary to manually reset the module to quit the maintenance mode. ♦ Remove test plugs access panel.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .Summary ATA 31 Page 185/ 186 ATA 31 INDICATING AND RECORDING SYSTEMS V3143 General description 2 Cockpit location 8 Interfaces 9 Features 10 Safety and precautions 15 Instruments and control panels description 16 Electrical clocks description 24 Electrical clocks operation 28 Multifunction computer system description 31 MFC description 34 MFC overhead panel description 40 MFC maintenance panel description 42 MFC system operation control & indications 46 CCAS description 63 CCAS cockpit location 82 CCAS operation with failure 83 CAP description 94 Master warning & caution description 100 TO config test description 102 Emergency audio cancel switch description 108 LH maintenance panel description 112 Recording system description 116 Recorders operation controls & indications 122 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .Summary ATA 31 V3143 Page 186/ 186 SSFDR description 136 SSFDR operation 140 FDAU description 142 FDAU operation 146 FDEP description 148 FDEP operation 152 Accelerometer description 156 Accelerometer operation 160 Indicators and recording panels 162 Transfer of AIDS reports from FDAU to terminal 174 Test of MFC environment with PHOBOS 182 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

.MAINTENANCE TRAINING NOTES T1 42-400l500 & 72-212A ref 72 V1.6 ATA 32 LANDING GEAR Date of issue 03/04/09 This publication will not be updated on a regular basis.

partially below the passenger compartment floor and partially in a specific fairing. V3201 Copyright © 2001-2008 . It is housed in a wheel well aircraft nose. fuselage mounted type. Î Nose Landing Gear (NLG) is forward retracting.ATA 32 General description Page 2/ 256 General description Î ATR landing gear is a retractable tricycle.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The two wheel nose gear assembly includes an oleopneumatic shock absorber. Gears and doors Î Main Landing Gear (MLG) is of lever type inboard retracting.6 . Each main gear assembly is equipped with two wheels and an oleopneumatic shock absorber. It is electrically controlled and hydraulically actuated.ATR Training Centre .

In the event of a hydraulic power supply failure. Emergency system Î In case of hydraulic or electrical supply failure. a push/pull handle permits landing gear mechanical unlocking. an emergency extension system is provided. NLG and MLG extend and lock down with their free fall assisters help.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î In the flight compartment. V3201 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . the landing gear can be extended by gravity and aerodynamic force. Î The landing gear is actuated by the hydraulic system.ATA 32 General description Page 3/ 256 Landing gear extension and retraction Î Landing gear extension and retraction is controlled by a control lever located on the centre instrument panel.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 4/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3201 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î A reference velocity signal is generated. Î The system consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ 4 wheel speed transducers (one per main gear wheel). The antiskid applies a deceleration law continuously adapting the actual wheel speed to the reference speed. locked wheel). Î Each brake is equipped with an automatic adjuster. V3201 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The main gear wheels are braked automatically as soon as the pilot selects the landing gear up.General description ATA 32 Page 5/ 256 Wheels and brakes Î The four main gear wheels are equipped with multidisc carbon brakes.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Each wheel and each pair of external or internal wheels are monitored. Î The antiskid system is activated as soon as the gear is down and locked. Î The aim of the system is to provide the maximum stopping performance by controlling brake pressure in order to minimize wheel slip. The wheels are fitted with tubeless tires. each operated by one set of five hydraulical pistons. and as long as the aircraft speed exceeds 10 knots. a wear indicator pin. The main gear wheels are fitted with fusible plugs which protects against tire and wheels burst in case of an overheat. Two modes are available: ♦ ♦ normal braking mode: it is controlled by pilot's brake pedals and supplied by the green system. and an overheat detector. 1 antiskid module. depending on runway conditions. 1 control box. Touchdown protection is ensured (spin up.ATR Training Centre . emergency and parking braking mode: it is controlled by the emergency and parking brake handle and supplied by the blue system. brake and tire wear.6 . These fusible plugs are designed to release internal pressure when wheel temperature exceeds 177°C / 350°F.

nosewheel deflection of 91° is possible during towing with no pressure in the system. The nose gear has a range of 60 degrees to either side of centre.6 . V3201 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Nosewheel steering is manually controlled.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. hydraulically actuated and electrically disabled. Î In addition.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 General description Page 6/ 256 Steering Î The hydraulically actuated nosewheel steering system is controlled by mechanical linkage from a steering tiller handle on the captain's side panel.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 General description Page 7/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3201 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 32 V3201 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 8/ 256 ACOS v1.

Î Each system commands gear extension and retraction.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 General description Page 9/ 256 Position and warnings Î Î Î Î The landing gear position detection and indication consist of two independant systems.ATR Training Centre . gear anti-retraction system and the warning associated to "LDG NOT DOWN". The secondary system is managed by MFC module 2A. V3201 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Each system uses its own detector and indications: ♦ down lock and air/ground signals from proximity sensors. The primary system is managed by MFC module 1A. The associated gear position is displayed on the main instrument panel. Each system has its own WOW circuit: WOW 1 into MFC module 1B and WOW 2 into MFC module 2B. The associated gear position is displayed on the overhead panel. ♦ up lock signal from mechanical limit switches. The WOW signals are used by the MFC to have the system using WOW information switched to the appropriate air/ground configuration.6 . Î Note: Gear must be considered down when one system indicates three green lights.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 10/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3201 General description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

V3201 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Normally. Î Note: When not used. the tail prop can be stored in the rear unpressurized area of the aircraft (behind the AFT bulkhead). Î The tail prop must be installed before passengers boarding/disembarking. A possible tip up may occur if 7 persons are at the rear of an otherwise empty aircraft.ATA 32 General description Page 11/ 256 Supplementary gear Î A non-retractable type tail bumper is installed on the rear section of the A/C fuselage in order to avoid fuselage contact with the runway when the take-off or the landing attitude has an angle of 8 degrees or greater. check the red indicator: ♦ ♦ if this red indicator does not show evidence of wear. it is stored in the cabin by the cabin crew. Î The equipment includes a skid lever attached to the fuselage and a shock damper which is connected to the fuselage by a ball joint hinge. if this red indicator shows evidence of wear. maintenance action is required.6 . inspect skid shoe.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. aircraft can be flown.ATR Training Centre . If signs of ground contacts are observed on skid shoe. Î At each walk around.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 32 Cockpit panels location Page 12/ 256 Cockpit panels location V3202 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATA 32 Interfaces Page 13/ 256 Interfaces V3203 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Features Page 14/ 256 Features V3204 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 15/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3204 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 V3204 Features Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 16/ 256 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 32 Safety and precautions Page 17/ 256 Safety and precautions V3205 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. by a rod.ATR Training Centre . Î These doors allow to close gear wells in flight conditions. two folding doors.6 .ATA 32 Main gear and doors description Page 18/ 256 Main gear and doors description Î The main landing gear supports a three section door to restore fairing contour when L/G is locked up. V3206 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the multiple section door which is composed of: ♦ ♦ a main L/G door. Î The main gear trunnion leg actuates.

a side brace which comprises the locking and unlocking system for the gear in down position. V3206 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .Main gear and doors description ATA 32 Page 19/ 256 Î Each Main Landing Gear (MLG) consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a trunnion leg.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a trailling arm. a shock absorber. 2 wheels and brakes.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Struct attachement description Page 20/ 256 Struct attachement description V3207 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 32 Struct attachement description Page 21/ 256 Î Each main gear is connected to frames 25 and 27 of the fuselage by a trunnion support plate and two side struts.6 . V3207 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 32 Trunion leg description Page 22/ 256 Trunion leg description V3208 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Trunion leg description Page 23/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3208 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 24/ 256 ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 V3208 Trunion leg description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î The trunnion leg incorporates fittings for the following components: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a shock absorber. the trailing arm is pivoted.ATR Training Centre . a free fall assister. V3208 Copyright © 2001-2008 . On its lower end.ATA 32 Trunion leg description Page 25/ 256 Î Main landing gear trunnion leg upper part has two pivot pins which mate with the aircraft structural hinge point. a MLG actuator assy. a door link.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . a gear uplock roller pin. Î The trunnion leg also incorporates provision for the installation of two proximity switches (one for WOW 1 system the second for WOW 2 system) and wiring for MLG flight/ground signals. a side brace.

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 32 Shock absorber description Page 26/ 256 Shock absorber description V3209 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

Î It is pivoted between a pin fitted to the trunnion leg and a universal joint fitted to the trailing arm.5 bar (427. Î The nitrogen charging pressure value is 29.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .Shock absorber description ATA 32 Page 27/ 256 Î The oleopneumatic double acting shock absorber absorbs landing energy and provides an elastic suspension when the aircraft taxies.0 PSI) at 15°C (59°F) with airplane on jacks. The sliding rod. V3209 Copyright © 2001-2008 . which moves inside the external cylinder. Î The shock absorber external cylinder is provided with filling/inflating single valve which allows the servicing of the shock absorber with dry nitrogen and hydraulic fluid AIR 3520 (MIL-H-5606). has a drain valve on its lower part.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 Trailing arm description Page 28/ 256 Trailing arm description V3211 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

the trailing arm is provided with a jack pad to allow gear jacking for wheels replacement and it is also equipped with the attachment for the lower part of the shock absorber. V3211 Copyright © 2001-2008 . In addition. Î At the end of the trailing arm. carries the wheels and brakes.ATA 32 Trailing arm description Page 29/ 256 Î The trailing arm is fitted with the axle which. there are two holes in which an emergency tow ring can be fitted. in its turn.6 . provisions for the wheel brake system are incorporated in the trailing arm.ATR Training Centre . Î On its underside.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Side brace description Page 30/ 256 Side brace description V3212 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

the second for secondary downlock system). provide the mechanical downlock.ATR Training Centre . V3212 Copyright © 2001-2008 . acting between the trunnion and the lower arm of the main alignement.ATA 32 Side brace description Page 31/ 256 Î The folding side brace supports and locks the main gear in the extended position.6 . installed between the lower arm and the trunnion. a safety pin can be installed in two holes on the secondary alignment to prevent gear accidental retraction during maintenance operations. Î It is unlocked by means of an unlocking actuator. Î It is located between the trunnion leg and a fuselage support fitting. Two springs. Î Two proximity switches detect the side brace downlocking (one for primary downlock indicating system. Î On ground. It includes two arms connected by a hinge. and a secondary alignement.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. located on the lower arm.

ATA 32 Main gear doors Page 32/ 256 Main gear doors V3213 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î The three section have a honeycomb panel type structure and are held together by multiple hinges. Î The door is hinged on its upper part to the fairing and on its lower one (the largest) to the trunnion leg by an adjustable rod. V3213 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 32 Main gear doors Page 33/ 256 Î The main landing gear supports a three section door to restore fairing contour when L/G is locked up.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 32 Nose gear and doors description Page 34/ 256 Nose gear and doors description V3214 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 . The drag brace supports the gear and keeps it locked down. Î The dual-wheel steerable Nose Landing Gear (NLG) is connected by pivot pins to the fuselage structure on frame 6.ATA 32 Nose gear and doors description Page 35/ 256 Î The nose landing gear is of forward retractable type. The leg struct incorporating the shock absorber and the nose wheel steering actuating system is composed of the barrel and the turning tube. V3214 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The turning tube is driven by the steering actuator. the second for WOW 2 system) and wiring for flight/ground signals.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. It turns the wheels on ground. Î The nose landing gear also incorporates two proximity switches (one for WOW 1 system. Î Four doors are mechanically connected to the gear to restore fuselage contour.ATR Training Centre . Î It consists of a leg struct and a drag brace. Î It consists of a leg struct incorporating the shock absorber and the steering system.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 36/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3214 Nose gear and doors description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

2 wheels (no brake). The lever pushes the leg on the towing lug helping the free fall during the initial phase only (about 4 degrees of leg rotation).ATR Training Centre . a drag brace which comprises the locking and unlocking system for the gear in down position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. a shock absorber. V3214 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . a steering actuator. a turning tube. Î A Nose Landing Gear free fall assister is installed on the wheel well ceiling (not shown on drawing).ATA 32 Nose gear and doors description Page 37/ 256 Î Nose Landing Gear (NLG) consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ an actuating cylinder. It is a mechanical spring type (twin springs).

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Drag brace description Page 38/ 256 Drag brace description V3215 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

On ground a safety pin can be installed in two holes on the secondary alignment. The downlock is obtained by two alignments: ♦ a main alignment including an upper Y shaped arm pivoted to the fuselage structure and a lower arm hinged to the leg. The upper arm includes attachments for NLG actuator assy and for the forward door mechanism. the second for secondary downlock system). ♦ a secondary alignment acting between the upper arm and the joint.6 . while an hydraulic actuator provides for down unlocking. The upper arm and the lower arm are connected by a universal joint.ATR Training Centre . Î A roller pin is provided at the horizontal hinge of the universal joint to ensure uplocking. to prevent NLG accidental retraction during maintenance operations.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Drag brace description Page 39/ 256 Î The folding drag brace is installed between the fuselage and NLG leg to support and lock the NLG in down position. Î Two proximity switches detect the downlocking of NLG (one for primary downlock system. Two locking springs between the upper arm and the secondary alignment ensure the downlocking of NLG. V3215 Copyright © 2001-2008 . engaging itself in an "UP LOCK BOX" under the nose well ceiling.

6 .ATA 32 Nose landing gear leg description Page 40/ 256 Nose landing gear leg description V3216 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

Î This one is fitted on the barrel together with the steering actuating cylinder. Î On the right ribbed arm.6 . a universal joint transmits the pilot control to the steering control valve.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The left ribbed arm incorporates also the attachment point for the hydraulic actuator assy. V3216 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a swivel steering valve is installed. and on the left ribbed arm. while the barrel incorporates the fittings for the drag brace and for the aft doors actuation links.ATA 32 Nose landing gear leg description Page 41/ 256 Î NLG leg is of barrel type with two ribbed arms connected to frame 6 by two pivot pins.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 32 Turning tube description Page 42/ 256 Turning tube description V3217 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Turning tube description Page 43/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3217 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 V3217 Turning tube description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 44/ 256 ACOS v1.

the tow bar lugs.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The turning tube is provided with attachments for: ♦ ♦ ♦ a torque link upper arm which transmits the steering torque to the wheel axle. Its drive mechanism is of rack-pinion type.6 . actuated by the steering cylinder.ATR Training Centre . a steering follow up lever. Î The turning tube is housed within the barrel and supported by two bearings. V3217 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 32 Turning tube description Page 45/ 256 Î The turning tube is fitted on the nose landing gear structure. Î Internal shock absorber cams ensure the nose wheels and turning tube exact alignment during landing gear retraction. Î The shock absorber sliding rod is located into the turning tube.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Shock absorber description Page 46/ 256 Shock absorber description V3219 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 32 Shock absorber description Page 47/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3219 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 48/ 256 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 V3219 Shock absorber description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 32 Shock absorber description Page 49/ 256 Î The nose gear shock absorber is of the oleo-pneumatic double acting type. Î The shock absorber consists of an inner tube and a sliding rod.ATR Training Centre . one shaped on the lower part of the inner tube and the other shaped on the sliding rod inner face ensure the nose wheels exact alignment during gear retraction. V3219 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The inner tube housed in the barrel and fixed to it. furthermore it is equipped with a drain valve which is located in its lower part. Î Two cams.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î It moves within the turning tube and is turned with it by means of two torque links. It absorbs landing energy and provides an elastic suspension when the aircraft taxies. Î The nitrogen charging pressure value is 25 bar (362 PSI) at 15°C (59°F) with airplane on jacks. The sliding rod carries an axle on which two wheels are mounted side by side. is provided with filling/unflating single valve which allows the servicing of the shock absorber with dry nitrogen and hydraulic fluid AIR 3520 (MIL-H-5606).

6 .ATA 32 Nose gear and doors description Page 50/ 256 Nose gear and doors description V3221 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

ATA 32 Nose gear and doors description Page 51/ 256 Î The nose gear retracts in a wheel well enclosed by four doors. Î The forward ones open only during nose gear movement while the aft follow gear.ATR Training Centre . On ground. it is possible to open the forward doors by means of opening mechanisms. Î The two aft doors are directly linked to the leg strut while the two forward doors are connected to the drag brace upper part through a linkage.6 . V3221 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The four doors are made by honeycomb panels.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. All doors close against adjustable stops.

6 . electrically controlled by the Multifunction Computer (MFC).ATR Training Centre . V3222 Copyright © 2001-2008 . three unlocking actuators. a hydraulic selector valve.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. three operating actuators.ATA 32 Normal system description Page 52/ 256 Normal system description Î The normal operation of the landing gear is obtained by means of the following components: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a control lever. located in the uplock boxes. located on the side and drag braces. three unlocking actuators.

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Normal system description Page 53/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3222 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 54/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3222 Normal system description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

the landing gear selector valve up section is supplied. Î The landing gear retracts. Î When the landing gear lever is selected DOWN.C.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the GREEN pressure is supplied to: ♦ ♦ ♦ the unlocking actuators located on side and drag braces.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Normal system description Page 55/ 256 Î When the landing gear lever is selected UP. the gear actuators..C. V3222 Copyright © 2001-2008 . if the A/C is in flight.F. the gear actuators. Î The landing gear extends. the brakes through the emergency and parking metering valve. the GREEN pressure is supplied to: ♦ ♦ the uplock boxes. the landing gear selector valve down solenoid is supplied through the M. Î Then. Î Through the M.F.

ATA 32 Landing gear normal extension and retraction operation Page 56/ 256 Landing gear normal extension and retraction operation V3236 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

Î So. a green hydraulic input is sent to the emergency and parking metering valve to brake the wheels before entering in the wheel wells. the MFC de-energizes the selector valve UP solenoid which puts both extension and retraction lines to the return. Î The same philosophy is applied for the extension system. Î So the UP locking is only mechanically ensured by the uplock boxes. Î The landing gears are mechanically locked down by the side and drag braces locking mechanism. V3236 Copyright © 2001-2008 . MLG and NLG actuators. de-energize the selector valve which connects the extension line to the return. through the MFC. the proximity switches. MLG and NLG unlocking actuators. The switching unit in the control lever box energizes the UP solenoid (+ signal) of the selector valve. Î Note: During landing gear extension.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When the three landing gears reach the down position and the relevant braces are locked. Î The position is electrically transmitted to the hydraulic selector valve which powers the extension lines of the three unlocking actuators. a hydraulic selector valve electrically operated by the control lever.ATA 32 Landing gear normal extension and retraction operation Page 57/ 256 Î The pilot retracts the landing gear by actuating the control lever (UP position selected). MLG and NLG actuators.ATR Training Centre . The retraction line is still connected to the return. up lock boxes. The pilot sets the landing gear control lever to the down position. the normal operation is obtained by means of the following components: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a landing gear lever (2 electrical positions). Î The negative signal is controlled by the MFC. a hydraulic selector valve electrically operated by the control lever. the normal operation is obtained by means of the following components: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a landing gear lever (2 electrical positions). Î When the three landing gears reach the selected position. Î So. The selector valve powers the retraction lines of the three actuators and concerned unlocking actuators Î Note: During LDG retraction. MLG and NLG unlocking actuators.6 . green low pressure caution is inhibited to avoid transient warnings. up lock boxes.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Landing gear lever description Page 58/ 256 Landing gear lever description V3224 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The lever protrudes from a switching box that houses a solenoid operated lever latch. A cam in the switching box prevents the accidental lever actuation. Two warning lamps. The box also contains six microswitches.ATA 32 Î Î Î Î Î Landing gear lever description Page 59/ 256 The two-position (UP-DOWN) control lever is located on the upper centre instrument panel 4VU and controls the landing gear position. housed within the grip.ATR Training Centre . provide a L/G not downlocked warning to the crew. three of which are utilized by the landing gear control indicating and warning system.6 . V3224 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 .C. the M. 1 or/and by M. Î In flight (three shock absorbers extended).F. V3225 Copyright © 2001-2008 . 2 and the latch pin locks the control lever.F.ATA 32 Landing gear lever operation Page 60/ 256 Landing gear lever operation Î When in flight. and to actuate a switch that energizes the latch solenoid. Î On ground (three shock absorbers compressed).F.C.ATR Training Centre . the solenoid is de-energized by M. the lever must be pulled to overcome the cam in the switching box.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. 1 or/and M.C. 2 energize the solenoid which retracts the latch pin and the lever can be actuated.C.F.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Landing gear lever operation Page 61/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3225 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 32 Landing gear selector valve description Page 62/ 256 Landing gear selector valve description V3226 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 32 Landing gear selector valve description Page 63/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3226 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 V3226 Landing gear selector valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 64/ 256 ACOS v1.

Î The emergency lever is mechanically actuated to put both extension and retraction lines to the return and to cut the pressure inlet in case of an emergency extension. V3226 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The valve is provided with two spools which control the hydraulic pressure: the upper one for normal operation and the lower one for emergency extension.ATA 32 Landing gear selector valve description Page 65/ 256 Î The electro-hydraulic selector valve is located in the rear area of the left main gear well and switches the pressurized hydraulic fluid to the retraction or the extension lines .C.loaded at one side and actuated by the emergency lever on the other.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î The upper spool is spring-loaded and hydraulically balanced at both ends.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The electrical supply to each solenoid is provided by the 28VDC standby bus and it is controlled by the control lever position and the respective M. The lower spool is spring.F.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 Up lock boxes description Page 66/ 256 Up lock boxes description V3228 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

spring-loaded to lock the hook.ATA 32 Up lock boxes description Page 67/ 256 Î The NLG UP lock box is installed below the NLG wheel well ceiling.6 .ATR Training Centre . spring-loaded to lock L/G in up position by the roller pin. for the retraction and the indicating systems.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3228 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a lever acting on the link rotation axis for the emergency extension. a one-way hydraulic actuator acting on the link to unlock the hook. inside each main gear fairing. detecting the hook position through the link. one microswitch. a link. Î Each UP lock box consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a hook. and two MLG UP lock boxes are installed on the fuselage skin.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Main gear actuator description Page 68/ 256 Main gear actuator description V3230 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATA 32 Î Î Î Î Main gear actuator description Page 69/ 256 Each MLG is equipped with a two-way hydraulic actuator which is supplied by the green system through the landing gear selector valve. which allows a damping at the end of the retraction stroke. It is also provided with a restrictor valve at the retraction port.ATR Training Centre . It is internally fitted with a dash-pot.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. to slow MLG extension. V3230 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . The actuator is connected between the aircraft structure and MLG trunnion leg.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Nose gear actuator description Page 70/ 256 Nose gear actuator description V3232 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 32 Nose gear actuator description Page 71/ 256 Î The actuator is a two-way hydraulic cylinder connected between the leg strut and the upper part of the drag brace. Î It is also provided with a restrictor valve at the retraction port. to slow MLG extension. a hydraulic box valve on the extension ports. It is provided with: ♦ ♦ a restrictor valve on the retraction port.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . which allows a free flow for the extension and a restricted flow at the end of the retraction stroke.ATR Training Centre . V3232 Copyright © 2001-2008 . to slow the gear extension. to damp the final stroke of the piston.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 Main gear unlocking actuator description Page 72/ 256 Main gear unlocking actuator description V3234 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

UP line at the same time as the actuating cylinders. a self-cleaning restrictor is installed to improve MLG damping effect during the extension phase. located on the MLG legs. the internal rod retracts acting on the secondary alignment unlocking and allowing the side brace to fold. Î On each hydraulic supply line. Î When supplied.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V3234 Copyright © 2001-2008 . It is supplied by L/G selector valve.6 .ATA 32 Main gear unlocking actuator description Page 73/ 256 Î A one-way hydraulic actuator is installed at each side brace lower arm .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Nose gear unlocking actuator description Page 74/ 256 Nose gear unlocking actuator description V3235 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

hydraulic pressure entering through port A displaces the rod. when the supply pressure is removed.ATA 32 Î Î Î Î Î Nose gear unlocking actuator description Page 75/ 256 The one-way cylinder is installed on the drag brace upper Y-shaped arm and is supplied by L/G selector valve UP line. Extension of the rod is obtained through an external force. the opposite chamber is vented to atmosphere through holes in the rod. In operation. causing it to retract.6 .ATR Training Centre . During the movements. When supplied the rod retracts and unlocks the secondary alignment allowing the drag brace to fold.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3235 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

three UP lock box levers.ATR Training Centre . a mechanical NLG free fall assister. two pneumatic MLG free fall assisters. V3237 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î With no hydraulic power supply. both NLG and MLG extend by their own weight and free fall assisters. by the emergency system.ATA 32 Landing gear emergency system description Page 76/ 256 Landing gear emergency system description Î The emergency extension system consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a handle located on the rear part of the pedestal. When released.6 . L/G can be released from the uplocked position. two forward gearboxes located under flight compartment floor and a third located under passenger compartment floor.

through the axial gearbox. which moves two push/pull cables to actuate the MLG uplock box levers. A third push/pull cable actuates the landing gear selector valve emergency lever.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Landing gear emergency extension operation Page 77/ 256 Landing gear emergency extension operation Î Landing gear extension is achieved by pulling the emergency handle. operation of the AFT gearbox. V3242 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . It rotates one of the two forward gearboxes.6 . which provides: ♦ ♦ actuation of the NLG uplock box lever. by cables.

ATR Training Centre .6 . a check valve in the green hydraulic return manifold.ATA 32 Landing gear emergency extension operation Page 78/ 256 Î During landing gear free descent. V3242 Copyright © 2001-2008 . allows oil suction from the hydraulic reservoir to avoid cavitation of the landing gear actuators: it can occur because of the different volumes of their chambers involved in the extension stroke (ref ATA 29).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATA 32 Landing gear emergency extension operation Page 79/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3242 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Gear boxes and emergency handle description Page 80/ 256 Gear boxes and emergency handle description V3238 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

ATA 32 Gear boxes and emergency handle description Page 81/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3238 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 V3238 Gear boxes and emergency handle description Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only Page 82/ 256 ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Each emergency lever acts on the up lock box link rotation axis (the link locks the hook in closed position). The aft box. actuates the MLG uplock boxes levers and L/G selector valve emergency lever by push-pull cables. that it remains motionless during normal hook operation and acts on it during emergency extension. V3238 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . in its turn. Î The lever is connected to the link in such a way.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Gear boxes and emergency handle description Page 83/ 256 Î The aft box is driven by cables which are actuated by the forward boxes assembly.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Selector valve description Page 84/ 256 Selector valve description V3239 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

V3239 Copyright © 2001-2008 . to prevent cavitation of actuators during landing gear emergency extension.Selector valve description ATA 32 Page 85/ 256 Î The lever of the landing gear selector valve is operated by the emergency extension handle via push-pull cables. Î The lever actuates the valve lower spool compressing the spring in such a way that: the IN port of the valve is closed and UP and DOWN ports are connected to the RET line.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATR Training Centre . Î So both chambers of the three actuating cylinders and the unlocking actuators are connected to the green system return line. regardless of upper spool position.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Nose LDG free fall assister description Page 86/ 256 Nose LDG free fall assister description V3240 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

V3240 Copyright © 2001-2008 . allowing opening the door. Î The NLG extension rotation is helped by the aerodynamic load.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Nose LDG free fall assister description Page 87/ 256 Î The NLG free fall assister lever pushes at the towing point for a leg rotation angle of 4 degrees only.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Emergency landing gear extension is performed by pulling the emergency handle actuating the NLG uplock box lever through the coaxial gearbox.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Main LDG free fall assister description Page 88/ 256 Main LDG free fall assister description V3241 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

ATR Training Centre . and is also provided with a low pressure indicator. which shows red when the pressure drops below 90 bar (1305 psi). Î It is connected to the fuselage and to the MLG leg.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î During extension the assister acts to fully extend MLG. Î The assister uses a filling port and an inflating valve to refill and inflate the oil and the nitrogen at a precharging pressure value of 119 bar (1725.ATA 32 Main LDG free fall assister description Page 89/ 256 Î The MLG free fall assister lever is a pneumatic spring (nitrogen/oil accumulator).6 .5 psi) at 15°C. V3241 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

6 . Î The main gear wheels are fitted with fusible plugs which protect against tire and wheel burst in the event of overheat.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3243 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Sealing between the two valves is obtained by a preformed packing. The wheels are fitted with tubeless tires.ATA 32 Wheels description Page 90/ 256 Wheels description Î The four main gear wheels are equipped with multidisc carbon brakes. The wheels are divided to facilitate tire installation and removal. Î The two wheel valves are held together by bolts and self.locking nuts.ATR Training Centre . The nose landing gear is not braked. These fusible plugs are designed to release internal pressure when the wheel temperature exceeds 177°C / 350°F.

Î The two wheel valves are held together by bolts and self. Î The main gear wheels are fitted with fusible plugs which protect against tire and wheel burst in the event of overheat.locking nuts.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. The nose landing gear is not braked. S3243 Copyright © 2001-2008 . The wheels are divided type to facilitate tire installation and removal.6 . The wheels are fitted with tubeless tires.ATA 32 Wheels description Page 91/ 256 Î The four main gear wheels are equipped with multidisc steel brakes.ATR Training Centre . Sealing between the two valves is obtained by a perfomed packing. These fusible plugs are designed to release internal pressure when the wheel temperature exceeds 177°C / 350°F.

The main gear wheels are braked automatically as soon as the pilot selects up on the landing gear control lever.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î Each brake is equipped with an automatic adjuster (to compensate brake wear). and an overheat detector. which controls an electro. Normal braking is provided with an antiskid (A/S) system which controls the pressure metered from the green system to the brake: four sensors transmit the wheel speed signals to an electronic box. Normal braking mode is controlled by pilot's brake pedals and supplied by green system.ATR Training Centre .hydraulic antiskid module for maximum braking efficiency. a wear indicator pin.ATA 32 Normal braking description Page 92/ 256 Normal braking description Î Î Î Î The four main gear wheels are equipped with multidisc carbon brakes. Each brake is operated by one set of five hydraulically powered pistons. V3244 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre . V3244 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 32 Normal braking description Page 93/ 256 Î Leak sensitive valves (hydraulic fuses) are installed to prevent hydraulic fluid loss in the braking system. Î The two normal and emergency braking systems are completely independant up to downstream of the antiskid module.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. should an abnormal leakage occur. Î The same components and line routes of the emergency system are used to park the aircraft.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Normal braking operation control and indication Page 94/ 256 Normal braking operation control and indication V3264 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

Î The normal braking system is supplied by the green hydraulic system.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. braking pressure is drawn to the green return system. The hydraulic pressure is now applied to the brakes. Î When braking action on pedals is released. One low pressure relief valve fitted on the A/S return (not shown). Î The antiskid system is composed of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ One electro-hydraulic A/S module with four fuses. They prevent hydraulic fluid loss in the case of a hydraulic line rupture. A metering valve installed in the hydraulic bay.ATA 32 Normal braking operation control and indication Page 95/ 256 Î The normal braking system is supplied by the green hydraulic system. Green pressure is metered through an independent hydraulic circuit by the pilot's pedals. Displacements of metering valve pistons are transmitted to the modulating spool which opens the IN port. left fairing. Two master cylinders. which supplies oil to the master cylinders. Î The pressures generated by the master cylinders are sensed by the corresponding pistons of the metering valve. Four brakes. Î When the pilot's pedals are pressed. One electronic control box. V3264 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î Let's perform a normal braking. the corresponding antiskid flapper controls braking pressure. That raises the protection of the aircraft against the risk of fire in the landing gear bay. which pressurize the oil to the reservoir. linked to the pedals. Four speed transducers. the master cylinder pistons are drawn down. Î The metered pressure is supplied through a filter to the pressure nozzle and the upper part of the antiskid module. Î The pressure applied to the brakes is controlled by the antiskid module which maintains the main wheels at the limit of skid. Î When a skid is detected. installed in the main wheel axles. in the hydraulic bay.ATR Training Centre . to the antiskid control box which transmits an electrical command to the servo valves of the antiskid module. It uses the pressure generated by each cylinder (RH or LH) to meter the pressure to the RH or LH line of the antiskid module. preventing wheel lock. with antiskid ON.6 . which controls the electro-hydraulic antiskid module for maximum braking efficiency. Î A brake overtemperature indicating system is installed to alert the crew in case of an abnormal brake temperature. one for each main wheel. Î The normal braking system uses the following components : ♦ ♦ ♦ A reservoir installed on the forward bulkhead. Î Four fuses are installed downstream of the antiskid module. Please clic on the pedals. Î The wheel speed transducer sends an AC signal proportionnal of the wheel speed. Î Four transducers transmit the wheel speed signals to an electronic box. Skid is then controlled. This pressurizes the oil of the independant circuit supplied by the braking reservoir.

V3264 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the skid control is lost.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. braking pressure is drawn to the green return system.ATR Training Centre . Î When braking action on pedals is released.6 . Pilot pedal's action must be modulated to avoid wheel skid.ATA 32 Normal braking operation control and indication Page 96/ 256 Î With antiskid OFF.

6 .ATA 32 Normal braking operation control and indication Page 97/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3264 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 98/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3264 Normal braking operation control and indication Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .

HOT amber light on BRK TEMP panel. HOT amber light illuminates on BRK TEMP cockpit panel. Test push button is pressed on BRK TEMP panel on 702 VU RH maintenance panel. the brake overtemperature system is operating. V3264 Copyright © 2001-2008 . A failure code is recorded in the MFC memory When The temperature decreases. If the BRK TEMP test is correct.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. temperature is higher than 150°C): ♦ ♦ ♦ Î Î Î Î CAUTION and single chime are activated. HOT amber light does not illuminate. the alarm resets. Brake must be inspected to cure the problem. Î When an overheat is detected (for example on Right INBOARD wheel.ATA 32 Normal braking operation control and indication Page 99/ 256 Î As soon as the A/C is energized.ATR Training Centre . If the test is not correct. WHEEL amber light illuminates on CAP.

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Reservoir description Page 100/ 256 Reservoir description V3246 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

♦ maximum level 2 x 65 cm3 (2 x 4 cubic inches).All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. by gravity.26 cubic inches). The reservoir capacity is: ♦ minimum level 2 x 37 cm3 (2 x 2. Î Each compartment supplies oil to a dual master cylinder (pilot and copilot side). Î The fluid used in the reservoir is of the same type used for the hydraulic systems: phosphate ester type IV. V3246 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Reservoir description Page 101/ 256 Î The unpressurized reservoir is installed at STA 2962 and is divided into two compartments. The reservoir is equipped with a drain port and a cap for the refilling of both compartments.

ATR Training Centre .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Pedals description Page 102/ 256 Pedals description V3247 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 32 Pedals description Page 103/ 256 Î The brakes are mechanically controlled by pivoting the upper end of rudder pedals. Î Each pedal is connected through a linkage to the relevant master cylinder which generates the braking control pressure. V3247 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 . Î The pedal linkage incorporates a load-feel / return spring.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Master cylinder description Page 104/ 256 Master cylinder description V3248 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .6 .

ATA 32 Master cylinder description Page 105/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3248 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

All right reserved For Training Only Page 106/ 256 ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 V3248 Master cylinder description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î When the lever is actuated by the pedal the rod moves against the spring forcing to close the holes in the piston and drawing it down to pressurize the oil sent to the metering valve. a piston with relief holes.6 . Each cylinder is connected to the relevant pedal by a lever and it is hydraulically connected to the brake metering valve. Î Releasing the pedal the spring force returns the actuating rod to the rest position allowing the oil to flow through the piston relief holes thus depressurizing the circuit.Master cylinder description ATA 32 Page 107/ 256 Î Each dual master cylinder is installed below the pedal set. V3248 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre . Î Internally the cylinder consists of: ♦ ♦ an actuating rod counteracted by a spring.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 Metering valve description Page 108/ 256 Metering valve description V3249 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 Metering valve description Page 109/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3249 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATA 32 V3249 Metering valve description Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 110/ 256 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Metering valve description Page 111/ 256 Î The metering valve is a dual type. Î The spool stroke is counteracted by a spring. each of them including: ♦ ♦ ♦ an upper piston and a lower piston which are actuated by the oil pressure displaced by the (L/R) master cylinders. to obtain a variable pressure for the brakes. a modulating spool which connects the (L/R) brakes to the pressure or return port depending on the pedal position. Î The two sides (L/R) of the valve are the same. Î On pilot pedal input. a spring which connects the pistons to a modulating spool. V3249 Copyright © 2001-2008 . the pressure generated by each master cylinder is sensed by the corresponding piston which acts on the spring.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. the spool closes the IN line and connects the brake line to the return line. Î It transmits the piston displacement to the modulation spool which opens the IN port proportional to the generated pressure. It is provided with four ports connected to the pilot and copilot master cylinders. When the pedals are released. through the Antiskid Module. two ports connected to the pressure and the returns of the green hydraulic system and two ports to send the metered pressure to the L and R brakes.

All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 32 Antiskid module description Page 112/ 256 Antiskid module description V3251 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 32 Antiskid module description Page 113/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3251 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .

6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 114/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3251 Antiskid module description Copyright © 2001-2008 .

Î If A/S system is switched off. a return nozzle and a modulating flapper. to permit an instantaneous fluid flow through the module to the brakes.ATR Training Centre . The modulealso receives the oil pressure from the parking / emergency braking valve without performing any modulation on it. the module does not perform any control on the oil flowing through itself. Î The module consists of: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ four 3-way servo-valves each containing a pressure nozzle.ATA 32 Antiskid module description Page 115/ 256 Î The A/S module is installed in the rear area of the left main gear well. Oil pressure from the normal metering valve (L and R side) to the A/S module is modulated to each brake according to the electrical signals received from A/S control box. which are spring-loaded in the open condition.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. V3251 Copyright © 2001-2008 . to avoid fluid loss from the module if a brake line breaks. when A/S system is inoperative. four fuses are also installed at the module outlets.6 . four spool valves. four shuttle valves switching the normal or the park / emergency pressure to the brakes. to supply the brakes in parking or emergency operations.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Hydraulic fuse description Page 116/ 256 Hydraulic fuse description V3253 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

Î The fuse allows oil flow up to 30 PSI of differential pressure at its IN-OUT ports.ATR Training Centre . and stops oil flow at a differential pressure beyond 30 PSI.6 . V3253 Copyright © 2001-2008 . actuated for maintenance purposes.ATA 32 Hydraulic fuse description Page 117/ 256 Î Each of the four fuses stops the flow of hydraulic fluid to the respective brake in the event of a line failure.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Î Each of the four fuses is provided with a bypass valve with a manually operated lever. with a self reset in 5 sec against a minimum pressure difference of 18 PSI.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Low pressure relief valve description Page 118/ 256 Low pressure relief valve description V3255 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

V3255 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Low pressure relief valve description Page 119/ 256 Î The valve is installed downstream of the common return of the A/S module and of the metering valve and consits of a spring. it provides a back-up pressure of 25 PSI at the return of A/S module to ensure the fuse operation in the event of a brake line failure.loaded poppet. Î Because of the unpressurized hydraulic returns.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . even if the pressure applied to the brake is released (zero differential pressure through the fuse).

ATR Training Centre .6 .ATA 32 Wheels speed transducer description Page 120/ 256 Wheels speed transducer description V3256 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

with a frequency proportional to the rotational speed of the wheel. Î The speed signal is a sine wave having 36 pulses for one complete revolution wheel.ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Its shaft is equipped with a coupling which is driven by the hubcap on the wheel axis. V3256 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The speed sensor sends to the control box a sinusoidal varying voltage.ATA 32 Wheels speed transducer description Page 121/ 256 Î Two transducers are mounted inside each main gear axle.6 .

ATA 32 Antiskid control box description Page 122/ 256 Antiskid control box description V3257 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Antiskid control box description Page 123/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3257 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 124/ 256 ACOS v1.ATA 32 V3257 Antiskid control box description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

V3257 Copyright © 2001-2008 . to avoid tire scuffing (locked wheel crossover protection). to preclude inadvertent brake application prior to MLG wheel spin up (touchdown protection). to avoid A/S system operation during aircraft low speed maneuvers (low speed protection).ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Antiskid control box description Page 125/ 256 Î The antiskid control box is housed on shelf 91 VU in the RH electronic racks and is powered from 28 VDC EMER BUS and 28 VDC ESS BUS. Î The unit is provided with self-tests usable by crew members and by maintenance personnel. servo valve coil or power input. Î Electrical supply is controlled by an A/S pushbutton switch on the centre instrument panel through the L/G lever (down position) and a gear selected UP relay.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . Î The box receives inputs from the wheel speed sensors and from ground and flight position relays to perform the following functions: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ to provide individual wheel deceleration control. Î The unit also gives "fault" advisories to the captain and first officer whenever a damage occurs to any speed sensor.

ATA 32 Antiskid control panel description and test pb Page 126/ 256 Antiskid control panel description and test pb V3259 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre .6 .

to verify A/S protection capabilites. with the aircraft in air mode. Î During ANTISKID test (pushbutton pressed in). the test is inhibited at speeds above 17 knots. the test allows observation of the brake compression and release. if a short circuit or a loss of continuity of power is detected. During normal operation. 3 seconds when aircraft is in flight. Î The system verifies the integrity of valves.ATR Training Centre . the spin up override capability. If performed on ground with the pressure applied to the brakes. the system illuminates the relevant "F" amber fault light in flight compartment. Î It gives a constant wheel speed signal to the box to verify. to prevent erroneous fault annunication.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. speed sensors and input power. Î If A/S system is armed during taxiing. V3259 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATA 32 Antiskid control panel description and test pb Page 127/ 256 Î The antiskid system is provided with an automatic test. 4 F amber lights are illuminated: ♦ ♦ 6 seconds when aircraft is on ground.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 Brakes description Page 128/ 256 Brakes description V3260 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Brakes description Page 129/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3260 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .

ATA 32 V3260 Brakes description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 130/ 256 ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre . ♦ a thrust ring assembly.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. Each brake assembly is mainly composed of: ♦ a housing. with an incorporated self. ♦ torque tube.adjusting mechanism. V3260 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 . They are hydraulically operated at a pressure of 3000 PSI and are fully released by five return springs. Î The brakes have two rotating disks and five pistons.ATA 32 Brakes description Page 131/ 256 Î Each main gear wheel is fitted with a carbon brake. ♦ a backplate. ♦ five hydraulic actuating pistons. ♦ a stationary disk (double stator). ♦ two rotating disks. The four brake units are interchangeable for either right or left hand installation.

The brake housing contains a socket to engage a torque pin on MLG trailing arm.6 .ATR Training Centre . V3260 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The brake housing is provided with two pressure ports and two bleed ports for R or L installation with respect to the trailing arm. Î The rotating disks are equipped with eight key slots on the outer diameter to engage the drive keys in the wheel and to transmit the brake force to the wheel. The stationary disk and the pressure plate are keyed to the torque tube to prevent their rotation.ATA 32 Brakes description Page 132/ 256 Î The brake housing is bolted together with an integral torque tube/back plate to contain a pressure plate. two rotating and one stationary disk.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

ATR Training Centre .ATA 32 Brakes description Page 133/ 256 This page intentionally left blank V3260 Copyright © 2001-2008 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .

6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATA 32 Brakes operation Page 134/ 256 Brakes operation V3261 Copyright © 2001-2008 .ATR Training Centre .

Î When the fluid pressure is applied through the drillings and cylinder liners to the piston. through the spreader plate. V3261 Copyright © 2001-2008 . a constant fluid displacement is maintained. The wear has been compensated each time and now. the heat pack shall be replaced (indicator pin gives wear remaining information when brake are pressurized). which ensures that each brake of the multi-brake system has a similar reaction time. the spring return the pistons to the brake off position.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1. to the pressure stator assembly.6 . Î The primary movement of the piston is limited by the clearance between the guide shoulder and the end plate. Automatic adjusters are incorporated in each cylinder assembly to maintain a pre-set working clearance as wear occurs in the heat pack. Thus. draws the friction bush along the retraction pin. Thus. a constant fluid displacement is maintained. Braking action is performed ! Î When the pressure is released.ATR Training Centre . Please clic to simulate a complete life brake cycle. during heat pack wear. The pistons move to apply a direct thrust. which ensures that each brake of the multi-brake system has a similar reaction time. The correct working clearance of the brake unit is thus maintained as the heat pack wears. Any movement in excess of this.Brakes operation ATA 32 Page 135/ 256 Î This hydraulically operated multi-piston plate brake incorporate a heat pack assembly comprising structural carbon components. Î Î Î Î Automatic adjusters are incorporated in each cylinder assembly to maintain a pre-set working clearance as wear occurs in the heat pack.

ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 .ATA 32 Brakes temperature transducer and transmitter description Page 136/ 256 Brakes temperature transducer and transmitter description V3262 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

F.C 2) which monitor brake temperature. Two brake temperature transmitters are fitted on each MLG.C.F. it receives temperature signals from transducers which are compensated. The thermocouple sends a voltage signal proportional to brake temperature to the M.C 1 (M.F.ATA 32 Brakes temperature transducer and transmitter description Page 137/ 256 Î The brake temperature transmitters are located on MLG trailing arm.C 1 (M. Î Each transmitter is supplied by the 28VDC STBY bus.F. Î The thermocouple consists of a chromel-alumel junction. Î Temperature transducers (thermocouples) are installed on the brake assy.2) through a brake temperature transmitter. amplified and sent to the M.6 .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.ATR Training Centre . V3262 Copyright © 2001-2008 .

ATA 32 Parking and emergency braking description Page 138/ 256 Parking and emergency braking description V3265 Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.

a parking/emergency braking metering valve (PEBMV). V3265 Copyright © 2001-2008 . Î The same components and line routes of the emergency system are used to park the aircraft. of the same type used for A/S modules. Î If the normal system fails to operate. Î The hydraulic pressure is supplied to the brakes through A/S module. Î The green hydraulic pressure from the L/G selector valve UP line is used to meter the blue pressure to the brakes in order to stop MLG wheels rotation in their wells. Î The parking/emergency braking system consists of the following main components: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a BRK lever. The two normal and emergency braking systems are completely independent up to downstream of the antiskid module. The emergency braking system is powered by blue system through an accumulator capable of six complete braking maneuvers.ATA 32 Parking and emergency braking description Page 139/ 256 Î Emergency and parking braking mode is controlled by the emergency and parking handle and supplied by the blue system. two fuses. Î In case the blue hydraulic system pump does not operate or does not provide sufficient hydraulic power. emergency aircraft braking is obtained by pulling progressively aft the brake handle on the flight compartment pedestal. the emergency braking system can be supplied through the auxiliary electric pump system.ATR Training Centre . For safety purposes two additional fuses are installed upstream of A/S module.All right reserved For Training Only ACOS v1.6 . a parking/emergency braking accumulator.

ATA 32 V3265 Parking and emergency braking description Copyright © 2001-2008 .6 .ATR Training Centre .All right reserved For Training Only Page 140/ 256 ACOS v1.

The two normal and emergency braking systems are completely independent up to downstream of the antiskid module. Î If the normal system fails to operate. Î The hydraulic pressure is supplied to the brakes through A/S module. a parking/emergency braking metering valve (PEBMV). Î The parking/emergency braking system consists of the following main components: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ a BRK lever. of th